OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Project Manual Title Page
Section 00 01 01
Page 1
March 22, 2016
A
PROJECT MANUAL
Specifications
Issued for Bid
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
199 Richmond St. West, Suite 1004
Toronto, Ontario
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
317 Adelaide Street West
Toronto, Ontario
M5V 1P9
Tel: 416-363-8877
Fax: 416-363-4029
Project No. 1413
March 22, 2016
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Document Responsibility and Project Directory
1.1
.1
.2
Document Responsibility
Refer to Project Manual, Section 00 01 10 - Table of Contents, for indication of
document responsibility (DR). Abbreviations for entity responsible for document
preparation are as follows:
.1
A - Denotes documents prepared by Architect.
.2
E - Denotes documents prepared by Electrical Engineer.
.3
H - Denotes documents prepared by Architectural Hardware Consultant.
.4
M - Denotes documents prepared by Mechanical Engineer.
.5
O - Denotes documents prepared by Owner.
Professional seals if applied next to company names in the project directory (below)
govern only those specification sections and schedules identified by the corresponding
document responsibility (DR) abbreviation in Section 00 01 10.
.1
1.2
.1
With regard to Section 00 31 00: The architect’s seal governs only Section
00 31 00 proper, and not the documents listed therein.
Project Directory
Owner:
OCAD University
100 McCaul Street
Toronto, Ontario
M5T 1W1
.2
Architect (the Consultant):
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
317 Adelaide Street West, Suite 1004
Toronto, Ontario
M5V 1P9
Tel: 416-363-8877
Fax: 416-363-4029
.3
Section 00 01 05
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Structural Engineer:
Blackwell Bowick Partnership Ltd.
19 Duncan Street
Toronto, Ontario
M5H 3H1
Tel: 416-593-5300
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Document Responsibility and Project Directory
.4
Mechanical Engineer:
H.H. Angus & Associates Limited
1127 Leslie Street
Toronto, Ontario
M3C 2J6
Tel: 416-443-8200
.5
Electrical Engineer:
H.H. Angus & Associates Limited
1127 Leslie Street
Toronto, Ontario
M3C 2J6
Tel: 416-443-8200
.6
Architectural Hardware Consultant:
Allegion Canada Inc.
1076 Lakeshore Road East
Mississauga, Ontario
L5E 1E4
Contact: Max Cedri
Tel: 905-403-1822
Mobile: 905-483-1901
Fax: 905-278-3258
END OF SECTION
Section 00 01 05
Page 2
March 22, 2016
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 00 01 10
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Table of Contents
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 05)
Document Identification
DR Pgs
Issued
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
00 01 01 Project Manual Title Page ................................................ A
00 01 05 Document Responsibility and Project Directory................ A
00 01 10 Table of Contents ............................................................ A
1
2
3
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
00 31 00 Information Available for Review...................................... A
1
March 22, 2016
5
1
1
2
2
1
2
5
2
1
9
6
5
7
7
3
2
9
1
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
4
March 22, 2016
2
5
4
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
9
March 22, 2016
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00
01 21 00
01 22 00
01 25 00
01 26 00
01 26 00
01 31 13
01 31 19
01 32 16
01 32 33
01 33 00
01 35 13
01 45 00
01 50 00
01 60 00
01 73 29
01 74 13
01 77 00
01 78 36
General Instructions......................................................... A
Allowances ...................................................................... A
Unit Prices ....................................................................... A
Product Substitution Procedures ..................................... A
Requests for Interpretation............................................... A
RFI Form ......................................................................... A
Coordination ................................................................... A
Project Meetings .............................................................. A
Construction Progress Documentation............................. A
Photographic Documentation........................................... A
Submittals........................................................................ A
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings......... A
Quality Control ................................................................. A
Temporary Facilities and Controls ................................... A
Products and Workmanship ............................................ A
Cutting and Patching ....................................................... A
Progressive Cleaning ...................................................... A
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals ................ A
Extended Warranties ....................................................... A
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 16
Selective Demolition ........................................................ A
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 35 00
03 35 03
03 54 14
Concrete Floor Finishing ................................................. A
Polished Concrete .......................................................... A
Cementitious Floor Resurfacing ....................................... A
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 27 00
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies ................................. A
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 00 01 10
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Table of Contents
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 05)
Document Identification
DR Pgs
Issued
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 50 00
05 50 10
Metal Fabrications ........................................................... A 7
Architectural Metal Fabrications ...................................... A 13
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 53
06 40 00
Rough Carpentry ............................................................ A
Architectural Woodwork .................................................. A
3
9
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
3
3
4
5
2
6
8
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
Steel Doors and Frames .................................................. A 10
Interior Aluminum Screen and Door Frames .................... A 5
Architectural Access Panels ............................................ A 2
Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors ................................. A 5
Sectional Glazed Aluminum Doors................................... A 5
Tempered Glass Entrances and Partitions....................... A 6
Finish Hardware .............................................................. A 5
Finish Hardware Schedule (to be issued by Addendum)....
Automatic Door Operators .............................................. A 5
Glass and Glazing .......................................................... A 8
Applied Films .................................................................. A 2
Louvres ........................................................................... A 5
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00
07 26 13
07 27 00
07 54 23
07 72 33
07 84 00
07 92 00
Thermal Insulation ........................................................... A
Above-Grade Vapour Barrier ........................................... A
Air Barrier Systems.......................................................... A
Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane ..................... A
Roof Hatches .................................................................. A
Firestopping and Smoke Seals ....................................... A
Joint Sealants ................................................................. A
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13
08 12 16
08 31 13
08 33 24
08 36 15
08 42 26
08 71 00
08 71 13
08 80 00
08 87 00
08 91 19
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 00
09 29 00
09 31 00
09 91 00
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board ................................... A 8
Gypsum Board................................................................. A 12
Tiling ............................................................................... A 14
Painting............................................................................ A 9
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 11 00
10 28 00
Visual Display Surfaces .................................................. A
Washroom Accessories .................................................. A
4
3
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 00 01 10
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Table of Contents
DR - indicates entity responsible for preparation of listed documents (see Section 00 01 05)
Document Identification
DR Pgs
Issued
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 13 00
Loading Dock Equipment ................................................. A
2
March 22, 2016
4
3
March 22, 2016
March 22, 2016
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 24 13
12 48 16
Roller Window Shades..................................................... A
Entrance Floor Mats......................................................... A
DIVISIONS 21, 22, AND 23 - MECHANICAL
Refer to Mechanical Specification for Index (to be issued by Addendum)
DIVISIONS 26, 27, AND 28 - ELECTRICAL
Refer to Electrical Specification for Index ........................................... E 126
END OF SECTION
March 22, 2016
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Information Available for Review
1.1
.1
Section 00 31 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Information Available for Review
The following documents have been made available by the Owner for review:
.1
Existing building information:
.1 Drawings, schedules and specifications:
.1 Architectural package dated 2015-12-02 prepared by Quadrangle.
.2 Mechanical and electrical package dated 2015-09-15 prepared by M.V.
Shore.
.2
The accuracy of the information contained in the above listed documents has not been
independently verified by the Consultant.
.3
The architect’s seal, if applied to the Project Manual, governs only Section 00 31 00
proper, and not the documents listed herein.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
General Instructions
Section 01 10 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
Language of the Contract
The use of the words “include” or “including”, or variations thereof, within the Contract
Documents is not limiting.
The Contract Documents
.1
The Contract Documents have been arranged into various divisions, sections, drawings,
and schedules for the purpose of presenting the Work in a logical and organized form
and to enable ease of reference and interpretation, and are not intended to be an
arrangement of precise and independent Subcontractors, or jurisdiction of responsibility
for the various parts of the Work. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
coordinating the execution of the Work of this Contract in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
.2
As a result, the Consultant shall not be required to decide on questions arising with
regard to agreements or contracts between the Contractor and Subcontractors or
Suppliers, nor to the extent of the parts of the Work assigned thereto.
.3
Further, no extra will be allowed as a result of the failure to coordinate and allocate the
Work such that the Work is Provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.4
This section coordinates, relates, and governs the work of other sections of the
specifications.
1.3
Laws, Notices, Permits and Fees
.1
The building code - Ontario Regulation 332/12, including amendments, shall govern the
Work.
.2
Comply with codes, by-laws, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the
Place of the Work. Codes and regulations form an integral part of the Contract
Documents.
.3
Owner shall apply and pay for the building permit. The Contractor shall pick up building
permit from the municipal department having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work. Obtain
and pay for all other permits, licenses, deposits and certificates of inspection as part of
the Work.
.4
Arrange for inspection, testing and acceptance of the Work required by the authorities
having jurisdiction. Be responsible for necessary preparations, provisions and pay costs.
.5
Obtain permits required to execute work on municipal rights of way. Obtain damage
deposits for sidewalks, roads and services, unless otherwise indicated.
.6
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications and inspections required
by authorities having jurisdiction such that notifications can be properly received and that
inspections can be properly undertaken without causing a delay in the Work. The
Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delay
in the Work caused by failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
General Instructions
.7
The Contractor shall provide to the chief building official or the registered code agency,
where a registered code agency is appointed under the Ontario Building Code Act in
respect of the construction to which the notice relates, the required notices set out in
Division C – Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.1(2) and Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the Ontario Building
Code, O. Reg. 332/12 as amended. The Contractor shall be present at each site
inspection by an inspector or registered code agency as applicable under Division C –
Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.2 of the building code.
.1
1.4
Section 01 10 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule notifications to the chief
building official or the registered code agency such that the inspection pertaining
to the notifications can be made within the time frame as required under Division
C – Part 1 Sentence 1.3.5.3 of the Ontario Building Code, O. Reg. 332/12 as
amended, without causing a delay in the Work. The Contractor, at no additional
cost to the Owner, shall be solely responsible for any delay in the Work caused
by failure to properly schedule required notifications and inspections.
Examination of the Place of the Work, Documents, Surfaces and Conditions
.1
Examine the Place of the Work and investigate matters relating to the nature of the
Work, means of access and egress, obstacles, rights and interests of other parties which
may be interfered with during the execution of the Work, conditions and limitations
including obstructions, existing structures or facilities, local conditions, actual levels,
character and nature of the Work, and other consideration which may affect performance
of the Work.
.2
Examine the extent of work to be performed and matters which are referred to in the
Contract Documents prior to start of the Work.
.3
Examine work to which work is to be applied, anchored or connected, and relevant asbuilt conditions.
.4
Each work operation following on a previous work operation of a differing Subcontractor,
as in the case of finishing and surfacing work, shall include a thorough examination of
the condition of the previous work. Conditions found unacceptable, either for the
commencement of the new work or its satisfactory completion, shall be reported in
writing to the Consultant.
.5
Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Commencement of
work implies acceptance of surfaces, tolerances, and conditions and existing conditions
will not be accepted as a contributing factor to subsequent failure or acceptability of the
Work.
1.5
.1
1.6
.1
Quantity of Items
Where a component, device, item or part of materials or equipment is referred to in the
singular number, such reference shall require the provision of as many components,
devices, items or parts of material or equipment necessary to complete the Work.
Standards and Codes
Contract forms, codes, specifications, standards, manuals and installation, application
and maintenance instructions referred to in these specifications, unless otherwise
specified, amended or date suffixed, shall be latest published editions at Contract date.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
General Instructions
1.7
Section 01 10 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Discrepancies and Clarifications
.1
Advise Consultant of discrepancies discovered in requirements of the Contract
Documents and request clarification in written form.
.2
Advise Consultant when clarifications are required pertaining to meaning or intent of
requirements of Contract Documents and request clarification from Consultant in written
form.
.3
Do not proceed with related work until written clarification is provided by Consultant.
.4
Failure to notify Consultant shall result in Contractor incurring responsibility for resulting
deficiencies and expense at no additional cost to the Owner.
.5
Written instructions issued by Consultant for the purpose of clarification, implicitly
supersede applicable and relevant aspects of the Contract Documents irrespective of
whether or not these documents are explicitly or specifically cited in clarification requests
or clarification instructions.
1.8
Setting out the Work
.1
Assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of the Work to required
locations, lines and elevations.
.2
Arrange meeting with Consultant to discuss critical setting out assumptions for the Work
and establish limiting conditions for setting out the Work. Consultant shall chair and
prepare minutes of the meeting, and prepare and submit sketches recording
understanding of key setting out principles.
.3
Provide devices needed to lay out and construct the Work.
1.9
.1
Documents at the Place of the Work
Maintain at the Place of the Work, one copy of each of following:
.1
Contract Documents including drawings, specifications, addenda, and other
modifications to the Contract.
.2
‘Reviewed' or 'Reviewed as Modified' shop drawings.
.3
Construction and submittal schedules.
.4
Supplemental Instructions, proposed Change Orders, Change Orders, and
Change Directives.
.5
Field Test Reports.
.6
Consultant’s field review reports and deficiency reports.
.7
Reports by authorities having jurisdiction.
.8
Building and other applicable permits, and related permit documents.
.9
Daily log including:
.1 Number of workers actively working at the Place of the Work by each
subcontract.
.2 Subcontractors working at the Place of the Work.
.3 Parts of the Work being worked on.
.4 Working hours worked at the Place of the Work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
General Instructions
Section 01 10 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.5 Activities with intermittent progress.
.6 Time lost and explanation for such time lost.
.7 Difficulties (work scheduled to start but did not with the reason why, delays,
labour inefficiencies, labour shortage).
.8 Products and materials delivered.
.9 Equipment mobilized and/or demobilized.
.10
.2
1.10
As-built drawings recording as-built conditions, instructions, changes for
structure, equipment, wiring, plumbing, and the like, as called for in Section
01 77 00 and Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28, prior to
being concealed.
Make above material available to Consultant upon request.
Trademark and Labels
.1
Trademarks and labels, including applied labels, shall not be visible in finished work in
finished areas, unless otherwise accepted or indicated by Consultant.
.2
The exceptions to this requirement are trademarks and labels which are essential to
identify materials, systems, assemblies, and equipment for maintenance and
replacement purposes, and for life safety, fire resistance and temperature rise ratings.
1.11
Waste Audits/Plans for Waste Reduction
.1
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction .
.2
Deliver to nearest appropriate depot materials accepted for recycling by region or
municipality having jurisdiction over the Place of the Work, including but not limited to
cardboard, paper, plastic, aluminum, steel, and glass. Deliver to nearest appropriate
depot scrap and excess gypsum wallboard for recycling of this material. Costs for this
work are included in the Contract Price.
1.12
Interferences
.1
Coordinate placement of equipment to ensure that components will be properly
accommodated within spaces provided prior to commencement of the Work.
.2
Take complete responsibility for remedial work that results from failure to coordinate
aspects of work prior to its fabrication/installation.
.3
Ensure that accesses and clearance required by jurisdictional authorities and/or for easy
maintenance of equipment are provided in layout of equipment and services; notify
Consultant if indicated clearances are in conflict.
1.13
Not In Contract Items and Items Supplied by Owner
.1
NIC (Not In Contract) shall be used to designate various items of equipment that require
coordination for installation although are not Provided as part of the Work.
.2
SBO (Supplied by Owner) shall be used to designate various items of equipment that will
be supplied by the Owner for installation by the Contractor as part of the Work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
General Instructions
.1
1.14
Section 01 10 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Install items indicated as supplied by Owner (SBO) during the Work. Coordinate
shipping and delivery with the Owner. Store items supplied by Owner at the
Place of the Work and protect from damage. Install completely, and leave in full
operating condition, in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.
Security
.1
Be responsible for security of the Place of the Work and material from time the Work
commences until completion of the Work.
.2
Provide and maintain signs, hoardings, guard-rails, barriers, warning lights and other
protection as required by authorities having jurisdiction for safety of the Place of the
Work. Be responsible for adequacy of protection.
1.15
Publicity Releases and Photographs
.1
No press or publicity releases will be permitted without prior written approval of the
Owner.
.2
No photographs of the Place of the Work or of any portion of the Work will be permitted
without written approval of the Owner, except as provided by the Contract Documents.
1.16
.1
Electronic Files
In the event that the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Supplier requests AutoCAD files
from the Consultant, the Consultant will be allowed to use their discretion whether or not
they will provide them. The Consultant may charge a fee for providing the electronic files
and/or require a copyright waiver to be signed, also at the Consultant‘s discretion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 21 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Allowances
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Cash Allowances
.1
Expenditures from cash allowance stipulated sum shall be directed by Consultant in
writing.
.2
Unexpended amounts of cash allowances shall be deducted from the Contract Price at
completion of Work.
.3
Cash allowances include supply and installation unless otherwise indicated.
.4
Supply only cash allowances include:
.5
.6
.1
Net cost of Products.
.2
Delivery to the Place of the Work.
.3
Applicable taxes and duties (excluding Value Added Taxes).
Supply only cash allowances do not include costs for the following (include such costs
elsewhere in Contract Price):
.1
Storage and handling at the Place of the Work.
.2
Installation costs.
Supply and install cash allowances include:
.1
Net cost of Products.
.2
Delivery to the Place of the Work.
.3
Unloading, storing, handling of Products on the Place of the Work.
.4
Installation, finishing, and commissioning of Products.
.5
Applicable taxes and duties (excluding Value Added Taxes).
.7
Consultant may direct Contractor to obtain bids, at no additional cost to the Owner, for
work for which payment is made from cash allowances.
.8
List of cash allowances
.1
The following cash allowances are included in the Contract Price:
.1 Supply and install tensile ceiling membrane system:
PART 2- PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
$215,000.00.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 22 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Unit Prices
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
The schedule of unit prices given by the Contractor and submitted with its original tender
for the Work shall apply to changes in the Work as applicable.
.2
The amounts to be added to (extra) or deducted from (credit) the Contract Price being
determined by actual measured quantities of the individual work items contained in the
schedule of unit prices.
.3
Changes in the Work shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. Do not
proceed with a change in the Work without a signed Change Order or Change Directive.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Product Substitution Procedures
Section 01 25 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Approved Alternates and Approved Equals
.1
Named Products alternates or equals, indicated by the phrases "or approved alternate
by XYZ Manufacturing" or "or approved equal by XYZ Manufacturing", shall be
interpreted to mean that named Product alternate or equal, if selected for use in lieu of
indicated or specified Product, meets or exceeds performance, appearance, general
arrangement, dimensions, availability, code and standards compliance, and colour of
specified Product. Be responsible for costs and modifications associated with the
inclusion of named Product alternate or equal at no additional cost to the Owner.
.2
The process for proposing and approving alternates or equals shall be the same process
as for proposing and approving substitutions (refer to paragraph 1.2 below).
.3
Confirm delivery of specified items prior to proposing alternates or equals.
1.2
.1
.2
.3
Substitutions
Submission of substitutions:
.1
Proposals for substitutions of Products and materials must be submitted in
accordance with procedures specified in this section.
.2
Consultant may review submissions, if directed by Owner, but in any case with
the understanding that the Contract Time will not be altered due to the time
required by the Consultant to review the submission and by the Contractor to
implement the substitution in the Work.
Submission requirements:
.1
Description of proposed substitution, including detailed comparative specification
of proposed substitution with the specified Product.
.2
Manufacturer’s Product data sheets for proposed Products.
.3
Respective costs of items originally specified and the proposed substitution.
.4
Confirmation of
manufacturer.
.5
Compliance with the building codes and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
.6
Affect concerning compatibility and interface with adjacent building materials and
components.
.7
Compliance with the intent of the Contract Documents.
.8
Effect on Contract Time.
.9
Reasons for the request.
.10
Detailed availability of maintenance services and sources of replacement
materials and parts, including associate costs and time frames.
proposed
substitution
delivery,
in
writing
by
Product
Substitutions submitted on shop drawings without following requirements of this section
prior to submission of the affected shop drawings will cause the shop drawings to be
rejected.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Product Substitution Procedures
Section 01 25 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.4
Proposed substitutions shall include costs associated with modifications necessary to
other adjacent and connecting portions of the Work.
.5
Consultant’s decision concerning acceptance or rejection of proposed substitutions is
final.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Requests for Interpretation
Section 01 26 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Request for Interpretation – RFI
A request for interpretation (RFI) is a formal process used during the Work to obtain an
interpretation of the Contract Documents.
.1
.2
An RFI shall not constitute notice of claim for a delay.
Submittal procedures:
.1
RFI form:
.1 Submit RFI on “Request for Interpretation” form, appended to this section.
The Consultant shall not respond to an RFI except as submitted on this form.
.2 Where RFI form does not provide sufficient space for complete information to
be provided thereon, attach additional sheets as required.
.3 Submit with RFI form necessary supporting documentation.
.2
RFI log:
.1 Maintain log of RFIs sent to and responses received from the Consultant,
complete with corresponding dates.
.2 Submit updated log of RFIs with each progress draw submittal.
.3
Submit RFIs sufficiently in advance of affected parts of the Work so as not to
cause delay in the performance of the Work. Costs resulting from failure to do
this will not be paid by the Owner.
.4
RFIs shall be submitted only to the Consultant.
.5
RFIs shall be submitted only by Contractor. RFIs submitted by Subcontractors or
Suppliers shall not be accepted.
.6
Number RFIs consecutively in one sequence in order submitted.
.7
Submit one distinct RFI per RFI form.
.8
Consultant shall review RFIs from the Contractor submitted in accordance with
this section, with the following understandings:
.1 Consultant’s response shall not be considered as a Change Order or Change
Directive, nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Time or changes in the Work.
.2 Only the Consultant shall respond to RFIs. Responses to RFIs received from
entities other than the Consultant shall not be considered.
.9
Allow 5 Working Days for review of each RFI by the Consultant.
.1 Consultant’s review of RFI commences on date of receipt by the Consultant
of RFI submittal and extends to date RFI returned by Consultant.
.2 When the RFI submittal is received by Consultant before noon, review period
commences that day; when RFI submittal is received by Consultant after
noon, review period begins on the next Working Day.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Requests for Interpretation
Section 01 26 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.3 If, at any time, the Contractor submits a large enough number of RFIs such
that the Consultant cannot process these RFIs within 5 Working Days, the
Consultant, will confer with the Contractor within 1 Working Day of receipt of
such RFIs, and the Consultant and the Contractor will jointly prepare an
estimate of the time necessary for processing same as well as an order of
priority between the RFIs submitted. The Contractor shall accommodate such
necessary time at no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional cost
to the Owner.
.10
Contractor shall satisfy itself that an RFI is warranted by undertaking a thorough
review of the Contract Documents to determine that the claim, dispute, or other
matters in question relating to the performance of the Work or the interpretation
of the Contract Documents can not be resolved by direct reference to the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall describe in detail this review on the RFI
form as part of the RFI submission. RFI submittals that lack such detailed review
description, or where the detail provided is, in the opinion of the Consultant,
insufficient, shall not be reviewed by the Consultant and shall be rejected.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
Date
Contractor’s Request for Interpretation
Consultant’s Supplemental Instructions
Project:
To
Co.
Phone #
Fax #
Email
# of
Pages
From
Co.
Phone #
Fax #
Email
RFI No.:
Date of
Request:
Owner:
To:
Contractor:
(Consultant’s
Representative)
Contractor’s
Representative:
Project No.:
Consultant’s Fax
No.:
Fax No.:
Interpretation Requested: (Description of request for interpretation and references to relevant
portions of Contract Documents)
Attachments:
Requested by:
Consultant’s Supplemental Instruction:
Attachments:
Reply By:
The work shall be carried out in accordance with these Supplemental Instructions issued
in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Price or Contract
Time. Prior to proceeding with these instructions, indicate acceptance of these
instructions as being consistent with the Contract Documents by returning a signed
copy to the Consultant.
Supplemental Instruction Issued:
Supplemental Instruction Accepted:
By:
By:
Consultant
Cc:
 Owner
Date
 Consultant
 Contractor
Contractor
 Field  Other:
Date
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 31 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Coordination
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
General
Provide the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and be responsible for
delays or costs resulting from failure to properly inspect or coordinate the Work, and for
replacement or corrective work required.
Identification of Systems
Provide identification of electrical and mechanical system installations and other
automated systems or equipment in compliance with Contract Documents.
Commissioning and Systems Demonstrations
.1
Provide testing, adjusting, balancing and certification and commissioning of mechanical
and electrical installations and other automated systems or equipment in accordance
with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Instruct Owner’s designated representatives in operation and maintenance of
mechanical and electrical installations and other automated systems or equipment, in
accordance with Section 01 77 00.
1.4
Superintendence
.1
Provide superintendent and necessary supporting staff personnel who shall be in
attendance at the Place of the Work while Work is being performed, with proven
experience in erecting, supervising, testing and adjusting projects of comparable nature
and complexity.
.2
The Contractor shall appoint a superintendent at the Place of the Work who shall have
overall authority at the Place of the Work and shall speak for the Contractor and
represent the Contractor’s interest and responsibilities at meetings at the Place of the
Work and in dealings with the Consultant and the Owner.
1.5
.1
1.6
Dimensions
Verify dimensions at the Place of the Work before commencing shop drawings. Before
fabrication commences report discrepancies to Consultant in writing. Incorporate
accepted variances on shop drawings and as-built records.
Coordination
.1
Coordinate and ensure workers, Subcontractors, and Suppliers cooperate to ensure that
the Work will be carried out expeditiously and in proper sequence.
.2
Make adjustments to allow adjustable work fit to fixed work.
1.7
.1
Building Dimension, Templates, Built-ins, and Coordination
Take necessary dimensions for the proper execution of the Work. Assume complete
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions, and for
coordination.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 31 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Coordination
.2
Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to be fixed
to or inserted in the Work and set in place or instruct separate Subcontractors as to their
location.
.3
Supply items to be built in, as and when required together with templates,
measurements, shop drawings and other related information and assistance.
.4
Pay the cost of extra work and make up time lost as a result of failure to provide
necessary information and items to be built in.
.5
Verify that the Work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions and
positions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by
requirements of the Contract Documents, and ensure that work installed in error is
rectified before construction resumes.
.6
Check and verify dimensions referring to interfacing of services. Verify such dimensions
with interconnected portions of the Work.
.7
Do not scale directly from drawings. Obtain clarification from Consultant if there is
ambiguity or lack of information.
.8
Details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work installed
shall be taken at the Place of the Work.
.9
Advise Consultant of discrepancies and omissions in the Contract Documents, that
affect aesthetics, or that interfere with services, equipment or surfaces. Do not proceed
with work affected by such items without clarification from Consultant.
.10 Prepare and submit setting drawings, templates and other information necessary for the
location and installation of material, holes, sleeves, inserts, anchors, accessories,
fastenings, connections and access panels.
.11 Subcontractors shall direct related Subcontractors on site of specific locations required
for sleeves and openings.
.12 Prepare interference drawings to properly coordinate the Work, where necessitated, in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 31 19
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Project Meetings
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Administrative
The Contractor shall schedule meetings as specified herein.
.1
.2
Such scheduling shall be in consultation both with the Owner and with the
Consultant.
The Contractor shall prepare agendas for meetings specified herein.
.1
Agendas shall include, as a minimum, the agenda items specified in the Contract
Documents.
.3
The Contractor shall distribute written notice of each meeting specified herein, complete
with meeting agenda, 4 Working Days in advance of meeting date to the Consultant and
the Owner and other affected parties.
.4
The Contractor shall chair and record the minutes of meetings specified herein.
.1
Contractor shall distribute copies of minutes to the Owner, the Consultant, and all
others in attendance within 3 Working Days after date of meeting.
.5
Representatives of parties attending meetings shall be authorized to act on behalf of the
parties they represent.
.6
Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not attend meetings unless authorized by the
Consultant and the Owner.
.7
The Contractor shall prepare, and distribute to the Consultant and the Owner 4 days in
advance of next progress meeting date, the following:
.1
1.2
Monthly progress reports containing updated schedules, shop drawing logs,
requests for interpretation logs, submittals and budget.
Contract Start-Up Meeting
.1
Within 5 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in Contract to discuss
and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities prior to the commencement of
the Work.
.2
The Owner, the Consultant, the Contractor, site superintendent(s), and inspection and
testing company will be in attendance.
.3
Agenda to include the following:
.1
Appointment of official representative of participants in the Project.
.2
Status of permits, fees and requirement of authorities having jurisdiction. Action
required.
.3
Establishing a schedule for progress meetings.
.4
Requirements for Contract modification and interpretation procedures, including,
but not limited to: requests for interpretation, contemplated change orders,
Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, procedures,
approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime,
and administrative requirements.
.5
Submittal procedures.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 31 19
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Project Meetings
1.3
.6
Schedule of submission of samples, colour chips, and items for Owners and/or
Consultant’s consideration.
.7
Construction schedule and progress scheduling.
.8
Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
.9
Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms.
.10
Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hours’ notice to
Consultant for review of the Work.
.11
Requirements for temporary facilities, signs, offices, storage sheds, utilities,
fences.
.12
Security requirements at and for the Place of the Work.
.13
Owner supplied Products.
.14
Record drawings.
.15
Maintenance manuals.
.16
Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties.
.17
Progress claims, administrative procedures, holdbacks.
.18
Insurances, transcripts of policies.
.19
Contractor’s safety procedures.
.20
Workplace Safety and Insurance Board Certificate.
Pre-Installation Meetings
.1
During the course of the Work prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, schedule
pre-installation meetings as required by the Contract Documents and coordinated with
the Consultant.
.2
As far as possible, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the
same day as regularly scheduled progress meetings.
.3
Agenda to include the following:
.1
Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.
.2
Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.
.3
Review of installation procedures and requirements.
.4
Review of environmental and site condition requirements.
.5
Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.
.6
Schedule of submission of samples, colour chips, and items for Consultant’s
consideration.
.7
Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities,
fences.
.8
Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hours’ notice to
Consultant for review of the Work.
.9
Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake
inspections and tests.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 31 19
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Project Meetings
.4
1.4
.10
Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
.11
Special safety requirements and procedures.
The following shall be in attendance:
.1
Contractor.
.2
Subcontractors affected by the work for which the pre-installation meeting is
being conducted.
.3
Consultant.
.4
Manufacturer’s representatives, as applicable.
.5
Inspection and testing company, as applicable.
Progress Meetings
.1
During the course of the Work prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, schedule
progress meetings as directed by the Consultant.
.2
Attendees at progress meetings shall include the following:
.3
.1
Contractor.
.2
Contractor’s site superintendent(s).
.3
Consultant.
.4
Owner.
Agenda to include the following:
.1
Review, approval of proceedings of previous meeting.
.2
Review of items arising from proceedings.
.3
Review of progress of the Work since previous meeting and Contractor’s monthly
progress report.
.4
Field observations, problems, conflicts.
.5
Update construction schedule.
.6
Problems that impede compliance with construction schedule.
.7
Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules.
.8
Review material delivery dates/schedule.
.9
Corrective measures and procedures to regain construction schedule.
.10
Revisions to construction schedule.
.11
Progress, schedule, during subsequent period of the Work.
.12
Review submittal schedules.
.13
Review status of submittals.
.14
Maintenance of quality standards.
.15
Pending changes and substitutions.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 31 19
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Project Meetings
1.5
.16
Review of Contract modifications and interpretations including, but not limited to:
requests for interpretation and log, contemplated change orders, Change Orders,
Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect on construction
schedule and on Contract Time.
.17
Review of status of as-built documents.
.18
Other business.
Pre-Takeover Meeting
.1
Prior to application for Substantial Performance of the Work, schedule a pre-takeover
meeting.
.2
Agenda to include the following:
1.6
.1
Review, approval of proceedings of previous meeting.
.2
Review of items arising from proceedings.
.3
Review of procedures for Substantial Performance of the Work, completion of the
Contract, and handover of the Work.
.4
Field observations, problems, conflicts.
.5
Review of outstanding Contract modifications and interpretations including, but
not limited to: requests for interpretation and log, contemplated change orders,
Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, for effect on
construction schedule and on Contract Time.
.6
Problems which impede Substantial Performance of the Work.
.7
Review of procedures for deficiency review. Corrective measures required.
.8
Review of arrangements for hydro, heating, and other services.
.9
Progress, schedule, during succeeding period of the Work.
.10
Review submittal requirements for warranties, manuals, and all demonstrations
and documentation required for Substantial Performance of the Work.
.11
Review of keying and hardware requirements.
.12
Review of status of as-built documents and record drawings.
.13
Status of commissioning and training.
.14
Review Contractor’s deficiency list and status.
.15
Cleaning for occupancy.
.16
Other business.
Post-Construction Meeting
.1
Prior to application for completion of Contract, schedule a post-construction meeting.
Four days prior to date for meeting, Consultant shall confirm a date for meeting based
on evaluation of completion requirements.
.2
Agenda to include the following:
.1
Review, approval of proceedings of previous meeting.
.2
Confirmation that no business is arising from proceedings.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 31 19
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Project Meetings
1.7
.1
.3
Confirmation of completion of the Contract, and handover of reviewed
documentation from the Consultant to the Owner.
.4
Confirmation of completion of contemplated change orders, Change Orders,
Change Directives, and Supplemental Instructions.
.5
Problems that impede Contract completion.
.6
Identify unresolved issues or potential warranty problems.
.7
Confirmation of completion of deficiencies.
.8
Corrective measures required.
.9
Confirmation of arrangements for hydro, heating and other services.
.10
Confirm submittal requirements for warranties, manuals, and demonstrations and
documentation for Contract completion are in order.
.11
Review of procedures for communication during post-construction period.
.12
Handover of reviewed record documents by the Consultant to the Owner.
.13
Handover of Contract completion insurance policy transcripts by Contractor.
.14
Submission of final application for payment.
.15
Review and finalize outstanding claims, pricing, and allowance amounts.
.16
Status of commissioning and training.
.17
Demobilization and the Place of the Work restoration.
.18
Review of requests for interpretation log.
.19
Other business.
Special Meetings
Owner and/or Consultant reserve the right to require special meetings which may be
held on short notice and at which attendance by Contractor and representatives of
affected Subcontractors and Suppliers is mandatory. Contractor shall keep detailed and
accurate meeting notes and distribute copies promptly to all in attendance and those
affected by agreements made at such meetings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Construction Progress Documentation
Section 01 32 16
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
.2
.3
General
Schedules required:
.1
Construction schedule.
.2
Product delivery schedule.
.3
Inspection and testing schedule.
Format:
.1
Construction Schedule shall to be developed utilizing either Microsoft Project
2003 (or later version) or Primavera Project Planner version 3.1 (or later version).
Include a separate bar for each trade or operation.
.2
Include horizontal time scale identifying the first Working Day of each week.
.3
Format for listings: The chronological order of the start of each item or part of the
Work.
.4
Identification of listings: By systems description.
Construction schedule:
.1
Include the complete sequence of construction activities, including provision for
climate and weather.
.2
Include the dates for the commencement and completion of each major element
of the Work parallel to the sections of the specifications.
.3
Show projected percentage of completion for each item as of the first Working
Day of each week.
.4
Submit draft schedule for review, and incorporate responses to comments
identified by Consultant and/or Owner.
.5
Show dates for the commencement and completion of inspection and testing
.6
At each date of submission of schedule, indicate progress of each activity.
.1 Show changes occurring since previous submission of the construction
schedule:
.1 Major changes in scope.
.2 Change Orders and Change Directives.
.3 Site Bulletins.
.4 Activities modified since previous submission.
.5 Revised projections of progress and completion.
.6 Other identifiable changes.
.2 Include a narrative report to define:
.1 Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
.2 Corrective action recommended and its impact on the schedule.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Construction Progress Documentation
.7
Section 01 32 16
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Submit revised construction schedule in accordance with the more frequent of
the two following conditions:
.1 At each construction progress meeting.
.2 On a bi-weekly basis.
.4
Product delivery schedule:
.1
.5
Include dates for delivery of Products, equipment, finish items, factory-finished
manufactured items. Show last dates for order, shipment, and delivery in order to
meet construction schedule.
Inspection and testing schedule:
.1
Prepare schedule for inspection and testing by advance discussion with the
selected inspection and testing company to determine the time required for the
inspection and testing company to perform its tests and to issue each of its
findings, and allow for required time in the construction schedule.
.2
Refer to Section 01 45 00 for additional requirements for inspection and testing
scheduling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Photographic Documentation
Section 01 32 33
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
General
Provide photographic documentation in digital format and in accordance with procedures
and submission requirements specified in this section.
Digital Photographs
.1
Equipment: Provide photographs using minimum 10 megapixel digital camera.
.2
Submit the required photographs to the Consultant and to the Owner.
.3
Output: Supply date stamped maximum resolution colour photos to Consultant in JPEG
format, on CD-ROM format.
.4
Number of photos required:
.1
Prior to construction: Provide necessary number of photographs, as required to
document existing conditions and verify damage to adjacent streets and property
which may or may not have occurred during construction: Minimum 50 photos.
.2
Each Progress draw: Provide 24 construction photographs each month to
accompany each application for progress draw to document the stage of the
Work from points selected by the Consultant showing as much as possible of the
Work installed during the previous month.
.3
Provide minimum of 8 photographs on each meeting report and for each
progress meeting.
.4
Completion: When the Work is completed, arrange to take final photographs of
the Work from a minimum of 8 points of view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Submittals
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
General Requirements
.1
Submit submittals as requested by the Contract Documents, as specified herein, and in
accordance with the conditions of the Contract.
.2
In addition to submittals specifically requested by the Contract Documents, submit other
submittals as may be reasonably requested by the Consultant, or as are required to
coordinate the Work and to provide the Owner with choices available, within the scope of
Contract Documents.
.3
Procedures and requirements for Contract closeout submittals shall be in accordance
with the following sections:
.4
.5
.1
Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals.
.2
Section 01 78 36 - Warranties.
Contractor’s review of submittals:
.1
Review submittals for conformity to Contract Documents before submitting to
Consultant. Submittals shall bear stamp of Contractor and signature of a
responsible official in Contractor’s organization indicating in writing that such
submittals have been checked and coordinated by Contractor. Contractor’s
review shall be performed by qualified personnel who have detailed
understanding of those elements being reviewed and of the conditions at the
Place of the Work proposed for installation.
.2
Check and sign each submittal and make notations considered necessary before
submitting to Consultant for review. Where submittal is substantially and
obviously in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents, reject submittal
without submitting to Consultant and request resubmission. Note limited number
of reviews of each submittal covered under Consultant’s services as specified
below.
.3
Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for any conflicts occurring in the Work
that result from lack of comparison and coordination of submittals required for the
Work.
.4
Submittals that have not been reviewed, checked, and coordinated by Contractor
prior to submission to Consultant, will be rejected.
.5
Notify Consultant in writing of changes made on submittals from Contract
Documents. Consultant’s review of submittals shall not relieve Contractor of
responsibility for changes made from Contract Documents not covered by written
notification to Consultant.
Consultant’s review of submittals:
.1
Review of submittals by Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining
conformance with the general design concepts and the general intent of the
Contract Documents. This review shall not mean that Consultant approves the
detail design inherent in the submittals, responsibility for which shall remain with
the Contractor. Such review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
errors or omissions in the submittals, or responsibility for meeting requirements
of Contract Documents.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Submittals
.2
Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at
the Place of the Work for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes
or to techniques of construction and installation, and for coordination of the Work.
.3
As part of their scope of work, Consultant shall review shop drawings no more
than twice. Should three or more reviews be required due to reasons of
Contractor omissions causing resubmission requests, then Contractor shall
reimburse the Consultant for time expended in these extra reviews. Time shall be
invoiced to the Owner (to be deducted from monies due to the Contractor and
paid to Consultant by Owner) at rates recommended by Consultant’s
professional association and disbursements shall be invoiced at Consultant’s
cost. The Contractor shall cover directly costs and administration associated with
courier services and the like for these extra shop drawing reviews.
.4
Consultant’s review and markings on submittals do not authorize changes in the
Work or the Contract Time, and will be accommodated at no additional cost to
the Owner. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, the Consultant’s markings on
submittals constitute a change in the Work or will effect a change in the Contract
Time, then the Contractor shall so notify the Consultant in writing and request an
interpretation following the procedures for requests for interpretation in
accordance with Section 01 26 00. If the Consultant finds that the Consultant’s
markings on submittals do constitute a change in the Work or will effect a change
in the Contract Time, then a Change Order will be prepared therefore. The time
taken to process such a request for interpretation shall not, in and of itself,
constitute a change in the Work nor increase the Contract Time.
.5
Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents or not requested
by the Consultant will not be reviewed by the Consultant and will be marked
'NOT REVIEWED' by the Consultant and returned to the Contractor.
.6
Make submittals with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to cause
no delay in the Work. Be responsible for delays, make up time lost and pay added costs,
at no additional cost to the Owner, incurred because of not making submittals in due
time to permit proper review by Consultant.
.7
Submittals that contain substitutions will be rejected. Substitutions are permitted only on
substitution submittals as specified in Section 01 25 00.
.8
Do not proceed with work affected by a submittal, including ordering of Products, until
relevant submittal has been reviewed by Consultant.
.9
Prepare submittals using SI (metric) units.
.10 Contractor’s responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by
Consultant’s review of submittals.
.11 Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittal from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved by Consultant’s review of submittal, unless Consultant gives
written acceptance of specific deviations.
.12 Engineered submittals:
.1
Submittals for items required to be sealed by professional engineer (engineered)
shall be duly prepared, sealed, and signed under the direct control and
supervision of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Place of the
Work, having in force, professional liability insurance with minimum coverage
limit of $5,000,000 per claim and annual aggregate.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Submittals
.2
Include with engineered submittal, proof of insurance identifying insurer, policy
number, policy term, and limit of liability, on duly signed letterhead and / or
certificates of insurance.
.3
Design includes life safety, sizing of supports, anchors, framing, connections,
spans, and as additionally required to meet or exceed requirements of applicable
codes, standards, regulations, authorities having jurisdiction, and design
requirements of the Contract Documents.
.4
Engineered submittals shall include design calculations, complete with
references to codes and standards used in such calculations, supporting the
proposed design represented by the submittal. Prepare calculations in a clear
and comprehensive manner so that they can be properly reviewed.
.5
Professional engineer responsible for the preparation of engineered submittals
shall undertake periodic field review, including review of associated mock-ups
where applicable, at locations wherever the work as described by the engineered
submittal is in progress, during fabrication and installation of such work, and shall
submit a field review report after each visit. Field review reports shall be
submitted to the Consultant, to authorities having jurisdiction as required, and in
accordance with the building code.
.6
Field reviews shall be at intervals as necessary and appropriate to the progress
of the work described by the submittal to allow the engineer to be familiar with
the progress and quality of such work and to determine if the work is proceeding
in general conformity with the Contract Documents, including reviewed shop
drawings and design calculations.
.7
Upon completion of the parts of the Work covered by the engineered submittal,
the professional engineer responsible for the preparation of the engineered
submittal and for undertaking the periodic field reviews described above, shall
prepare and submit to the Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction, as
required, a letter of general conformity for those parts of the Work, certifying that
they have been Provided in accordance with the requirements both of the
Contract Documents and of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Place of
the Work.
.8
Costs for such field reviews and field review reports and letters of general
conformity are included in the Contract Price.
.13 Keep copies of reviewed submittals at the Place of the Work in an organized condition.
Only submittals that have been reviewed by the Consultant and are marked with
Consultant’s review stamp, as applicable, are permitted at the Place of the Work.
.14 The Work shall conform to reviewed submittals subject to the requirements of this
section. Remove and replace materials or assemblies not matching reviewed submittals
at no increase in the Contract Time and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.2
.1
Schedule of Submittals
Before commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a detailed schedule of
submittals required by the Contract Documents.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Submittals
.1
Schedule shall be accompanied by a checklist, correlated to each of the
schedule of submittals, the construction schedule (specified under Section
01 32 16), the Product delivery schedule (specified under Section 01 32 16), and
the schedule of inspections and tests (specified under Sections 01 32 16 and
01 45 00), listing the following:
.1 Shop drawings.
.2 Samples.
.3 Mock-ups.
.4 Reviews, tests and inspections by:
.1 Manufacturers.
.2 Authorities having jurisdiction.
.3 The Owner.
.4 The Consultant.
.5 Inspection and testing companies.
.5 Demonstration and training.
.2
Indicate dates for submitting, review time, resubmission time, float time, and last date for
meeting construction schedule.
.3
Consultant will review submittal schedule and advise Contractor if volume and timing of
submittals will permit timely review and response. Consultant may require modifications
to submittals schedule in order to allow adequate time for review of submittals. Adjust
submittals schedule and construction schedule as required to comply with Consultant’s
needs.
.4
Make provisions in schedule for at least 10 Working Days for Consultant’s review of
submittals. When submittals have to be reviewed by one or more of Consultant’s
subconsultants, add 5 more Working Days for a total 15 Working Day review period.
.5
If the Consultant requires resubmission of submittals, allow for an additional 10 Working
Days review for each resubmission.
.6
If, at any time, the Contractor submits a large enough number of submittals such that the
Consultant cannot process these submittals within 10 Working Days, the Consultant, in
consultation with the Contractor within 3 Working Days of receipt of such submittal, will
provide the Contractor with an estimate of the time necessary for processing same. The
Contractor shall accommodate such necessary time at no increase in the Contract Time
and at no additional cost to the Owner.
.7
The Contractor shall resubmit the submittal schedule to correspond to changes in the
construction schedule. Such resubmissions shall maintain the minimum 10 Working Day
period for the Consultant’s review.
.1
.8
Submittal schedule to be resubmitted at a minimum frequency of every two
weeks.
Schedule submissions of submittals well in advance of scheduled dates for installation,
to provide lead time for reviews and possible resubmissions and for placing orders and
securing delivery so as to avoid delays in the Work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Submittals
1.3
Submission Procedures
.1
Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
Individual submittals shall include related information.
.2
Distribute copies of submittals to parties whose work is affected by submittals except
Consultant and Owner before final submission for review by Consultant.
.3
Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
.1
Date.
.2
Project title and number.
.3
Contractor’s name and address.
.4
Identification and quantity of each submittal.
.5
Other pertinent data.
.4
Each submittal shall be identified numerically by relevant specification section number
with a numeric indicator for multiple submittals by that section followed by revisions
number, for example 04 05 19-01-R0.
.5
Make any changes in submittal that Consultant may require, consistent with Contract
Documents Contract Documents, and resubmit as directed by Consultant.
.6
Notify Consultant, in writing, when resubmitting, of any revisions other than those
requested by Consultant.
.7
After Consultant’s review, distribute copies to affected parties.
1.4
.1
Product Data Sheets
Submit Product data sheets as follows:
.1
1 copy digitally in pdf format to Consultant by email, or using the Consultant’s
document management system.
.2
Submit Product data sheets as called-for by the Contract Documents or as the
Consultant may reasonably request where shop drawings will not be prepared due to a
standardized manufacture of a Product. Manufacturers' catalogue cuts will be acceptable
in such cases, providing that they are 213 mm x 275 mm (8-1/2" x 11") originals, and
that they indicate choices including sizes, colours, model numbers, options and other
pertinent data, including installation instructions. Submissions showing only general
information are not acceptable.
.3
Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design proposed on
Product data sheets, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.
.4
Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of Product data sheets will be
returned to Contractor in digital format for reproduction and distribution.
.5
Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed Product data sheets for issuance to Owner
immediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable, bound
manner and in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
1.5
.1
Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings as follows:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Submittals
.1
1 copy digitally in pdf format to Consultant by email, or using the Consultant’s
document management system.
.2
Lettering on shop drawings shall be not less than 3mm (1/8") high.
.3
Where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent than design proposed on
shop drawings, the requirements of the Contract Documents take priority.
.4
Consultant markings and resulting action required:
.1
Shop drawings requiring no changes will be marked 'REVIEWED', and shall be
submitted for as-built drawings purposes.
.2
Shop drawings requiring several changes will be marked 'REVIEWED as
NOTED' and shall be revised and submitted for as-built drawings purposes.
.3
Shop drawings requiring substantial changes will be marked 'REVISE AND RESUBMIT' and shall be revised and resubmitted until Consultant stamps drawings
with 'REVIEWED' or 'REVIEWED as NOTED'.
.5
Shop drawing size shall be multiple of 213 mm and 275 mm (8-1/2" and 11") excluding
38 mm (1-1/2") binding margin and not larger than 838 mm x 1117 mm (33" x 44").
Leave minimum 150 mm x100 mm (6" x 4") clear space for Consultant’s comments.
.6
Upon completion of review by Consultant, 1 marked set of shop drawings will be
returned to Contractor in digital format for reproduction and distribution.
.7
Retain 1 complete set of prints of reviewed shop drawings for issuance to Owner
immediately prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, in an acceptable, bound
manner and in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.8
Submit copies of reviewed shop drawings to authorities having jurisdiction as required.
.9
Shop drawings shall include:
.1
Fabrication and erection dimensions.
.2
Plans, sections, elevations, arrangements and sufficient full size details which
indicate complete construction, components, methods of assembly as well as
interconnections with other parts of the Work.
.3
Design calculations prepared by professional engineer, as required,
substantiating sizes for members and connections based on design loads.
.4
Clear definition of the division of responsibility for the work described thereon.
No Products, items or equipment, or description of work, shall be indicated to be
supplied, or work to be done, “By Others” or “By Purchaser”. Shop drawings
marked with either of these phrases will be rejected without having been
reviewed by the Consultant.
.5
Location and type of exposed anchors, attachments and locations and types of
fasteners, including concealed reinforcements to accept mounted fasteners.
.6
Adhesives, joinery methods and bonding agents.
.7
Kinds and grades of materials, their characteristics relative to their purpose,
detailed description of finishes and other fabrication information.
.8
Configurations, types and sizes required; identify each unit type on drawing and
on Product.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Submittals
1.6
.9
Descriptive names of equipment and mechanical and electrical characteristics
when applicable.
.10
Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance and
safety or work shown on shop drawings, as well as other interconnected work.
.11
Assumed design loadings, dimensions of elements and material specifications for
load-bearing members.
.12
Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts and holes in structural members.
.13
Wall thicknesses of metals.
.14
Location and types of welds. For structural welds use AWS symbols and clearly
show net weld lengths and sizes.
.15
Materials, gauges, and sizes being supplied including connections, attachments,
reinforcement, anchorage and locations of exposed fastenings.
.16
Installation instructions and details for Products to be installed by separate
Subcontractors, including function of each part.
.17
A list of Products covered by, or included on, the shop drawing. List of Products
shall be complete and show manufacturer's name, Product name, generic
description, standard certification where specified, manufacturer's complete
installation data and precautions against wrong installation, operation and
maintenance.
.18
Refer to individual sections of the specifications for more particular requirements
for shop drawings.
.19
Compatibility statement: Include with each shop drawing a statement that each
Product and material indicated on the shop drawing is compatible with each
Product and material with which it comes into contact.
Samples
.1
Submit a minimum of 1 sample unless a greater amount is specified.
.2
Deliver samples to the following location with expenses, including carrying costs,
prepaid, unless otherwise instructed:
.1
Construction site office.
.1 Upon request, samples shall be delivered to the Consultant’s office by
courier.
.3
Identify samples or assemblies by Project number and name, name of Consultant,
Contractor and Subcontractor, and date of submission. Identify location, specified
material reference and any other pertinent information. Show construction by layered
method if necessary, clearly displaying textures and patterns.
.4
Resubmit samples until written acceptance is obtained from Consultant.
1.7
.1
Coordination and Interference Drawings
The schedule of values specified under GC 5.2.4 shall include a line item for the
preparation of coordination and interference drawings in accordance with the
requirements of this section, with a value of $10,000.00 for mechanical coordination
drawings and $10,000.00 for electrical coordination drawings.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
Submittals
.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and submitting to the Consultant for
review, a consolidated set of installation coordination/interference drawings for the
building showing how the building systems (including, but not limited to, domestic
heating and cooling piping, air distribution systems, air control boxes, reheat coils, fire
protection piping, electrical distribution, fire alarm systems, lighting, communication
cabling, security cabling) will fit together above ceiling areas and in exposed ceiling, to
allow ceiling heights required by the Contract Documents and by maintenance and
control access.
.1
Each Subcontractor whose work is affected by the information presented on the
coordination and interference drawings shall sign-off on the drawings prior to
submission to the Consultant and thereby agrees to coordinate their parts of the
Work to preserve the coordination and interference guidelines represented by the
coordination and interference drawings.
.3
Drawings to be in the form of a 3D model. Consultant will provide model of base building
in Revit 2015 for use by Contractor at the outset of the work.
.4
Prepare sleeve drawings for work of Division 15, and Division 16 showing size and
location of penetrations through load bearing elements. Submit sleeving drawings to
Consultant for review not less than 10 Working Days prior to construction of affected
work.
.5
Prepare embedded conduit drawings, showing size and location of penetrations through
load bearing elements. Submit embedded conduit drawings to Consultant for review not
less than 10 Working Days prior to construction of affected work.
.6
Prepare insert setting drawings for work to be cast into concrete and/or mortared into
masonry elements. Submit insert setting drawings to Consultant for review not less than
10 Working Days prior to construction of affected work.
.7
Coordinate placement of equipment to ensure that components will be properly
accommodated within spaces Provided prior to commencement of Work. In areas where
equipment and services are exposed care shall be taken to organize and layout services
in an organized and orderly manner. Where possible services are to run parallel or at
right angles to one another as required. Consultant may request that service layout be
reconfigured to suit sightline concerns during the coordination drawings review phase.
These drawing changes are to be executed at no additional cost to the Owner.
.8
Take complete responsibility for remedial work that results from failure to coordinate the
Work prior to fabrication and installation.
.9
Ensure that accesses and clearance required by jurisdictional authorities and/or for easy
maintenance of equipment are Provided in layout of equipment and services.
.1
Indicate required access points, clearances, and sizes for equipment and pieces
of equipment required in the Work. Note areas where access is compromised by
interferences with other services for review by the Consultant. Do not proceed
with installation of equipment in such compromised areas until a proposed
means of providing access has been accepted by the Consultant.
.10 Prepare and circulate coordination, interference and sleeving drawings prior to placing
orders for equipment and materials.
.11 Coordination and interference drawings shall be circulated for mark-ups by
Subcontractors responsible for work of all Divisions.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 33 00
Page 9
March 22, 2016
Submittals
.12 Coordinate preparation and submission of coordination and interference drawings with
shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings
Section 01 35 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
.2
General Procedures
For the purposes of this section:
.1
The words “worker” or “workers” shall mean the Contractor, Contractor’s staff or
employees, Subcontractors, Subcontractor’s staff or employees, Suppliers,
Supplier’s staff or employees, or anyone engaged for the Work, directly or
indirectly, by the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated.
.2
The words “make good” or “making good” shall mean that, when a finish or
material has been altered, the material or finish shall be repaired or replaced,
and refinished to match existing quality and appearance to acceptance of
Consultant, and that repaired or replaced and refinished Work shall not be
discernible from existing materials or finishes when judged by the Consultant
from a viewing distance of 1830 mm (6'), and that such work is included in the
Contract Price.
Operational limitations:
.1
The existing building will remain in full use and occupancy throughout the Work,
except for such parts of the building that have been vacated for the Work.
.2
Contractor’s use of the Place of the Work is limited to permit regular use of
existing Owner’s facilities to continue with the least amount of interference and
disruptions possible.
.3
In consultation with, and to acceptance of, the Consultant in the presence of the
Owner, designate an entrance and a circulation route that workers shall use and
that shall not be used by Owner’s staff, building occupants, or the public.
.3
Dust tight enclosure and partition doors and entrance doors to the Place of the Work
shall remain closed.
.4
Areas of the existing building adjacent to the Place of the Work or areas affected by the
Work, including circulation and access routes, shall be maintained in a clean state
equivalent to the level of cleanliness maintained in the existing building, and as follows:
.5
.1
Clean and vacuum the Place of the Work and areas surrounding the Place of the
Work daily or more frequently as required.
.2
Wet mop floor areas in vicinity of access doors to the Place of the Work daily, or
more frequently as required.
.3
Vacuum carpeted areas daily or more frequently as required.
.4
Wet clean carpets in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations once
work in such areas is complete.
.5
Final cleaning shall be in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
Waste protection and removal:
.1
Waste management and disposal shall be in accordance with Section 01 50 00
as supplemented herein.
.2
Transport waste in containers with tightly fitting lids or cover waste with a wet
sheet.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings
.6
1.2
.1
.2
1.3
Section 01 35 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.3
Remove waste as it is created. Debris shall be contained and covered if it can
not be removed immediately.
.4
Do not transport waste through occupied areas of existing building.
.5
Remove waste at the end of each Working Day through construction access
routes.
Document condition of the existing building in areas immediately adjacent to the Place of
the Work by means of construction photographs in accordance with Section 01 32 33.
Security
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for securing the Place of the Work and the
Work, and for securing areas used for the storage of Products or construction machinery
and equipment. The Owner shall have no responsibility in this regard.
.1
Provide and maintain security lighting.
.2
Provide and maintain temporary locks. Premises to be locked after working
hours.
Provide security for the Place of the Work by methods compatible with the security
system for the existing building.
.1
Contractor shall coordinate the Work carefully with the Consultant in the
presence of the Owner in order to ensure no disruption to the existing building’s
security system.
.2
Where existing building’s security system is breached due to Contractor’s
negligence, be responsible for any damage or theft of property, regardless if area
where damage or theft occurred is under Contractor’s control or not.
Use of Existing Facilities
.1
Restrict access, parking, material deliveries, execution of work, operations and
procedures to designated locations and times and do not deviate from designated
procedures without prior acceptance by the Consultant in the presence of the Owner.
.2
Periodically review proposed construction operations with the Consultant in the presence
of the Owner and cooperate as required to ensure that Owner’s interests and
requirements are not unduly compromised with regard to the normal operation and
function of occupied areas on the existing building.
.3
Traffic through occupied areas of the existing building shall be kept to a minimum.
Travel within occupied areas of the existing building shall be via the most direct route.
.4
Noise, dust and debris, and odours shall be minimized to ensure building occupants in
adjacent areas are disturbed as little as possible. Corrective action to cease or limit
disagreeable annoyances to building occupants shall be implemented immediately upon
notification by the Consultant or the Owner.
.5
Use of existing garbage chutes shall not be permitted.
.6
Use of existing containers and garbage bins shall not be permitted.
.7
Use of existing elevators shall not be permitted.
.8
Existing fire protection equipment:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings
.9
.1
Existing fire protection equipment shall only be used in an emergency situation.
.2
Do not remove existing fire protection equipment.
.3
If any existing fire protection equipment is used or interfered with in any way, the
Owner’s fire equipment inspector shall be retained to inspect, test, recharge, and
otherwise repair such equipment at no additional cost to the Owner.
Sanitary facilities:
.1
1.4
.1
Section 01 35 13
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Use of existing sanitary facilities shall not be permitted. Provide temporary
sanitary facilities in accordance with Section 01 50 00.
Parking
Parking for workers shall not be made available by the Owner.
.1
Parking will be permitted in public parking areas only.
.2
Throughout the Work, ensure that there is no interference with the operation of the
existing premises, and that the existing parking areas and road system remain free and
clear of obstructions.
.3
Illegally parked vehicles will be ticketed and/or towed at vehicle owner’s expense, and at
no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5
Existing Services Interruptions
.1
Connection or disconnection of services that will interfere with the operation of the
Owner’s facilities shall not be done without the prior written acceptance of the Consultant
in the presence of the Owner and during the times designated by the Owner. Premium
charges associated with such work shall be included in the Contract Price.
.2
Provide at least 10 Working Days’ prior written notice to the Consultant and the Owner of
requirement or intention to interrupt services, and obtain written permission of the
Consultant in the presence of the Owner prior to commencing such interruption.
.3
In no instance shall interruptions affect the entire existing building.
.4
As far as possible, coordinate interruptions with the Owner’s regular maintenance of
building services and systems.
.5
Areas adversely affected by changes in air flows outside the construction areas as a
result of a required shut-down of portions of the existing HVAC system within the
construction areas are to be re-balanced to comfortable levels as advised by the
Consultant.
.6
Should existing services be interrupted in breach of the above, Make Good immediately
and provide protection against further such disruptions. Costs resulting from such
interruptions and for making good shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.6
Protection of the Existing Building
.1
Protection requirements shall be in accordance with Section 01 50 00, as supplemented
herein.
.2
Keep Place of the Work safe and secure, denying access to unauthorized personnel.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings
Section 01 35 13
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.3
Protect existing work from damage. Make Good any damage caused. The onus is on
the Contractor to substantiate that damage existed prior to commencement of the Work.
.4
Do not overload the existing structure due to the Work.
.5
Take special measures to protect existing work from damage when moving heavy loads
or equipment. Protect areas used as passageways or through which materials are
moved. Use resilient tired conveyances only when moving materials and equipment
inside building. Provide coverings as required to protect existing work from damage.
.6
Separate exterior access, work and storage areas from Owner occupied existing areas,
with fencing and hoarding. Rearrange fencing/hoarding as Work progresses to suit
extent and configuration of the Work.
.7
Provide guards, barricades and other temporary protection to prevent injury to persons.
.8
Protect existing building components and contents from damage by weather, when
executing Work affecting integrity of the building envelope. Provide temporary insulated
and air tight weatherproof closures to protect openings made in existing building
envelope. Make Good existing building components and contents damaged by weather
resulting from inadequate temporary protection measures.
.9
Provide temporary fire resistant closures at existing areas openings exposed to
construction areas for the Work to maintain fire and life safety of existing building.
.10 Protection of existing occupied areas:
.1
Existing exterior walls with windows of plain glazing, when exposed to the Work,
shall be protected with 16 mm (5/8”) gypsum board for interior surfaces and
9.5 mm (3/8”) exterior grade plywood for exterior surfaces, mounted on suitable
framing.
.1 Plywood: in accordance with Section 06 10 53.
.2 Metal framing: in accordance with Section 09 22 00.
.3 Gypsum board: in accordance with Section 09 29 00.
1.7
.2
Maintain such protection throughout the Work.
.3
Other openings in the existing exterior walls, such as doors and louvres, shall be
similarly protected or replaced with doors of solid core wood or hollow steel
construction.
Emergency and Fire Protection
.1
Provide and maintain ready access to fire protection equipment, in accordance with
Section 01 50 00.
.2
Provide temporary fire resistant closures at existing building openings exposed to
construction areas.
.3
Contractor shall coordinate the work carefully with the Owner in order to ensure no
disruption to the existing fire detection and annunciation systems. Failure to provide
such coordination shall result in the Contractor incurring the responsibilities and
expenses associated with disruption to the existing fire detection and annunciation
systems at no additional cost to the Owner.
.1
Provide fire watch when existing fire detection and annunciation systems are not
operational or on bypass.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings
.2
.4
.7
Where temporary shut-down is necessitated, such shut down shall be in
accordance with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the
building code.
Obtain ‘Hot Work Permit’ from Owner prior to hot work operation, which may cause the
building's fire alarm system to be activated or create an unwarranted fire risk condition.
The prevention of fires and false fire alarms caused by hot work operations is the
primary goal of this procedure. Gas hoses, backflow preventers, fire resistive tarpaulins,
curtains and other cutting and welding equipment must be in good repair before the
permit is issued.
.1
.6
Whenever a changeover time occurs, which is an outage time of at least a
portion of the fire alarm system, the municipal fire department shall be notified of
the temporary shutdown and alternative measures shall be devised.
Contractor shall coordinate the work carefully with the Consultant in the presence of the
Owner in order to prevent unapproved disruptions to the existing sprinkler system,
standpipe system, or other fire protection systems.
.1
.5
Section 01 35 13
Page 5
March 22, 2016
‘Hot Work’ is defined as work using open flames or sources of heat that could
ignite materials in the work area.
Fire separations:
.1
Maintain the integrity of fire separations, fire protection systems , and fire rated
assemblies.
.2
Make Good fire separations, fire protection, and fire rated assemblies
compromised as a result of the Work.
Temporary fire separations:
.1
Provide temporary fire separations between existing occupied floor areas and
new areas under construction.
.2
Construct temporary fire separations out of steel studs and gypsum board to
provide a construction equivalent to a minimum of 1 hour fire resistance rating,
unless otherwise indicated.
.1 Firestopping and smoke sealant: in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
.2 Gypsum board: in accordance with Section 09 29 00.
.3 Steel studs: in accordance with Section 09 22 00.
.8
.3
Where access is required, the doorway shall be protected by a door of solid core
wood or hollow steel construction.
.4
Finish hardware equivalent to a minimum of 1 hour fire resistance rating, unless
otherwise indicated.
Maintaining existing building exit facilities:
.1
Maintain exit facilities serving the existing building.
.2
Where an exit is blocked-off or deleted as a result of the Work, an alternative exit
shall be Provided that is acceptable to the Consultant, the Owner, and authorities
having jurisdiction.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Special Procedures for Work in Occupied Buildings
.3
.9
Section 01 35 13
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Where it is necessary for access to be gained to an exit through the Place of the
Work, the access shall be clearly defined and protected so that it is separated
from construction areas by a smoke tight fire separation equivalent to a minimum
of 1 hour fire resistance rating, unless otherwise indicated.
Fire department access:
.1
Do not obstruct access route designated for fire department equipment.
.2
If it is necessary that existing access routes be obstructed or deleted, alternative
access routes acceptable to the fire department and in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and authorities having jurisdiction shall
be Provided prior to commencement of work that will obstruct or delete existing
access.
.10 Combustible materials:
.1
Stockpiling of combustible materials adjacent to or inside the existing building
shall not be acceptable.
.11 Temporary protection of openings in fire separations:
.1
Openings in existing floor assemblies and vertical fire rated assemblies required
by the Work, shall be temporarily protected with materials as required to maintain
continuity of the required fire resistance rating for existing fire rated assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 45 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Quality Control
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
Section Includes
General administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Related Requirements
.1
Pre-installation meetings: in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.2
Materials and workmanship quality assurance and reference standards: in accordance
with Section 01 60 00.
.3
Balancing and testing
Divisions 26, 27, and 28.
1.3
.1
of
systems
-
under
Divisions 21, 22, and 23,
and
Inspection and Testing
Inspection and testing services will be used to verify compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
.1
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit the Contractor’s
other quality assurance and control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Documents requirements.
.2
Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by
Consultant, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions
of this section.
.2
The Owner will appoint inspection and testing agencies, representing, reporting and
responsible to the Owner. Payment will be by Owner, unless otherwise specified.
.3
Additional testing services required because of changes in materials, proportions of
mixes requested by Contractor or Subcontractors as well as additional testing services
for materials occasioned by lack of identification or by failure of such materials being
replaced to meet requirements of the Contract Documents or testing of structure or
elements including load testing, shall be carried out at no additional cost to the Owner.
.4
Inspection and testing required by codes or ordinances, or by an authority having
jurisdiction, and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be paid for by the Contractor and not be paid by Owner, unless
otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
.5
Inspection or testing performed exclusively for Contractor’s convenience shall be sole
responsibility of Contractor, and will not be paid by Owner.
.6
Inspection and testing shall be performed by qualified and/or certified personnel under
professional supervision or performed directly by a professional engineer qualified in
conformance with applicable codes and certification programs.
.7
Requirements of regulatory agencies:
.8
.1
Testing shall be conducted in accordance with requirements of the building code.
.2
Obtain certification where required by the building code and standards.
Cooperation with inspection and testing agencies:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 45 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Quality Control
.9
.1
Provide inspection and testing agencies with materials and installation
information as required and /or requested.
.2
Provide access to the Work for representatives of inspection and testing
agencies.
.3
Cooperate with inspection and testing agencies and give adequate notification of
any changes in source of supply, additional work shifts and other proposed
changes.
.4
Permit access to the Work for inspection and testing agencies wherever the
Work is in progress, or wherever Products, materials, or equipment are stored
prior to shipping.
.5
Supply labour required to assist inspection and testing agencies in sampling and
making tests.
.6
Repair work damaged as a result of inspection and testing work.
.7
Inspection and testing agency services do not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for normal shop and site inspection, and quality control of
manufacturing and installation.
Where evidence exists that defective workmanship may have occurred, or that the Work
may have been carried out incorporating defective materials, or tests demonstrate that
installed conditions do not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Consultant reserves the right to have appropriate inspections, tests, and surveys
performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to help
determine the extent of defect and whether such work must be replaced. Inspections,
tests, and surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the
Contractor’s expense, and will not be paid by Owner, unless the results indicate that the
work so tested, inspected or surveyed is not defective or that, in Consultant’s opinion,
the work so tested, inspected, or surveyed may be accepted, in which case tests,
inspections or surveys will be paid by Owner.
.10 Prepare schedule for inspection and testing agency services in accordance with Section
01 33 00 and as follows:
.1
Establishing schedule:
.1 By advance discussion with the selected inspection or testing agency,
determine the appropriate time necessary to perform the required services
and to issue related reports.
.2 Allow for required time within construction schedule.
.2
Adherence to schedule:
.1 Contractor shall advise inspection and testing agencies in advance when
inspection and testing of the Work is required.
.1 Amount of advance notice shall be as required by the inspection and
testing company, but shall be no less than 2 Working Days.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 45 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Quality Control
.2 When inspection and testing agency is ready to perform inspection and
testing according to predetermined schedule, but is prevented from
inspection and testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the
parts of the Work scheduled for inspection and testing, extra costs for
inspection and testing attributable to the delay may be back-charged to
Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
.3
Notify inspection and testing agency at least 3 Working Days before work
required to be inspected commences, and arrange for a meeting at the Place of
the Work, to be held 1 Working Day before the work starts with the following
present:
.1 The Contractor, and the Subcontractor responsible for the work to inspected
and/or tested, the inspection and testing agency representatives, the product
manufacturer's representative when required, and the Consultant.
.4
Give 2 Working Days’ prior notice to inspection and testing agency of the
commencement of each phase of the Work requiring inspection, and provide
inspection and testing agency with materials and installation information.
.11 Reports and documents
.1
Inspection and testing agencies shall submit shop inspection and site inspection
reports within 5 Working Days of each inspection.
.2
Distribute reports as follows:
.1 Owner; 2 copies.
.2 Consultant; 1 copy.
.3 Contractor; 2 copies.
.4 Consulting engineers, as applicable; 1 copy each.
.3
Inspection and testing agencies shall submit a written report for each inspection
or test, including pertinent data such as conditions at the Place of the Work,
dates, test references, locations of tested materials, actual Product identification,
testing methodology, procedures, and descriptions, site instructions given,
recommendations and/or any other information required by standard applicable
to reporting of tests and inspections.
.1 Report shall clearly indicate failure of Product or procedures to meet
applicable standards, give recommendations for retesting or correction.
Inspector shall contact Contractor and Consultant immediately when Product
or Product assembly fails to meet requirements of the Contract Documents.
.4
Upon completion of portions of the Work subject to independent inspection and
testing, submit to the Consultant duplicate certificates of acceptance of the
installation issued by the independent inspection and testing company.
.12 Inspection and test specimens
.1
Inspection and testing will, generally, consist of procedures listed in the following
paragraphs, but additional tests may be performed as required to verify
conformance to Contract Documents.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 45 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Quality Control
1.4
.2
Specimens and samples for testing, unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents, will be taken by the inspection and testing agency; sampling
equipment and personnel will be provided by the inspection and testing agency;
and deliveries of specimens and samples to the testing agency will be performed
by the testing agency unless otherwise specified.
.3
Inspection and testing agency shall take samples necessary to verify quality as
specified. Taking of samples shall not endanger the structure or life safety, and
shall be taken so as to best represent the Work as a whole.
.4
Samples shall be handled, packaged, stored and delivered in accordance with
specified tests. Sample handling where required shall duplicate conditions at the
Place of the Work (such as site-cured concrete cylinders).
Mock-Ups
.1
Provide field or shop erected example of work complete with specified materials and
workmanship.
.2
Erect mock-ups at locations as specified and as acceptable to Consultant. Do not
proceed with work for which mock-ups are required prior to Consultant’s review of mockups.
.3
Protect and maintain mock-ups until directed to be removed. Commence work
demonstrated in mock-up only after review and acceptance of workmanship. If possible,
mock-up may become part of finished work, at sole discretion, and with prior written
acceptance of Consultant.
.4
Reviewed and accepted mock-ups will become standards of workmanship and material
against which installed work will be compared.
.5
Remove and replace materials or assemblies not matching reviewed mock-ups.
.6
Resubmit mock-ups until written acceptance is obtained from Consultant.
1.5
Manufacturer’s Field Review
.1
Where manufacturer’s field review is specified, manufacturer’s representative shall
review the relevant parts of the work at the Place of the Work, or wherever such affected
work is in progress, to ensure that work is being executed in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations and verify its product to be fit-for-purpose
intended.
.2
Manufacturer’s field review is to ensure that the Products specified are being used in the
Work and are being applied on surfaces prepared in accordance with their
recommendations and the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.3
Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer’s representative shall undertake a minimum of
1 field review, with additional reviews as deemed necessary by the manufacturer, to
determine that the work of such sections is in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
recommendations.
.4
Manufacturer’s representative shall submit a type-written report on manufacturer’s
letterhead within 2 Working Days after each field review. Report shall document
manufacturer’s representative’s field observations and recommendations.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 01 45 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Quality Control
.5
Manufacturer’s field review reports shall be prepared and distributed following the
procedures specified for preparation and submittal of inspection and testing reports
given above.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 50 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
General Instructions
.1
Temporary facilities and controls specified in this section shall be supplemented as
applicable in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
.2
Arrange, obtain and pay cost for permits required for temporary facilities and controls.
.1
Contractor to obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for occupancy of
public right of ways for material staging, deliveries, and waste bins.
.3
Provide and maintain temporary facilities and controls for the Work and remove them
from the Work upon issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work.
.4
Arrange and pay for required temporary services, unless otherwise indicated by
Consultant.
.5
Protect and maintain without interruption, existing water, heating, drainage, telephone
and other services within the Place of the Work to existing buildings not within the scope
of the Work of this Contract. Obtain written permission of the Owner for services
required to be temporarily shut off, at least 2 full Working Days in advance.
.6
Do not use permanent conveying, mechanical, or electrical systems, except standpipe
for firefighting, during the course of the Work unless specific written permission is
provided by the Consultant. Use of permanent facilities or services for temporary
construction service shall not prejudice warranties.
.7
Provide connection and disconnection of temporary services and facilities required in the
Work, including connection to existing services made available by the Owner.
1.2
Existing Services and Facilities
.1
Do not use any existing services and facilities during construction unless specific written
permission is provided by Owner.
.2
Where existing services are made available by the Owner, Provide meters for measuring
usage, the costs for which usage and meters shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
1.3
.1
Temporary Electrical Services
Provide and maintain an adequate temporary electrical service for performance of the
Work including, but not limited to, operation of electric pumps, motors, vibrators and
other power tools, hoisting and related construction and general illumination during the
Work.
.1
.2
1.4
.1
Use existing power, where available, subject to Owner’s approval. Pay for usage
at rates stipulated by the Owner.
Provide and maintain any components and equipment necessary to transform supply
power to necessary temporary power voltage.
Temporary Water Supply
Provide and maintain a temporary supply of water for use in the Work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Temporary Facilities and Controls
.1
.2
1.5
Use existing water supply, where available, subject to Owner’s approval. Pay for
usage at rates stipulated by the Owner.
Extend supply pipe or pipes from nearest available sources and maintain in good
condition until permanent system is installed and ready for use.
Temporary Sanitary Facilities
.1
Use of new building's sanitary facilities by workers is prohibited.
.2
Provide and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for use by workers.
.3
Use of existing building’s sanitary facilities by workers is prohibited.
1.6
Section 01 50 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Temporary Site Offices
.1
Provide heated, lighted, air conditioned and ventilated site office, of sufficient size to
accommodate site meetings for 12 people, and furnished with drawing layout table, filing
cabinets, fax machine, telephone, and computer as described below.
.2
Owner shall make available to Contractor a designated space off-site for use during
construction progress meetings.
1.7
Temporary Telephone, Fax Machine, and Computer
.1
Provide and maintain a telephone and fax machine (no combined units) in temporary site
office for exclusive use of Consultant, Contractor, and Subcontractors. Pay phone is not
acceptable.
.2
Fax machine shall be capable of recording date and time on faxes. Fax machines shall
have dedicated telephone line.
.3
Long distance charges shall be paid by party making call.
.4
Provide and maintain a computer for the purposes of email and internet access.
Computer to have dedicated, high-speed access, and be Provided complete with a
printer capable of printing 11” x 17” format.
1.8
Temporary Heating and Ventilation
.1
Provide and pay for temporary heating, cooling and ventilating required for the Work,
including attendance, maintenance and fuel.
.2
Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to:
.1
Facilitate continuous uninterrupted progress of the Work.
.2
Protect the Work and Products against damage and defacement caused by
weather, harmful levels of temperature, humidity, and moisture.
.3
Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for proper storage, installation
and curing of materials, in accordance with specified standards and
manufacturer's requirements.
.4
Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working
environment.
.3
Solid fuel salamanders will not be permitted.
.4
Furnish other temporary heating as required by various sections of the specifications or
by Product manufacturers.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 50 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.5
Ventilate to the exterior of the building work areas as required when toxic materials are
being utilized or cured.
.6
Replace with new, any work damaged due to failure to provide adequate heat at no cost
to Owner.
1.9
Temporary Enclosures and Protection
.1
Provide temporary enclosures and protection of adequate construction to prevent
dispersion of dust and dirt into other areas of existing building and to prevent dispersion
of dust and dirt beyond the Place of the Work.
.2
Provide temporary weather-tight enclosures and protection for exterior openings in
building as soon as walls, floors and roofs are built so as to protect the Work from
weather and vandalism. Provide doors in enclosures as necessary to maintain fire exits.
.3
Temporary enclosure and protection shall be of finished appearance and painted to
colour approved by Owner.
.4
Provide dust seal and sound resistant enclosures to protect existing building and
operations as indicated. Include temporary doors, fastenings and keys.
.5
Insulate and airseal exterior enclosures to prevent condensation and drafts.
.6
Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
1.10
Signs and Notices
.1
Do not exhibit at the Place of the Work signs or advertisements other than mandatory
warning signs and regulations, unless otherwise approved by Consultant and Owner.
.2
Maintain signs in good condition for the duration of Contract.
.3
Obtain approvals from authorities having jurisdictional for temporary signs.
1.11
Plant, Machinery and Scaffolding
.1
Provide formwork, scaffolding, equipment, tools, machinery
appurtenances necessary for the proper execution of the Work.
.2
Erect plant, machinery and scaffolding to permit access to building and the Work.
.3
Use scaffolds in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades'
operations.
.4
Support scaffolds from finished surfaces only after taking precautions to prevent
damage. No supports, clips, brackets, or similar devices shall be welded, bolted, or
otherwise affixed to any finished member or surface without prior permission.
1.12
and
incidental
Site Storage
.1
Handle and store materials so as to prevent damage or defacement to the Work and
surrounding property.
.2
Construct weather-tight storage sheds for storage of materials that may be damaged or
defaced by weather. Provide floors raised 150 mm (6”) clear of ground for storage of
Products.
.3
Owner is not responsible for securing Products or materials at the Place of the Work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Temporary Facilities and Controls
1.13
Section 01 50 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Protection of the Public
.1
Provide fencing, barricades, hoarding, notices and warning boards and maintain lights
and signals for protection of workers engaged on the Work, for protection of adjoining
property and for protection of the public.
.2
Where any special hazard exists from which it is not possible to protect the public safety
by other means, watchpersons shall be employed to preserve public safety until the area
of special hazard no longer poses a risk to public safety.
1.14
Protection of the Work
.1
Protect the Work from damage, discolouring, and defacement. Maintain protection until
the Work is complete.
.2
Protect completed work from soiling, abrasion, punctures, damage, and defacement,
and maintain protection until the surrounding or overhead work is complete.
.3
Keep surfaces free of oils, grease or other materials that may damage or deface them or
affect bond of applied Products.
.4
Remove and replace materials damaged or defaced as a result of failure to provide
adequate protection.
.5
Have damaged or defaced work corrected by workers meeting qualification requirements
of the Contract Documents.
1.15
Protection of Concrete Floors to Remain Exposed in Finished Work
.1
Non-marking protection material shall be placed over concrete floors designated as
exposed.
.2
Post the following on warning signs at locations leading to areas of where concrete
floors are to remain exposed in finished work (see Concrete Floor Contractors
Association of Canada):
.1
Concrete floors shall be protected from staining, damage and excessive loading
at all times:
.1 No traffic is permitted on new concrete floors for the first 3 days after
placement.
.2 Foot traffic is permitted between 3-7 days after placement (curing materials
must be replaced where disturbed by traffic).
.3 Scissorlifts and light equipment are permitted 7 days after slab placement.
.4 Vehicles shall be diapered to prevent oil and other liquid spills (remove
leaking equipment from the jobsite immediately).
.5 Tires shall be non-marking or taped with non-marking tape to prevent
marking of the floors.
.6 Trucks, forklifts and any other heavy loads may only to be placed on the floor
if they have been previously approved by the Consultant.
.7 Spills must shall be cleaned up immediately to avoid permanent staining of
the concrete.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 50 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
.8 Concrete shall be protected from scratching and impact damage at all times.
No cutting, painting, welding or other injurious activities shall be performed
without protecting the concrete from damage prior to the commencement of
work.
1.16
Snow Removal
.1
Allow no accumulation of ice and snow within the Place of the Work. There shall be no
use of salt for de-icing in areas of building work.
.2
Remove snow from access routes to the Work to maintain uninterrupted progress of the
Work.
1.17
.1
1.18
Pest Control
Provide rodent control and other pest control programs during the Work in accordance
with the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Waste Management
.1
Do not bury rubbish and waste materials at the Place of the Work.
.2
Do not dispose of waste into waterways or storm or sanitary sewers.
.3
Do not burn waste materials at the Place of the Work.
.4
Comply with waste disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
.5
Remove waste material from the Place of the Work daily. If waste is collected in bins,
bins to be removed from site once full.
.6
Arrange and pay for removal of debris and waste from the Place of the Work.
.7
Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris. Pay fees.
1.19
Control of Dust, Debris and Noise
.1
Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris.
.2
Control dust and dirt produced during the Work to prevent dispersion beyond the
immediate work areas.
.3
Prevent materials from contaminating air beyond application area, by providing
temporary enclosures and ventilation/filtration.
.4
Limit noise levels in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
the Owner.
.5
Prevent abrasive-blasting, pressure-washing spray, and other extraneous materials from
contaminating air beyond application area.
.6
The surrounding buildings and campus are occupied year round. Pay special attention to
control and minimization of dust, noise, and garbage. Protect surrounding site work and
building cladding from damage during construction.
.7
Supplement these requirements in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Temporary Facilities and Controls
1.20
Section 01 50 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Traffic Control and Road Maintenance
.1
Do not block roads or impede traffic. Keep construction traffic to designated roads only.
Provide flagperson to direct traffic as required.
.2
Provide a hard surface area at the Place of the Work for cleaning down trucks prior to
entry onto municipal roads or private roads outside of the Place of the Work.
.3
Keep public and private roads free of dust, mud and debris resulting from truck,
machinery and vehicular traffic related specifically to this Project, for the duration of
Work.
.4
Clean roads regularly, public or private. Wash down and scrape flush roads at least daily
when earth moving operations take place. Maintain public property in accordance with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.21
.1
1.22
Security
Provide security for the Place of the Work in accordance with Section 01 35 13.
Design and Safety Requirements for Temporary Facilities
.1
Be responsible for design, erection, operation, maintenance and removal of temporary
structural and other temporary facilities. Engage and pay for registered professional
engineering personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to perform these functions
where required by law or by the Contract Documents; and in cases where such
temporary facilities and their method of construction are of such a nature that
professional engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results.
.2
Engage and pay for professional engineer(s) registered in Place of the Work to design
and supervise construction and maintenance of hoardings, covered ways, protective
canopies and project sign(s). Designs provided by Consultant or Owner for such work
cover general appearance only.
1.23
Moisture Control
.1
Concrete slabs shall be properly cured and dried before installation of finished flooring
assemblies. Allow for proper drying time before slabs are ready for moisture testing. Do
not cover concrete slabs with finish flooring assemblies unless the moisture vapour
emission rate meets manufacturer’s printed installation specifications.
.2
Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting, protect as
follows:
.3
.1
Protect porous materials from water damage.
.2
Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
.3
Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with
concrete.
.4
Remove standing water from decks.
.5
Keep deck openings covered or dammed.
After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of
building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture, protect as
follows:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Temporary Facilities and Controls
.4
Section 01 50 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
.1
Do not load or install gypsum board or other porous materials or components, or
items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
.2
Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
.3
Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic
matter.
.4
Discard or replace water-damaged material.
.5
Do not install material that is wet.
.6
Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry
before enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.
After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of
permanent heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems, maintain as follows:
.1
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective drying
conditions.
.2
Use permanent heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system to control
humidity subject to the prior written approval of the Consultant.
.3
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative
humidity, and exposure to water limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Products and Workmanship
Section 01 60 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
Availability of Products
In the event of delays in supply of Products, and should it subsequently appear that the
Work may be delayed for such reason, Consultant reserves the right to substitute more
readily available Products of similar character, at no additional cost to the Owner.
Product Handling
.1
Handle and store Products in a manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration
and soiling and in accordance with manufacturers’ and Supplier’s recommendations and
so as to ensure preservation of their quality and fitness for the Work, and protect from
vandalism and theft.
.2
Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition with
manufacturer's seals and labels intact, facing to outside. Do not remove from packaging
or bundling until required in the Work.
.3
Store materials susceptible to environmental damage in a weathertight enclosure raised
clear of ground so that they are protected from weather, dampness and deterioration. Do
not use such materials which have been damaged by exposure to moisture.
.4
Keep sand, when used as ingredients for grout, mortar or similar mixed materials, clean
and dry. Store sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during
inclement weather.
.5
Store sheet materials, lumber and other Products susceptible to deterioration on flat,
solid supports and keep clear of ground or slab. Slope to shed moisture.
.6
Handle materials to preclude damaging existing surfaces and work of others.
.7
Remove damaged Products and replace with new undamaged Products.
.8
Transportation:
.1
Pay cost of transportation of Products required in performance of Work.
.2
Transportation cost of Products supplied by Owner will be paid for by Owner.
Unload, handle and store such Products at the Place of the Work.
.3
Reject Products damaged during transport.
.4
Transportation of Products must be undertaken to suit construction schedule.
Contractor is responsible for determining mode of transport to ensure delivery,
obtaining shop drawings, placement of orders, and on-time premium costs, air
freight, and the like.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Product Requirements and Quality
.1
Products used for temporary facilities may have been previously used, providing they
are sound in structural qualities.
.2
Products and Product installation shall be in compliance with building code, regulations
and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Products and Workmanship
.3
Section 01 60 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Specified options: The Work is based on materials, Products and systems specified by
manufacturer's catalogued trade names, references to standards, by prescriptive
specifications and by performance specifications.
.1
Where only one manufacturer's trade name is specified for a Product, the
Product is single sourced and shall be supplied by the specified manufacturer.
.2
Where more than one manufacturer's trade name is specified for a Product,
supply one Product from list of Products specified.
.3
When a Product is specified by reference to a standard, select one Product from
manufacturer that meets or exceeds the requirements of the standard and
manufacturer’s written application directions.
.4
When a Product or system is specified by prescriptive or performance
specifications, Provide one Product or system which meets or exceeds the
requirements of the prescriptive or performance specifications and
manufacturer’s written application directions.
.5
The onus is on the Contractor to prove compliance with governing published
standards, prescriptive specifications and with performance specifications.
.6
Visual selection specification:
.1 Where specifications include the phrase "as selected by Consultant from
manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies
with requirements. Consultant will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and
premium items.
.7
Visual matching specification:
.1 Where specifications require "match Consultant’s sample", provide a product
that complies with requirements and matches Consultant’s sample.
Consultant’s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
.4
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout the
Contract Documents) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective,
and of the quality standards specified, for the purpose intended. If requested, furnish
evidence as to type, source and quality of Products Provided.
.5
Where Contract Documents list Basis of Design or acceptable manufacturers, or list of
products, select as applicable, one Product meeting performance of specifications and
manufacturer’s written application directions.
.6
Where Contract Documents list acceptable Products or acceptable manufacturers,
select as applicable, one Product meeting performance of specifications and
manufacturer’s written application directions.
.7
Where Contract Documents require design of a Product or system, and minimum
material requirements are specified, the design of such Product or system shall employ
materials specified within applicable section. Where secondary materials or components
are not specified, augment with materials meeting applicable code limitations, and
incorporating compatibility criteria with adjacent work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Products and Workmanship
Section 01 60 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.8
Defective Products, whenever identified prior to completion of the Work, will be rejected,
regardless of previous reviews. Review of the Work by the Consultant or inspection and
testing companies does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for executing the
Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, but is a
precaution against oversight or error.
.9
Should dispute arise as to quality or fitness of Products, the decision rests strictly with
Consultant based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.10 Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, maintain uniformity of Product
and manufacturer for any like item, material, equipment or assembly for the duration of
the Work.
.11 Products exposed in the finished work shall be uniform in colour, texture, range, and
quality, and be from one production run or batch, unless otherwise indicated.
.12 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on Products are not acceptable in
prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in
mechanical, electrical, machinery or like rooms.
.13 Owner retains right to select from choices available within specified Products for colours,
patterns, finishes or other options normally made available. Submit full range of Product
options in accordance with 01 33 00 for such selection.
.14 Quality control:
.1
Implement a system of quality control to ensure compliance with Contract
Documents.
.2
Notify Consultant of defects in the Work or departures from intent of Contract
Documents that may occur during construction. Consultant will recommend
appropriate corrective action in accordance with requirements of the Contract.
.15 Exposed to weather: Products and materials in environments not protected by the
building’s HVAC and/or climate control systems shall be considered exposed to weather.
2.2
Inserts, Anchors, and Fasteners
.1
Use only factory made, threaded or toggle type inserts as required for supports and
anchors, properly sized for load to be carried.
.2
Where inserts cannot be placed, use factory made expansion shields for light weights
only.
.3
Supply and locate inserts, holes, anchor bolts and sleeves during placement or
fabrication of structural elements.
.4
Fasteners stressed in withdrawal are not acceptable, except where otherwise indicated.
.5
Metal fastenings shall be uniform to metals materials and components being anchored
or of a metal which will not set up a galvanic action causing damage to the fastening or
metal component under moist conditions.
.6
Fastenings for prefinished materials shall be of concealed type unless otherwise
indicated, and when exposed finish is required, of matching prefinishing materials.
.7
Metal fastenings and accessories shall be same texture, colour and finish as material on
which they occur, as selected by Consultant.
.8
Power actuated fasteners:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Products and Workmanship
Section 01 60 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.1
Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190-11
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
.2
Do not use power actuated fasteners which are stressed in withdrawal in finished
work.
.3
Do not use power actuated fasteners within 100 mm (4") of the edge of concrete
or masonry, unless otherwise accepted in writing by Consultant.
.4
Do not use power actuated fasteners in post-tensioned concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Manufacturer's Instructions
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, install or erect Products in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures
supplied with Products. Obtain printed instructions directly from manufacturers.
.2
Notify Consultant in writing, of conflicts between the Contract Documents and
manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Improper installation or erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these
requirements, authorizes Consultant to require removal and re-installation at no
additional cost to the Owner.
.4
Manufacturers’ representatives shall have access to the Work at all times. Contractor
shall render assistance and facilities for such access in order that the manufacturers’
representatives may properly perform their function.
3.2
Overloading
.1
Protect the existing building from loads which may cause permanent deformation.
.2
Protect the Work from loads which may cause permanent deformation.
3.3
.1
3.4
.1
3.5
.1
Galvanic/Dissimilar Metal Corrosion
Insulate dissimilar metals from each other by suitable plastic strips, washers or sleeves
to prevent galvanic corrosion where conductive liquid or electrolyte (rainwater or
condensation) exists.
Penetrations
Holes or voids created in assemblies or partitions for penetrating mechanical, electrical,
or sprinkler service items, shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the penetrating item
as well as additional required fill materials, such as sealants, firestopping and smoke
sealants, insulation, and the like, without exceeding the maximum opening allowable by
the manufacturer of the additional required fill material.
Workmanship
General:
.1
Execute the Work using workers experienced and skilled in the respective duties
for which they are employed.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Products and Workmanship
Section 01 60 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
.2
Do not employ an unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.
.3
Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest
solely with Consultant, whose decision is final.
.4
Upon request by the Consultant, submit proof, in the form of CCDC 11 Contractor's Qualification Statement, of qualifications of Subcontractors to verify
Subcontractor’s qualifications and experience meet or exceed the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
.1 If, upon review of the Contractor’s Qualification Statement, it is found that the
Subcontractor does not meet the qualification requirements specified in the
Contract Documents pertaining to the parts of the Work for which the
Subcontractor has been retained, the Contractor shall replace the unqualified
Subcontractor with a qualified Subcontractor, satisfactory to the Contractor
and the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner and at no increase in the
Contract Time.
.5
.2
.3
Coordination:
.1
Ensure cooperation of workers in layout of the Work. Maintain efficient and
continuous supervision.
.2
Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and
accessories.
Backer plates:
.1
.4
.5
Provide backer plates to support and provide anchorage base to carry loads from
surface or recessed applied materials.
Concealment:
.1
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings,
except where indicated otherwise.
.2
Before installation, inform Consultant of any contradictory situation. Install as
directed by Consultant.
Cutting and remedial work:
.1
.6
Remove Products or materials that have been broken, chipped, cracked,
discoloured, abraded, or damaged during construction period and Provide
undamaged Products or materials meeting the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Perform cutting and remedial work required to make parts of the Work come
together. Coordinate the Work to ensure this requirement is maintained. Obtain
permission from Consultant before commencing any cutting. Refer also to
requirements of Section 01 73 29.
Location of fixtures:
.1
Consider location of fixtures, access panels, outlets and mechanical and
electrical items indicated as approximate only. Locate fixtures, and the like
approximately; Architectural drawings will relate these items to known
dimensions, such as ceiling tile grid or wall locations and the like.
.2
Obtain Consultant’s acceptance for precise locations of fixtures, access panels,
outlets, mechanical, and electrical items.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Products and Workmanship
.7
.8
.9
Section 01 60 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.3
Consultant reserves the right to relocate electrical outlets and mechanical fixtures
at a later date, but prior to installation, without cost, provided that the relocation
per outlet does not exceed 3050 mm (10') from the original location.
.4
Inform Consultant of conflicting installations. Install only as directed by
Consultant.
Protection of work in progress:
.1
Take reasonable and necessary measures, including those required by
authorities having jurisdiction, to Provide protection.
.2
Adequately protect parts of the Work completed or in progress. Parts of the Work
damaged or defaced due to failure in providing such protection is to be removed
and replaced, or repaired, as directed by the Consultant, at no additional cost to
the Owner.
.3
Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any
load bearing structural member without written permission of Consultant, unless
specifically indicated. Refer also to Section 01 73 29.
.4
Adequately protect finished flooring from damage. Take special measures when
moving heavy loads or equipment on them.
.5
Keep floors free of oils, grease or other materials likely to discolour them or affect
bond of applied surfaces.
.6
Protect work of other Subcontractors from damage while doing subsequent work.
Damaged work shall be made good by appropriate Subcontractors but at
expense of those causing damage.
.7
Protect existing buildings, curbs, roads and lanes. If, during the Work, any
buildings, curbs, roads or lanes are damaged, bear costs for repairs.
Existing utilities:
.1
When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute the
Work at times approved by Owner, with a minimum of disturbance to Owner’s
ongoing operations, the Work, and traffic.
.2
Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When inactive services are
encountered, cap off in a manner approved by authority having jurisdiction and
stake or otherwise record location of capped service.
Protection of mechanical and electrical Products or materials:
.1
Wrap in protective plastic and seal mechanical and electrical items of mechanical
and electrical equipment prior to and during for shipment, storage at the Place of
the Work and after installation.
.2
Remove protective coverings only to the extent required for installation of the
items. Re-install protection immediately following installation.
.3
Remove protective coverings in stages, as work areas are completed, or when
directed by Consultant.
.10 Operational requirements:
.1
Operable Products shall be Provided fully operational and ready for intended
use.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Products and Workmanship
.2
Section 01 60 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Adjust operating hardware and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and
weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts for smooth squeak-free function, in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Cutting and Patching
Section 01 73 29
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Cutting, Patching and Remedial Work
Submittal Items:
.1
Comply with administrative requirements of Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit written request in advance of cutting, coring, and alteration that affects:
.1 Structural integrity of any element of Work.
.2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
.3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
.4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
.5 Owner or work of other contractors.
.3
Include in request:
.1 Identification of Project.
.2 Location and description of affected work.
.3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.
.4 Description of proposed work, and Products to be used.
.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching.
.6 Effect on Owner or work of other contractors.
.7 Written permission of affected separate contractor.
.8 Date and time work will be performed.
.9 Non-destructive structural survey: Radiography (X-ray) imaging of work to be
cut or cored.
.4
.2
Do not commence cutting, patching, or remedial work until request has been
reviewed by Consultant.
Preparation:
.1
Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement
during cutting and patching.
.2
After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of the Work.
.3
Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
.4
Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; devices and
methods to protect other portions of the Work from damage.
.5
Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering
work.
.6
Where uncovering of area exposes local deterioration, cracking, evidence of
water infiltration, structural settlement, previous modifications, or other
unexpected conditions, advise Consultant immediately in writing and leave
conditions exposed until receipt of Consultant’s written instructions. If area is
exposed to the exterior, Provide temporary protection from inclement weather.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Cutting and Patching
.7
.3
Section 01 73 29
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Scan existing concrete walls and floor slabs in areas where the use of
mechanical fasteners or inserts is required. No existing rebar is permitted to be
cut or adversely exposed.
Execution:
.1
Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete the Work. Under no
circumstances will overcutting of corners of opening be accepted. Ensure corners
of openings to be cut are predrilled or sawed.
.2
Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
.3
Remove samples of installed work for testing if directed by Consultant.
.4
Shop drawings identifying precise locations and size of openings to be cored and
cut are to be submitted for review by Consultant. Provide non-destructive
structural survey of structural concrete to be cored or cut, for Consultant review.
Coring and cutting work locations shall be reviewed by Consultant for acceptance
before proceeding.
.5
Provide openings in non-structural elements of the Work for penetrations of
mechanical and electrical work
.6
Perform work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will Provide
proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
.7
Employ qualified installer with at least 3 years of relevant experience to perform
cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and
sight-exposed surfaces.
.8
Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not
allowed to be used anywhere within existing buildings unless approved by
Consultant.
.9
Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
.10
Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through
surfaces and with suitable allowance for deflection, expansion, contraction, and
firestopping.
.11
Enclose pipes, ducts, conduit and wires passing through floors at areas where
faucets occur in a 100 mm (4") high metal sleeve and make air and watertight
with water resistant firestopping.
.12
Completely seal voids of penetrations of fire rated wall, ceiling, and floor
constructions with firestopping and smoke seals.
.13
Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Refinish continuous surfaces to
nearest intersection. Refinish entire assembly units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Cutting and Patching
END OF SECTION
Section 01 73 29
Page 3
March 22, 2016
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Progressive Cleaning
Section 01 74 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
Environmental Controls
.1
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and antipollution laws.
.2
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of the Work
daily.
.3
Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
.4
Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
1.2
.1
1.3
Materials
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned
and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
Cleaning During Construction
.1
Clean-up the Place of the Work daily. Maintain clean and clear egress routes at all
times.
.2
Maintain Place of the Work, grounds and public properties free from accumulations of
waste materials and rubbish.
.3
Provide containers at the Place of the Work for collection of waste materials and rubbish.
Remove waste materials and rubbish from the Place of the Work when containers
become full.
.4
Vacuum and clean interior building areas when ready to receive finish painting, and
continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis until Substantial Performance of the
Work.
.5
Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
.6
Promptly as the Work proceeds, on a daily basis and upon completion, clean up and
remove rubbish, surplus materials and equipment.
.7
Remove as the work of this section progresses, corrosive and foreign materials which
may set or become difficult to remove at time of final cleaning or which may damage
members.
.8
Wash exposed surfaces with a cleaning solution approved by Product manufacturers.
.9
Debris and waste not permitted within cavities of Work.
1.4
.1
Final Cleaning
Perform final cleaning in accordance with requirements of Section 01 77 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Progressive Cleaning
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 74 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
Section 01 77 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
General Instructions
.1
The procedures for completing Contract and acceptance by the Owner shall be in
accordance with the methods described in OAA/OGCA Document 100 (December 12,
2007) and any additional requirements described below.
.2
Stages will be reviewed at the Contract start-up meeting to ensure that parties
understand their responsibilities. Refer to Section 01 31 19 for procedures and
requirements for Contract start-up meeting.
.3
Within 4 weeks of commencement of the Work, submit to the Consultant a list of
closeout submittals required by the Contract Documents.
1.2
.1
.2
Final Cleaning
Environmental controls:
.1
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and
anti-pollution laws.
.2
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from Place of the
Work daily.
.3
Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
.4
Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
Materials:
.1
.3
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be
cleaned and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
Final cleaning:
.1
Immediately prior to Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performance
of the Work has been achieved, remove surplus Products and construction
machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the remaining
Work.
.2
Remove waste Products and debris other than that caused by the Owner, and
leave the Work clean and suitable for occupancy by Owner.
.3
When the Contract is completed, remove surplus Products, tools, construction
machinery and equipment.
.4
Clean glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain
enamel, prefinished surfaces, and fixtures.
.5
Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative parts of the Work,
electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fittings, walls, and floors.
.6
Vacuum clean and remove dust from building interiors, behind grilles, louvres,
and screens. Vacuum clean interior of electrical equipment.
.7
Clean floor finishes to recommendations of manufacturer.
.8
Remove non-permanent labels.
.9
Remove dirt and residue from surfaces.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
1.3
.1
Section 01 77 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.10
Inspect finishes, fittings and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and
operation.
.11
At completion of the Work, remove protective coatings, clean surfaces and
remove excess compounds and sealant materials. Make good defective,
scratched or damaged work.
.12
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of
mechanical equipment.
.13
Remove seal wrap on mechanical and electrical Products and materials and
clean as required.
.14
Clean and/or replace lamps, light fixtures, lenses and grilles.
.15
Remove protective covering and labels from lamps, hardware, and speciality
items.
.16
Under the direction of the Consultant, aim adjustable luminaires .
.17
Clean architectural metal surfaces to remove surface discolouration and rust
staining.
Closeout Submittals
Collect reviewed submittals, and assemble required closeout submittals executed by
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and manufacturers. Prior to submitting closeout submittals to
the Consultant, undertake the following:
.1
Review maintenance manual contents (operating, maintenance instructions, asbuilt drawings, materials) for completeness.
.2
Review supply and completeness of spare parts required by Contract Documents
and manufacturers.
.3
Review in relation to Contract Price, Change Orders, Change Directives,
holdbacks and other adjustments to the Contract Price.
.4
Review inspection and testing reports to verify conformance to intent of Contract
Documents and that changes, repairs or replacements have been completed.
.5
Execute transition of performance bond and labour and materials payment bond
to warranty period requirements.
.6
Submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Price,
previous payments, and monies remaining at time of application for completion of
the Contract. Consultant will issue a final change order reflecting approved
adjustments to Contract Price not previously made.
.2
No later than 10 Working Days prior to submitting request for Consultant’s review to
determine if Substantial Performance of the Work has been achieved, submit to the
Consultant the closeout submittals specified in this section, including, but not limited to,
reviewed shop drawings, Product data sheets, samples, operating instructions, as-built
records, fully executed warranties and guarantees, reports recording demonstration and
instruction provided to Owner for operation and maintenance of building systems,
software required for operation and maintenance of building systems, maintenance
materials, and keys.
.3
For equipment put into use with Owner’s permission during the Work, submit required
closeout submittals within 10 Working Days after start-up.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
Section 01 77 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.4
For items of the Work delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Performance of the
Work, provide updated closeout submittals within 10 Working Days after acceptance,
listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
.5
Neither the Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial Performance of the Work has
been achieved, nor acceptance of the Work, will take place until receipt, by the
Consultant, of acceptable copies of the closeout submittals required herein and by the
Contract Documents.
.6
Unless otherwise indicated, all closeout submittals shall be submitted to the Consultant
in digital PDF format.
.7
As-built documents:
.1
Owner will provide 1 set of Contract Documents to the Contractor for as-built
documentation purposes.
.2
Accurately record as-built conditions and deviations from Contract Documents as
the Work progresses.
.3
Mark changes in red ink.
.4
Record, without being limited to, the following:
.1 Field changes of dimensions/details.
.2 Changes by Change Orders, Change Directives, and Supplemental
Instructions.
.3 Locations of interior mechanical and electrical equipment and distribution.
.4 Specification as-builts: Record as-built Products, including manufacturer,
manufacturer’s model or system number.
.5
As-built documentation:
.1 Submit 3 copies of as-built documents.
.8
Operation and maintenance manuals:
.1
Submit 3 copies of operation and maintenance manuals, consisting of the
following general components:
.1 Operation and maintenance book.
.2 Shop drawing book.
.3 Warranty book.
.4
.2
Project data book.
Operation and maintenance books shall contain operating and maintenance data
and information specified below for supplied Products, in English, and shall be
made up as follows:
.1 Charts, diagrams and reports identified in Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and
Divisions 26, 27, and 28 of the specifications.
.2 Description, operation and maintenance instructions for equipment and parts
list. Indicate nameplate information such as make, size, capacity, serial
number.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
Section 01 77 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.3 Bind each general component of the operation and maintenance books in
separate vinyl hard covered, 3 ring loose leaf binders.
.4 Enclose title sheet, labelled as applicable, with project name, date and list of
contents.
.5 Organize contents into applicable sections of work to parallel project
specifications break-down. Mark each section by labelled tabs protected with
celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividing sheets.
.6 Neatly type lists and notes. Use clear drawings, diagrams of manufacturers'
literature.
.3
Shop drawing book:
.1 Submit one copy of each final accepted shop drawing issued for the Work on
which have been recorded changes made during fabrication and installation
caused by unforeseen conditions.
.2 Engineered shop drawings shall include copies of the certificate of insurance,
the engineer’s field review reports, and the engineer’s letters of general
conformity that were provided as part of the engineered submittal in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 appended to the pertinent engineered
shop drawing in the shop drawing manual.
.4
Warranty book:
.1 Submit copies of bonds, guarantees, warranties and extended warranties
together in one report binder, complete with an indexed summary list of
warranties and expiration dates. Warranties to be in accordance with Section
01 78 36.
.5
Project data book: shall include the following information supplemented by
additional required data specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents:
.1 Maintenance instructions for finished surfaces and materials.
.2 Copy of hardware and paint schedules.
.3 Names, addresses and phone numbers of Subcontractors and Suppliers, as
applicable.
.4 Additional material used in the Work listed under various sections showing
name of manufacturer and source of supply.
.5 Report recording demonstration and instruction provided to Owner for
operation and maintenance of building systems as described below in this
section.
.6 Key construction photos.
.7 Permits and forms:
.1 Workplace Safety & Insurance Board certificate of clearance.
.2 Certificates of approval of the Work by local building department (if
available).
.3 Electrical authority certificate of inspection.
.9
Posted operating instructions
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
Section 01 77 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
.1
Prepare operating instructions in English for posting near equipment and
systems. Posted instructions to be glass covered, framed and mounted.
.2
Posted instructions to consist of simplified, consolidated equipment, control and
power diagrams graphically representing the entire system, including concise
instructions on how to start and stop systems, what settings and conditions are to
be observed by the operators, and what control adjustments are to be made or
maintained by the operator.
.3
Posted instructions shall include control diagrams with added specific operating
instructions, controls, interlocks, and the like.
.4
Posted instructions shall include:
.1 HVAC controls for each system;
.2 One line schematic diagrams of water supply;
.3 One line isometric diagrams of sanitary drainage;
.4 One line diagrams of steam distribution, hot and cold water systems,
including risers, valves, control devices, etc.
.10 Maintenance materials:
.1
Provide overage, extra stock, and maintenance materials. For required materials,
see individual sections of specifications. Deliver to a location and at a time
specified by the Owner, and as follows:
.1 Use unbroken cartons, or if not supplied in cartons, material shall be strongly
packaged.
.2 Clearly mark cartons or packaging as to contents, project name, and
Supplier.
.3 If applicable give colour and finish, room number or area where material is
used.
1.4
.2
Replace incorrect or damaged maintenance materials delivered to Owner,
including damage through shipment.
.3
Provide a typed inventory list of maintenance materials prior to Substantial
Performance of the Work application. List all items, complete with quantities, and
storage locations.
.4
Establish a master list identifying maintenance materials and maintain a log of
when materials are turned over to Owner and signing authority for acceptance of
materials on behalf of Owner.
System Demonstration and Project Commissioning
.1
Refer also to requirements of Division 21, 22, and 23 and Division 26, 27, and 28 with
respect to commissioning for control systems, mechanical / electrical systems.
.2
Perform system demonstration and commissioning work no later than 10 Working Days
prior to submitting request for Consultant’s review to determine if Substantial
Performance of the Work has been achieved.
.3
Review submittals by Subcontractors for equipment and systems requiring
commissioning to ensure that the commissioning and testing procedures are coordinated
and consistent with equipment being supplied.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
Section 01 77 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.4
Submit required certificates of approval or acceptance from authorities having
jurisdiction.
.5
Meet with other consultants; structural, mechanical,
demonstration, instruction, commissioning and completion.
.6
Arrange, schedule and chair meetings with the Owner, Consultant, and Subcontractors
to coordinate demonstration, instruction and commissioning activities, and completion as
outlined in the project specifications.
.7
Coordinate the execution of functional testing and commissioning activities, and
preparation and compilation of commissioning reports.
.8
Review condition of equipment such as lighting, elevators and heating system, which
has been used in the course of the Work to ensure turning over at completion in "as new
condition" with warranties dated and certified from time specified.
.9
The contractor shall identify or engage a Commissioning Agent to the satisfaction of the
Owner and Consultant. The following tasks must be performed by the Commissioning
Agent:
electrical,
to
coordinate
.1
Prior to the start of commissioning activities, prepare a commissioning plan
outlining the detailed description of the commissioning process and activities for
all items requiring commissioning, and the responsibilities of each member of the
commissioning team.
.2
Submit all functional testing criteria as required for all equipment and systems
requiring commissioning.
.3
Submit contractor / vendor checklists or commissioning verification forms to the
Consultant for review and approval prior to commencement of commissioning
activities. Include:
.1 Pre-start checklists. Identify each item by all involved trades which must be
completed prior to startup of the specific piece of equipment or system.
.2 Start up checklists: Identify each item by all involved trades in relation to
start-up testing of specific equipment or systems. Start up and testing must
be clearly documented according to the respective manufacturer's written
instructions and the Contract Documents.
.3 Functional performance test checklists: Identify the step-by-step procedure by
which each and every functional requirement of a system or piece of
equipment and its various components will be tested and verified. Include all
specified requirements including but not limited to start-up, increasing load,
decreasing load, and modulation, shutdown, operation under all climatic
conditions, including all normal modes of operation and also under potential
abnormal and emergency conditions including power failure and
backup/restart. Ensure the installation functions properly under all specified
conditions.
.4
Testing and Balancing report: Commissioning Agent shall coordinate with the
balancing agent(s) for testing and adjusting of flows, operation parameters etc as
specified in the Contract Documents. A balancing report shall be submitted as
part of the close-out documentation.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
Section 01 77 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
.5
Coordinate troubleshooting of those systems or equipment that do not meet the
functional testing criteria and provide all necessary follow-up testing and
documentation.
.6
Submit all completed and functional test documentation for all required
commissioning activities prior to Substantial Performance of the Work.
.7
Plan and execute all Building Operator training as described herein.
.10 When partial occupancy of uncompleted project is required by Owner, coordinate
Owner’s uses, requirements, access, and the like, with Contractor's requirements to
complete the Work.
.11 Demonstration and instruction:
.1
Demonstrate operation of each system to Owner and Consultant. Provide 2
training sessions for automated systems and equipment.
.2
Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of
equipment and systems, using operation and maintenance data provided as the
basis for instructions. Arrange and coordinate instruction of Owner’s staff in
care, maintenance and operation of building systems and finishes
.3
Contractor, manufacturer’s representatives, and responsible personnel from
Subcontractors whose work is being demonstrated shall be present at these
demonstrations.
.4
Instruct Owner’s representative on use of software required for operation and
maintenance of building systems and provide a toll-free telephone number or
website address for further assistance to the Owner.
.5
Contractor is to demonstrate functionality of all access hatches and removable
panels (specified products or constructed elements) to the Consultant and Owner
prior to completion of the Work.
.6
Prepare and insert additional data in the operation and maintenance data
manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during
demonstration or instruction.
.7
Demonstration and instruction report:
Submit a written report of such
demonstration, instruction, and commissioning to the Consultant as part of the
contract closeout submittals described earlier in this section. Report shall include
time and date of each demonstration, instruction, and commissioning activity,
complete with a list of persons present.
.8
Training sessions to be video recorded by the Contractor and submitted on DVD
format as part of the contract closeout submittals described earlier in this section.
.12 Correct deficiencies and defects identified during demonstration, instruction, or
commissioning.
.13 Attend 'end-of-work' testing and break-in or start-up demonstration.
1.5
.1
Substantial Performance of the Work
Deficiency review:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
.2
.3
Section 01 77 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
.1
Neither Owner nor Consultant will be responsible for preparation or issuance of
extensive lists of deficiencies. Contractor assumes prime responsibility for
ensuring that items shown and described in the Contract Documents are
complete. Any reviews to approve the certificate of Substantial Performance of
the Work will be immediately cancelled if it becomes obvious to the Consultant
that extensive deficiencies are outstanding.
.2
The Contractor shall conduct an inspection of the Work to identify deficiencies
and defects, which shall be repaired. When the Contractor considers that the
Work is substantially performed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Consultant a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected and apply
for a review of the Work by the Consultant to determine if Substantial
Performance of the Work has been achieved.
.3
The Contractor’s request described above shall include a statement by
Contractor that the Work to be reviewed by Consultant for deficiencies is, to the
best of the Contractor’s knowledge, in compliance with Contract Documents,
reviewed shop drawings, and samples, and that deficiencies and defects
previously noted by Consultant have been repaired.
.4
No later than 10 Working Days after the receipt of the Contractor’s request
described above, but contingent upon the prior receipt, by the Consultant, of the
closeout submittals in the manner and form specified in this section, the
Consultant and the Contractor will review the Work to identify any defects or
deficiencies. If necessary, the Contractor shall tabulate a list of deficiencies to be
corrected prior to Substantial Performance of the Work being certified by the
Consultant. During review, the Consultant and the Contractor will decide which
deficiencies or defects must be rectified before Substantial Performance of the
Work can be certified, and which defects are to be treated as warranty items.
.5
Provide a schedule of planned deficiency review having regard to the foregoing.
Certification of Substantial Performance of the Work:
.1
When the Consultant considers that the deficiencies and defects have been
completed and that it appears that the requirements of the Contract Documents
have been substantially performed, the Consultant shall issue a certificate of
Substantial Performance of the Work to the Contractor, stating the date of
Substantial Performance of the Work.
.2
The certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work shall be prepared and
issued in accordance with the Construction Lien Act.
Final Inspection for completion of the Contract:
.1
Deficiencies and defects shall be made good before the Contractor submits a
written request for final review of the Work and before the Contract is considered
complete.
.2
When Contractor is satisfied that the Work is complete, and after the Contractor
has reviewed the Work to verify its completion in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit a written
request for a final review by the Consultant, who in turn will notify the Owner.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Contract Closeout Procedures and Submittals
1.6
Section 01 77 00
Page 9
March 22, 2016
.3
If there are any deficiencies identified as a result of this review, they shall be
listed by the Consultant and submitted to the Contractor. This list shall be
recognized as the final deficiency list for purposes of acceptance of the Work
under the Contract.
.4
Such deficiencies shall be corrected by a date mutually agreed upon between
Consultant and the Contractor, unless a specific date is required by Contract,
and a further review by the Consultant shall be called for by the Contractor
following his own review to take place within 7 days from date of request.
.5
Contractor shall thereafter submit invoice for final payment.
.6
Money shall be withheld for deficiency work and will be released only when all
deficiencies have been completed. No partial payment to be recognized until all
work is completed.
Warranty Period
.1
Provide on-going review and attendance to building call-back, maintenance and repair
problems during the warranty periods.
.2
At the beginning of the 12th month after Substantial Performance of the Work, the
Owner, Contractor and Consultant, along with key Subcontractors as designated, shall
carry out a complete review of building and its systems to determine which deficiencies
are to be rectified under the warranty. Contractor shall be responsible for timely written
notification of Owner, and Consultant prior to such end of warranty period inspection and
any delay in such notification shall extend such warranty period until proper notification
is received by Owner, and Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Extended Warranties
Section 01 78 36
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Extended Warranties
Warranties shall be in accordance with General Condition GC 12.3, as amended by
Section 00 73 00, and as follows:
.1
Where specifically identified in the Contract Documents, extended warranties
shall
be
furnished
by
individual
manufacturer
for
particular
product/system/assembly
or
by
Subcontractor
for
a
particular
product/system/assembly/section of the Specifications.
.2
Extended warranties shall include for proper performance of the portion of the
Work as defined by the scope of the applicable specification section to the extent
that the design and Contract Documents permit such performance.
.3
Extended warranties shall be provided by Subcontractor unless warranty is
specified to be provided by product manufacturer.
.4
The Owner shall promptly give the warrantor notice in writing of observed defects
and deficiencies which occur during the warranty period.
.5
Extended warranties shall commence at date of Substantial Performance of the
Work.
.6
Extended warranties specified shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,
other warranties required by the Contract Documents.
Manufacturer's
disclaimers and limitations on product warranty do not relieve Contractor of
obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
.7
Submit extended warranty on warrantor’s standard form specifically endorsed by
the warrantor to the Owner and shall include the following information:
.1 Name and address of Project.
.2 Warranty commencement date (date of Substantial Performance of the
Work).
.3 Warranty period.
.4 Specific warranty terms as required in applicable portion of Contract
Documents.
.5 Name and title of authorized signing officer and seal of warrantor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not applicable.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Selective Demolition
Section 02 41 16
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Demolition and removal of selected non-structural portions of building.
.2
Removal of surplus materials from the Place of the Work.
.3
Related mechanical and electrical work and demolition requirements are covered
under Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28 respectively.
Administrative Requirements
Pre-demolition meeting:
.1
Schedule a pre-demolition meeting following the procedures specified for preinstallation meetings in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.2
Review existing conditions at the Place of the Work thoroughly to establish full
extent of items to be removed, including footings, foundations, slabs, toppings,
secondary floor finishes, and structures and items to remain. Commencement of
demolition work will be considered to be acceptance of existing conditions at the
Place of the Work and removal of such items.
.3
Examine adjacent properties to determine extent of protection required.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Demolition report:
.1
Prior to commencement of the work of this section at the Place of the Work,
prepare and submit to the municipal building department having jurisdiction over
the Place of the Work a report on the proposed demolition methods and
procedures for the removal of indicated structures for the safe retention of
structures to remain.
.2
Report shall be prepared under the supervision, and bear the seal and signature,
of a professional engineer licensed to practice engineering in the Place of the
Work, experienced in this type of engineering, and in accordance with Section
01 33 00.
.3
Submit 3 copies of the demolition report to the Consultant for record purposes
only: Consultant shall neither review nor accept any liability for the contents of
the report.
.4
Without limiting the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, the demolition
report shall include:
.1 Drawings, diagrams and details showing sequence of demolition work and
supporting structures.
.2 Description, in detail, of the methods and procedures for working at the base
of existing buildings to remain.
.3 Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Selective Demolition
Section 02 41 16
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.1 Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting
and ending dates for each activity.
.2 Interruption of utility services.
.3 Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
.4 Location of temporary street barricades, building interior partitions and
means of egress.
.4 Written description of methods for removal and temporary bracing of
structural members or supporting construction.
.3
If a demolition permit is required by the municipal building department having jurisdiction
at the Place of the Work, it is a requirement of this Contract that the Contractor obtain
the demolition permit such that the engineer for the Contractor responsible for the
preparation of the demolition report becomes the Engineer of Record for the demolition
work. It is understood that this may require preparation and submission of certain
reports, possibly including drawings, as part of the municipal permit process prior to,
during, and upon completion of the demolition work. Copies of the permit with the name
of the Engineer of Record shall be submitted and received by the Consultant prior to the
commencement of demolition.
.1
.4
1.4
.1
If an application has been made, by or on behalf of the Owner, to the building
department having jurisdiction at the Place of the Work, it is a requirement of this
Contract that the Contractor obtain an amendment to this application/permit such
that the engineer for the Contractor responsible for the preparation of the
demolition report becomes the Engineer of Record for the demolition work. It is
understood that this may require preparation and submission of certain reports,
possibly including drawings, as part of the municipal permit process prior to,
during, and upon completion of the demolition work. Copies of the permit with the
name of the Engineer of Record shall be submitted and received by the
Consultant prior to the commencement of demolition.
Existing conditions documentation:
.1
Document existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements,
including pre-existing damage to finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as
damage caused by demolition operations.
.2
Comply with Section 01 32 33.
.3
Submit existing conditions documentation before demolition work begins.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors: the work of this section shall be executed by a
Subcontractor having a minimum of 5 years specialized demolition experience
and able to deploy adequate equipment and skilled personnel to complete work
expediently in an efficient and orderly manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Selective Demolition
Section 02 41 16
Page 3
March 22, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
.2
Observe existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine
extent of selective demolition required.
.3
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Consultant.
.4
Survey of existing conditions: Record existing conditions by use of photographs in
accordance with Section 01 32 33.
3.2
.1
3.3
.1
Utility Services and Mechanical / Electrical Systems
Refer to Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28 respectively.
Selective Demolition - General
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction, and as otherwise indicated. Use methods required to complete the work
within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
.1
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before
disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
.2
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or
grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent
surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
.3
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
.4
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents
of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
.5
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
.6
Remove decayed, infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
.7
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as
not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
.8
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
.2
Dispose of demolished materials from Project site except where noted otherwise and in
accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Remove and transport debris in a
manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
.3
Do not sell demolished material at the Place of the Work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Selective Demolition
.4
3.4
Section 02 41 16
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Clean existing surfaces specified to receive new applied finishes to assure proper
adherence.
Selective Demolition - Procedures for Specific Materials
.1
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between
saw cuts.
.2
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to
remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
.3
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up
and remove.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Floor Finishing
Section 03 35 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Concrete floor finishing; for alternative price 3 and locations indicated:
.1 Penetrating liquid concrete floor treatment, chemically reactive, standard
stay-in-place formula.
.2 Hardened concrete floor enhancer and sealer.
1.2
.1
1.3
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
1.4
.1
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
.2
.1
Execute the work of this section only by a Subcontractor who has adequate
equipment and skilled workers to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have
been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified.
Mock-ups:
.1
1.5
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Provide 1525 mm x 1525 mm (5’ x 5’) mock-up at the Place of the Work as part
of final installation for approval, location to be directed by Consultant. Mock-up
will be used by Consultant to determine which floor finish will be used in the
Work.
Field Conditions
Perform work only when environmental conditions are as specified in Section 03 30 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Materials
Penetrating liquid concrete floor treatment, chemically reactive, standard stay-in-place
formula:
.1
Water-based, chemically reactive liquid densifier and chemical hardening
compound: one-component liquid sodium or lithium silicate surface hardener.
Odourless, colourless, biodegradable, VOC compliant and reacts chemically to
produce a hard, dust-free finish.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 W.R. Meadows Inc. ‘Liqui-Hard Ultra’.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Floor Finishing
Section 03 35 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Hardened concrete floor enhancer and sealer:
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 W.R. Meadows Inc. ‘Bellatrix Hardened Concrete Floor Enhancer’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
3.2
General
Before commencing work of this section, ensure that surfaces are acceptable to receive
and maintain concrete finishing, and that specified installation will be achieved.
Penetrating Liquid Concrete Floor Treatment; Chemically Reactive
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Do not apply liquid hardening compound until after minimum of 30 days of concrete
curing.
.3
Do not allow excess formula or activation formula to set and discolour concrete surface.
3.3
Hardened Concrete Floor Enhancer and Sealer
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Apply a minimum of two uniform coats. Consecutive coats to be applied in perpendicular
directions in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.4
.1
3.5
.1
3.6
.1
Patching and Refinishing
Before completion of the Work, patch and refinish defective surfaces to match
surrounding areas with no discernible variation in appearance.
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
Protection
Protect finished concrete floor areas from abrasion traffic, and from damage caused by
spillage of oil or other deleterious materials.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 03 35 03
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Polished Concrete
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Polished concrete finish system (base bid):
.1 Surface preparation and grinding.
.2 Apply hardener and polish concrete to specified finish.
.3 Edge and corner grinding/polishing with hand tools for polished concrete
finish at perimeter of structural elements and at concrete curbs.
1.2
.1
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19 and in
accordance with Concrete Floor Contractors Association Technical Bulletin entitled
“Preconstruction Meetings”.
.1
1.3
Independent inspection and testing company shall attend the pre-installation
meeting.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
.4
1.4
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit 300 x 300 mm (12” x 12”) samples of each specified material and finish,
in each specified colour to show successive applications of each coat.
Concrete floor surface tolerance testing; for existing slabs:
.1
Conduct and submit report of existing surface floor tolerances.
.2
Measure F-number finish tolerance requirements in accordance with CAN/CSA
A23.1/A23.2 or by other method approved by the Consultant and submit log
records of measurements.
.3
Testing is to be done to evaluate and determine the conditions and concrete floor
surface tolerances prior to the installation of polished concrete floor finish.
.4
Perform tests and proceed with flooring installations only after documented tests
have been performed and reports submitted in writing and approved by the
Consultant.
.5
Test results will be used to confirm whether or not the aggregate exposure and
polish level specified in paragraph 2.1.2 of this section are suitable for the
existing floor surface.
Closeout Submittals
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 03 35 03
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Polished Concrete
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
.1
Submit manufacturer’s maintenance instructions for incorporation into the
operation and maintenance manuals.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Execute the work of this section only by Subcontractor who is a member in good
standing of the Concrete Floor Contractors Association of Ontario.
.2
Provide the work of this section, executed by competent installers with minimum
5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified
and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
.1 Submit applicator's certification showing applicator's good standing with
Product manufacturer.
.2
Mock-ups:
.1
1.6
.1
1.7
Provide 1525 mm x 1525 mm (5’ x 5’) mock-up at the Place of the Work as part
of final installation for approval, location to be directed by Consultant. Mock-up
will be used by Consultant to determine which floor finish will be used in the
Work.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Store materials at the Place of the Work in an area specifically set aside for purpose that
is locked, ventilated, and maintained at temperatures of between 16°C and 32°C and in
accordance with finish system manufacturer’s written requirements.
Field Conditions
.1
Comply with polished concrete manufacturer’s written instructions for substrate
temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and
other conditions affecting work of this section.
.2
Provide adequate ventilation during installation.
.3
Advise other trades of fixtures and fittings not to be installed until floor finish materials
are cured.
.4
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this section. If necessary,
mask and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, and the like, by suitable
means.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Polished Concrete
Source quality control:
.1
.2
Source concrete finishing
manufacturer.
components
and materials
are from
single
Provide polished concrete system as specified herein and conforming to the following
requirements:
.1
Finish: Natural finish.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 03 35 03
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Polished Concrete
.2
Aggregate exposure; depth of grind:
.1 Fine aggregate exposure: CFCA Class B.
.3
Polish level:
.1 Level 2; semi-gloss finish.
2.2
Polished Concrete Floor Finish Products
.1
Acceptable polishing systems:
.1 L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. ‘FGS
Floor System’.
PermaShine Polished Concrete
.2 Retroplate Canada ‘Retroplate’.
.3 W.R. Meadows ‘Induroshine’.
.2
Acceptable hardening Products:
.1 L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. ‘FGS Hardener Plus’.
.2 Retroplate Canada ‘Retro-Plate 99’.
.3 W.R. Meadows ‘Liqui-hard’.
.3
Performance criteria; hardener treated polished 24 MPa concrete:
.1 Abrasion resistance: ASTM C779/C779M-12, Procedure A, 30 minutes:
0.2 mm (0.008").
.2 Coefficient of friction: ASTM C1028-07e1 - all levels of finish to exceed OSHA
and ADA recommendations, NFSI certified as High Traction.
.3 Absorption: 1.1 ml, 24 hour
testing Method No. II.4.
.2
cumulative absorption per Rilem absorption
Oil repellent sealer: Ready to use, silane, siloxane and fluoropolymers blended water
based solution sealer, quick drying, low-odor, oil and water repellent, VOC compliant
and compatible with chemically hardened floors.
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1 L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
.2 Retroplate Canada.
.3 W.R. Meadows.
.3
Water: Clean, free oil, soluble salts or other deleterious substances.
.4
Cleaning solution: Proprietary, mild, highly concentrated liquid concrete cleaner and
conditioner containing wetting and emulsifying agents; biodegradable, environmentally
safe and certified High Traction by National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI).
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1 L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
.2 Retroplate Canada.
.3 W.R. Meadows.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 03 35 03
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Polished Concrete
.5
Stain guard sealer: Ready to use, is a low odour, VOC compliant, topical sealer
consisting of low molecular emulsified cross-linking, coupling polymers that effectively
protect concrete and other natural stone floor surfaces from the damaging effects of
staining, defacing and deterioration due to contaminant penetration.
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1 L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
.2 Retroplate Canada.
.3 W.R. Meadows.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Verify that specified environmental conditions are ensured before commencing the work
of this section.
.2
Examine surfaces to receive finish system. Concrete surfaces shall be smooth, sound,
dry, and free from conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality
of the work of this section. Test surfaces for moisture content using manufacturer’s
recommended test procedure to ensure that they are suitable for application, and fully
cured.
.3
Ensure that surfaces have been Provided as specified in the work of other sections, that
they will not adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of the work of this
section, and that they can be put into acceptable condition by means of preparation
specified in this section.
.4
Concrete slabs shall have sound surface free of dust, chemicals, grease, oil, laitance
and curing agents, and cured to requirements of manufacturer of hardening agent.
.5
Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces and conditions. Defective
work resulting from application to unsatisfactory surfaces will be considered the
responsibility of those performing the work of this section.
.6
If any substrate deficiency is apparent, notify Contractor in writing prior to commencing
work.
.7
Site verification of conditions:
.1
.8
Verify concrete slab performance requirements:
.1
3.2
Verify that concrete substrate conditions, which have been previously installed
under other sections or contracts, are acceptable for product installation in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of concrete
finishing materials.
Test floor flatness as specified in paragraph 1.3.4.
Preparation
.1
After acceptance of surfaces, prepare surfaces as required by the polished concrete
manufacturer.
.2
Cover or mask surfaces adjacent to those receiving finish system to protect work of
others and property from damage and soil.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 03 35 03
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Polished Concrete
.3
3.3
Grinding and hardening at vertical barriers, perimeter of structural elements and at
concrete curbs in accordance with approved mock-up.
Installation
.1
Apply polished concrete finish system in accordance with polished concrete
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Grind, polish and harden concrete surfaces to match accepted samples and mock-ups.
Match approved samples in sheen, colour and texture.
.3
Hardening and polishing of concrete surfaces:
.4
3.4
.1
Application shall not take place until after at least 30 days of placement of
concrete.
.2
Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to installation of equipment or
furnishings, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application
.3
Applicable procedures must be followed as recommended by the Product
manufacturer and as required to match approved test sample.
.4
Achieve increased impermeability, hardening, dust-proofing, and abrasion
resistance of the surface while imparting a sheen.
.5
Apply special concrete hardener finish in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
Erect barriers to prevent the entry and presence of personnel not performing work of this
section during application of hardener/sealer, and for 12 hours following completion of
application.
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Manufacturer shall provide field review in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
3.5
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Touch up and refinish minor defective work. Refinish entire coated surface areas where
finish is damaged or otherwise unacceptable.
.2
Wash polished concrete surfaces with a neutral cleaner, rinse with clean water and allow
to dry.
.3
Protect polished concrete from staining and damage.
.4
Final cleaning shall be in accordance with section 01 77 00.
3.6
.1
Protection
Protect concrete in accordance with Section 01 50 00.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Cementitious Floor Resurfacing
Section 03 54 14
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Cementitious floor resurfacing with polished finish (alternative price 1):
.1 Self leveling concrete topping system.
.2 Liquid densifier.
.3 Polishing to specified finish.
.4 Concrete sealer.
.5 Transition trim.
.2
Cementitious floor resurfacing with sealer (alternative price 2):
.1 Self leveling concrete topping system.
.2 Concrete sealer.
.3 Transition trim.
1.2
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Test and evaluation reports:
.1
.4
.1
Submit floor resurfacing manufacturer's written recommended guidelines with
respect to application of cementitious flooring material, ventilation and
environmental requirements.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
.2
Submit copies of compressive strength testing as prepared by floor resurfacing
manufacturer.
Manufacturers’ instructions:
.1
1.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Installers / applicators / erectors: Installation of flooring shall be by an applicator
authorized by the flooring manufacturer using flooring manufacturer's approved
mixing and pumping equipment.
Mock-ups:
.1
Selection mock-up:
.1 Provide one (1) each, 915 mm x 915 mm (36” x 36”) mock-up of both the
cementitious floor resurfacing with sealer (alternative price 2) and the
cementitious floor resurfacing with polish finish (alternative price 1).
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Cementitious Floor Resurfacing
Section 03 54 14
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.2 Selection mock-ups to be placed on plywood substrate or similar sound
substrate and made available at the place of Work for review by the
Consultant and Owner no later than 20 Working Days after Contract Award
.3 Selection mock-ups will be used by the Consultant and Owner to determine
which floor finish will be used in the work.
.2
Verification mock-up:
.1 Provide 3050 mm x 3050 mm (10’ x 10’) mock-up of selected floor finish at
the Place of the Work as part of final installation for approval, location to be
directed by Consultant.
1.4
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
If materials are stored on site they shall be stored in an area specifically set aside for
purpose that is locked, ventilated, and maintained at minimum temperature of 10 °C.
.2
Ensure that health and fire regulations are complied with in storage area, and during
handling and application.
1.5
Field Conditions
.1
Ensure substrate is sound, dry, free of dust, dirt, paint, grease, oil or other foreign
substances.
.2
Ensure that voids which would allow the mix to run through the substrate are filled.
.3
Provide ventilation required during installation.
.4
Keep other trades from area to be poured during day of pour. Keep heavy work off of
floor for at least twenty four (24) to forty eight (48) hours following pour, in accordance
with manufacturer's directions.
.5
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this section. If necessary,
mask and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, etc. by suitable means.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Self Levelling Cementitious Flooring
Acceptable Products:
.1
.2
Mapei 'Ultratop’.
System components:
.1
Self levelling flooring.
.2
Primer: as recommended by cementitious flooring material manufacturer.
.3
Silicate lithium base densifier (alternative price 1): as recommended by
cementitious flooring material manufacturer
.4
Concrete sealer; acceptable Products:
.1 Mapei ‘Mapecrete Protector FF’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.3
Polish specification (alternative price 1):
.1
Finish: Natural finish.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Cementitious Floor Resurfacing
.2
.4
Polish level: Level 2; semi-gloss finish.
Transition trim: Schluter ‘RENO-RAMP/-K’.
.1
.5
Section 03 54 14
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Material: aluminum.
Polyethylene sheet; bond break at perimeter and internal walls:
.1
CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Type 1, 0.15 mm (6 mil) thick, flame spread rating of
less than 150 to CAN/ULC S102.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Verify that specified environmental conditions are ensured before commencing Work.
.2
Examine surfaces to receive flooring. They shall be smooth, sound, dry, and free from
conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work.
.3
Ensure that surfaces to receive flooring are sound, that they will not adversely affect
execution, permanence, or quality of work, and that they can be put into acceptable
condition by means of preparation specified in this section.
.4
Defective work resulting from application to unsatisfactory surfaces will be considered
the responsibility of those performing the work of this section.
3.2
Preparation
.1
Clean and prepare surfaces as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
.2
Prepare concrete surfaces by mechanical method of steel shotblast, sandblast, or other
method approved by flooring manufacturer in accordance with International Concrete
Repair Institute (ICRI) recommendations to achieve a CSP 3 profile. Thoroughly vacuum
clean substrate upon completion of blast operation. Substrate to be approved in writing
by cementitious flooring manufacturer prior to application of flooring material.
.3
Cover or mask surfaces adjacent to those receiving flooring to protect work of others and
property from damage and soil.
3.3
Installation (Alternative Price 1)
.1
Apply cementitious flooring material in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
.2
Apply flooring to provide level and smooth finished surface.
.3
Grind floor and apply liquid densifier, as directed by manufacturer.
.4
Polish floor in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
.5
Apply 2 coats of sealer finish to concrete topping in accordance with manufacturer's
written instruction.
3.4
.1
Installation – Transition Trim
Install transition strips between cementitious topping and adjacent floor finishes, in
maximum lengths.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Cementitious Floor Resurfacing
3.5
Section 03 54 14
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Installation (Alternative Price 2)
.1
Apply cementitious flooring material in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
.2
Apply flooring to provide level and smooth finished surface.
.3
Apply 4 coats of sealer finish to concrete topping in two steps, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instruction. Burnish surface between steps, as directed by
manufacturer.
3.6
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Testing:
.3
3.7
.1
Field samples: At least one set of 3 molded cube samples shall be taken from
each day's pour during application. Cubes shall be tested as recommended by
topping manufacturer in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M-13e1.
.2
Submit test results to Consultant.
Manufacturer shall provide field review in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Touch up and refinish minor defective Work. Refinish entire coated surface areas where
finish is damaged or otherwise unacceptable.
.2
Remove promptly as Work progresses spilled or spattered concrete materials from
surfaces of Work performed under other Sections. Clean floors on completion of Work.
Do not mar surfaces while removing.
.3
Leave storage and mixing areas in same condition as equivalent spaces in project.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
Section 04 27 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
Concrete unit masonry assemblies.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings for masonry unit wall assemblies indicating:
.1 Proposed locations of movement (control) joints.
.2 Types of masonry units, grade, typical dimensions, special shapes and
shape dimensions.
.3 Layout/coursing for each type of masonry unit.
.4
.5
1.3
.1
Samples:
.1
2 of each type of concrete masonry unit specified.
.2
1 of each type of masonry accessory specified
.3
1 of each type of masonry reinforcement proposed for use.
Test and evaluation reports: Submit test results confirming compliance of aggregates
with CAN/CSA A179-04.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
1.4
Installers / applicators / erectors: Provide work of this section, executed by
competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in application of Products,
systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of Product
manufacturers.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Deliver materials to the Place of the Work in dry condition.
.2
Keep materials dry until use.
.3
Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of
plank or timber skids.
.4
Handle and store cementitious materials protected against moisture.
.5
Handle and store mortar materials to prevent contamination by foreign materials, and
damage by freezing or excessively high temperature.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
Section 04 27 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Mortar Materials
.1
Mortar and grout: Comply with CAN/CSA A179-04.
.2
Portland cement: to CSA A3001-08, Type 10/ASTM C150/C150M-15. For exposed
mortar, maintain uniformity of cement manufacturer and batch for colour uniformity.
.3
Hydrated lime: to ASTM C207-06(2011), Type S.
.4
Sand: to CAN/CSA A179-04.
.5
Maintain uniformity of mortar material manufacturers, mortar materials and source of
aggregate throughout the Work.
.6
Mortar types:
.1
Foundation walls and other exterior masonry at or below grade: Type S.
.2
Interior masonry:
.1 Loadbearing: Type S.
.2 Non-loadbearing: Type N.
.3
2.2
.1
Mortar colour: grey.
Grout
Grout following masonry components:
.1
Lintels and bond beams.
.2
Grouted walls and piers.
.2
Place and grout reinforcing and bearing in accordance with CAN/CSA A371-04 and
structural drawings. Use concrete of minimum 20 MPa compressive strength unless
otherwise indicated.
.3
Grout for block cores: to CAN/CSA A179-04.
2.3
Reinforcing and Connectors
.1
Conform to minimum requirements of CAN/CSA A370-15 unless otherwise indicated,
and to requirements for seismic reinforcement of partition walls as indicated on the
drawings.
.2
Corrosion protection; metal materials: in accordance with building code and CAN/CSA
A370-15:
.1
.3
Interior walls: Use mill galvanized.
Joint reinforcement:
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1 Blok-Lok.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Interior wall assemblies: 9 gauge mill galvanized wire ladder reinforcement.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
2.4
.1
Section 04 27 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Masonry Accessories
Deflection space filler (non-fire rated walls):
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 Johns Manville ‘MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts’.
.2 Roxul ‘AFB’.
.3 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Deflection space filler (fire rated walls): in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
.3
Movement (control) joint filler; concrete block wythes: PVC, designed to fit into sash
grooves
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 Blok-Lok ‘VS Series’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.4
Slip-sheet flashing membrane (for lintel bearing locations):
.1
Minimum 0.5 mm (0.020”) thick, PVC membrane, low temperature flexible to
40°C below zero.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 Blok-Lok ‘Flex-Flash’.
.2 Lexcor F20.
.3 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.5
Concrete Masonry Units
.1
Comply with CAN/CSA A165 SERIES-04.
.2
Include shapes, such as end, bond, sash groove, ledge and lintel units, required to
complete the Work, with uniform appearance.
.3
.1
Provide open end blocks where vertical reinforcing occurs in walls.
.2
Provide knock-out blocks where horizontal reinforcing bars occur in walls.
.3
Provide bullnose units at interior partition door openings and where indicated.
.4
Solid concrete masonry units may be used where grouted block is indicated,
whenever reinforcing is not indicated, in lieu of grouted solid installation method.
.5
Size: metric.
Normal weight units:
.1
Hollow units: H/15/A/M, H/20/A/M and H/25/A/M.
.2
Semi-solid units: SS/15/A/M, SS/20/A/M and SS/25/A/M.
.3
Full solid units: SF/15/A/M, SF/20/A/M and SF/25/A/M.
.4
Colour: grey.
.5
Profiles: as indicated.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
Section 04 27 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
.1
Prior to commencing masonry work, verify that conditions at the Place of the Work will
allow construction of masonry within required limitations for wall heights, wall
thicknesses, openings, bond, anchorage, lateral support, and compressive strengths of
masonry units and mortars.
.2
Provide protection where required at mixing areas to prevent damage attributed to
mortar materials.
3.2
Workmanship
.1
Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in proper alignment. Lay
masonry to tolerances specified in CAN/CSA A371-04.
.2
Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond
above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.
.3
Do masonry mortar and grout work in accordance with CAN/CSA A179-04 except where
specified otherwise.
.4
Do masonry work in accordance with CSA S304.1-04, CAN/CSA A370-15 and
CAN/CSA A371-04 except where specified otherwise.
3.3
Measurement and Mixing
.1
Mix mortars as specified in CAN/CSA A179-04. Use only dry aggregate. Test for bulking
to determine accurate proportioning.
.2
Fine grout: mix one part Portland cement and three parts sand with water.
.3
Coarse grout: ready mixed high slump pea gravel concrete.
.4
Adjust water in mortar mix to suit absorption rates of masonry units.
3.4
Laying Masonry Units
.1
Lay concrete masonry units in half running bond unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Units shall be cut only upon acceptance of Consultant. Walls are to be laid-up with full
size masonry units.
.3
Where masonry surfaces serve as substrate for thin-set tile and direct applied coatings,
build to tolerance of 1:500 (1/8" in any 6'-0") (3 mm in any 1.83 m) under a straight edge.
.4
Remove loose and foreign materials from supporting bed surfaces to ensure bonding.
.5
Stop off horizontal runs of walls by racking back a half unit in each horizontal course. Do
not tooth.
.6
Do not install defective, cracked, and broken masonry units.
.7
Do not install masonry units with face or faces exhibiting chips, blemishes, texture
variation, and other imperfections detracting from appearance when viewed from
distance of 4600 mm (15 ft.).
.8
Do not lay concrete masonry units that will appear smooth or slick where exposed to
view, whether painted or not finished.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
.9
Section 04 27 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Mixing and blending: Mix units from a minimum of 3 pallets to ensure uniform blend of
colour and texture and comply with manufacturer's recommended installation
instructions. Distribute masonry units of varying textures to avoid spotty appearance
over wall surfaces exposed to view. Do not use units which contrast too greatly with
overall range.
.10 Maintain bracing of walls and piers continuously during construction until structure
provides support.
.11 Locate bearings and piers as indicated. Provide solid masonry units at bearings. Grout
under bearing plates installed on masonry with non-shrink grout.
.12 Extend walls and partitions to deck, slab or structural members, as applicable, except
where otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. Incorporate both lateral support and
deflection space at termination of walls as required by this section.
.13 Lay masonry level, true to line, square, plumb, and as indicated. Lay masonry courses in
vertical alignment to ensure vertical joints align for full height of masonry and full height
of building face.
.14 Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of
joints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
.15 Fully bond intersections, and external corners.
.16 Do not adjust masonry units after laying. Where resetting of masonry is required,
remove, clean units and reset in new mortar.
.17 Extend masonry to construction above, except where otherwise indicated. Cut and fill
around obstructions.
.18 Build chases, do not cut them.
.19 Lay hollow concrete masonry units so that shell rest and align.
.20 Exposed cuts shall be made clean and true with a suitable masonry saw.
.21 Exposed corners at door opening sin interior partitions shall utilise units with bullnose
corners.
3.5
Jointing
.1
Form tooled mortar joints whenever exposed to view, and behind cabinets, fitments, and
wall accessories. Tool when mortar is thumb-print hard by tools having long bearing
surface to avoid uneven depressions. Close cracks and crevices.
.2
Concealed masonry: strike flush joints concealed in walls and joints in walls to receive
plaster, acrylic stucco, tile, insulation, resilient base, or other applied material except
paint or similar thin finish coating. Ensure that no mortar protrudes from joints on wall
surfaces to receive materials and coatings.
.3
Tool with round non-staining pointing tool to provide smooth, compressed, uniformly
concave joints except if specified or shown otherwise.
.4
Joint thickness:
.1
Maintain mortar joint thickness of 10 mm (3/8"), unless otherwise specified or
indicated.
.2
At masonry cut around obstructions: maximum joint size of 13 mm (1/2").
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
Section 04 27 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.5
Make joints of uniform thickness with vertical joints in alignment.
.6
Trowel point joints in unparged masonry in contact with earth.
.7
Form reglets where indicated for metal flashing in masonry.
.8
Remove loose or defective mortar when masonry is removed and replace.
.9
Rake out joints at junctions of masonry with concrete walls and columns, and at
intersection of masonry walls and partitions where joint reinforcement is installed. These
joints will be sealed by Section 07 92 00.
.10 Cut out defective mortar joints and repoint.
3.6
.1
3.7
Joining of Work
Where necessary to temporarily stop horizontal runs of masonry, and in building corners;
.1
Step-back masonry diagonally to lowest course previously placed.
.2
Do not "tooth" new masonry.
.3
Fill in adjacent courses before heights of stepped masonry reach 1220 mm (48").
Cutting
.1
Cut out neatly using a wet diamond blade saw for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and
other recessed or built-in objects.
.2
Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.
3.8
Built-In Work
.1
Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check plumb, location and
alignment frequently, as work progresses.
.2
Coordinate and cooperate in the provisions for setting, anchorage and alignment of builtin work.
.3
Metal door frames:
3.9
.1
Build masonry around metal door frames supplied and set in accordance with the
various parts of the Contract Documents.
.2
Ensure that anchors are secured solidly, and that frames are true and plumb.
.3
Fill back void of frames with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
.4
Protect frame with protective covering and leave no mortar on exposed frame
faces.
Reinforced Masonry
.1
Conform to requirements of CAN/CSA A371-04.
.2
Grouting beneath bearing plates: Completely fill voids beneath steel bases bearing on
masonry with an approved non-shrink grout having a compressive strength at 28 days of
at least 35 MPa. Where grout is exposed to view or weather, use non-ferrous expansion
agents.
.3
Reinforced block lintels:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
Section 04 27 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
.1
Install reinforced block lintels over doorways, other openings and recesses as
indicated.
.2
Support masonry units of reinforced block lintels built in place. Provide a level
platform, true to the proper elevation and of sufficient strength to support the load
without visible deflection. Maintain supports in place for a minimum of 7 days and
for a period sufficient to permit the concrete to cure and gain sufficient strength to
safely support all loads.
.4
Lay masonry units with full mortar coverage on all abutting edges with joints shoved
tight. Where masonry construction is continued above the lintel, place the first course of
masonry units on the lintel in a full mortar bed.
.5
Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated. Make joints in lintels and bond
beams to match adjacent walls.
.6
Reinforce masonry walls as indicated.
.7
Grouted reinforced masonry: Construct masonry to meet indicated requirements.
.8
Place 100% solid block at each jamb under lintels.
3.10
.1
Provision for Movement
Deflection space:
.1
Incorporate deflection space between tops of non-load-bearing walls/partitions
and structure to prevent transference of structural loads to masonry.
.1 Interior masonry partition deflection space: 25 mm (1").
.2
3.11
Coordinate work of this section with installation of lateral supports.
Deflection Space Filler
.1
Non-fire rated walls: Fill deflection space with deflection space filler. Where deflection
space is exposed, tamp filler into deflection space 25 mm (1").
.2
Fire-rated walls: Refer to requirements of Section 07 84 00.
3.12
Loose Steel Lintels
.1
Set and level lintels, centred over opening width, on a slip-sheet membrane, placed over
bed or mortar.
.2
Allow suitable movement joint at ends of lintels for expansion and contraction movement
at exterior lintels.
3.13
.1
3.14
.1
Lateral Supports
In addition to requirements of Contract Documents, Provide horizontal and vertical wall
and partition lateral support anchors in accordance with CAN/CSA A370-15.
Control (Movement) Joints
Provide continuous movement joints maximum 7480 mm (24'-6") on centre, and/or as
indicated.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
Section 04 27 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
.2
Place movement joints at changes in wall direction, changes in building heights, at door
and window locations where necessary and directed, at major changes in thickness of
wall, periodic lengths of continuous wall (7480 mm (24'6") on centre max.) and as
directed by Consultant and as indicated.
.3
Review and coordinate movement joint locations with the Consultant prior to installation
of masonry.
.4
Construct movement joints as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, make movement
joints 19 mm (3/4") wide. Cut masonry reinforcement at control joints.
.5
Stop reinforcing 25 mm (1") short of each side of movement joints unless otherwise
indicated.
3.15
.1
3.16
.1
3.17
.1
3.18
.1
3.19
.1
Horizontal Reinforcing
Joint reinforcement:
.1
Install joint reinforcement in cavity walls, solid walls and partitions.
.2
Place reinforcement continuously in horizontal joints at 400 mm (16") on centre,
beginning with course 400 mm (16") above bearing, unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Do not carry reinforcement through intersections where lateral support anchors
are installed, at intersections of walls and partitions with solid piers and at block
movement joints.
Bolts and Anchors
Embed bolts and anchors solidly in mortar or grout to develop maximum resistance to
design forces.
Structural Reinforcement
Install to indicated requirements.
Temporary Bracing
Provide adequate temporary bracing to masonry walls until floor and roof decks are
installed and can develop adequate diaphragm action to brace walls.
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
.2
Field tests and inspections:
.1
3.20
Source quality control: Perform tests on masonry units to determine compressive
strength as required by jurisdictional authorities in accordance with CAN/CSA
A165 SERIES-04.
Provide mortar for strength testing in accordance with CAN/CSA A179-04 and
Section 01 45 00.
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Protect masonry and adjacent work from damage from cleaning work.
.2
Clean masonry in accordance with masonry manufacturer's printed instructions. Remove
masonry and install new masonry, if masonry is damaged by cleaning work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Concrete Masonry Unit Assemblies
Section 04 27 00
Page 9
March 22, 2016
.3
Test cleaning agent and procedures by cleaning small, inconspicuous sample location
prior to commencement of overall cleaning work. Review cleaning test area with
Consultant and obtain acceptance in writing prior to cleaning remainder of areas
requiring cleaning.
.4
Soak wall with clean water and flush off loose dirt and mortar.
.5
Apply specified cleaning agent in accordance with the manufacturer's direction, working
from top to bottom.
.6
Rinse areas thoroughly with clean water to remove cleaning solutions, dirt, and mortar
residue.
.7
Remove mortar from exposed masonry face immediately and prior to full set to avoid
mortar staining of masonry units. Remove masonry and install new masonry, if mortar
staining cannot be removed without damaging masonry work.
.8
Remove efflorescence and mortar deposits from surfaces to receive coatings and
surfaces which are exposed to view. Remove efflorescence and mortar deposits from
surfaces to receive coatings or surfaces which are exposed to view, occurring within a
time period of 1 year after date of Substantial Performance of the Work
.9
Use proprietary PH-neutral cleaning solution with water as approved by manufacturer of
masonry units in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Use clean water to
remove excess cleaning solution.
.10 Remove mortar droppings from flashings and other materials immediately to prevent
damage and discolouration.
3.21
Protection
.1
Protect other materials and finishes from contamination by mortar droppings.
.2
Provide temporary bracing of masonry work during and after erection until permanent
lateral support is in place.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 05 50 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Metal Fabrications
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Work of this section includes miscellaneous metal fabrications as indicated on
the drawings, including but not limited to:
.1 Steel support framing for glazed/solid partition at north wall; primed.
.1 Painting in accordance with Section 09 91 00.
.2 Steel angle framing and metal deck for infill floor structure at Washroom 116.
.3 Prime painted HSS posts and channels concealed in partitions.
.4 Threaded rods, angles and other steel elements for support of blackened
steel beam system and which are not visible in the finished condition;
painted.
.5 Galvanized steel framing at overhead door openings.
.6 Perforated steel closure panels.
.2
Section excludes:
.1
1.2
Blackened steel architectural fabrications: in accordance with Section 05 50 10.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit list of fabrications to be Provided as part of the work of this section.
.3
Product data sheets:
.1
.4
1.3
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit engineered shop drawings.
.2
Include plans, sections and large scale details, and shall indicate components
and methods of assembly, materials and their characteristics, fastenings, metal
finishes, welds, and their structural characteristics relative to their purpose, and
other fabrication information required.
.3
Indicate proposed site connections and methods.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors: work of this section shall be executed only by a
Subcontractor who has adequate plant, equipment, and skilled tradespersons to
perform work expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for
satisfactory installations similar to that required in the Work during a period of at
least the immediate past 5 years.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 05 50 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Metal Fabrications
.2
1.4
Requirements of regulatory agencies: the work of this section that functions to resist
forces imposed by dead and live loads shall conform to requirements of jurisdictional
authorities.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Label, tag or otherwise mark metal fabrications supplied for installation by other sections
to indicate its function, location in building and shop drawing designation.
.2
Protect work from damage during delivery, storage and handling.
.3
Deliver work to location at the Place of the Work designated by Contractor and to meet
requirements of construction schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Design, fabricate, and install work of this section in accordance with the building code
and requirements of all other governing authorities.
.2
Welding:
.1
.3
Weld structural components in steel to conform to requirements of CSA W59-13,
and by a fabricator fully certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to conditions
of CSA W47.1-09(R2014) and CSA W55.3-08 (R2013) as applicable.
Design assemblies and connections to withstand own dead load, live loads, superimposed dead loads, and fabrication forces, without permanent distortions or
deformation, to maximum allowable deflection of L/360, within the following construction
tolerances:
.1
Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines:
.1 3.2 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10 ft)
.2
Maximum variation from level:
.1 3.2 mm (1/8") in 9 m (30 ft).
.3
Maximum variation from straight:
.1 3.2 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10 ft) under a 3 m (10 ft) straight edge.
.4
Maximum variation from angle indicated:
.1 10 seconds.
.5
2.2
.1
Tolerances shall be non-cumulative.
Materials
General:
.1
Unless detailed or specified otherwise, standard Products will be acceptable if
construction details and installation meet intent of the Contract Documents.
.2
Include materials, Products, accessories, and supplementary parts necessary to
complete assembly and installation of work of this section.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 05 50 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Metal Fabrications
.2
.3
Incorporate only metals that are free from defects that are visible, or that impair
strength or durability. Install only new metals of best quality, and free from rust or
waves and buckles, and that are clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles.
.4
The engineer responsible for the production of the shop drawings is responsible
for structural design, member sizes, arrangement, connections and anchoring of
work of this section. Coordinate and maintain materials, dimensions, layout and
appearance to meet intent of the Contract Documents.
Metals:
.1
Steel, structural shapes, plate, bars: hot-rolled, CSA G40.21-04, Grade 300W.
.2
Steel, hollow structural sections: hot-formed, seamless, CSA G40.21-04, Grade
350W, Class H.
.3
Steel (mild), sheet and strip, hot rolled, ASTM A1011/A1011M-10.
.4
Steel, sheet: cold rolled, stretcher levelled, fully pickled, ASTM A1008/A1008M11, Grade CS Type A exposed, matte finish, dry, unless otherwise indicated.
.5
Steel pipe: ASTM A53 / A53M - 10, Type E or S, Grade A or B, standard weight,
Schedule 40 seamless black or AISI MT 1010/1015, or acceptable alternative.
.6
Perforated metal panels:
.1 Fabricate from 20 gauge cold rolled, stretcher levelled steel sheet.
.2 Panel size: as indicated on drawings.
.3 Openness: 51%.
.4 Holes: round, 9.53 mm (3/8") diameter.
.5 Pattern: spaced 12.7 mm (1/2") staggered centres.
.6 Finish: shop painted, power paint, white as selected by Consultant.
2.3
.1
.2
Accessories
Fasteners:
.1
Fasteners: Exposed fasteners to match the material surface on which they occur.
.2
Fasteners for stainless steel to be stainless steel 300 Series or stainless steel
400 Series.
.3
Fasteners in contact with aluminum to be stainless steel 300 Series, stainless
steel 400 Series, cadmium plated or aluminum.
.4
Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307-14.
.5
High strength bolts: to ASTM A325-14.
.6
Other types of fasteners as appropriate to meet design requirements.
Welding materials:
.1
.3
Steel: to CSA W59-13.
Grout:
.1
Epoxy grout; non-shrink, non-expanding:
.1 Hilti ‘HY-150’.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 05 50 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Metal Fabrications
.2 Sika 'Sika AnchorFix 3001'.
.3 W.R. Meadows ‘REZI-WELD 3/2 EPOXY GROUT/PATCH’.
.2
Cementitious grout: non-shrink, non-expanding to ASTM C1107/C1107M-14a:
.1 Sika 'Sika Grout 212' or ‘Sika M-Bed Standard’.
.2 W.R. Meadows 'Sealtight CG-86 Construction Grout'.
.4
2.4
Dielectric separator: Best grade, quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminous
paint to CAN/CGSB 1.108-M89, or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant.
Finishes
.1
Shop primer; steel: CISC/CPMA 2-75 or SSPC-Paint 20, Paint Specification No. 20:
Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I "Inorganic" and Type II "Organic").
.2
Zinc rich paint; steel: Two-component zinc-rich coating, zinc powder to ASTM D520
Type III ,SSPC-Paint 20, Type 1 Inorganic or single-component zinc-rich coating to
SSPC-Paint, Type 2 Organic, CAN/CGSB 1.181-M99, VOC content <100 g/l to ASTMD1475.
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 Aervoe Industries, Inc. ‘Low VOC Cold Galvanize Coating 93% Zinc’.
.2 ZRC Worldwide ‘ZRC Zero-VOC Galvanizing Compound’.
.3
Hot dip galvanizing: for irregular sections, conforming to CAN/CSA G164-M92, minimum
zinc coating of 600 g/m². Use air cooling method (no water or chromate dipping
treatment permitted).
.4
Powder paint:
.1
2.5
.1
.2
Tiger Drylac series 49 (polyester TGIC), one coat, smooth matte, custom colour
finish as selected by Consultant.
Fabrication
General:
.1
Fabricate metal fabrications with machinery and tools specifically designed for
the intended manufacturing processes and by skilled tradesmen.
.2
Fit and assemble metal fabrications in shop. When this is not possible, make a
trial shop assembly.
.3
Incorporate anchors at 610 mm (24") on centre or as otherwise required for
secure attachment for metal fabrications located in cast-in-place concrete and
concrete masonry units.
.4
Incorporate means for fastenings of other work secured to work of this section.
.5
Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59-13 as applicable, unless specified
otherwise.
Construction:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 05 50 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Metal Fabrications
.3
.4
.5
.1
Fabricate with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors,
and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and within
allowable design factors imposed by jurisdictional authorities. Fabricate items
from steel unless otherwise noted.
.2
Ensure that metal fabrications will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of
joints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation.
.3
Construct items that are part of floor construction, such as gratings and trench
covers, to support the same live loads for which surrounding floors are designed
unless indicated otherwise.
Assembly:
.1
Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions
between components fit together tightly and in true planes.
.2
Provide smooth welds with splatter removed where exposed to view.
.3
Allow for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies
with surrounding Work.
.4
Field welding of hot dipped galvanized members permitted only when other
fastening methods are not possible. Locations of field welds to be clearly
identified on reviewed shop drawings.
.5
Incorporate holes and connections for work installed under other sections.
.6
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes.
.7
Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles,
and other similar work.
Shop prime painting:
.1
Clean loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux and spatter from the work after
fabrication.
.2
Prepare and prime paint in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Prepare steel by methods specified in CISC/CPMA 2-75 or SSPC
SP3.
Powder painting:
.1
Apply powder paint in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations and as follows.
.2
Cleaning:
.1 Clean surfaces to be coated as follows:
.1 Remove all dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping dry
with clean cloths or compressed air.
.2 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed
from surface.
.3 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to thoroughly dry.
.2 If the above procedures do not clean the substrate surfaces, clean the
surfaces with high pressure water washing.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 05 50 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Metal Fabrications
.3 Apply pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before surface
deterioration occurs.
.4 Pre-treat iron phosphate for steel, zinc phosphate for galvanized or steel
structures, and yellow or green chromating, or approved chrome-free for
aluminum substrates.
.3
Application:
.1 Apply coating to requirements of coating manufacturer’s written application
instructions.
.2 Method of Application: as recommended by paint system manufacturer.
.3 Spray application.
.1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose,
capable of properly fluidizing powder coating to be applied.
.2 Apply coating materials to clean surfaces to minimum 2.5 - 3.5 mil dry film
thickness or as specified by manufacturer.
.3 Ensure coating adheres to internal corners and recessed areas.
.4 Allow surfaces to cure for minimum time period as required by manufacturer.
.5 Cure in accordance with manufacturer’s cure curves.
.6
Galvanizing:
.1
Galvanize metal fabrications following fabrication.
.2
Paint damage galvanized surfaces with zinc rich paint, immediately following
damage to galvanized protection. Prepare substrate to remove oil and grease to
SSPC-SP1, rust scale to SSPC-SP3, mill scale to SSPC-SP6.
.3
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated
to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
3.2
Examination
Take measurements at the Place of the Work to ensure that metal fabrications are
fabricated to fit surrounding construction, around obstructions and projections in place,
or as indicated, and to suit service locations.
Installation
.1
Install metal fabrications plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly
fitted together and to surrounding work.
.2
Include in work of this section anchor bolts, high tensile bolts, washers and nuts,
expansion bolts, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips, and other items necessary for
secure installation as required by loading and jurisdictional authorities. Weld to CSAS16-09.
.3
Attach metal fabrications to interior concrete and masonry with corrosion resistant
expansion bolts to support load with a safety factor of 3.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 05 50 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Metal Fabrications
.4
Insulate between dissimilar metals or between metal, and masonry or concrete with
bituminous paint to prevent electrolytic action.
.5
Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades
together with setting templates.
3.3
.1
3.4
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
After erection, touch up primed surfaces that are burned, scratched or otherwise
damaged with prime paint to match shop paint.
.2
Clean and repair areas of bare metal and welds on galvanized surfaces with zinc rich
paint. Welded area of members to be masked to minimize overpainting of adjacent
undamaged surfaces. Prepare substrate to remove oil and grease to SSPC-SP1, rust
scale to SSPC-SP3, mill scale to SSPC-SP6.
.3
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool marked components
and replace with new.
3.5
Protection
.1
Maintain protection of work of this section from time of installation until final finishes are
applied or to final cleanup.
.2
Protect finished surfaces from damage.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Blackened steel architectural fabrications; including but not limited to:
.1 Blackened steel reception desk.
.2 Blackened steel display cabinet and shelves with glass panels and doors and
integral lighting.
.3 Blackened steel plate interior sliding doors.
.4 Blackened steel plate mobile closet.
.5 Blackened steel framing for vestibule enclosure.
.6 Blackened steel support legs for work surfaces/countertops.
.7 Blackened steel framing system for gallery lighting.
.2
Section excludes:
.1
1.2
Miscellaneous metal fabrications: in accordance with Section 05 50 00.
Administrative Requirements
.1
Conduct a pre-fabrication meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.2
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
1.3
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit engineered shop drawings.
.1 Interior entrance vestibule: Shop drawings to be prepared in conjunction with
engineer preparing shop drawings for Section 08 42 26.
.2
Submit a list of fabrications to be Provided as part of the work of this section.
.3
Include plans, sections and large scale details, exposed-to-view edge conditions.
.4
Indicate materials, including material characteristics, profiles of each metal
fabrication member, methods of assembly and joinery, fittings, fastenings,
finishes, anchorages, welds, solders, brazing, and their structural characteristics
relative to their purpose, accessory items, and other fabrication information
required.
.5
Indicate proposed Place of the Work connections and methods.
.6
Submit coordination drawings indicating locations of concealed grounds, cutouts,
plates, and other required fabrications.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
.7
.4
.5
1.4
Show relation to adjoining construction, details of outside and inside corners and
door openings.
Samples:
.1
Submit three (3) samples of blackened steel indicating varying levels of patina for
selection by Consultant. Samples to be 200 mm x 200 mm each.
.2
Provide samples of welded joints showing quality of workmanship.
.3
Provide fastener samples for each type required.
Certificates: mill certificates signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
1.5
.1
Section 05 50 10
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.1
Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for glass and glazing and finishes.
Advise of proper materials, and methods of cleaning glass.
.2
Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for blackened steel surfaces.
Advise of proper materials, and methods of cleaning blackened steel.
.3
Manual shall include detailed maintenance and cleaning procedure for materials
and finishes requiring specific care, noting particularly those procedures or
materials which will cause damage to finished surfaces.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors: Execute work of this section only by a
Subcontractor, shop foreperson, and Place of the Work installation foreperson
who have adequate plant, equipment, and skilled tradespersons to perform work
expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for installations similar to
that specified during a period of at least the immediate past 10 years.
Fabricators shall have experience working with all metal types specified in this
section.
.1 Provide separation of stainless steel or non-ferrous metals fabrication areas
from mild steel fabrication areas.
.2 Grinders, wire brushes, and tools used on stainless steel or non-ferrous
metals shall be free of materials which will leave or produce dissimilar
material or metal oxides deposits. Tools previously used on mild steel shall
not be used on stainless steel or non-ferrous metal work.
.3 Do not bring iron or mild steel surfaces into contact with stainless steel or
non-ferrous metals, including lifting tools, steel tables, storage racks, and
other storage and handling equipment.
.4 Cutting or grinding debris from iron or mild steel materials shall not be
permitted to settle on stainless steel or non-ferrous materials and
fabrications.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.5 Perform water-wetting and drying tests during finishing indicating free iron on
finished stainless work in accordance with ASTM A380-06.
.2
Requirements of regulatory agencies: the work of this section that functions to resist
forces imposed by dead and live loads shall conform to requirements of Authorities with
Jurisdiction.
.3
Mock-ups:
.1
Provide finished mock-ups, per the following list, for review and acceptance by
Consultant:
.1 Blackened steel clad interior doors and wall panels.
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Label, tag or otherwise mark work supplied for installation by other sections to indicate
its function, location in building and shop drawing designation.
.2
Protect work from damage during delivery, storage and handling.
.3
Deliver work to location at the Place of the Work designated by Contractor and to meet
requirements of construction schedule.
.4
Store metal fabrications in dry location and protect from weather.
.5
For metalwork items which are susceptible to damage from construction activities
provide strippable temporary protective film on factory finished or prefinished surfaces
before shipping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Design, fabricate, and install work of this section in accordance with the building code
and requirements of all other Authorities with Jurisdiction.
.2
Design assemblies and connections to withstand own dead load, super-imposed dead
loads, live load, and fabrication forces, without permanent distortions or deformation, to
maximum allowable deflection of L/360, within the following construction tolerances:
.1
Edges and surfaces shall be uniform for all like metalwork.
.2
Limit inconsistencies in edge and surfaces to those which can be identified when
viewed from distance of not greater than 300 mm (12").
.3
Surfaces of panels shall be flat and free of distortion when viewed from any
distance or angle from surface.
.4
Finish shall be uniform when viewed from any distance from surface or from like
surfaces which are viewed from within the same viewing area.
.5
Limit variations from plumb and level:
.1 3.2 mm in 6096 mm (1/8” in 20’) vertically and horizontally.
.2 6.4 mm in 12192 mm (1/4” in 40’) either direction.
.6
Limit offsets in theoretical end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignment:
.1 1.6 mm (1/16”) where surfaces are flush or less than 12.7 mm (1/2") out of
flush and separated by not more than 50 mm (2").
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.2 3.2 mm (1/8") for surfaces separated by more than 50 mm (2").
.3
2.2
.1
.2
.7
Step in face: 1.6 mm (1/16”) maximum.
.8
Jog in alignment: 1.6 mm (1/16”) maximum.
.9
Location: 6.4 mm (1/4") maximum deviation of any member at any location.
.10
Tolerances are not accumulative.
Welding:
.1
Weld components in steel to conform to requirements of CSA W59-13, and by a
fabricator fully certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to conditions of CSA
W47.1-09(R2014) and CSA W55.3-08 (R2013) as applicable.
.2
Weld components in aluminum to conform to requirements of CSA W59.2-M1991
(R2013), and by a fabricator certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to
conditions of CSA W47.2-11(R2015).
.3
Weld stainless steel components to conform to requirements of CSA W59-13 and
ANSI/AWS D1.6/D1.6M-2007 as applicable, and by a fabricator fully certified by
the Canadian Welding Bureau to conditions of CSA W47.1-09(R2014).
Materials
General:
.1
Unless detailed or specified otherwise, standard Products will be acceptable if
construction details and installation meet the requirements and intent of the
Contract Documents.
.2
Include materials, accessories, and supplementary parts necessary to complete
assembly, support, anchorage, and installation of architectural metal fabrications.
.3
Incorporate only metals that are free from defects that impair strength, durability,
or are visible. Install only new metals of best quality, and free from rust or waves
and buckles, and that are clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles.
.4
Metals subject to corrosion during handling and storage shall be protected from
exterior and adverse conditions to preserve finish.
Metals:
.1
Steel, structural shapes, plate, bars: hot-rolled, CAN/CSA-G40.21, Grade 300W,
unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Steel (mild), sheet and strip, hot rolled, ASTM A1011/A1011M-10, Commercial.
.3
Steel, sheet and strip, hot rolled, ASTM A830/A830M-14, Commercial C2,
pickled and oiled.
.4
Steel, hollow structural sections: hot-formed, seamless, CAN/CSA-G40.21,
Grade 350W, Class H, unless otherwise indicated.
.5
Steel, sheet: cold rolled, stretcher levelled, fully pickled, ASTM A1008/A1008M11, Grade CS Type A exposed, matte finish, oiled, unless otherwise indicated.
.6
Steel pipe: ASTM A53 / A53M - 10, Type E or S, Grade A or B, standard weight,
Schedule 40 seamless black or AISI MT 1010/1015, unless otherwise indicated.
.7
Stainless steel materials; Type 304L unless otherwise indicated:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 5
March 22, 2016
.1 Stainless steel tubing: to ASTM A269, Commercial Grade, seamless welded.
.2 Stainless steel sheet and plate: ASTM A167-99(2009).
.3 Stainless steel bar and angle: ASTM A276-15(2015).
.8
Aluminum materials:
.1 Aluminum extrusions: Alloy 6063-T5 or T6 to ANSI H35.1/H35.1M-2013.
.2 Aluminum sheet: aluminum alloy 5005H14 to ANSI H35.1/H35.1M-2013.
Exposed sheet shall be machine flattened free of distortions, resquared
sawcut edges.
2.3
.1
Reception Desk – Accessories and Hardware
Solid surfacing sheet:
.1
Homogenous (not coated, laminated or composite construction), filled material
containing methyl methacrylate.
.2
Nominal sheet thickness: 19 mm (3/4") minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Colour/pattern: As selected by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.
.4
Acceptable Products:
.1 Dupont 'Corian'.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Drawer slides:
.1
.3
Richelieu ‘Accuride Series 4034 Drawer Slide’.
Adjustable feet for reception desk:
.1
McMaster Carr ‘Swivel Stud Levellers Model 6111K314’.
.1 Finish: Black lustre finish.
.4
Plywood:
.1
Thickness: 19 mm.
.2
Veneer core plywood non telegraphing grain: Sanded good one side or good two
sides (when both sides exposed or to receive applied finish materials) plywood
.1 Hardwood plywood: to ANSI/HPVA HP-1-2009.
.2 Softwood plywood: to US Plywood Standard APA PS-1-09.
2.4
Display Cabinet – Accessories and Hardware
.1
Glass and glazing: materials in accordance with Section 08 80 00 and installed by the
work of this section.
.2
Steel suspension rod system:
.3
.1
Steel suspension rod: 9.5 mm (3/8”) diameter steel with black oxide finish.
.2
Shaft collar: Ruland Manufacturing Product # WCL-f-F.
Hinges: Manfred Frank ‘Model # MFH 100’.
.1
Types:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.1 Overlay.
.2 Curtainwall.
.4
.5
Case door seals:
.1
Manfred Frank ‘MF-S1 Compression Seal’.
.2
Manfred Frank ‘MF-S2 Brush Swipe Seal’.
.3
Manfred Frank ‘MF-T Adhesive Tape’.
Channels:
.1
C.R Laurence ‘Model # WU1BLCL’.
.2
C.R Laurence ‘Model # D604BL’.
.6
Lock: Hafele ‘233.47.041’.
.7
Light:
.1
Continuous LED Strip Lighting System and accessories as Distributed by Lee
Valley Tools:
.1 4000K Natural White 30 LEDs/m/
.2 Continuous Corner Channel ( K00U42.71 and Opal Diffuser( L.00U42.72 )
and related accessories.
.3 Low Voltage Power Supply and Dimmable Transformer: 00U41.76 60 W.
.4 Electronic Low Voltage Dimmer: Skylark CL 00U41.79 (coordinate location
with Division 26, 27 and 28 integrate into ganged light switches.
.2
Wiring Connectors, Screw terminal Blocks, splice and lead wire connectors and
flat wiring: as recommended by manufacturer.
.1 Colour: Black.
2.5
.1
.2
2.6
.1
Doors and Wall Panels – Accessories and Hardware
Solid wood edge inserts:
.1
Hardwood for concealed blocking and framing: Economy grade, any species that,
when painted, will not show any defects.
.2
Moisture content: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber with moisture content range
between 6% to 12% for interior architectural woodwork. Maintain temperature
and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that
moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 5% to
10%.
Door hardware: in accordance with Section 08 71 00.
Mobile Closet – Accessories and Hardware
Solid wood edge inserts and hardware blocking:
.1
Hardwood for concealed blocking and framing: Economy grade, any species that,
when painted, will not show any defects.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
.2
.2
.3
.4
.1
Non-locking caster: Richelieu ‘Model F25656’.
.2
Locking caster: Richelieu ‘Model F25622’.
Closet rod and support:
.1
Rod: Richelieu ‘Model 1108315900’.
.2
Support: Richelieu ‘Model 2113150900’.
Magnetic door catch:
Richelieu ‘Model BP52090’.
Base magnets:
.1
.6
Moisture content: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber with moisture content range
between 6% to 12% for interior architectural woodwork. Maintain temperature
and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that
moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 5% to
10%.
Rubber casters:
.1
.5
Section 05 50 10
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Master Magnetics Inc. ‘Item # 0502710’.
Hinges:
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 Hafele ‘329.31.210’.
.2 Richelieu ‘Model 7514500’.
2.7
.1
.2
Accessories – General
Fasteners:
.1
For steel: Zinc plated screws and bolts, and to ASTM A307-14.
.2
For stainless steel: same metal as that being fastened. Match finish of exposed
heads with material being fastened.
.3
Fasteners shall be tamperproof where exposed.
Welding materials:
.1
Steel: to CSA W59-13.
.2
Aluminum: to CSA W59.2-M1991 (R2013).
.3
Stainless steel: ANSI/AWS D1.6/D1.6M-2007.
.3
Anchors: where exposed, countersunk 410 stainless steel Tapcon fasteners to suit.
Where exposed to view to match metal anchored.
.4
Dielectric separator: Best grade, quick drying non-staining alkali resistant bituminous
paint to CAN/CGSB 1.108-M89, or membrane type to acceptance of Consultant.
.5
Grout:
.1
Epoxy grout; non-shrink, non-expanding:
.1 Hilti ‘HY-150’.
.2 Sika 'Sika AnchorFix 3001'.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 8
March 22, 2016
.3 W.R. Meadows ‘REZI-WELD 3/2 EPOXY GROUT/PATCH’.
.2
Cementitious grout: non-shrink, non-expanding to ASTM C1107/C1107M-14a:
.1 Sika 'Sika Grout 212' or ‘Sika M-Bed Standard’.
.2 W.R. Meadows 'Sealtight CG-86 Construction Grout'.
.6
Construction adhesive; plywood to metal applications: to requirements of American
Plywood Association AFG-01, ASTM C557, ASTM D3498, and FHA UM60.
.7
Adjustable foot for steel legs at work surfaces: subject to approval of Consultant.
2.8
.1
Finishes
Blackened steel: Blackened steel finish to be achieved using applied patina and clear
lacquer.
.1
Applied black patina; acceptable Products:
.1 Sculpt Nouveau ‘Black Magic Patina’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Sealer; acceptable Products:
.1 Sculpt Nouveau ‘Ever-Clear’.
.1 Finish: Double-matte.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.3
Metal degreaser/cleaner; acceptable Products:
.1 Sculpt Nouveau ‘Metal Degreaser’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
.3
Prime paint:
.1
Service grade (concealed) fabrications: to CISC/CPMA 2-75.
.2
Architectural grade (exposed) fabrications: Provide primers that comply with
primers and finish systems specified in Section 09 91 00.
Organic zinc-rich coating; for touching up welds and damaged metallic coatings:
.1
Organic Zinc-Rich coating containing 95% metallic zinc, by weight in the dried
film; recognized under the Component Program of Underwriter's Laboratories,
Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to Federal Specification
DOD-P-21035A (formally MIL-P-21035A) for repair of hot-dip galvanizing.
.2
Acceptable Product: ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound.
.4
Hot dip galvanizing: for irregular sections, conforming to CAN/CSA G164-M92, minimum
zinc coating of 600 g/m². Use air cooling method (no water or chromate dipping
treatment permitted).
.5
Stainless steel: AISI No. 4 brushed finish.
.6
Aluminum: Clear anodized to AAMA 611, designation AA-M10C22A31.
2.9
.1
Fabrication
General:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 05 50 10
Page 9
March 22, 2016
.1
Fabricate with machinery and tools specifically designed for intended
manufacturing processes and by skilled workers.
.2
Fit and assemble architectural metal fabrications in shop. When this is not
possible, make a trial shop assembly.
.3
Incorporate anchors at 610 mm (24") on centre or as otherwise required for
secure attachment for metal fabrications located in cast-in-place concrete.
.4
Incorporate means for fastenings of other work secured to work of this section.
.5
Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59-13 and CSA W59.2-M1991
(R2013), ANSI/AWS D1.6/D1.6M-2007 as applicable, unless specified otherwise.
Construction:
.1
Fabricate with materials, component sizes, metal thicknesses (gauges),
reinforcing, anchors, and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended
use, and within allowable design factors imposed by Authorities with Jurisdiction.
Fabricate items from steel unless otherwise noted.
.2
Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and
seams, distortion, and permanent deformation to expansion and contraction
forces and loads.
.3
Construct items that are part of floor construction, such as gratings and trench
covers to support same live loads for which surrounding floors are designed
unless indicated otherwise.
Assembly:
.1
Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions
between components fit together tightly and in true planes.
.2
Corners shall be mitred unless otherwise noted.
.3
Fasten work with concealed methods unless otherwise indicated.
.4
Weld connections where possible, bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flush
with nuts. Countersink bolt heads, and Provide method to prevent loosening of
nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings.
.5
Allow for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies
with surrounding work.
.6
Field welding of hot dipped galvanized members only when other fastening
methods are not possible. Locations of field welds to be clearly identified on shop
drawings.
Finish work:
.1
Incorporate holes and connections for work installed under other sections.
.2
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes.
.3
Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles,
and other similar work.
.4
Machine or grind floor plates, gratings, covers, or their bearings to provide flush,
solid, and level support.
Shop prime painting:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
.6
.7
.8
Section 05 50 10
Page 10
March 22, 2016
.1
Clean loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux and spatter from the work after
fabrication.
.2
For service grade (concealed) fabrications: Prepare and prime paint by methods
specified in CISC/CPMA 2-75.
.3
For architectural grade (exposed) fabrications: clean and prepare surfaces to
meet specified requirements of SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning", and factory prime finish and site finish, to manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Apply paints using HVLP or conventional spray application.
Galvanizing:
.1
Galvanize metalwork following fabrication except where impossible. Paint
galvanized surfaces that are cut, welded or threaded with zinc rich paint to
ensure a minimum coating of 0.102 mm, immediately following damage to
galvanized protection.
.2
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated
to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
Blackened steel finish:
.1
Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with blackened steel finish
manufacturer’s recommended instructions.
.2
Clean and degrease surface using cleaning/degreasing system.
.3
Apply black patina in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Apply a
minimum of two (2) coats.
.4
Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Architectural grade (exposed) fabrications:
.1
Fabrications exposed to view shall be of the highest architectural quality, free of
scratches, pitting, roughness, marring, discolouration, seams, staining and other
imperfections with the quality of workmanship conforming to the workmanship
classifications of Class 1 as defined in NAAMM AMP 555, paragraph 8.3 of
Section 8, Quality Control or Assurance and as follows:
.1 Exposed surfaces are finished smooth with pits, mill marks, nicks and
scratches filled or ground off. Defects shall not show when painted or
polished. Remove sharp corners and edges.
.2 Conceal welds where possible. Where exposed, grind welds to small
radius with uniform sized cove. Welds shall appear continuous in
appearance. When painted or polished welds shall be undetectable.
.3 Use only flat head countersunk bolts in exposed locations unless
indicated otherwise.
.4 Distortions shall not be visible to the eye.
.5 Exposed joints shall be fitted to hairline finish.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 11
March 22, 2016
.2
In addition to the above requirements for fabrication, workmanship shall be of
architectural furniture quality. Metals which are non-ferrous, noted as prefinished,
powder coat finished, and where specifically noted as architectural shall be
fabricated and finished to an architectural quality. Where welds are noted,
provide continuous welds. Grind welds smooth and flat. Polish finish to match
adjacent metal finish. Welds shall be indiscernible when exposed to view. Unless
indicated otherwise, conceal fastenings.
.3
Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
.4
Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with
true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to
smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
.5
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing the work.
.6
Form simple and compound curves in bars, pipe, tubing, and extruded shapes by
bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration
required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without
buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
.7
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm (0.040") unless otherwise indicated.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
.8
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or mitre corner joints. Fabricate
connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
.9
Weld behind finished surfaces without distorting or discolouring exposed side.
Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.
Where welding cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to
comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no
evidence of a welded joint.
.1 Exposed edges of steel members and plates to be eased and all burrs
removed.
.10
2.10
Surface preparation; non-ferrous metals: Remove tool and die marks and stretch
lines, or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish,
free of cross scratches. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of
each piece.
Fabrication - Solid Surfacing
.1
Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to size and shape indicated, in
accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written requirements.
.2
Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive. Joints
shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 100 mm (4") wide solid
surfacing material reinforcing strip under joints.
.3
Provide holes and cut-outs as indicated or as required.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
Section 05 50 10
Page 12
March 22, 2016
.4
Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout cut-outs then sand
edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.
.5
Surfaces shall have a uniform finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Take measurements at the Place of the Work to ensure that work is fabricated to fit
surrounding construction, around obstructions and projections in place, or as indicated,
and to suit service locations.
.2
Inspect surfaces on which work of this section is dependent for any irregularities
detrimental to installation and performance of the work of this section. Confirm
conditions are satisfactory before proceeding.
3.2
Installation
.1
Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together
and to surrounding Work and as required for proper performance.
.2
Supply and install anchor bolts, high tensile bolts, washers and nuts, expansion bolts,
toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips, and other items necessary for secure
installation as required by loading and jurisdictional authorities. Weld to CSA S16-09.
.3
Countersink holes provided for wood screws where wood is attached to work of this
section.
.4
Attach metal fabrications to interior concrete and masonry with corrosion resistant
expansion bolts to support load with a safety factor of 3.
.5
Attach metal fabrications to exterior concrete and masonry with non-shrink epoxy grout
to support load with a safety factor of 3.
.6
Insulate between dissimilar metals, between metal and masonry, and between metal
and concrete with bituminous paint to prevent electrolytic action.
.7
Erect members and component parts plumb, level and true to building lines, in correct
relation to work of other sections and established lines, curves and levels indicated.
.8
Securely bolt steel framing to concrete by means of bolts and expansion anchors, shim
and pack to true straight lines and levels.
.9
Field welding:
.1
Comply with applicable specification for procedures of manual shielded metal arc
welding and requirements for welding and for finishing welded connections given
above in this section.
.2
Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations.
.10 Glass shall be in lengths shown, cut to shapes as required to suit slopes, curves, rakes
and conditions indicated and to provide vertical joints. Set glass plumb and true to line
with no variation in face plane between sections of glass at joints.
3.3
.1
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00 and as follows:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Metal Fabrications
3.4
Section 05 50 10
Page 13
March 22, 2016
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
After erection, touch up primed surfaces that are burned, scratched or otherwise
damaged with prime paint to match shop paint.
.2
Repair areas of bare metal and welds on galvanized surfaces with zinc rich paint.
.3
Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool marked components
and replace with new.
.4
Clean and polish glass and metal surfaces after installation is complete. Use only
materials that won't scratch or mar finished surfaces and as approved by material
manufacturers.
3.5
Protection
.1
Maintain protection of work of this section from time of installation until final finishes are
applied or to final cleanup.
.2
Protect finished or exposed surfaces from damage.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 06 10 53
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Rough Carpentry
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
.1 Plywood backing panels.
.2 Wood grounds, nailers, blocking and sleepers.
.3 Wood panel sheathing, interior roof.
1.2
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Shop drawings:
1.3
.1
.1
Clearly indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other
related details.
.2
Pressure treated lumber and plywood shall be accompanied by supplier’s
certificate of conformance with this specification.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
When it is required that wood maintain dimensional stability and tolerances to ensure
accurate installation of later work, store and install it only in dry areas, and where no
further installation of moist materials is contemplated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Wood Materials
General requirements:
.1
Except as indicated or specified otherwise lumber shall be softwood, S4S,
moisture content not greater than 19% at time of installation, in accordance with
following standards:
.1 CSA O141-05.
.2 NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
.2
Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds:
.1
Use S2S material.
.2
Dimension lumber sizes: in compliance with Section 12 of the NLGA.
.3
Dimension lumber species and grades:
.1 Spruce-Pine-Fir.
.2 Light framing to NLGA Construction grade, S-Dry.
.3 Planks to NLGA No. 2 grade, S-Dry.
.4 Boards to NLGA No. 4 Common grade, S-Dry.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 06 10 53
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Rough Carpentry
2.2
Panel Materials
.1
Softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151-09.
.2
Douglas Fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121-08.
2.3
.1
Sheathing Materials
Interior roof sheathing:
.1
2.4
.1
Plywood sheathing: 19 mm (3/4") thick minimum, no-void (solid core) hardwood
plywood, Sheathing Grade, Douglas Fir Plywood.
Fastenings and Hardware
General:
.1
Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material
and manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not
less than 38 mm (1-1/2") into wood substrate.
.2
Anchors to concrete and unit masonry: Capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M-15, conducted by a
qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
.3
Use surface fastenings of following types, except where specific type is indicated.
.1 To hollow masonry, plaster and panel surfaces use 9 mm (11/32") expansion
bolts or other acceptable anchor.
.2 To solid masonry and concrete use expansion bolts.
.3 To structural steel use bolts through drilled hole, or welded stud-bolts or
power driven self-drilling screws, or welded stud-bolts.
.4
Fastener materials:
.1 Hot-dip galvanized fasteners: ASTM A153/A153M-09 Class A or B1 G185
(CAN/CSA G164-M92 minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2) and connectors
meeting ASTM A653/A653M-11 Class G-185 sheet (CAN/CSA G164-M92
minimum zinc coating of 600 g/m2) or better.
.5
Hardware materials:
.1 Hot-dipped galvanized to CAN/CSA G164-M92 with minimum zinc coating of
600 g/m2 or hot-dipped galvanized fasteners complying with ASTM
A153/A153M-09, Class A or B1, and connectors complying with ASTM
A653/A653M-11 , Class G185.
.2
2.5
.1
Sheathing fasteners: Bugle head, corrosion resistant steel, power driven type, minimum
length of 3 times thickness of sheathing.
Source Quality Control
Identify lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards
Accreditation Board.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 06 10 53
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Rough Carpentry
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
Layout work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit accurately. Erect
in position indicated. Align, level, square, plumb, and secure work permanently in place.
.2
Bore holes true to line and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts into place for snug fit, and
use plates or washers for bolt head and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws
tightly when installed, and again just before concealed by other work or at completion of
work.
.3
Cooperate with work of other sections to ensure that unity of actions will ensure orderly
progress to meet construction schedule.
.4
Include in work of this section rough hardware such as nails, bolts, nuts, washers,
screws, clips, and connectors required for complete and proper installations; and
operating hardware required on work of this section for temporary use.
.5
Do not attach work by wood plugs or blocking in concrete or masonry.
.6
Do not regard nailers, blocking, and such other fastening provision indicated as exact or
complete. Install required provisions for fastening, located and secured to suit Place of
the Work conditions, and adequate for intended support.
.7
Cut work into lengths as long as practical and with square ends. Erect work plumb, in
true planes, and fastened rigidly in place.
.8
Verify that grounds required for fastening of components and equipment are located
correctly, and sized for adequate support.
3.2
Equipment Backboard
.1
Provide backboards for mounting equipment as required. Use 19 mm (3/4") Softwood
Plywood.
.2
Refer to Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28 for requirements for
electrical backboards.
3.3
Miscellaneous Plywood Blocking
.1
Provide minimum 19 mm (3/4") softwood plywood blocking for attachment of
miscellaneous fitments as indicated.
.2
Wood blocking within gypsum board metal stud assemblies under work of Section
09 22 00.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
Section 06 40 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Work of this section includes architectural woodwork including, but not limited to,
the following:
.1 Standing and running trim.
.2 Cabinetry and hardware.
.3 Fixed and removable painted MDF panels at north wall partition assembly.
.4 Fixed MDF work surfaces/countertops.
.5 Solid surfacing countertops and fabrications.
.6 Painted plywood shelving and adjustable brackets in Janitor Room.
.7 Factory and site finishing of architectural woodwork.
1.2
.1
.2
1.3
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
.1
Coordinate with other work for satisfactory and expeditious completion of the
work of this section. Coordinate with partition accessories, electrical,
communications, and finish components to ensure that proper provisions are
made for the installation of the work of this section and for work by others.
.2
Where woodwork is to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimension of
other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing
woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delays in the Work.
.3
Provide forms, templates, anchors, sleeves, inserts and accessories required to
be fixed to or inserted in the work of this section and set in place. Instruct
applicable Subcontractors as to their locations.
.4
Provide cut-outs for raceways, sleeves, grommets and other manufactured
accessories which are required for the work of this section and for work by
others.
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data for each type of Product and process
proposed for use in the work of this section and incorporated into items of
architectural woodwork.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings for the work of this section complying with the
Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014 requirements.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
Section 06 40 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.2
Indicate quality standards and grades.
.3
Include full scale drawings of all exposed-to-view edge conditions.
.4
Include plans, sections and large scale details, and indicate components and
methods of assembly, fastenings, and other fabrication information required for
the work of this section. Indicate assembly joint lines.
.5
Include materials and their characteristics and finishes as applicable including
the following:
.1 Panel core and material types, thicknesses, compliance with specified
standards, special treatments.
.2 Adhesive types to be used and locations.
.3 Finishing requirements including Architectural Woodwork Standard finish
system number, sheen, and required application steps.
.4
.5
.6
Submit coordination drawings indicating locations of concealed grounds, cutouts, plates, and other required fabrications.
.7
Show relation to adjoining construction, details of outside and inside corners and
door openings.
Selection samples:
.1
Submit 2 sets of 200 mm x 200 mm (8” x 8”) lacquered MDF panels showing
gloss levels for each specified colour. Provide samples in gloss levels as
specified in paragraph 2.8.3.1.1.
.2
Casework hardware, one unit of each type and finish.
Verification samples:
.1
Submit samples for purpose of verification of compliance with specified
requirements.
.2
Submit 2 sets of 200 mm x 200 mm (8” x 8”) samples, or 200 mm (8”) long as
applicable (unless otherwise indicated below), of each specified Product, material
and finish, including but not limited to the following:
.1 Shop finished materials, showing each type of finish and colour.
.1 Lacquered MDF panels.
.2 Samples of each specified Product, in each specified colour and finish.
.3 Solid surfacing in each specified colour and finish, 100 mm x 100 mm (4” x
4”) samples
.4 Melamine in each specified colour and finish.
1.4
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for finishes requiring specific care,
noting particularly those procedures or materials which will cause damage to
finished surfaces to be included in maintenance manuals.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
.3
Section 06 40 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Maintenance materials:
.1
Deliver extra sets of hardware items for maintenance as follows:
.1 Two (2) sets of each type actually installed.
1.5
.1
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Manufacturers:
.1 Architectural woodwork shall be manufactured by a firm having a minimum of
5 years experience on work of similar size and quality.
.2 Shall be a member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute
or the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada or the
Woodwork Institute.
.3 Fabricator solid surfacing: Fabrication to be performed by a solid surface
manufacturer's certified fabricator Submit certification letter prepared by the
solid surfacing manufacturer.
.2
.2
Quality standard:
.1
.3
Installers / applicators / erectors: engage an installer who has successfully
completed 2 architectural woodwork projects similar in scope, materials and
design to this Project within the last 5 years.
Work shall be in accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards,
Edition 2, 2014, Premium Grade, or the highest grade available for performance
and appearance characteristics of materials in Sections 3 – 5 used that apply to
Product fabrication and installation requirements governed by Sections 6 – 12.
Mock-ups:
.1
Provide mock-ups for the following:
.1 All veneer and solid types.
.2 All edge and joint types.
.3 MDF work surface and upper cabinets, minimum 4’ width or one cabinet.
.1 Mock-up may remain as a part of the finished work pending approval from
the Consultant.
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Protect architectural woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent
damage, spoilage, and deterioration.
.2
Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that
could damage, soil, or deteriorate architectural woodwork have been completed in
installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only
in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified under paragraph
1.7 Field Conditions.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
.3
1.7
.1
Section 06 40 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
The architectural woodwork manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible
to make certain that architectural woodwork is not delivered until the building and
storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the architectural woodwork will not be damaged
by excessive changes in moisture content.
Field Conditions
Environmental conditions:
.1
During storage and installation: Obtain and comply with Architectural Woodwork
Standard’s for optimum temperature and relative humidity conditions for
woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these
conditions have been attained. Woodwork shall be acclimatized for a minimum of
72 hours prior to commencing woodwork installation.
.2
During finishing: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Standard’s temperature
and humidity requirements before, during, and after application of finishes.
.3
During service life of woodwork: Obtain and comply with woodwork
manufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for
woodwork.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Performance/Design Requirements
Casework integrity shall meet the minimum acceptance levels in accordance with SEF 81999 as outlined in the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014 and
additional or greater loading capacities as specified throughout the Architectural
Woodwork Standards.
.1
.2
2.2
.1
2.3
.1
Cabinets to be flush overlay type in accordance with AWMAC.
Maximum allowable adjustable shelf lengths shall comply with shelves assembly rules
per the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014 based on shelf thickness
indicated or scheduled.
General
Single-source manufacturing and Installation responsibility: Engage a qualified
Manufacturer to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section,
including fabrication, finishing, and installation.
Wood Materials
Lumber:
.1
Hardwood for concealed blocking and framing: Economy grade, any species that,
when painted, will not show any defects.
.2
Moisture content: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber with moisture content range
between 6% to 12% for interior architectural woodwork. Maintain temperature
and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that
moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 5% to
10%.
.3
Solid hardwood for transparent opaque finish.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
Section 06 40 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
.1 Species: Paint Grade Birch.
2.4
.1
Panel Materials
Panel material schedule; except where indicated otherwise:
.1
Thickness: 19 mm (3/4") minimum.
.2
Core panels:
.1 At melamine work: MDF.
.2 Plywood backing; countertops, backsplashes, and where indicated: Exterior
grade plywood with Type II adhesive, with no added urea-formaldehyde used
in composition.
.3
.2
Maximum moisture content at time of installation: 10% to 12%.
Plywood:
.1
Veneer core plywood non telegraphing grain: Sanded good one side or good two
sides (when both sides exposed or to receive applied finish materials) plywood
.1 Hardwood plywood: to ANSI/HPVA HP-1-2009.
.2 Softwood plywood: to US Plywood Standard APA PS-1-09.
.2
.3
Exterior grade plywood: 19 mm (3/4") nominal thickness, Douglas Fir plywood to
CSA O121-08, exterior grade DFP, sanded both sides.
Medium density fibreboard (MDF):
.1
To ANSI A208.2-2009, 720 kg/m3 (45 lbs/ft3) minimum density and as follows:
.1 Grade:
.1 Grade 130.
.2 Formaldehyde emission: F21 for panel thicknesses greater than 8mm 8 mm
(5/16") and F13 for panels equal to or thinner than 8 mm (5/16").
.2
2.5
.1
.2
Finish: where applicable, finish exposed MDF in accordance with paragraph 2.8.
Plastic and Composite Materials
Low pressure decorative laminate (LPDL); melamine MDF panels:
.1
MDF with thermally fused melamine resin impregnated decorative paper facing to
ANSI/NEMA LD 3-2005, complete with matching non-yellowing edge trim, unless
otherwise noted.
.2
Thickness: 19 mm (3/4") minimum.
.3
Colours: Black.
Solid surfacing sheet:
.1
Homogenous (not coated, laminated or composite construction), filled material
containing methyl methacrylate.
.2
Nominal sheet thickness: 12.7 mm (1/2") minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Colour/pattern: As selected by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.
.4
Acceptable Product:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
Section 06 40 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.1 Dupont 'Corian'.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.6
Fasteners and Adhesives
.1
Wood screws: FF-S-111D Amendment 1 (1989), type, size, material and finish as
required for the condition of use.
.2
Nails: FED FF-N-105, type, size material and finish as required for the condition of use.
.3
Anchors: Type, size material and finish as required for the condition of use.
.4
Fastening devices shall be set or countersunk flush with surface of framing member. No
exposed fasteners permitted. Where accepted by Consultant, exposed fasteners shall
be flat head hex socket cap screws and matching joint connector sex bolts (also known
as Chicago screws or post and screw) by Murakoshi, distributed by Richelieu, Spaenaur
Joint Connector bolt with decorative head, hex drive series; finish as selected by
Consultant.
.5
At butt joints in counter surfaces, employ assembling bolts to ensure tight structural joint.
.6
Adhesives: Type II water resistant, except use Type I waterproof in wet environments.
2.7
.1
Hardware
Casework hardware; to be furnished and installed by the architectural woodwork
manufacturer.
.1
Where casework hardware is not specified or indicated on drawings or
scheduled, casework hardware shall comply with ANSI/BHMA Standards, latest
edition, minimum grades, loading and other basic rules per the Architectural
Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014.
.2
Concealed hinges:
.1 Acceptable manufacturer:
.1 Blum.
.2 Hettich.
.2 Description:
.1 European style, self closing, 110 degree, full overlay.
.3
Door catches: Hafele ‘356.06.401’.
.4
Drawer bumper: Hafele ‘430.07.400’.
.5
Drawer edge pull: Hafele ‘124.02.920’.
.6
Sliding cabinet door pull handle: ‘Hafele ‘151.35.665’.
.7
Hinged cabinet door handle: Richelieu ‘989880170’.
.1 Number of hinges to be as recommended by hinge manufacturer to suit door
material and width.
.8
Refrigerator door attachment mechanism: Hafele ‘568.16.007’.
.9
Sliding door fitting: Hafele ‘406.02.040’.
.10
Cabinet locks: Hafele ‘235.03.817’.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
.11
Section 06 40 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Adhesive backed cable clips: CableOrganizer ‘Adhesive Cable Clips Model
ACC6’.
.1 Colour: Black.
.12
Shelf supports:
.1 CRL Anochrome KV Steel Brackets, sized to suit 16” (400 mm) shelf depth.
.2 CRL Anochrome KV 48 Heavy Duty Adjustable Steel Standard.
2.8
Finishes – Interior Architectural Woodwork
.1
General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is specified in this section,
regardless of whether factory applied or applied after installation.
.2
Preparations for finishing:
.3
.1
Prior to finishing, exposed portions of woodwork shall have handling marks or
effects of exposure to moisture removed with a thorough final sanding over
surfaces of the exposed portions, using appropriate grit sandpaper, and shall be
cleaned prior to applying sealer or finish. Sanding shall be completed just prior to
stain or finishing application.
.2
Concealed surfaces of woodwork that might be exposed to moisture, such as
those adjacent to exterior concrete or masonry walls, shall be back-primed.
.3
Comply with referenced quality standard in Part 1 for sanding, filling countersunk
fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
Finish for MDF:
.1
Comply with requirements indicated below for finish system, staining, and sheen.
.1 Sheen: subject to review of selection samples by Consultant, provide one of
the following sheen levels.
.1 Satin.
.2 Semigloss.
.2 Factory finish with transparent, Post Catalyzed Lacquer in accordance with
the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014, Section 5.
.1 Opaque finish: Paint or pigmented stain. Allow for 2 colours, white and
black, to later selection by Consultant.
2.9
Fabrication
.1
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated with openings and
mortises pre-cut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items of work.
.2
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before
shipment to maximum extent possible. Trial fit in shop and disassemble components
only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary, provide ample
allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. Reassemble with concealed fasteners.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
Section 06 40 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
.3
Provide woodwork, solid tops and other indicated materials with pre-cut openings, where
possible, for hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, telephone cut-outs
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and Provide proper size and shape.
Smooth edges of cut-outs and, where located in countertops, seal edges of cut-outs with
a water-resistant coating.
.4
Provide lumber framing for architectural woodwork, complete with all bracing and
fastening devices as required for a rigid installation, and as required to sustain the
imposed loads.
.5
Reinforcing shown is minimum. Provide additional reinforcing as required to ensure a
rigid assembly. Take responsibility for the stability of furniture and fitments.
.6
Do fabrication from field measurements with provisions for scribing as required to meet
built-in conditions.
.7
Provide balancing sheets as required, and specified, complying with the Architectural
Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014.
.8
Provide surface mount blocking & strapping necessary to support the work of this
section. Such blocking shall not be exposed upon completion of work.
.9
Prefinish work at the factory, except where specified or indicated otherwise.
.10 Solid wood edging: No end grain shall be visible; mitre external corners; house internal
corners.
2.10
Fabrication - Solid Surfacing
.1
Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to size and shape indicated, in
accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written requirements.
.2
Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive. Joints
shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 100 mm (4") wide solid
surfacing material reinforcing strip under joints.
.3
Provide holes and cut-outs as indicated or as required.
.4
Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout cut-outs then sand
edges smooth. Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.
.5
Surfaces shall have a uniform finish.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
.1
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas
before installing.
.2
Ensure that environmental conditions have been provided as requested and specified.
.3
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion
and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
.4
Provide all grounds, nailers and other required fabrications which are to be built into
other work when required.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Woodwork
Section 06 40 00
Page 9
March 22, 2016
.5
Ensure that wall and ceiling variations are not in excess of 6.4 mm (1/4") in 3658 mm
(144") and that floors are not in excess of 12.7 mm (1/2") in 3658 mm (144") of being
plumb, level, flat, straight, square, of the correct size. Variations shall be corrected prior
to installation of work of this section.
.6
Report conditions contrary to requirements preventing proper installation. Do not
proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
Installation
.1
Install woodwork to comply with Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014 for
same grade specified in Part 1 of this section for type of woodwork involved.
.2
Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions.
.3
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair
damaged finish at cuts.
.4
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and
blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching
fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and
filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
.5
Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed at
shop or before installation of woodwork.
3.3
.1
3.4
Installation – Tolerances
Install to a tolerance of 3 mm in 2400 mm (1/8" in 8’-0”) for plumb and level (including
tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces unless otherwise
acceptable in accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 2, 2014.
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.
.2
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
.3
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.5
Protection
.1
Protect architectural woodwork during remainder of construction period to ensure that
work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
.2
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer, that ensure that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Performance of the Work.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 21 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Thermal Insulation
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Semi-rigid insulation board; cavity wall assemblies.
.2
Fire barrier duct wrap insulation.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data:
1.3
.1
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
.2
Submit data and installation instructions for materials and prefabricated devices,
providing descriptions sufficient for identification at the Place of the Work.
.3
Submit data from manufacturer's or independent
compatibility and adhesive results of proposed materials.
laboratory
indicating
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Execute work of this section using a Subcontractor who has adequate plant,
equipment and skilled workers to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have
been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified during a
period of at least the immediate past 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Insulation Materials
Semi-rigid insulation board; cavity wall assemblies:
.1
Mineral-fibre to CAN/ULC-S702, Type 1, 48 kg/m³ (3 lb/ft³) minimum density to
ASTM C612-10 for glass fibre mineral-fibre insulation, and 72 kg/m³ (4.5 lb/ft³)
minimum density to ASTM C612-10 for basalt rock and steel slag mineral-fibre
insulation.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 Roxul 'CavityRock’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Fire barrier duct wrap insulation:
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 3M ‘Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Description:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 21 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Thermal Insulation
.1 Flexible fire-resistant thermal insulation blanket, inorganic fibre blanket
encapsulated with scrim-reinforcing foil, 38.1 mm (1-1/2”) thickness.
.2 Adhesive: as recommended by manufacturer.
2.2
.1
Accessories
Insulation fasteners: HDPE washer, zinc plated pin finish, pins purpose made to suit
substrate material, 50 mm (2”) minimum insulation holding diameter; direct fasten type,
washer depth length to suit insulation thickness.
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 ITW Ramset ‘InsulFast’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation – General
.1
Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated.
.2
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
.3
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
.4
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
.5
Install attachment at rate as required to prevent displacement of insulation boards during
construction operations.
.6
Butt joints tightly and offset vertical joints to form an unbroken thermal envelope. Use
only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possible
dimensions to reduce number of joints.
.7
Apply insulation to ensure total and complete coverage of surfaces indicated to be
insulated, and in direct contact with such surfaces.
.8
Ensure integrity and continuity of insulation at juncture with different types of materials
and seal in an acceptable manner.
.9
Do not cover insulation until it has been reviewed and accepted by Consultant.
3.2
.1
Installation – Semi-Rigid Insulation
Install at masonry assembly locations in accordance with Section 04 05 00.
.1
Where applicable, fasten insulation using masonry tie securement plates
Provided under Section 04 05 19.
.2
In locations where insulation clips are not practical or available with masonry
connectors, mechanically fastened to substrate with minimum of 5 insulation
fasteners per insulation board and maximum spacing of 610 mm (24") on centre.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 21 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Thermal Insulation
.2
For other cladding assemblies:
.1
3.3
.1
3.4
.1
3.5
Mechanically fasten to substrate with minimum of 5 insulation fasteners (dice
pattern) per insulation board and maximum spacing of 610 mm (24") on centre.
Installation – Fire Barrier Duct Wrap
Install fire barrier duct wrap in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
Protection
.1
Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations respecting protection.
.2
Protect polystyrene insulation from extended exposure to sunlight.
.3
Repair damage resulting from performance of work of this section in manner acceptable
to Consultant.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Above-Grade Vapour Barrier
Section 07 26 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Above-grade vapour barrier.
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit sample of proposed Products for review by Consultant.
Quality Assurance
.1
Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers with
minimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies
specified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
.2
Mock-up:
.1
Construct 10 m² (100 ft²) area of typical installation for each type of Product.
.1 Construct mock-up of sheet vapour barrier installation including one lap joint,
one inside corner and at one electrical box. Mock-up may be part of finished
work.
.2
Locate at the Place of the Work as part of final installation. Space installation to
include exterior wall panel incorporating window and insulation.
.3
Do not proceed until mock-up has been reviewed by Consultant.
.4
When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required
for this work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
.1
Sheet Vapour Barrier
Polyethylene film: CAN/CGSB 51.34-M86 (amended 1988), Type 1, 0.15 mm (6 mil)
thick, with a water vapour permeance of not greater than 45 ng/(P•s•m²), flame spread
rating of less than 150 to CAN/ULC-S102-10.
Accessories
Joint sealing tape: air resistant pressure sensitive adhesive tape, type recommended by
vapour barrier manufacturer, 75 mm (3") wide.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Above-Grade Vapour Barrier
.2
Section 07 26 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Lap sealant; butyl sealant: CGSB 19.21-M87.
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 Pecora ‘BA98’.
.2 Tremco ‘Acoustical Sealant’.
.3 QuietSeal ‘Acoustic Sealant QS-350’.
.4 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.3
Staples and fasteners: minimum 6.4 mm (1/4") leg.
.4
Moulded box vapour barrier: factory-moulded polyethylene box for use with recessed
electric switch and outlet device boxes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Ensure services are installed and inspected prior to installation of sheet vapour barrier.
.2
Install sheet vapour barrier on interior side of insulation at exterior wall and ceiling
assemblies prior to installation of gypsum board to form continuous application.
.3
Use sheets of largest practical size to minimize joints.
.4
Inspect sheets for continuity. Repair punctures and tears with sealing tape before work is
concealed.
3.2
Attachment
.1
Seal vertical joints in sheet vapour barrier over framing by lapping no fewer than two
studs.
.2
Fasten sheet vapour barrier to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners at 400 mm (16") on centre.
3.3
.1
3.4
.1
3.5
.1
Exterior Surface Openings
Cut sheet vapour barrier to form openings and ensure material is lapped and sealed to
frame.
Perimeter Seals
Seal perimeter of sheet vapour barrier as follows:
.1
Apply continuous bead of sealant to substrate at perimeter of sheets.
.2
Lap sheet over sealant and press into sealant bead.
.3
Ensure that no gaps exist in sealant bead. Smooth out folds and ripples occurring
in sheet over sealant.
Lap Joint Seals
Seal lap joints of sheet vapour barrier as follows:
.1
Attach first sheet to substrate.
.2
Apply continuous bead of sealant over solid backing at joint.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Above-Grade Vapour Barrier
3.6
.1
3.7
.1
Section 07 26 13
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.3
Lap adjoining sheet minimum 150 mm (6") and press into sealant bead.
.4
Ensure that no gaps exist in sealant bead. Smooth out folds and ripples occurring
in sheet over sealant.
Electrical Boxes
Seal electrical switch and outlet device boxes that penetrate vapour barrier as follows:
.1
Install moulded box vapour barrier or double wrap boxes with film sheet providing
minimum 305 mm (12") perimeter lap flange.
.2
Apply sealant to seal edges of flange to main vapour barrier and seal wiring
penetrations through box cover.
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Air Barrier Systems
Section 07 27 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.1
1.3
Sheet-Applied Self-Adhesive Air / Vapour Barrier Membrane.
Independent inspection and testing company shall attend the pre-installation
meeting.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Compatibility statement:
.1
1.4
.1
1.5
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit manufacturer’s compatibility statement validating compatibility of air
barrier system materials with substrates and adjacent materials.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.2
Provide the work of this section, executed by competent installers with minimum
5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified
and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Package materials and identify on attached labels the manufacturer, contents and
material specification number.
.2
Store flammable solvent-base liquids away from excessive heat and open flame. Primer
contains solvent. Do not use near open flame.
.3
Store surface conditioner at temperature above 5°C to facilitate handling.
.4
Store roll materials on end.
1.6
Field Conditions
.1
Provide forced air circulation during curing period for enclosed applications.
.2
Low temperature application:
.1
Perform adhesion test for membrane when ambient temperature is below -5°C.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Air Barrier Systems
.2
Section 07 27 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Proceed with work when temperature is (or predicted) to fall below -5°C ambient
temperature only with the mutual documented agreement of inspection and
testing company, manufacturer and applicator.
.3
Do not perform installation during rainy or inclement weather or on wet or frost covered
surfaces.
.4
Provide temporary protection of the applied membrane to prevent mechanical damage
or damage from spillage of oil or solvents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Air barrier system shall perform as continuous air barrier and as liquid-water drainage
plane flashed to discharge to exterior of building envelope incidental condensation or
water penetration.
.2
At wall and roof cladding transitions, air barrier system shall perform as continuous air
barrier and as liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to exterior of building
envelope incidental condensation or water penetration by creation of unobstructed
drainage plane that extends across the cladding transition or by flashing to discharge to
exterior of building envelope incidental condensation or water penetration.
.3
Air barrier system shall accommodate substrate movement, construction material
changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration which permits air
and water leakage exceeding the following specified limits and requirements, or
interruption of the drainage plane:
.1
Air permeance of air barrier material: Maximum 0.02 L/s.m2 at 75 Pa (0.004
cfm/ft2 at 1.57 psf) to ASTM E2178-13.
.2
Rate of air leakage of air barrier system: Maximum 0.15 L/s.m2 at 75 Pa (0.030
cfm/ft2 at 1.57 psf) to ASTM E283-04(2012).
.3
Water vapour transmission for air / vapour barriers: Maximum 5.7 ng/Pa.m 2.s.
(0.1 perms).
.4
Water vapour transmission for vapour permeable air vapour barriers: Minimum
570 ng/Pa.m2.s. (10 perms).
.5
Air barrier system structural performance while maintaining air barrier
performance for air leakage: Air barrier system shall transfer wind loads to
structure and shall resist design wind load in accordance with the building code.
.6
Low temperature performance: Minimum -30°C (-22°F).
.7
Compatibility: Air barrier system materials shall be compatible with substrate and
adjacent materials with material manufacturers and show no performance
deterioration during service conditions.
.8
Self-sealability: ASTM D1970/D1970M-15a.
.9
Adhesion: ASTM D4541-09e1, 110 kPa (16 psi) minimum performance for site
tested adhesion.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Air Barrier Systems
.4
2.2
.1
Section 07 27 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Air barrier system shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to air barrier material
of adjacent building envelope air barrier systems, allowing for relative movement of
systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made
between the following unless otherwise applicable:
.1
Foundation and walls.
.2
Walls and openings (windows, doors, louvres, and other wall penetrations).
.3
Wall and roof systems.
.4
Wall and roof over unconditioned space.
.5
Walls, floor and roof across construction, control, and movement joints.
.6
Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations.
Sheet-Applied, Vapour Impermeable Self-Adhesive Air / Vapour Barrier Membrane
System
Description: Composite preformed modified bituminous membrane system consisting of
SBS modified asphalt for low temperature flexibility and polyethylene scrim reinforcing,
with physical properties as follows:
.1
Single source responsibility: Components required for complete air barrier
system and through wall flashing membrane behind the opaque wall assemblies
to be obtained from single manufacturer.
.2
Thickness: 1.0 mm (40 mils).
.3
Application temperature: in accordance with product installation instructions.
.4
Primer: in accordance with product installation instructions.
.5
Termination and penetration sealing mastic: in accordance with product
installation instructions.
.6
Acceptable product systems:
.1 Henry Company ‘Blueskin SA' and ‘Blueskin SA LT’.
.2 Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing ‘CCW 705’.
.3 Grace Construction Products ‘Perm-A-Barrier Wall Membrane’.
.4 IKO ‘AquaBarrier AVB’ and AquaBarrier AVB Low Temp’.
.5 Soprema 'Sopraseal Stick 1100 Summer Grade’ and Sopraseal Stick 1100
Winter Grade'.
.6 Tremco ‘ExoAir 110 and 110LT’.
.7 W.R. Meadows 'Air Shield' and ‘Low Temperature Air Shield’.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
Installation – General
Surfaces to receive air barrier systems shall be smooth, dry and free from conditions that
will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of the work of this section.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Air Barrier Systems
Section 07 27 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.2
Air barrier system shall be continuous in the building envelope. Lap and seal air barrier
systems in accordance with product manufacturer’s installation instructions to
construction, control, and expansion joints, across junctions between different building
assemblies, and around penetrations through the building assembly.
.3
Wrap into jamb, head and sill of building envelope window openings, door openings, and
other openings with air barrier system membrane by returning membrane to inside face
of opening unless otherwise indicated.
3.2
Installation – Sheet Applied, Vapour Impermeable, Self-Adhesive Membrane
.1
Apply self-adhering membrane continuous to prepared and primed substrate in an
overlapping shingle fashion to shed moisture towards exterior and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and written instructions. Stagger vertical joints
200 mm (8").
.2
Align and position self-adhering membrane, remove protective film and press firmly into
place. Ensure minimum 50 mm (2") overlap at end and side laps. Promptly roll laps and
membrane with a counter top roller to affect the seal.
.3
At the end of each days work seal the top edge of the membrane where it meets the
substrate using liquid air seal mastic. Trowel apply a feathered edge to seal termination
and shed water.
.4
Seal projections with application of liquid air seal mastic.
.5
Apply self-adhering membrane continuous across junctions between different building
assemblies, and around penetrations through the building assembly. Provide 100 mm
(4") overlap unless otherwise indicated, or required by manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
.6
Inspect membrane for punctures, misaligned seams and fishmouths, apply additional
layer of membrane over affected area, extending minimum of 150 mm (6") beyond
damaged area in all directions.
3.3
.1
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
Independent inspection and testing company shall perform inspection of
completed work.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane
Section 07 54 23
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
.1
.2
Summary
Section includes:
.1
TPO roofing membrane.
.2
Associated accessories and products.
Section excludes:
.1
1.2
.1
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.1
1.3
Plywood sheathing panels: in accordance with Section 06 10 53.
Independent inspection and testing company shall attend the pre-installation
meeting.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Roofing manufacturer’s warranty and design criteria:
.1
.4
.5
Submit roofing manufacturer’s warranty specimen and warranty design criteria
prior to commencement of roofing work.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit drawings showing locations of main joints, section of entire system,
sections of each sleeve and penetration condition, flashing conditions, expansion
joints and other fabrication information. Indicate membrane attachment system
and layout where applicable.
.2
Shop drawings to include preparation and installation instructions, as well as
installation methods for project specific application.
Certificates:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit manufacturer’s certification that Products proposed for use in the work of
this section are physically and chemically compatible with each other.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
.1
Submit manufacturer’s maintenance instructions for incorporation into the
operation and maintenance manuals.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane
Section 07 54 23
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.1
Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing the roofing system
specified in this section, with minimum 10 years successful experience.
.2
Installers / applicators / erectors: Provide work of this section, executed by
competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in application of Products,
systems and assemblies specified and with approval and training of Product
manufacturers.
.1 Work of this section shall be installed by a Subcontractor that is a member in
good standing of the Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) and
Ontario Industrial Roofing Contractors Association (OIRCA.
.2 Subcontractor must be approved by membrane manufacturer. Submit
applicator's certification letter prepared by membrane manufacturer.
.1 Heat welding of laps shall be performed only by skilled welders who have
successfully completed a course of instruction provided by membrane
manufacturer.
.2
Mock-up:
.1
1.6
Prepare a mock-up of the work of this section in accordance with Section
01 45 00. Incorporate materials and methods of fabrication and installation
identical with Project requirements. Install mock-up of ceiling assembly at
location directed by Consultant. Retain accepted mock-up of sufficient size and
scope to show typical pattern of seams, fastening details, edge construction, and
workmanship.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Package materials and identify on attached labels the manufacturer, brand, contents,
weight as applicable, and Product and specification numbers.
.2
Protect edges of roll goods from damage during handling, and store rolls on end to
prevent flattening.
.3
Handle materials
recommendations.
.4
Keep materials and equipment free from debris, ice, snow and contaminants. Store
adhesives and sealants between 16°C and 27°C.
.5
Provide protection to building surfaces during hoisting, or application of materials.
Protect adjacent surfaces in an acceptable manner from damage, marking and soiling
during installation of the work of this section.
.6
Do not store roofing materials on roof. Store them under cover while roofing work is not
in progress.
.7
Roofing membrane that has been exposed to the elements for 7 days or more shall be
prepared in accordance with manufacturer’s installation specifications.
1.7
carefully
to
preclude
damage.
Follow
manufacturer's
Extended Warranty
.1
Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years, in accordance with Section 01 78 36.
.2
Roofing manufacturer total system warranty including the following:
.1
No water leakage.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane
.2
Labour, materials, and workmanship.
.3
No dollar limit.
.4
Non-prorated.
.5
No limitation for ponded water.
.6
10 year warranty duration.
Section 07 54 23
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.3
The warranty is a labour, material, and workmanship total roof systems warranty. The
roof system shall meet the overall performance requirements of the Contract Documents
and remain leak-proof during the warranty period.
.4
Membrane roofing system to be free of defects in labour, materials and workmanship
resulting in leakage, failure to stay in place, undue expansion or shrinkage, deformation,
splitting, cracking, delamination, wrinkling, ultraviolet deterioration, environmental
deterioration, microbial deterioration, brittleness due to low temperature deterioration,
deterioration due to compatibility with materials by this section and/or supplied by
membrane manufacturer as required for the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
Roofing System Manufacturer
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
.1
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
.2
Firestone Building Products.
.3
Johns Manville.
.4
Lexcan limited.
Materials
.1
Use only materials and components supplied or accepted by roofing membrane
manufacturer.
.2
Single ply TPO membrane:
.1
At Contractor’s option, use either type of TPO roofing membrane materials
specified (adhered or mechanically fastened), but use only one type throughout
the Work.
.2
Adhered locations:
.1 Polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic-polyolefin (TPO) membrane in
accordance with the following properties:
.1 ASTM D6878/D6878M-13 Standard Specification for Thermoplastic
Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing.
.2 Membrane thickness: 1.52 mm (0.060”) minimum.
.3 Coating over scrim; weathering side: 0.381 mm (0.015”) minimum.
.3
Mechanically fastened locations:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane
Section 07 54 23
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.1 Polyester scrim reinforced thermoplastic-polyolefin (TPO) membrane in
accordance with the following properties:
.1 ASTM D6878-06a Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin
Based Sheet Roofing.
.2 Membrane thickness: 1.52 mm (0.060”) minimum.
.3 Coating over scrim; weathering side: 0.381 mm (0.015”) minimum.
.4
Membrane colour: White.
.5
Installed membrane system shall allow for structural movement or deflection of
building, and span cracks in substrate of 6 mm (1/4") wide or less which may
occur after installation of membrane.
.6
Elastic sheet materials shall be compatible with other materials used to provide
the complete system including adhesives, insulation, protection materials and
expansion joints.
.7
Provide factory pre-fabricated (by roofing membrane manufacturer) curb wrap
corners, square tubing wraps, split pipe seals, and penetration flashings for
respective detail conditions.
.3
Membrane coated flashings: Non-reinforced TPO membrane, 1.0 mm (0.04") thick,
same colour as roofing membrane, heat welded to minimum 0.5 mm (0.02") 26 gauge
Z275 galvanized steel.
.4
Substrate material:
.1
.5
Plywood sheathing panels: in accordance with Section 06 10 53.
Fastening accessories; in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications:
.1
Membrane adhesives:
.1 As recommended by manufacturer of material being adhered.
.6
.2
Substrate board fasteners: in accordance with Section 06 10 53.
.3
Sealant: Low VOC 250 g/L (8.8 oz/gal maximum), one-part, moisture curing,
elastomeric polyether sealant providing rapid skin time when exposed to
atmospheric moisture forming a waterproof rubber surface in less than an hour,
product as recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer.
.4
Membrane fastening plates: 60 mm (2-3/8") diameter, to FM 4470.
.5
Nails: galvanized steel to CSA B111-1974, Table 12, and length sufficient to
penetrate wood substrate 25 mm (1") minimum.
.6
Fastening bars: Z275 galvanized or AZ150 galvalume steel, or extruded
aluminum, 14 gauge, slot holes 25 mm (1") on centre.
Wood blocking and plywood: in accordance with Section 06 10 53.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
General Installation Requirements
Perform roofing work in accordance with specifications, manufacturer's printed
specifications and installation instructions, and approved shop drawing preparation and
installation instructions, with greater requirements governing.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane
3.2
Section 07 54 23
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Installation
.1
Follow manufacturer's instructions using only compatible adhesives and compounds
recommended by manufacturer in quantities and techniques so recommended. Install
membrane sheets to layout and details shown on reviewed shop drawings.
.2
Welding method shall be hot air method only. Do hand welding, machine welding and
progressive testing of seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Probe seams once the hot air welds have thoroughly cooled (approximately 30 minutes)
and repair gaps.
.4
Apply cut edge sealant on cut edges of roofing membrane (where the scrim
reinforcement is exposed) after seam probing is complete.
.5
At flashing termination points, incorporate manufacturer's recommended materials,
adhesives, sealing strips, and stainless steel compression rings and accessories to
ensure completely waterproof system.
3.3
.1
3.4
.1
3.5
Fully Adhered System
Install roofing membrane without folds or wrinkles. Follow manufacturer's layout
drawings. Overlap membrane over lap line provided on membrane. Fully adhere roofing
membrane, with no air pockets in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Hot air weld overlaps according to membrane manufacturer's
recommendations.
Mechanically Fastened System
Unroll and relax roofing membrane and draw tight without folds or wrinkles. Follow
manufacturer's layout drawings. Overlap membrane over lap line provided on
membrane. Install fasteners and membrane plates midway between 25 mm (1") and
75 mm (3") lines provided along edge of membrane, at spacing indicated on shop
drawings. Set self-drilling fasteners with torque controlled or depth locator equipment
only. Hot air weld overlaps according to membrane manufacturer's recommendations.
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Manufacturer’s field review to be in accordance with Section 01 45 00 supplemented as
follows:
.1
Membrane manufacturer’s field representative shall be on-site and review
installation a minimum of once per week during roofing installation and provide
written site reports to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 72 33
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Roof Hatches
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
Roof hatches.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
1.3
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Show profiles, accessories, locations, and dimensions.
.2
Include details of interface with work of other sections.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Package and brace products to prevent damage in shipment and handling. Protect finish
surfaces by sturdy wrappings, or covering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Roof Hatches; Ladder Access
.1
Description: Preassembled, insulated cover and insulated metal curb, welded corner
construction, c/w padlock latch, hinge, handle, and other hardware as required.
.2
Cover: Break formed, hollow-metal design with concealed insulation, overlapping flange,
and internally reinforced live load to meet building code.
.1
Steel: Cover and frame; 1.9 mm (0.07") (14 gauge) Z275 (G-90) paint bond
galvanized steel.
.3
Gasket: Extruded EPDM rubber gasket permanently adhered to cover.
.4
Hinges: Heavy-duty pintle hinges with 9.5 mm (3/8") type 316 stainless steel hinge pins.
.5
Latch: Self latching, zinc plated outside T handle with stainless steel inside lock and
lever assembly. Unit also has inside and outside padlock provisions.
.6
Lift Assistance: Compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes. Automatic
hold-open arm with grip handle release.
.7
Hardware:
.1
Steel: Engineered composite compression spring tubes. Steel compression
springs with electrocoated acrylic finish.
All other hardware is zinc
plated/chromate sealed.
.8
Size: 610 mm x 610 mm (24" x 24") size.
.9
Finish: Baked on polyester enamel paint finish.
.10 Acceptable Product:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 72 33
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Roof Hatches
2.2
.1
Acudor ‘Model G3232’.
.2
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
Fabrication
.1
Fit joints and junctions between components tightly, to prevent entry of water into
component voids and interior of building. Cap open ends of sections exposed to view.
.2
Fabricate work with materials and component sizes, complete with metal gauges,
reinforcing, anchors, and fastenings of adequate strength to ensure that it will remain
free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, and distortion within limits of
intended and specified use. Conceal and weld connections wherever possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
.2
Incorporate devices to which roofing and flashing may be secured, and, install work to
ensure that roofing and flashings will be properly installed to maintain weather-tight
building.
.3
Verify under work of this section that installed products function properly.
.4
Adjust hardware to function smoothly and without binding and to ensure that
components fit in a weather-tight fashion.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
Section 07 84 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
.2
Section excludes:
.1
1.2
.1
.2
Firestopping and smoke seals, for mechanical, electrical and communications
penetrations of fire resistant assemblies, and firestopping and smoke seals within
their respective assemblies.
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
.1
Coordinate with other sections to assure that pipes, conduit, cable, and other
items that penetrate fire rated construction, have been permanently installed prior
to installation of firestop assemblies.
.2
Schedule the Work to assure that penetrations and other construction that
conceals penetrations are not erected prior to the installation of firestop and
smoke seals.
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.1
1.3
Materials installed in cavities, joints, around penetrations, and openings in floors,
walls, partitions, and other building components to restrict the spread of fire and
smoke.
Representatives for the mechanical and electrical work and independent
inspection and testing company shall attend pre-installation meeting.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data: Submit data and installation instructions for Products and prefabricated
devices, providing descriptions sufficient for identification at the Place of the Work.
.1
Materials list of Products proposed for use in the work of this section;
.2
Listing agency's detailed drawing showing opening, penetrating items, and
firestopping materials, identified with listing agency's name and number or
designation, fire rating achieved, and date of listing.
.3
Manufacturer’s specifications, detail sheets, and other data needed to prove
compliance with the specified requirements;
.4
Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certification that installed firestopping and
smoke seal Products are suitable for the use indicated and comply with specified
requirements.
.5
Submit fire resistance rating test listings for firestopping and smoke seal
systems.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
.6
.3
.4
1.4
.1
Section 07 84 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and shop drawing
details when no ULC, c-UL or other Canadian listed assembly is available for an
application.
Engineered judgment must include both Project name and
Subcontractor’s name who will install firestop system as described in shop
drawing.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit drawings indicating fire resistance rated assembly number, required
temperature, hose stream, and flame rating, material thicknesses, installation
methods and materials of firestopping and smoke seals, primers, supports,
damming materials as applicable, reinforcements, anchorages, fastenings and
methods of installation for each condition to be encountered.
.2
Designate on shop drawings static through penetrations and dynamic joint
systems, relative positions, expansion and control joints in rated slabs and walls,
firestopping details at receptacles and similar poke-through devices and
surrounding permanent materials. Identify re-entry locations.
Manufacturers’ instructions:
.1
Manufacturer of the Products proposed for use in the work of this section shall
prepare a firestopping manual scheduling the products to be used for each
assembly and installation required in the Work.
.2
Manual shall include manufacturer’s Product data sheets as specified under
paragraph 1.3.2.
.3
Firestopping manual shall be submitted within 4 weeks of Contract award.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers with minimum 5
years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified
and with approval, training and certification of Product manufacturers.
.1 Submit proof of manufacturer’s installer certification for each installer of
firestopping and smoke sealant systems.
.2 Manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping Products to the Contractor
or to a Subcontractor or installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself
confer qualification on the buyer.
.2
.2
Applicator shall designate a single individual as Project foreperson who shall be
present at the Place of the Work at all times throughout the work of this section
when the work of this section is being performed.
Regulatory requirements:
.1
Firestop systems shall be listed in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-11 and
tested assemblies shall achieve a fire resistance rating in accordance with
building code.
.2
Proposed firestopping and smoke seal materials and methods shall conform to
applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
1.5
Section 07 84 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Delivery Storage, and Handling
.1
Deliver the materials to the Place of the Work in the manufacturer's unopened
containers, containing the classification label, with labels intact and legible at time of
use.
.2
Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations with proper
precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed.
.3
Do not use damaged or adulterated materials and materials exceeding their expiry date.
1.6
.1
Field Conditions
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions relative to temperature and humidity conditions,
before, during and after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Manufacturers
.1
General: Manufacturers of firestopping and smoke seal system Products and installation
specialists for the work of this section are limited to applicable assemblies as required
for the Work and having listing mark on packaging.
.2
Acceptable manufacturers for work of this section:
2.2
.1
3M Canada Inc.
.2
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
.3
Dow Corning.
.4
Hilti Canada Corp.
.5
Hubbard Enterprises / Holdrite.
.6
Nuco – Self-Seal Firestopping Products.
.7
Specified Technologies Inc.
.8
Tremco Canada Ltd.
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Provide firestop and smoke seal systems consisting of a material, or combination of
materials installed to retain the integrity of fire-rated construction by effectively impeding
the spread of flame, smoke, and/or hot gasses through penetrations, blank openings or
gaps, membrane penetrations, construction joints, or at perimeter fire containment in or
adjacent to fire-rated barriers.
.2
Provide also smoke sealants applied over firestopping materials or combination smoke
seal/firestop seal material to form air tight barriers to retard the passage of gas and
smoke.
.3
Provide fire-resistance rating equivalent to the rating of the adjacent floor, wall or other
fire separation assembly.
.4
Provide firestopping, at fire rated assemblies with assembly STC rating requirements,
with STC rating equal or better to STC rating of fire rated assembly.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
Section 07 84 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.5
Provide firestopping and smoke sealant system assemblies as practical and as required
to coordinate with the schedule and sequencing of the Work.
.6
Confirm locations of exposed/non-exposed firestopping/smoke seal surfaces with
Consultant prior to application.
.7
Provide movement capability at movement joints in accordance with design
requirements for movement joint.
2.3
.1
.2
Materials
Single source responsibility for firestopping and smoke seal materials:
.1
Obtain firestopping and smoke seal materials from single manufacturer for each
different Product required.
.2
Manufacturer shall instruct applicator in procedures for each material.
Firestopping and smoke seal systems shall conform to the following:
.1
Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier
against flame, smoke and gasses in compliance with requirements of CAN/ULCS115-11 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended.
.2
Provide firestopping materials and systems with fire-resistance rating not less
than the fire-resistance rating of applicable adjacent assembly.
.3
Listed in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-11.
.4
For services that penetrate a fire separation or a membrane forming part of an
assembly required to have a fire-resistance rating, provide firestop system with
"F" rating as required by building code.
.5
For combustible pipe penetrations through a fire separation required to have a
fire-resistance rating, provide firestop system with “F” rating as required by
building code.
.6
For services that penetrate a fire wall or a horizontal fire separation that is
required to have a fire-resistance rating, provide firestop system with “FT” rating
as required by building code.
.7
For joints in fire-separations, provide firestop system as required by building
code.
.8
Products shall be compatible with abutting dissimilar membranes, architectural
coatings, finishes at floors, walls and ceilings. Check with requirements of
Contract Documents and manufacturer of selected materials being installed.
.3
Smoke sealants for overhead and vertical joints shall be non-sagging; sealants for floors
shall be self-levelling.
.4
Smoke seal sealant colour: Grey in areas exposed to view.
.5
Smoke sealants at vertical through penetrations in areas with floor drains shall be
waterproof type.
.6
Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe
(closed and open piping systems).
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
Section 07 84 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written Product data including Product
technical bulletins, Product installation instructions and Product packaging instructions.
Preparation
.1
Examine sizes, anticipated movement and conditions to establish correct thickness and
installation of back-up materials.
.2
Clean bonding surfaces to remove deleterious substances including dust, paint, rust, oil,
grease, moisture, frost and other foreign matter which may otherwise impair effective
bonding.
.3
Prime and mask adjacent surfaces. Mask areas adjacent to sprayed firestopping to limit
firestopping overspray to area not greater than 25 mm (1") of minimum required.
3.3
Installation
.1
Mix and apply firestopping, gas and smoke seals in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and tested designs to achieve required flame rated seal, to prevent
the passage of gas and smoke and, where specifically designated, the passage of fluids.
.2
Provide temporary forming and packing as required and other accessories in
accordance with manufacturers’ written instructions. Apply materials with sufficient
pressure to properly fill and consolidate the mass to seal openings.
.3
Provide fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by techniques to achieve
the following results:
.1
Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,
accessories, and penetrating items.
.2
Install materials so that they contact and adhere to substrates formed by
openings and penetrating items.
.4
Provide joint fillers to provide support of firestop materials during application and at the
position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed firestop
material relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and
develop fire-resistance required.
.5
For materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to Provide
smooth, uniform surfaces. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces.
.6
Seal joints to ensure an air and water resistant seal, capable of withstanding
compressions and extensions due to thermal, wind or seismic joint movement.
.7
Notify Consultant when random completed installations are ready for review, as directed
by Consultant, prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping and as applicable, smoke
seals.
.8
Remove temporary forming and dams only after materials have gained sufficient
strength.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Firestopping and Smoke Seals
3.4
.1
3.5
Identification
Identify through-penetration firestopping and smoke seal systems with pressuresensitive, self-adhesive, printed vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of
penetrated construction on both sides of each firestopping system installation where
labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping and
smoke seal systems. Include the following information on labels:
.1
The words: “Warning: Through-Penetration Firestopping system – Do Not
Disturb”;
.2
Applicator’s name, address and phone number;
.3
Designation of applicable testing and inspection agency;
.4
Date of installation;
.5
Manufacturer’s name for firestopping and smoke seal system materials.
Field Quality Control
.1
Quality control to be in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Field tests and inspections:
.3
Section 07 84 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.1
Inspection consultant to review installation of the work of this section and to
perform random tests to verify its completion in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
.2
Give at least 48 hours notice before operations commence, and arrange for a
pre-job conference with the Contractor, Subcontractor, inspection and testing
company, manufacturer, and Consultant present.
.3
Inspection and testing company shall examine penetration firestopping in
accordance with ASTM E2174-14b and ASTM E2393-10a as applicable.
Inspection and testing company shall examine firestopping and shall determine,
in general, that firestopping has been installed in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and the tested and listed firestop
system.
.4
Representatives of the manufacturer(s) shall have access to the Work.
Contractor shall provide assistance and facilities for such access in order that the
manufacturer(s) representative(s) may properly perform its function.
Manufacturer’s field review to be in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Exterior building sealants.
.2
Interior building sealants.
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.1
The following items shall be addressed at the pre-installation meeting:
.1 Analysis of the work.
.2 Shape factor of the joint.
.3 Recommendations for priming joints.
.4 Inspection of surfaces and joints.
.5 Compatibility of materials.
.6 Backing materials.
1.3
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.3
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
.2
Submit manufacturer's and Product name for each sealant which will be used in
the Work prior to commencing the Work.
.3
For Products specified to comply with SWR Institute Sealant Validation Program,
provide written confirmation from SWRI of Product compliance.
Samples:
.1
.4
Submit "wet sample" sealant colour samples for each sealant Product and
colour.
Test and evaluation reports:
.1
Test sealant in contact with samples of materials to be sealed to verify adhesion
will be achieved and no staining of the material will result. Prepare sample joints
at the Place of the Work of each type of sealant for each joint condition.
.1 Submit test results to Consultant prior to application of sealants.
.2
Test sealant in contact with samples of porous materials to be sealed to ensure
that no staining of the material will result in accordance with ASTM C1248.
.1 Submit test results to Consultant prior to application of sealants.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
1.4
.1
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
.2
Mock-up:
.1
1.5
Installers / applicators: Execute the work of this section only by a Subcontractor
with minimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and
assemblies specified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers,
and is a member in good standing of the Sealant and Waterproofing Association.
Installer to comply with quality assurance articles referenced in ASTM C1193-13
for installation of joint sealants.
Submit 2440 mm (96") long sealant joint mock-up.
Field Conditions
.1
Verify substrates and ambient air temperature at the Place of the Work before, during
and after application to ensure compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Surfaces shall be frost-free, dust-free, clean and completely dry at time of installation.
.2
Sealant and substrate materials: Conform to sealant manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations. Keep organic sealant materials heated to at least 16°C when working
at temperatures below 10°C.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Sealants
General:
.1
Colours: Sealant colours shall match colours of adjacent materials, as selected
and approved by Consultant.
.1 Standard colours: to later selection by Consultant form manufacturer’s
standard range.
.2
.2
Comply with ASTM C920-11 and other requirements indicated for each liquidapplied chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C920-11
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
.3
For sealants to be applied to porous substrates: Provide products that have
undergone testing according to ASTM D1248-12 and have not stained porous
joint substrates indicated for Work.
.4
Sealant supplied shall not exude any material(s) which travels into adjacent
materials, or travels onto surfaces of adjacent materials; causing damage, or
attracting soiling, which becomes apparent during the service life of the building.
Exterior sealants; joints in vertical surfaces:
.1
Sealant: single-component, non-sag, low to medium modulus non-bleed, highperformance silicone joint sealant, in accordance with the following:
.1 Comply with:
.1 ASTM C920-11, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 or greater.
.2 CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87.
.3 SWR Institute Sealant Validation Program.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 Dow Corning ‘790’.
.2 Dow Corning ‘795’.
.3 Momentive ‘Silpruf NB SCS2700 or SCS 2000’.
.4 Sika ‘Sikasil WS-290’.
.5 Sika ‘Sikasil WS-295’.
.6 Tremco, Inc. 'Spectrem 1’.
.7 Sika ‘Sikasil WS-295’.
.3
Interior general sealants:
.1
VOC limit: less than 250 g/L.
.2
Interior sealant; at joints with painted gypsum board: one-component paintable
acrylic or polyurethane sealant in accordance with the following:
.1 Comply with:
.1 ASTM C834-10.
.2 CGSB 19-GP-5M-1984.
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 BASF Building Systems ‘Sonolac’.
.2 Sika ‘Sikaflex 1A’.
.3 Tremco, Inc. ‘Tremflex 834’.
.3
Interior sealant, mildew resistant one part silicone sealant in accordance with the
following:
.1 Comply with:
.1 ASTM C920-11, Type S, Grade NT, Class 25
.2 CAN/CGSB 19.22-M89.
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 BASF Building Systems "OmniPlus";
.2 Dow Corning "786"
.3 Momentive "Sanitary SCS1700 Sealant"
.4 Sika ‘Sikasil GP’.
.5 Tremco, Inc. "Tremsil 200";
2.2
.1
Accessories
General: Provide joint sealants, primers, backings, and fillers that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates and other sealants or joint fillers specified and
approved for applications indicated under joint sealant scheduled and under conditions
of service and application as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on
proven test results and field experience.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
.2
Cylindrical sealant backings: Provide joint backings that meet ASTM C1330-02, Type O
(open-cell polyurethane), or Type B (non-absorbent bi-cellular backing materials with
surface skin), sized 25 percent or greater than joint opening with proper density to
control sealant depth and profile. Follow joint sealant manufacturer’s recommendations
with backing selections for optimum joint sealant performance, in accordance with the
following schedule:
.1
Use open cell foam with non-absorbing closed cell skin (Sof-Rod) for vertical
joints; round shape for open joints and triangular shape for angular joints.
.2
Use closed cell foam for horizontal joints.
.3
Bond-breaker tape: Polyethylene tape or other approved plastic tape as recommended
by joint sealant manufacturer to prevent 3-sided joint adhesion to rigid, inflexible joint
fillers or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would restrict proper sealant
movement or result in sealant failure.
.4
Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent and compatible with joint sealants and
adjacent surfaces.
.5
Sealant primers: Use primers only as recommended by sealant manufacturer where
required to enhance adhesion of sealant to specific joint substrates indicated and as
determined for use from pre-construction mock-up testing. Select primers in consultation
with sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrate material which do not have a
detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.
.6
Cleaners for nonporous surfaces:
.1
Provide non-staining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to
manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing material, which are not harmful to
substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily
residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service
performance.
.2
Provide cleaner conditioner required for glass and glazed surfaces as
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
3.2
Manufacturer’s Recommendations
Unless specified otherwise herein, comply with the recommendations and directions of
the manufacturer whose materials are being used in the work of this section.
Preparation
.1
Protect adjacent work areas and finished surfaces from damage during joint sealant
installation.
.2
Clean and prepare joint surfaces and substrates of substance that could impair the bond
of joint sealants immediately before installing joint sealants.
.3
Provide a dry, dust-free and cleaned substrate for optimum results.
.4
Clean porous joint surfaces by using heavy-duty brushing, light abrasive, mechanical
abrading or combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound surface for
optimum bond with joint sealants per manufacturer’s recommendations.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
.5
Non-porous surfaces shall be cleaned using the two-cloth wipe method as referenced in
ASTM C1193-13 and outlined by joint sealant manufacturer’s instruction.
.6
Rusting or scaling surfaces shall be prepared using abrasive cleaning methods as
recommended by joint sealant manufacturer prior to joint sealant installation.
Efflorescence, mould, mildew and algae must be removed and neutralized prior to joint
sealant installation.
.7
Coordinate cleaning, priming and installation to avoid contamination of wet, freshly
coated or adjacent finished surfaces. Prepare finish-coated surfaces per joint sealant
manufacturer’s specific recommendations.
.8
Test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion before any sealing is
commenced. Submit reports in writing to Consultant of results.
3.3
.1
3.4
Masking
Where necessary to prevent contamination or marring surfaces of adjacent materials,
mask areas adjacent to joints with masking tape prior to priming or sealing application.
Remove tape immediately after joint has been completed and an initial set achieved.
Installation
.1
Review the complete Contract Documents for extent of sealant work required.
.2
Apply joint sealants for continuous waterproof sealant joint protection. Vertical joints
shall be lapped over horizontal joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Comply
with installation recommendations in ASTM C1193-13 for use of joint sealants as
applicable to each specific sealant installation.
.3
Install sealant primers only when recommended by sealant manufacturer and
demonstrated at pre-construction tests after joint surface preparation has been
completed and when surfaces are verified as clean and dry. Allow any primer installation
to completely dry or cure prior to installation of backing or joint sealants.
.4
Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and in
proper sequence with installation of primers and backings.
.5
.1
Using proper joint sealant dispensing equipment, place sealants by pushing
sealant beads into opening to fully wet-out joint sealant substrates. Fill sealant
joint opening to full and proper configuration.
.2
Install, providing uniform cross-sectional shapes and depths in relation to joint
width for optimum sealant movement capability per joint sealant manufacturer’s
instructions.
Joint sealant tooling is required for non-sag joint sealant installations. Immediately after
placing fresh sealants and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants using metal
spatulas designed for this purpose in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Provide a smooth, uniform sealant finish, eliminating air pockets and ensuring good
contact for optimum sealant adhesion within each side of the joint opening.
.1
Provide concave joint configuration as indicated per figure 5-A in ASTM C119313 unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolour sealants or adjacent surfaces.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
.3
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint openings using metal
spatula, promptly cleaning any sealant residue from adjacent finished surfaces.
Remove masking after joint sealant is installed.
.6
Allow single-component sealants to fully cure before adhesion testing is performed as
recommended by joint sealant manufacturer.
.7
Match approved sealant mock-up for colour, finish and overall aesthetics. Remove,
refinish or re-install work not in compliance with the Contract Documents.
.8
When surfaces of adjacent materials are to be painted, perform sealant work before
these surfaces are painted.
.9
Verify contact materials are compatible with primer and sealant. When incompatible,
inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatible type acceptable to
Consultant.
.10 Check form release agent used on concrete for compatibility with primer and sealant. If
they are incompatible inform Consultant and change primer and sealant to compatible
type, or clean concrete to sealant manufacturer's acceptance.
.11 Install joint backing material, filler strips, gaskets, bond breakers and similar type
material of comparable performance characteristics. Install bond breaker tape or packing
over asphalt impregnated fibre board as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
.12 Where joints are 12.7 mm (1/2") or deeper, insert backing material in continuous uniform
compression with setback from finished face of adjoining materials equal to required
depth of sealant (width/depth ratio) as specified herein.
.13 On horizontal traffic surfaces, support joint filler against vertical movement which might
result from traffic loads, including foot traffic.
.14 Pack joints tightly with sealant backing set at depth specified for sealant. Fill other voids
with filler.
.15 Install bond breaker tape in bottom of joints in lieu of sealant backing where proper
depth cannot be obtained when backing is installed.
.16 Maintain correct sealant depth. Sealant depth shall be 1/2 the width of the joint,
maximum depth shall be 12.7 mm (1/2"), minimum depth shall be 6 mm (1/4"). Comply
with manufacturer's written recommendations.
.17 Fillet bead sealant joints to be sized to provide proper contact area with substrates, in
accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
.18 Apply sealants using pressure-operated guns fitted with suitable nozzles in accordance
with manufacturer's directions. Apply sealants in such manner as to ensure good
adhesion to sides of joints and to completely fill voids in joints.
.19 Apply sealants so that surfaces of joints are smooth, full bead, free from ridges, wrinkles,
sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. Tool sealant surfaces to produce a smooth
surface.
.20 Remove droppings and excess sealant as work progresses, before material achieves
initial set.
.21 Primer is mandatory for gun applied sealants.
.22 Install sealant with exterior face of sealant set back 10 mm (3/8") from face of adjacent
materials at building movement joints, unless otherwise indicated.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
.23 Do not apply sealants to areas where installation of paints, coatings or flooring is in
progress. Apply sealants after such work is complete and fully cured.
3.5
Exterior Sealant Schedule
.1
Include in work of this section joint sealants in exterior assemblies to seal open joints in
surfaces exposed to view, and to make building weather-tight, as indicated, and as
otherwise specified, except where specified under the work of other sections.
.2
Exterior sealant work is part of the work of this section. Install sealant to:
3.6
.1
Perimeters of exterior openings where frames/glazing meet exterior facade of
building.
.2
Movement and control joints in exterior surfaces of insitu concrete and masonry.
.3
Exterior joints between masonry and insitu concrete.
.4
Exterior joints in horizontal wearing surfaces.
Interior Sealant Schedule
.1
Include in work of this section sealants to seal open joints in surfaces exposed to view,
and to make building weather-tight and air-tight, as applicable, as indicated, and as
otherwise specified, except where specified under the work of other sections.
.2
Install sealant to:
.3
.1
Movement and control joints on exposed insitu concrete walls.
.2
Interior control and expansion joints in floor and wall surfaces.
.3
Raked out joints at junctions of masonry with concrete walls and columns, and at
intersection of masonry walls and partitions where joint reinforcement is installed.
.4
Perimeters of exterior and interior door and window frames.
.5
Joints at tops of non-load bearing masonry walls at the underside of insitu
concrete.
.6
Exposed interior control joints in gypsum board.
.7
Millwork junctions with walls.
Mildew resistant sealant at wet areas:
.1
Perimeter joints of wet fixtures such as:
.1 Water closets.
.2
3.7
Counter/wall junctions at countertops.
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Clean off excess sealant or sealant residue adjacent to sealant joint installations as the
work progresses by methods approved by joint sealant manufacturer.
.2
Do not damage adjacent surfaces with harmful removal techniques and protect finished
surfaces beyond those that have been masked.
.3
Remove and replace damaged joint sealants.
.4
Remove temporary coverings and masking protection from adjacent work areas upon
completion.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 07 92 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
Joint Sealants
3.8
.1
Protection
Protect installed sealants during and after final curing from damage resulting during
construction.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Hollow metal doors and panels (steel doors).
.2
Metal frames (steel frames, transom frames).
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
.1
1.3
Cooperate fully with finish hardware distributor's representative
preparation of shop drawings and execution of shop fabrication.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit copy of NAAMM-HMMA 840-07 standard.
.3
Product data sheets:
.1
.4
1.4
.1
during
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Include details of each door and frame type, finish hardware types and locations,
frame profiles, door and frame elevations, mitre details, fire protection rating,
glazing preparation details and anchor details and locations.
.2
Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to
numbering on drawings and in door schedule.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Manufacturers:
.1 Provide doors and frames manufactured by a firm specializing in the design
and production of hollow metal steel doors and frames.
.2 Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Canadian Steel Door
Manufacturers Association (CSDMA).
1.5
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Inspect materials thoroughly upon receipt and report immediately discrepancies,
deficiencies and damages, in writing, to Supplier.
.2
Note damages incurred during shipment on carriers' bill of lading and report immediately,
in writing, to Supplier.
.3
Store materials properly on planks, out of water and covered to protect from damage
from adverse weather conditions. Remove wet packaging immediately.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
.4
Section 08 11 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Remove wrappings or coverings from doors upon receipt at the Place of the Work, and
store in a vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between them.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
Manufacturer
The following manufacturers are approved for work of metal doors and frames:
.1
All Steel Doors 2000 Ltd.
.2
Apex Industries Inc.
.3
Artek Door (1985) Ltd.
.4
Daybar Industries Ltd.
.5
Fleming-Baron Door Products.
.6
Gensteel Doors.
.7
LMT Group Inc.
.8
M.J. Daley Manufacturing Co. Ltd.
.9
Shanahan's Manufacturing Ltd.
.10
Trillium Steel Doors Limited.
.11
Vision Hollow Metal Limited.
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Exterior insulated metal doors shall be tested to meet an operable U-value of 0.400.
.2
Fire rating requirements:
2.3
.1
.1
Fire rated labelled doors and frames: tested to CAN/ULC-S104-10 and listed by a
nationally recognized agency having a factory inspection service and shall be
constructed as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection
Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.
.2
Install fire labelled steel door and frame products in accordance with NFPA 80,
except where indicated otherwise.
Materials
Steel:
.1
Fabricated from tensioned levelled steel to ASTM A924/A924M-14, galvanized to
ASTM A653/A653M-11 , Commercial Steel CS, Type B.
.2
Steel shall be free of scale, pitting, coil breaks, surface blemishes, buckles,
waves, and other defects.
.3
Equivalent minimum base steel thicknesses for gauges shall be in accordance
with Appendix 1 of CSDMA “Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel
Door and Frame Products”.
.4
Finish:
.1 Unless otherwise indicated: Galvanneal coating designation ZF120 (A40).
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.2 Where indicated on drawings: Blackened steel finish in accordance with
Section 05 50 10.
.2
Door core materials:
.1
.3
Honeycomb: Structural small cell 25 mm (1") maximum kraft paper 'honeycomb'.
Weight: 36.3 kg (80 lb) per ream (minimum). Density: 16.5 kg/m3 (1.03 pcf)
minimum, sanded to required thickness.
Adhesives:
.1
Heat resistant, single component, polyurethane reactive (water) hot melt,
thermoset adhesive.
.2
Lock seam doors: fire resistant, resin reinforced polychloroprene, high viscosity
sealant-adhesive.
.4
Primer: rust inhibitive for touch-up.
.5
Finishing hardware: in accordance with Section 08 71 00.
.6
Miscellaneous:
.1
2.4
Door silencers: single stud rubber or neoprene type.
Fabrication - General
.1
Fabricate steel doors, frames, transoms, sidelights and borrowed lights as applicable, to
the design and dimensions indicated. Take field measurements where coordination with
adjoining work is necessary.
.2
Fabricate steel doors and frames to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,
warp, wave or buckle with all corners square unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Operating clearances:
.1
Provide clearance at floor with allowance made for indicated finish flooring
materials.
.2
Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.
.3
Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 3 mm (1/8") at jambs and
heads, except not more than 6 mm (1/4") between pairs of doors. Not more than
19 mm (3/4") at bottom.
.4
Drill and tap or reinforce for mortised or surface mounted hardware in accordance with
accepted hardware schedule, ANSI A115, NFPA 80, or manufacturers
recommendations.
.5
Countersink exposed fasteners unless otherwise shown. Use flat or oval head screws.
.6
Reinforce components to resist stresses imposed by hardware in use.
.7
Allow for anticipated expansion and contraction of frames and supports.
.8
Fit elements at intersections and joints accurately together, in true planes, and plumb
and level.
.9
Perform welding to CSA W59-13.
.10 Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap to receive hardware and security devices using templates
provided by respective Supplier.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.11 Touch up finish damaged during fabrication.
.12 Prepare doors or frames to receive seals where seals are indicated.
.13 Attach labels to suit required fire-protection ratings.
2.5
Fabrication – Steel Doors and Panels
.1
Fabricate steel doors and panels to a thickness of 45 mm (1-3/4"), unless indicated
otherwise.
.2
Interior and non-insulated doors and panels:
.1
Face sheets fabricated from 1.087 mm (18 gauge) steel.
.2
Honeycomb core.
.3
Longitudinal edges mechanically interlocked.
.1 Adhesive assisted with edge seams visible.
.3
Fabricate of composite metal face construction with each face formed from flush sheet
steel without visible seams, free of scale, pitting, coil brakes, buckles and waves.
.4
Formed edges shall be true and straight with minimum radius for the thickness of steel
used.
.5
Lock and hinge edges shall be bevelled 3 mm in 50 mm (1/8" in 2") unless hardware or
door swing dictates otherwise.
.6
Top and bottom of doors shall be provided with inverted, recessed, 1.60 mm (0.063") 16
gauge steel end channels, welded to each face sheet at 50 mm (2") on centre maximum.
.7
Prior to shipment, mark each door with an identification number as shown on the
approved submittal drawings.
.8
Blank, reinforce, drill and tap doors for mortised, templated hardware. Locate hardware
to manufacturer's standard unless indicated otherwise.
.9
Holes 12.7 mm (1/2") and larger shall be factory prepared.
2.6
Fabrication – Steel Frames
.1
General: Applicable to frames, transom panel frames, sidelights, and window
assemblies.
.2
Interior and non-thermally broken frames; welded:
.1
Fabricated from:
.1 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel.
.2
.3
Supplied set-up and welded (SUW).
Heavy duty doors and panels; frameless commercial security duty doors:
.1
Honeycomb core.
.2
Face sheets fabricated from:
.1 2.3 mm (0.091") steel.
.3
Longitudinal edges continuously welded the full height of the door, filled and
ground smooth with no visible seams.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 5
March 22, 2016
.4
Factory assembled frame product shall be square, free of defects, warps or buckles.
.5
Set-up and welded corner joints (SUW):
.1
.6
.7
Profile welded–punch mitred, continuously welded on inside of the profile faces,
rabbets, returns and soffit intersections, with exposed faces filled and ground to a
smooth, uniform seamless surface, as defined in the CSDMA - “Recommended
Specifications for Commercial Steel Door and Frame Products”.
Set-up and welded joints at mullions, sills and center rails:
.1
Coped accurately, butted and tightly fitted.
.2
At intersecting flush profile faces, securely weld, fill and grind to flush, smooth,
uniform, seamless surface.
.3
At intersecting recessed profile faces, securely
reinforcements, with exposed hairline face seams.
.4
At other intersecting profile elements make exposed face seams to hairline
tolerance.
weld
to
concealed
Where required due to site access, when required for co-ordination or installation, or
shipping limitations, frame product shall be fabricated in sections for splicing in the field.
.1
Field spliced jambs, heads and sills shall be provided with 1.60 mm (0.063") 16
gauge steel splice plates securely welded into one section, extending 100 mm
(4") minimum each side of splice joint.
.2
Field splices at closed sections (mullions or center rails) shall be 1.60 mm
(0.063") 16 gauge steel splice angles securely welded to the abutting member.
Face of splice angle shall extend 100 mm (4") minimum into closed sections
when assembled.
.3
Field splice joints shall be welded, filled and ground to present a smooth uniform
surface by the installation company responsible for installation after assembly.
.8
On factory assembled frame product, provide 2 temporary steel shipping bars welded to
the base of the jambs or mullions to maintain alignment during shipping and handling.
Remove shipping bars prior to anchoring of frames to floor.
.9
Each door opening shall be prepared for single stud door silencers. Silencers shall be
shipped loose for installation by installer, after finish painting.
.1
Single interior doors: 3 at strike jamb.
.2
Pair of interior doors: 2 at header.
.3
Sound, light, or smoke sealed doors: None required.
.10 Prior to shipment, mark each frame with an identification number as shown on the
approved submittal drawings.
.11 Provide mullions and transom bars of closed construction type. For fixed condition,
attach members to frame with butt-welded joints. For removable condition, attach
members with removable mullion anchors.
.12 Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated.
.13 Fasten removable stops by counter-sunk Phillips head screws at approximately 225 mm
(9") on centre symmetrically spaced on stop length.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.14 Anchor frames to floor by 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge thick angle clips, welded to frame
and Provide with 2 holes for floor anchorage.
.15 Grind welded corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to uniform
smooth finish.
.16 Protect strike and hinge reinforcements using guard boxes welded to frames at masonry
construction.
.17 Reinforce head of frames wider than 1220 mm (48").
.18 Brace frame units to prevent distortion in shipment and protect finish.
2.7
Hardware Reinforcements and Preparations
.1
Door and frame product shall be blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for
fully templated mortise hardware only, in accordance with the approved hardware
schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier.
.2
Door and frame products shall be factory blanked and reinforced only for mortised
hardware that is not fully templated.
.3
Where surface mounted hardware, anchor hinges, thrust pivots, pivot reinforced hinges,
or non-templated hardware are required frame product shall be reinforced only, with
drilling and tapping done by field installation.
.4
Templated holes 12.7 mm (1/2") diameter and larger shall be factory prepared, except
mounting and through bolt holes, which shall be by installation on site. Templated holes
less than 12.7 mm (1/2") diameter shall be factory prepared only when required for the
function of the device (for knobs, levers, cylinders, thumb or turn pieces) or when these
holes over-lap function holes.
.5
Hinge reinforcements shall be 3.51 mm (0.138") 10 gauge steel minimum, high
frequency type shall be provided.
.6
Frames shall be prepared for 114 mm (4.5”) standard weight hinges minimum unless
otherwise indicated.
.7
Doors and frames in excess of 2450 mm (96") rabbet height shall be prepared for
114 mm (4.5”) heavy weight 4.6 mm (0.180”) hinges minimum.
.8
Lock, strike and flush bolt reinforcements shall be 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel
minimum, with extruded tapped holes that provide equivalent number of threads as 2.74
mm (0.108") 12 gauge.
.9
Reinforcements for surface mounted hardware, concealed closers and holders and flush
bolts shall be 1.30 mm (0.051") 18 gauge steel minimum.
.10 Reinforcements are not required for surface applied hardware supplied with thru-bolts
and spacers or sex-bolts.
.11 Provide hardware mortises on perimeter frame members to be grouted in masonry or
concrete partitions with 0.84 mm (0.033") 22 gauge steel grout guards.
2.8
.1
Frame Anchorage
Frame products shall be provided with anchorage appropriate to floor, wall and frame
construction.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 7
March 22, 2016
.2
Each wall anchor shall be located immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement
on the hinge jamb and directly opposite on the strike jamb.
.3
Frame products for installation in new masonry walls shall be provided with steel
adjustable wall anchors of the T-strap, stirrup or wire, 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge
minimum or 3.96 mm (0.156”) diameter wire. Straps shall be not less than 50 mm
(2") x 254 mm (10”) in size, corrugated and/or perforated.
.4
Frame products installed in steel stud and drywall partitions shall be provided with
1.00 mm (0.039") 20 gauge steel snap-in or "Z" stud type anchors.
.5
Jambs of frames in previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel shall be
punched and dimpled to accept machine bolt anchors, 6.4 mm (1/4") diameter, located
not more than 150 mm (6") from the top and bottom of each jamb. Anchor preparations
and guides shall also be located immediately above or below the intermediate hinge
reinforcing and directly opposite on the strike jamb. Each preparation shall be provided
with 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge anchor bolt guides.
.6
Anchor bolts and expansion shell anchors for the above preparations shall be provided
by the installation company.
.7
Where frame product is installed prior to construction of the adjacent wall, each jamb
shall be provided with 1.60 mm (0.063") 16 gauge steel floor anchors. Each anchor shall
be provided with 2 holes for mounting to the floor and shall be securely welded to the
inside of the jamb profile.
.8
On sidelights or windows exceeding 3 m (9’-10”) in width, installed in stud partitions,
channel extensions shall be provided from the top of the frame assembly to the
underside of the structure above. Extensions shall be fabricated from 2.74 mm (0.108")
12 gauge steel formed channels, mounting angles and adjusting brackets, with mounting
angles welded to the inside of frame head. Formed channels, adjusting brackets and
fasteners shall be shipped loose. Channels shall be mechanically connected to
mounting angles and adjusting brackets with supplied fasteners, on site, by contractor
responsible for installation.
2.9
Sizes and Tolerances
.1
Widths of door openings shall be measured from inside of frame jamb rabbet with a
tolerance of ± 1.6 mm (+0.063").
.2
Heights of door openings shall be measured from the finished floor (exclusive of floor
coverings) to the head rabbet of the frame with a tolerance of ± 1.2 mm (± 0.047").
.3
Unless finishing hardware dictates otherwise, doors shall be sized so as to fit the above
openings and allow a 3 mm (1/8") clearance at jambs and head. A clearance of 19 mm
(3/4") between the bottom of the door and the finished floor (exclusive of floor coverings)
shall be provided. Tolerances on door sizes shall be ± 1.2 mm (± 0.047").
.4
Manufacturing tolerances on formed frame profiles shall be ± 0.8 mm (± 0.031") for
faces, door stop heights and jamb depths. Tolerances for throat openings and door
rabbets shall be ± 1.6 mm (± 0.063") and ± 0.4 mm (± 0.016") respectively. Hardware
cut-out dimensions shall be as per template dimensions, ±0.4 mm (+0.015").
2.10
.1
Hardware Locations
Hardware preparations in frame product shall be as noted below and locations on doors
shall be adjusted for clearances specified in paragraph 2.9 of this section.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 8
March 22, 2016
.2
Top of upper hinge preparation for 114.3 mm (4.5”) hinges shall be located 180 mm
(7.5”) down from head, transom mullion or panel as appropriate. The top of the bottom
hinge preparation for 114.3 mm (4.5”) hinges shall be located 310 mm (12.625”) from
finished floor as defined in paragraph 2.9 of this section. Intermediate hinge
preparations shall be spaced equally between top and bottom cutouts.
.3
Strike preparations for unit, integral, cylindrical and mortise locks and roller latches shall
be centered 1033 mm (40-5/16") from finished floor. Strikes for deadlocks shall be
centered at 1220 mm (48") from finished floor. Strikes for panic or fire exit hardware
shall be located as per device manufacturer's templates.
.4
Push and/or pulls on doors shall be centered 1070 mm (42") from finished floor.
.5
Preparations not noted above shall be as per hardware manufacturer's templates.
.6
Hardware preparation tolerances shall comply with the ANSI A115 standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Provide necessary grounds, bracing and strapping for fitting and adequate for securing
of the work.
.2
Cooperate with work of other sections to ensure fastenings set by others are provided
and located, their work is installed to their specifications and that those responsible for
back priming are notified in sufficient time for them to schedule work.
3.2
Installation – Steel Doors and Frames
.1
Set frame product plumb, square, aligned, without twist at correct elevation in
accordance with NAAMM-HMMA 840-07.
.2
Frame product installation tolerances:
.1
Plumbness tolerance, measured through a line from the intersecting corner of
vertical members and the head to the floor, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").
.2
Squareness tolerance, measured through a line 90 from one jamb at the upper
corner of the product, to the opposite jamb, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").
.3
Alignment tolerance, measured on jambs, through a horizontal line parallel to the
plane of the wall, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").
.4
Twist tolerance, measured at face corners of jambs, on parallel lines
perpendicular to the plane of the wall, shall be ±1.6 mm (±1/16").
.3
Fire labelled product shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80.
.4
Brace frame product rigidly in position while building-in. Remove temporary steel
shipping jamb spreaders. Install temporary wood spreaders at mid-point of frame rabbet
height to maintain frame widths. Remove wood spreaders after product has been builtin.
.5
Provide vertical support at center of head for openings exceeding 1250 mm (48") in
width.
.6
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08 11 13
Page 9
March 22, 2016
.7
Execute installation and assembly using skilled forces under supervision of a competent
joinery foreperson.
.8
Install doors in accordance with NAAMM-HMMA 840-07, maintaining clearances
outlined in paragraph 2.9 of this section.
.9
Install finishing hardware in accordance with ANSI A115.1G-1994, manufacturers'
templates and instructions, and Section 08 71 00.
.10 Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.
.11 Steel surfaces shall be kept free of grout, tar or other bonding materials or sealers.
.12 Remove grout or other bonding material from products immediately following installation.
.13 Provide appropriate anchorage for floor and wall construction. Each wall anchor shall be
located immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on the hinge jamb and
directly opposite the strike jamb. On each jamb, install 2 anchors for openings up to and
including 1525 mm (60") high and install 1 anchor for each additional height of 760 mm
(30") of height or fraction thereof, except as indicated below. Frames placed in
previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel shall be Provided with anchors
located not more than 150 mm (6") from top and bottom of each jamb, and intermediate
anchors at 660 mm (26") on centre maximum.
.14 Secure frames set in previously constructed concrete or masonry openings by
countersunk expansion bolts at same centres as for adjustable Tee wall anchors.
Reinforce frame at fastening location to prevent indentation of frame by fastening device.
.15 Fill and grind smooth “punch and dimpled” frame installations.
.16 Prior to site touch-up, exposed surfaces of galvanneal steel to be finished shall be
cleaned to remove foreign matter. Refer to paint manufacturers recommendations for
additional information and requirements of Section 09 91 00.
.17 Touch-up exposed field welds shall be finished to present a smooth uniform surface and
with a rust inhibitive primer.
.18 Touch-up exposed surfaces that have been scratched or otherwise marred during
shipment, installation, and handling shall be with a rust inhibitive primer.
.19 Finish paint in accordance with Section 09 91 00.
.20 Install door silencers.
.21 Adequately fasten units and secure in place with concealed fixings wherever possible.
Include grounds and furring where required.
.22 Coordinate installation of doors and frames with installation of hardware specified in
Section 08 71 00.
.23 Make allowance for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames.
.24 Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function.
3.3
.1
Installation - Finishing Hardware
Install finishing hardware in accordance with Section 08 71 00.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Steel Doors and Frames
3.4
Section 08 11 13
Page 10
March 22, 2016
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Adjust doors to swing freely, smoothly and easily, to remain stationary at any point, to
close evenly and tightly against stops without binding, and to latch positively when doors
are closed with moderate force.
.2
Adjust hardware so that latches and locks operate smoothly and without binding, and
closers act positively with the least possible resistance in use. Lubricate hardware if
required by Supplier’s instructions.
.3
Ensure that doors equipped with closers operate to close doors firmly against anticipated
wind and building air pressure, and to enable doors to be readily opened as suitable for
function, location and traffic.
.4
Clean hardware after installation in accordance with Supplier’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Interior Aluminum Screen and Door Frames
Section 08 12 16
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Interior aluminum screen and door frames.
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
.4
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Partition sample to show basic construction, glazed sections, door frames, trim,
and finishes.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings for the work of this section.
.2
Clearly indicate fabrication details, plans, elevations, hardware, and installation
details.
.3
Indicate door location using numbering system per door schedule, size, and hand
of each door, elevation of each door type; construction type core and edge
construction not covered in product data; and special blocking requirements.
.4
Indicate dimensions and locations of factory machining criteria for hardware,
extent of hardware blocking.
.5
Indicate electrified hardware requirements and preparations.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
.3
Maintenance materials:
.1
1.5
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance
manual.
Submit minimum 2% extra snap-in trim, stops, clips, and other components for
each colour, pattern, and finish specified.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications of Installers: Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers
with minimum 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies
specified and with training of Product manufacturers.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Interior Aluminum Screen and Door Frames
.2
Mock-ups:
.1
1.6
.1
Section 08 12 16
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Provide mock-up of one door and one fixed panel. Mock-up may remain as a part
of the completed work subject to approval of Consultant.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Package or crate, and brace products to prevent damage during shipment and handling.
Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces from environmental conditions
where required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
Manufacturer
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacturers:
.1
Teknion.
.2
Haworth.
.3
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Design system to accommodate glass and glazing as specified or indicated.
.2
Extruded aluminum: Controlled alloy billets of 6063 T5, to assure compliance with tight
dimensional tolerances and maintain colour uniformity.
2.3
.1
.2
Architectural Wall System
Specifications are based on the Teknion ‘Altos’ system. The following listed systems are
acceptable only when in compliance with requirements of this section:
.1
Haworth ‘Enclose’.
.2
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
System description: Provide frames with the following characteristics:
.1
Door elevations:
.1 Type: Full-height.
.2 Hinged doors:
.1 Glass: 10 mm (3/8") clear tempered glass.
.3 Hardware:
.1 Base mounted door stops.
.2 Levers:
.1 Saturn.
.2 With standard lock and cylinder.
.2
Wall elevations:
.1 Glazed fascia: Segmented with transom for doors, as indicated on drawings.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Interior Aluminum Screen and Door Frames
Section 08 12 16
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.1 Fascia; bottom segment: Glass: 10 mm (3/8") clear tempered glass.
.2 Fascia; top segment: Glass: 10 mm (3/8") clear tempered glass.
.2 Base fascia: Anodized aluminum.
.3 Ceiling fascia: Anodized aluminum.
.3
Performance:
.1
Sound Transmission Classification of 40 unless otherwise indicated, tested in
accordance with ASTM E90-04 by an independent agency, without the aid of
acoustical batting.
.2
Wall system must be certified under UL 723. Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials, and achieve up to Class A rating.
.3
Wall system has been tested for structural performance in accordance with
ASTM E72-15.
.4
Wall system shall provide non-visible methods of panel attachment and
connection that includes a continuous, full-height sound and light seal.
.5
Wall system shall accommodate floor and ceiling height variances of up to
64 mm (2-1/2"), including 64 mm (2-1/2") expansion and 12.7 mm (1/2")
compression. Frame must permit on-site height modifications for reconfiguration
to location with alternate ceiling height in a non-seismic zone.
.6
Wall system shall be erected and disassembled in a non-damaging manner to
finished surfaces, including floors, walls, ceilings, columns, windows mullions,
bulkheads, and exterior curtain wall profiles including convection units, and
provide a tight and concealed fit.
.7
Ceiling channel shall be in minimum 3050 mm (10’) one-piece lengths, formed
steel capable of accepting resilient light and sound seal recessed from panel
face. Ceiling channel must be capable of attaching to multiple standard ceiling
types in a non-damaging manner.
.8
Floor attachment is to be achieved without mechanical fastening (in non-seismic
applications). Floor gripper strips are to be designed as an integral part of the
floor channel, and automatically grip on carpet or hard-surface flooring, and be
non-damaging.
.9
Door units shall be interchangeable with like-sized panel assemblies using the
same connection method as panels. Pivot doors shall be designed with nonhanded, reconfigurable door leaf, reversible in the field without additional
modifications or materials. Solid doors shall be 45 mm (1-3/4") thick (pocket
doors shall be 35 mm (1-3/8") thick), architectural quality, solid core wood particle
board or composite core of internal wood sections.
.10
Wall system should have provisions for mounting components from
interconnecting panel and supporting component furniture. The attachment
method shall ensure that components, when properly installed, shall hang level.
The attachment method shall also ensure that the partition is not damaged.
.11
Wall system must be capable of disassembly into component parts for ease of
distribution, installation, inventory and storage.
.12
Fully glazed walls are to achieve a minimum STC rating of 32 using single glazed
elements, and an STC of 38 using double glazed elements, per ASTM E90-04.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Interior Aluminum Screen and Door Frames
2.4
.1
Section 08 12 16
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.13
Doors are to arrive on site prepared to receive all specified hardware.
.14
Aluminum door frames are to arrive on site prepared for specified door hardware.
.15
Door hardware to be furnished by the wall system manufacturer.
Finishes
Exposed aluminum surfaces: thermosetting acrylic enamel to AAMA 2603-02, 0.8 mils
minimum overall dry film thickness.
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 PPG 'Duracron'
.2 Valspar ‘Flurocryl’.
.2
2.5
Colour to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.
Fabrication
.1
Pre-machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates,
drilled and tapped as required and fastened within frame with concealed screws.
.2
Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Provide manufacturer's information and templates required for installation of work of this
section, and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices, and
construction of other work incorporated with products specified in this section in order
that they function as intended.
.2
Install work in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations, true,
tightly fitted, and level or flush to adjacent surfaces, as suitable for installation. Adjust
components to allow for irregularities in adjacent construction and relate accurately to
finished ceiling and floor coverings.
.3
Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates with fasteners
recommended by frame manufacturer.
.4
Use concealed installation clips to assure that splices and connections are tightly butted
and properly aligned.
.5
Secure clips to main structural components and not to snap-in or trim members.
.6
Do not use screws or other fasteners that will be exposed to view when installation is
complete.
.7
Fit joints and junction between components tightly and in true planes, conceal joints
where possible.
3.2
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00 and as follows:
.2
Manufacturer’s field review to be in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Interior Aluminum Screen and Door Frames
3.3
Section 08 12 16
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Verify under work of this section that installed products function properly, and adjust
them accordingly to ensure satisfactory operation.
.2
Refinish damaged or defective Work so that no variation in surface appearance is
discernible.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Access Panels
Section 08 31 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
Architectural access panels.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Further to requirements of Section 01 33 00, indicate locations, types, and sizes
of access panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
.1
.2
Performance/Design Requirements
Materials for fire resistance rated construction shall conform to requirements of indicated
fire resistance rated assembly.
Architectural Access Panels
Acceptable Product:
.1
Bauco Products Incorporated (APS - Access Panel Solutions) ‘Bauco Plus II’
access panels.
.2
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
Description:
.1
Maximum gap between door and frames: 1.5 mm (1/16").
.2
Door: Aluminum frame with gypsum board inlay and structural nylon corner
elements. Door is to be taped and finished to match surrounding surface.
.3
Frame: Recessed aluminum frame provides edge similar to drywall bead against
which wall or ceiling surface can be finished. Finish edge flush with gypsum
board in accordance with trim tolerances specified in Section 09 29 00.
.4
Materials: Extruded Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6. 12.7 mm (1/2") or 15.9 mm (5/8")
gypsum board inlay, thickness shall be consistent with thickness of surrounding
gypsum board. Fibreglass reinforced nylon. Zinc-plated screws, stainless steel
springs and retaining wire.
.5
Hinge: concealed, two point pin hinge, non corroding, as suggested by
manufacturer.
.6
Latch: Screwdriver cam latch (standard).
.7
Finish:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Architectural Access Panels
Section 08 31 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.1 Finish gypsum board to Level 4 in accordance with Section 09 29 00.
.2 Paint completed installation in accordance with Section 09 91 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Access Panels for Drywall
.1
Locations to be reviewed and confirmed by Consultant.
.2
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.3
Install before drywall has been taped and finished.
.4
Fasten frame to drywall with standard drywall fasteners.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors
Section 08 33 24
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Overhead coiling fire-rated doors; fire protection with smoke control (smoke
seals):
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
.4
Shop drawings:
.1
Include details of each door and frame type, hardware types and locations, frame
profiles, door and frame elevations, anchor details and locations.
.2
Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to
numbering on drawings and in door schedule.
Templates:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit information and templates required for installation of work of this section.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
.1
1.6
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into operations and
maintenance manuals.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by a Subcontractor with minimum 5
years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified and with
approval and training of Product manufacturers.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Package or crate, and brace Products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling.
Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Performance/Design Requirements
Exterior overhead coiling door construction shall be designed to withstand windload in
accordance with building code requirements.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors
.2
Regulatory requirements: Oversized label on doors requiring a fire resistance rating, with
ULC or WH fire resistance rating label to doors, for fire resistance ratings as indicated.
.1
.3
2.2
.1
Section 08 33 24
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Provide fire-rated doors with smoke control (smoke seals).
Install fire labelled door products in accordance with NFPA 80, current edition, except
where indicated otherwise.
Materials
Overhead coiling fire-rated doors; fire protection with smoke control (smoke seals):
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 Wayne Dalton ‘Firestar 700C’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Description:
.1
Label: ULC or c-UL.
.1 Fire rated doors to be connected and activated by fire alarm control in
accordance with NFPA 80. Provide a 20 second delay device, flashing light
warning devices (both sides of openings) and warning signs both sides of
openings).
.2 For doors with smoke control (smoke seals):
.1 Provide door with c-UL label for "Leakage Rated Assembly" or "S" label.
.1 Comply with NFPA 105 air leakage requirements.
.2 Pass UL test procedure 1784.
.2
Curtain: Insulated interlocking roll-formed slats. Endlocks shall be attached to
each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement.
.1 Slat:
.1 73 mm (2-7/8”), flat profile, 22 gauge with 24 gauge backer.
.2 Insulation:
.1 Manufacturer’s standard non-combustible mineral wool.
.3
Bottom bar:
.1 Two galvanized structural steel angles 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm (1-1/2" by 11/2" by 1/8") minimum.
.4
Guides:
.1 Minimum 5 mm (3/16") thick steel.
.2 Attach to jambs with 10 mm (3/8") diameter bolts at 760 mm (30") on centre.
.3 Flare upper ends for curtain entry.
.5
Brackets: Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood.
.6
Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type. Counterbalance shall be housed in a
steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.762
mm (0.03") per foot of span. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an
adjusting tension wheel.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors
Section 08 33 24
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.7
Hood: 0.5 mm (0.02") 24 gauge galvanized primed steel minimum for wall
openings through 5791 mm (19') wide, 0.8 mm (0.03") 22 gauge galvanized
primed steel for wall openings over 5791 mm (19') wide. Hood shall be equipped
with thermally controlled, internal, galvanized steel flame baffle as required.
Provide one intermediate support bracket for wall openings over 4115 mm (13'6") wide and two support brackets for wall openings over 5791 mm (19') wide.
.8
Smoke control (smoke seals):
.1 Bottom bar:
.1 For motor operated doors: Combination smoke seal / sensing edge.
.2 Guides and head:
.1 Replaceable, UL listed, nylon pile smoke seals sealing against fascia side
of curtain.
2.3
.1
Finishes
Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM
A653/A653M-11 and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including bonderizing,
5 microns (0.2 mils) thick baked-on prime paint, and 15 microns (0.6 mils) thick bakedon polyester (powder coated) top coat.
.1
Colour: to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.
.2
Guides: steel with polyester powder coating, light gray colour.
.3
Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer.
2.4
.1
Operation
Manual operation:
.1
.2
Manual chain operated type shall be complete with 'U-Test Fire Door Release
System'.
Electrical operation:
.1
Electrical motors, controller units, remote pushbutton stations, relays and other
electrical components: CSA and ULC/c-UL approved.
.2
Controller units with integral motor reversing starter, 3 heater elements for
overload protection, including pushbuttons and control relays as applicable.
.3
Operation:
.1 Remote push button stations: surface mounted, in door locations, with OPENCLOSE key switch.
.2 Automatic closure:
.1 Time delay release device.
.2 Test and reset hoist.
.4
Sensing edge protection:
.1 Electric sensing edge (Sensing /smoke seal edge):
.1 Provide automatic reversing control by automatic sensing switch within
neoprene or rubber astragal extending full width of door bottom bar.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors
Section 08 33 24
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.2 Contact before door fully closes shall cause door to immediately stop
downward travel and reverse direction to fully opened position.
.3 Provide a wireless sensing edge connection to motor operator to
eliminate physical travelling electric cord connection between bottom bar
sensing edge device and motor operator.
.5
Operator controls: Push-button operated control stations with open, close, and
stop buttons for surface mounting, for interior location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Examine building structure, finishes and conditions at the Place of the Work.
.2
Notify Consultant of any adverse conditions which could jeopardize system installation or
system operation. Do not proceed until such conditions have been documented,
assessed, rectified and approved for installation. Starting work indicates acceptance of
conditions unless Consultant is notified otherwise in writing.
3.2
Electrical Wiring
.1
Power shall be brought up to circuit breaker/disconnect switch adjacent to controller
under Division 16 and in conformance with requirements specified therein.
.2
Wiring from motor to switches, controls, starters, safety devices and other items
requiring power shall be carried out under this Section in accordance with requirements
of Division 16.
.3
Use EMT conduit for fixed wiring. Use purpose-made and approved type flexible cables
or cords at applicable locations; adequately support so as not to impede access or foul
moving parts of equipment.
3.3
Installation
.1
Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for
maintenance.
.2
Install hangers, brackets, fastenings, door track, operating hardware and fittings, and
other specified equipment as recommended by door manufacturer.
.3
Install doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
3.4
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Adjust work of this section to ensure free-running, tightly closing and properly
counterbalanced operation. Ensure that installation is free from warp, twist or other
distortion. Lubricate operating hardware.
.2
Refinish damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance is
discernible. Refinish work at site only if approved.
.3
Clean work on completion of installation.
3.5
.1
Closeout Activities
Demonstration:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Overhead Coiling Fire-Rated Doors
.1
.2
Section 08 33 24
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Provide system demonstration and training to Owner’s maintenance personnel
on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting,
servicing, preventive maintenance and procedures for testing and resetting
release devices.
Testing:
.1
Test and adjust controls and safety devices.
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
.2
Test fire-release system and reset components after testing.
.3
Test labelled doors for proper operation by activating fire alarm. Test door in
presence of Consultant.
END OF SECTION
Replace damaged and
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Sectional Glazed Aluminum Doors
Section 08 36 15
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Sectional glazed aluminum doors.
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Shop drawings:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Clearly indicate materials, operating mechanisms, required clearances and
electrical connections.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
.1
1.6
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into operation and
maintenance manual.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Manufacturers: Doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of 5 years
experience in the fabrication and installation of sectional doors. Manufacturers
proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit
evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified,
and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed
within the past 5 years.
.2
Installers / applicators / erectors: Installation of sectional doors shall be
performed by the authorized representative of the manufacturer.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Package or crate, and brace Products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling.
Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Sectional Glazed Aluminum Doors
Section 08 36 15
Page 2
March 22, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
Performance/Design Requirements
Exterior overhead glazed aluminum door construction shall be designed to withstand
windload in accordance with building code requirements.
Materials
.1
General: Single-source responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories
from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from
source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.
.2
Glazed sectional doors:
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 Wayne Dalton ‘451 Series Aluminum Doors’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Description:
.1 Aluminum extrusions: Aluminum alloy AA6063-T6 to ANSI H35.1/H35.1M2013.
.1 Section framing: 35 mm (1-3/8") wide extrusion by 1.57 mm (0.062") thick;
2.7 mm (0.105") thick at mounting hardware locations.
.2 Top rail and end stiles: 89 mm (3-1/2") wide.
.3 Centre stiles: 75 mm (3") wide.
.2 Panel construction:
.1 Bottom panel shall be sandwich panel type with insulated core of
polyurethane foam bonded to 1.29 mm (0.05") thick stucco embossed
aluminum sheets complete with 35 mm (1-3/8") wide extruded aluminum
frame.
.2 Upper panels: glazing units.
.3 Door components shall be replaceable in event of damage.
.4 Glazing: Nominal 13 mm (1/2") thick, hermetically sealed insulating glass
units, clear, tempered glass.
.3
2.3
.1
Metal fabrications: in accordance with Section 05 50 00.
Finishes
Exposed aluminum surfaces; anodized to AAMA 611-98:
.1
Colour anodized to AA Designation AA-M12C22A44 (Class I).
.1 Black.
2.4
.1
Operation
Manual operation:
.1
.2
Manual chain operated type.
Electrical operation:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Sectional Glazed Aluminum Doors
Section 08 36 15
Page 3
March 22, 2016
.1
Electrical motors, controller units, remote pushbutton stations, relays and other
electrical components: CSA and ULC/c-UL approved.
.2
Electric interlocks to prevent operation when locks are engaged.
.3
Controller units with integral motor reversing starter, 3 heater elements for
overload protection, including pushbuttons and control relays as applicable.
.4
Operation:
.1 Remote push button stations: surface mounted, in door locations, with OPENCLOSE key switch.
.2 Automatic closure:
.1 Time delay release device.
.2 Test and reset hoist.
.5
Sensing edge protection; self-monitored system: (supervised or self-monitoring
sensing edges).
.1 Supervised electric sensing edge.
.6
Operator controls:
.1 Control stations with open, close, and stop buttons.
.1 Push-button.
.2 Control mounting: Surface.
.3 Control locations: Locate stations as directed by Consultant.
2.5
Hardware
.1
Steel: Sheet steel galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M-11 , designation G90/Z275,
thicknesses as specified, indicated, or required, unless otherwise specified or indicated.
.2
Track: 2.5 mm (0.1") 11 gauge steel, heavy duty, galvanized, lift hardware as indicated
on the drawings, with 75 mm (3") size track for torsion spring lifting within headroom
conditions imposed by building structure and include ancilliary hardware items. Track
sloped for weathertight closing, 400 mm (16") radius curves, mounted to full size gusset
plates.
.3
Track brackets: 3.04 mm (0.1") (11 gauge) commercially galvanized steel, rib reinforced,
fully adjustable to counteract any unevenness in the jambs. Bolt track brackets to
continuous track mounting angles.
.4
Track hangers: 25.4 x 25.4 mm (1" x 1") 2.28 mm 13 gauge commercially galvanized
steel perforated angles. Provide required number to properly hang the set of hardware.
.5
Rollers: 76.2 mm (3") in diameter, with 7.94 mm (5/16") diameter ball bearings,
11.11 mm (7/16") diameter long stem roller axles and both the inner and outer ball races
of hardened steel.
.6
Hinged roller brackets: 3.04 mm (0.1") (11 gauge) commercially galvanized steel,
located at each section, fitted with heavy steel tube cross pieces in which the roller axles
shall ride.
.7
Hinges: 3.04 mm (0.1") (11 gauge) commercial galvanized steel and shall be located
across the door as required.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Sectional Glazed Aluminum Doors
Section 08 36 15
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.8
Bottom roller brackets: 'wrap-around' design, picking up the bottom corner of the door as
well as acting as the bottom roller carrier, fitted with a pick up cable anchoring device.
.9
Counterbalance:
.1
Head shaft: 32 mm (1-1/4") diameter tube type, with ball bearings at end gusset
plate supports, and intermediate brackets as required to support shaft; to suit
space restriction at installation conditions.
.2
Drum: to suit height and weight of door. The height of the door shall determine
the amount of cable which must be accommodated on the drum, while the door
weight shall determine the cable diameter. Using these two factors, the drums
shall be selected to suit the particular application.
.3
Lift cable: 5 mm (3/16") diameter aircraft cable with 1905 kg (4200 lb) nominal
breaking strength.
.4
Springs: 10,000 cycle grade.
.5
Counterbalance: Torsion springs mounted on shaft designed to counterbalance
weight of door so that door remains open at any position and that is arranged for
convenient adjustment.
.10 Accessories:
2.6
.1
Horizontal sliding lock bolts on interior.
.2
Extruded aluminum and arctic grade vinyl weatherstrip for jambs and head, to
manufacturer's standard.
.3
Weatherstripping: Neoprene bulb weatherstrip for bottom of door continuously
supported. Dual finned seals between sections.
Fabrication
.1
Fabricate Work with materials, and with component dimensions and gauges, reinforcing,
attached anchors and fastenings of adequate strength to prevent warping, buckling,
opening of joints and seams, loosening of hardware, distortion, and displacement within
limits of intended and specified use.
.2
Conceal and weld connections wherever possible.
.3
Fit joints and junctions between components tightly and in true planes.
.4
Isolate from each other dissimilar metals, and metal from concrete or masonry to prevent
electrolysis. On aluminum, use bituminous paint in concealed locations and lacquer
where exposed to view.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Electrical Wiring
.1
Power shall be brought up to circuit breaker/disconnect switch adjacent to controller
under Division 16 - Electrical and in conformance with requirements specified therein.
.2
Wiring from motor to switches, controls, starters, safety devices and other items
requiring power shall be carried out under this section.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Sectional Glazed Aluminum Doors
.3
3.2
Section 08 36 15
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Use EMT conduit for fixed wiring. Use purpose-made and approved type flexible cables
or cords at applicable locations; adequately support so as not to impede access or foul
moving parts of equipment.
Installation – General
.1
Install overhead doors and operators in accordance with door manufacturer's printed
instructions.
.2
Work shall be performed by qualified personnel approved by door manufacturer.
.3
Secure guides to steel framing members, header box to side guides and the motor to
header box.
.4
Drill and tap door frames to receive hardware. Fasten door tracks and stops to door
frame by means of machine bolts; welding will not be permitted.
.5
Fit doors snugly to all edges of jambs and heads of frames. Doors shall operate
smoothly and freely under all conditions of operation. Door shall sit in any position in
door opening and shall not drift upward or downward. Install and adjust weatherstripping.
.6
Furnish necessary appurtenances relating to door installation, including those required
on door frames.
.7
Upon completion of installation of doors and operating equipment, lubricate moving parts
prior to putting into operation. Supply oil to gear reduction units and grease sprockets,
bearings, cables, link chains and door guides.
.8
Install doors to operate freely and to close tight.
3.3
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Ensure that doors and door frames have protective coverings after installation to protect
factory applied finishes.
.2
Check and adjust as required items of operating hardware, including weatherstripping.
.3
Upon completion of work of this section, clean down material, lubricate moving parts and
adjust operation as required to obtain optimum performance.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Tempered Glass Entrances and Partitions
Section 08 42 26
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
.2
Section excludes:
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Interior tempered glass doors and interior tempered glass partitions and
necessary hardware and related trim for such items.
Blackened steel angel frame: in accordance with Section 05 50 10.
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit engineered shop drawings.
.1 Shop drawings to be prepared in conjunction with engineer preparing shop
drawings for Section 05 50 10.
.4
.2
Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to complete details illustrating
construction of the various parts of the work of this section, metal and glass
thicknesses, methods of joining, details of field connections and anchorage,
interfacing with other work, fastening and sealing materials and methods.
.3
Submit catalogue cuts of manufactured items.
Samples:
.1
Unless otherwise indicated, submit 2 samples for each of the following:
.1 305 mm x 305 mm (12” x 12") sample of each glass type and finish including
sample of finished exposed glass edge.
.2 150 mm x 150 mm (6” x 6") sample of each metal type and finish.
.3 305 mm (12") long samples of top and bottom channels rails for glass wall
panels in specified finish.
.4 1 sample of each door hardware type in specified finish.
.5
Certificates:
.1
Submit certification that adhesion of sealant to samples of metal and glass is
adequate when tested in accordance with ASTM C794-15a.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Tempered Glass Entrances and Partitions
.2
1.4
Submit certification that materials in contact with sealant are compatible with
sealant after being exposed to 2000 to 4000 micro watt ultra-violet radiation for
21 days.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance instructions:
.1
1.5
.1
Section 08 42 26
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Submit operation and maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of
tempered glass entrances, doors and partitions.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors: Provide work of this section, executed by
competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in application of Products,
systems and assemblies specified and with training of Product manufacturers.
.1 Foreperson experience: Minimum 10 years experience as glazing mechanic.
.2 Typical glazing mechanic experience: Minimum 3 years experience as
glazers.
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for
strategic off-the-ground, under cover storage locations. Do not load any areas beyond
design limits.
.2
Adequately protect and crate components against damage, dirt, disfigurement and
weather.
.3
Exercise extreme care in handling units to prevent damage and scratched surfaces.
.4
Deliver glass to the Place of the Work in properly packed crates for protection and
properly marked for ease of handling.
.5
Protect finishes with strippable coating that will not mar, nor deface finish on removal, or
a similar method designed to afford an equivalent amount of protection. Leave protected
coating intact until damage risk is past or immediately prior to final cleaning.
.6
Stacking should be done to prevent bending pressure or abrasion of finished surfaces.
.7
Mark or flag each pane of glass installed immediately following glass installation. Use
temporary coloured tapes or flags suspended near, but not in contact with glass.
.8
Replace scratched or broken glass damaged due to faulty setting, careless handling or
storage at no additional cost to the Owner. Additionally, glass which, in opinion of
Consultant, is seriously distorted shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Manufacturer
Acceptable manufacturers/installers:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Tempered Glass Entrances and Partitions
2.2
.1
C.J. Rush Industries.
.2
CR Laurence.
.3
Inkan Ltd.
.4
Surface Solution Industries Inc.
.5
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
Section 08 42 26
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Design glass to CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89. Thicknesses indicated are minimum thickness
required. Increase thicknesses as required to meet design requirements.
.2
Comply with requirements of jurisdictional authorities and the building code.
.3
Design system to receive, accommodate and interface with work of other sections as
indicated or required.
.4
Design connections for work of this section to building structure and to adjacent
construction to take into account peculiarities as may be found in the Work.
.5
Design tempered glass entrances and partitions and their connections to building
structure and adjacent construction to ensure no possibility of weakening, loosening or
fracturing occurring due to vibrations from any source.
.6
Design light gauge steel structural members in accordance with CAN/CSA S136-07.
2.3
.1
Door and Partition Systems
Door system; interior vestibule doors:
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 ProTemp Glass ‘100 Series’.
.1 Type and finish: to match base building exterior entrance doors.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Interior partition system:
.1
Glazing channels:
.1 Bottom channel; acceptable Products:
.1 C.R Laurence ‘Model # WU1BLCL’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2 Top channel; acceptable Products:
.1 C.R Laurence ‘Model # D604BL’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.4
Materials
.1
Bolts, screws and fasteners: Series 300 or 400 stainless steel, cadmium plated.
.2
Setting blocks: Neoprene ASTM C542-05(2011), 80 to 90 Durometer A.
.3
Butt glazing joint sealant:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Tempered Glass Entrances and Partitions
Section 08 42 26
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.1
Medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone sealant; complying with ASTM C92011, Type S, Grade NS, Application G, Class 25.
.2
Colour: as selected by Consultant from full colour range.
.3
Acceptable Products:
.1 Dow Corning ‘999-A’.
.2 Momentive ‘SCS1200’.
.3 Pecora ‘860’.
.4 Tremco ‘Proglaze’.
.4
Paint: bituminous, conforming to CAN/CGSB 1.108-M89.
.5
Glass retaining member seals: PVC or Neoprene, ASTM C542-05(2011), 70 to 90
Durometer A, Teflon coated, compressible, with corner joints under compression to
assure vertical to horizontal neoprene pressure contact.
.6
Glass: in accordance with Section 08 80 00, and as follows:
.1
Tempered glass, clear glass to requirements of CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90, Type 2,
Class B.
.2
Exposed glass edges: bevelled and polished smooth.
.3
Glass thickness: as required to meet design requirements, and to at least
thicknesses as indicated.
.1 Glass thickness, minimum: 12 mm (1/2”).
2.5
.1
Finishes
Extruded aluminum glazing channels:
.1
Extruded aluminum 6063-T5 alloy to ANSI H35.1/H35.1M-2013 with a minimum
yield of 138 MPa (20015 PSI), free from defects impairing appearance, strength
and durability. Tracks susceptible to wear shall be extruded from aluminum 6061T6 alloy to ANSI H35.1/H35.1M-2013.
.2
Finish:
.1 Anodized to AAMA 611:
.2 Colour anodized to AA Designation AA-M12C22A44.
.1 Black.
.2
Top and bottom rails of glass vestibule doors: thermosetting acrylic enamel to AAMA
2603-02, 0.8 mils minimum overall dry film thickness.
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 PPG 'Duracron'
.2 Valspar ‘Flurocryl’.
.2
Colour to match existing exterior doors and framing system
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Tempered Glass Entrances and Partitions
2.6
Section 08 42 26
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Hardware
.1
Furnish hardware necessary for complete and trouble free operation of doors and
panels.
.2
Finish hardware:
.1
2.7
Door hardware: except as indicated, hardware is supplied by Section 08 71 00
for installation by the work of this section.
Fabrication
.1
Fabricate sections to accommodate and interface with work of other sections by means
of rabbets, interlocks, miscellaneous angles, trim and filler sections, as required.
.2
Component fastenings, concealed throughout, adequate strength, stainless steel and
fusion welds.
.3
Jointing and intersections of metals shall be accurately cut, fitted to a tolerance of
0.076 mm (0.003") in true planes with adequate concealed fastenings.
.4
Perform fitting and assembly of component parts in shop, insofar as practicable. Work of
this section that cannot be permanently shop assembled shall be fitted, assembled,
marked and dismantled to assure proper fitting in field. Identify shop assembled
components on shop drawings for location and erection at Place of the Work.
.5
Pre-drill glass panels to accept hardware and hangers to templates of hardware
manufacturer.
.6
Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes.
.7
Polish glass edges prior to tempering.
.8
Silicone sweeps; interior vestibule doors:
.1
.9
Provide clear silicone sweeps/weather seals at edge of glass.
Door edge clearances:
.1
Between doors and frame at head and jambs: 3 mm (1/8").
.2
At sills with thresholds: 6 mm (1/4").
.3
At sills without thresholds: 13 mm (1/2").
.4
At meeting edges of pairs of doors: 3 mm (1/8").
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Make thorough examination of Contract Documents, check anchorage, structural
deflections, interfacing with work of other sections and other factors influencing design
and performance and be fully cognizant of requirements.
.2
Notify Contractor if preparations are required to be made in the work of other sections for
proper attachment, securing or executing of the work of this section.
.3
Check structural elements and adjoining framing on which the work of this section is
dependent, verify governing dimensions. Confirm conditions satisfactory before
proceeding.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Tempered Glass Entrances and Partitions
3.2
Section 08 42 26
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Installation
.1
Allow for dimensional tolerances and deviation from true plane permissible in structural
support frame. Erect plumb and true, and in correct relationship to the work of other
sections.
.2
Install components in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
.3
Insulate between dissimilar metals or between metal, and masonry or concrete with
bituminous paint to prevent electrolytic action.
.4
Upon completion of glazing, check units for squareness, alignment and smooth
operation, adjust as required. Clean and polish glass and remove soiling from exposed
metal.
.5
Hardware: Adjust, test and make operational without binding or other interference likely
to affect movement of panels.
3.3
.1
3.4
.1
3.5
Installation Tolerances
Maximum variations from plumb and level: 3 mm (1/8") deviation in 3000 mm (10’-0").
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
At completion of the work of this section, remove labels from glass and clean inner and
outer faces of glass and exposed finished metal surfaces. Replace scratched or broken
glass and make good any damaged materials.
.2
Check door units for squareness, alignment and smooth operation. Adjust, test and
make hardware operational without binding or other interference likely to affect
movement of panels.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 71 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Finish Hardware
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
.1
.2
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Supply and off-load to place in a clean, dry, and secure room at the Place of the
Work, which has been designated for storage of all finish hardware specified
including necessary fastening devices.
.2
Supply all finish hardware required and not supplied under other Sections.
.3
Check and verify hardware information on door and frame shop drawings, prior to
fabrication.
.4
Packaging, labelling, provision of installation instructions, templates, fixings and
similar items, and delivery to the Work site.
.5
Give assistance at the Place of the Work to organize hardware storeroom and
supply qualified staff to correctly categorize, mark, and arrange each item in
groups to enable efficient dispensing in specified hardware groups for each door
to installation trades.
.6
Provide qualified staff at the Place of the Work promptly to assist installation
trades subsequent to being requested and to ensure that hardware is being
correctly installed.
.7
Upon completion of installation of hardware, hardware Supplier shall arrange and
conduct, in company of Consultant and Contractor, inspections to verify that all
hardware is installed and functioning satisfactorily, and where necessary shall
recommend adjustments of such items as closer arms, valves, door holders and
latch and locksets. Report comments in writing to Consultant and Contractor.
.8
Supply temporary locking cylinders and keys for construction purposes. Locks
used for Contractor security shall be keyed as required to conform to building
operations’ security requirements.
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
.1
Coordinate work of this section to ensure information and material is promptly
provided, to ensure orderly and expeditious progress of the Work, and to comply
with schedule for completion.
.2
Within 3 weeks of Contract Award,
manufacturers/Suppliers to Consultant.
.3
Assist Contractor to organize hardware storeroom and supply qualified staff to
correctly categorize, mark, and arrange each item in groups to enable efficient
dispensing in specified hardware groups for each door to installation trades.
.4
Coordinate the work of this section to ensure supplied hardware can function as
required and can be installed within the particular details of the door and frame
assemblies. Hardware that cannot be installed or will not function as intended
will be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
submit
confirmed
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
orders
to
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 71 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Finish Hardware
1.3
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
.4
.5
Schedules and samples:
.1
Prepare and submit for review, a finish hardware schedule with technical product
data sheets for use in the Work. List type, selected manufacturer's name and
number, location, mounting heights and finish of hardware, and complete cross
reference to door schedule.
.2
The indication or omission of a hardware component on the hardware schedule
does not remove the responsibility of this section to ensure that all hardware can
be installed and will function as intended.
.3
Submit samples of complete line of hardware and finishes. Identify samples
indicating hardware item numbers used in the Finish Hardware Schedule,
manufacturer’s numbers, names, types, finishes, sizes and indication of door
location(s). Approved samples will be retained for comparisons and returned
upon completion of the Work.
.4
Prepare and submit for review, a keying schedule recognizing Owner
requirements which shall be determined after award of Contract.
Templates:
.1
Submit for distribution, 3 copies of templates, template information, installation
instructions and details necessary to enable preparation for, and installation of
finish hardware in accordance with Door Hardware Institute recommended
procedures. Submit templates arranged and marked coincident with specified
hardware designations.
.2
Submit promptly when requested, the foregoing information in 3-ring plastic hardcovered binders suitably identified.
.3
In lieu of 1.3.4.1 and 1.3.4.2, arrange for the issue by each hardware
manufacturer, the manufacturer's standard book of template drawings, at the
option of door and frame manufacturers.
Jigs:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit template jigs for each component to be recessed to enable installation
trades to prepare doors to preclude misalignment and improper fit.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
Instruct the Owner’s designated representative in proper care and preventative
maintenance of hardware to assure longevity of operation.
.2
Submit maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of finish hardware.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 71 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Finish Hardware
.3
1.5
.1
1.6
Submit to building maintenance staff prior to date of Substantial Performance of the
Work, two sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications: Provide work of this section, executed by competent Supplier with
minimum 5 years experience in Products, systems and assemblies specified and with
approval of Product manufacturers.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Package each item of hardware individually, complete with trim and necessary
fastenings, and accessories, including wrenches, keys, and other appurtenances
required to ensure correct installation. Mark each item as to contents and appropriate
use in specified groups.
.2
All items of hardware subject to handling when installed shall be submitted with an easily
removable covering to protect against scratches, abrasions, coating with dissimilar finish
materials on adjacent surfaces, and tarnishing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Comply with codes and requirements of governing authorities, and as specified.
.2
Provide hardware items with characteristics to meet specified fire ratings, and conform to
exit requirements of governing authorities.
2.2
.1
Materials
Finish hardware: in accordance with Finish Hardware Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Before furnishing any hardware, carefully check Contract Documents, verify door
swings, door and frame materials and operating conditions, and assure that hardware
will fit work to be attached.
.2
Check shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and installation,
and verify to correctness thereof, or advise of required revisions. Check that doors,
frames and panels requiring additional support are reinforced.
.3
Point out special requirements to installer. Make final adjustment of hardware, in
particular closer arms, valves and locksets, to work properly.
3.2
Installation
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Refer also to
installation requirements indicated, and specified in other sections of specifications.
.2
Accurately locate and adjust hardware to meet manufacturer's instructions. Use special
tools and jigs as recommended.
.3
Locate door stops to contact doors 75 mm (3") from latch edge.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 71 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Finish Hardware
.4
Refer to Section 08 14 00 with respect to factory preparation for hardware for wood
doors. Install wood doors and applicable hardware, including hinges.
.5
Take delivery of finishing hardware and install, except hardware specified as part of work
of another section. Check each item as received.
.6
Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions, at heights later
directed by Consultant. Hardware shall operate freely. Protect installed hardware from
damage and paint spotting.
.7
Sound and weather seals:
.1
Install seals to continuously seal entire perimeter of doors. Secure in place with
non-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment.
.2
Maintain integrity of seal at head of doors fitted with closers. Adapt seals as
required to achieve specified performance.
.8
Pre-drill kickplates and doors prior to installation of kickplates. Apply with water-resistant
adhesive and countersunk stainless steel screws.
.9
Set thresholds on two continuous beads of polyurethane caulking fastened with a
minimum of 4 countersunk screws.
.10 At wood doors, use screw attachment for exit devices and closers.
3.3
Electrified Hardware
.1
Install electronic components, security components such as magnetic locks, sentronic
hold open devices door status switches, card readers, processors, transformers, and
other electric devices.
.2
Power wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Divisions 26, 27, and 28
including conduit, boxes and other electrical appurtenances, including connections and
terminations. Be responsible for ensuring that all wiring work is done in accordance with
the Suppliers wiring diagrams and directions.
.3
Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the distributor of the system.
Submit a copy of reports to the Consultant.
3.4
Keying
.1
Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
.2
Submit Construction Master Keying (CMK) and Grand Master Keying (GMK) upon
completion of the work of this section.
3.5
.1
Field Quality Control
Field tests and inspections:
.1
Inspect the installation of finish hardware on an agreed frequency.
.2
Advise in writing of work being performed that will prejudice the installation or
correct operation of items of hardware.
.3
Ensure items have been installed complete with required trim and accessories,
and fastenings are adequately secured and approved. Ensure closer arms,
valves, holder devices, locksets and latchsets are correctly adjusted.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 71 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Finish Hardware
3.6
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Adjust doors to swing freely, smoothly and easily, to remain stationary at any point, to
close evenly and tightly against stops without binding, and to latch positively when doors
are closed with moderate force.
.2
Adjust hardware so that latches and locks operate smoothly and without binding, and
closers act positively with the least possible resistance in use. Lubricate hardware if
required by Supplier’s instructions.
.3
Ensure that doors equipped with closers operate to close doors firmly against anticipated
wind and building air pressure, and to enable doors to be readily opened as suitable for
function, location and traffic.
.4
Clean hardware after installation in accordance with Supplier’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Automatic Door Operators
Section 08 71 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
.2
1.3
Automatic door operators.
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
.1
Check dimensions at the Place of the Work before fabrication commences, and
report to Consultant in writing all discrepancies.
.2
Where dimensions are not available before fabrication commences, the
dimension required shall be agreed upon between the various sections
concerned.
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Shop drawings:
.1
.4
.1
Submit certificate of conformance to specified standards following procedures for
submittal of Product data.
Templates:
.1
1.4
Submit samples of each finish material proposed for use in the Work.
Certificates:
.1
.6
Shop drawings to be prepared specifically for this Contract and to indicate
location of components, anchorage details, adjacent construction interface, and
dimensions as well as all necessary wiring and electrical requirements.
Samples:
.1
.5
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit templates to Contractor for use by installers and fabricators as required
for proper location and installation of hardware.
Closeout Submittals
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
Demonstrate, and provide instruction in, the proper operation and maintenance
of the Products Provided as part of the work of this section to the Owner in
accordance with Section 01 77 00.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Automatic Door Operators
.2
1.5
.1
Section 08 71 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Submit operation data and maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of
hardware for incorporation into the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Section 01 77 00.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.1 Execute the work of this section only by a certified Subcontractor who has
adequate plant, equipment, and skilled workers to perform it expeditiously,
and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to
that specified during a period of at least the immediate past 5 years, and with
10 years satisfactory experience.
.2 Installer shall be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the operators for
installation of their Product.
.2
1.6
Barrier free door operators shall be certified by the manufacturer to performance design
criteria in accordance with CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 247-92(R2014), and ANSI/BHMA
A156.19-2013.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Store finishing hardware in locked, clean dry area.
.2
Package each item of hardware, including fastenings, separately or in like groups of
hardware, and label each package as to item definition and location.
.3
Submit hardware with an easily removable covering to protect against scratches,
abrasions, coating with dissimilar finish materials on adjacent surfaces, and tarnishing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Automatic Door Operators
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following systems:
.1
Vestibule door; basis of design:
.1 Refer to Finish Hardware Schedule.
.2
Universal washroom door:
.1 Refer to Finish Hardware Schedule.
2.2
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Use ULC or ULI listed and labelled hardware in fire separations and exit doors.
.2
Be responsible for, and abide by, all requirements and regulations of the building code.
Conduct tests and inspections required, and pay all charges incidental thereto.
2.3
.1
Automatic Door Operators - General
Operation:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Automatic Door Operators
.1
Section 08 71 13
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Activation type:
.1 Push-plate.
.2
Door to safely stop and reverse if an object is encountered in the opening or
closing cycle.
.3
Operating forces:
.1 Push plate: 22.2 N.
.2 Door, manual opening force: 62 N.
.3 Door, Closing force: 26.6 N.
.2
.4
Factory-set door hold open voltage.
.5
Fail safe: In the event of power failure, door shall operate manually, without
damage to operator components.
Activators; wall-mounted:
.1
Push-plate:
.1 Formed stainless steel plate, satin finish, approximately 127 mm (5") square,
with depressed wheelchair logo marking, 2 required per opening.
.3
2.4
.1
.2
Electrical supply: 120 Volt.
Automatic Door Operators - Door Frame/Wall Mounted
Provide adjustment by microprocessor for the following:
.1
Opening speed.
.2
Back-check.
.3
Hold-open, from 5 seconds to 30 seconds.
.4
Closing speed.
.5
Opening force.
Controller:
.1
Completely electromechanical capable of the following functions:
.1 Obstruction detection.
.2 Initialization and power on.
.3 Door motion learn cycle.
.4 Manual mode, without spring closer.
.5 Power open/power close logic.
.2
Control box and motor/gear box to be contained in aluminum housing finished to
match aluminum entrances, precision-machined gears and bearing seats and allweather lubricant, mounted on vibration isolators.
.1 Vestibule door: design for concealed overhead application.
.2 Washroom door: design for interior application.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Automatic Door Operators
2.5
.1
Section 08 71 13
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.3
Gears: manufactured by operator manufacturer specifically for operators being
provided.
.4
Motor: DC permanent magnet motor with shielded ball bearings. Stop motor
when door stops or is fully open and when breakaway is operated.
.5
Door operating arm: forged steel, attached at natural pivot point of door. Do not
use side block in top of door. Exposed arms to be factory polished and finished
to match operator enclosure.
.6
Control circuits for actuators and safeties: low-voltage, NEC Class II.
.7
Service conditions: satisfactory operation between -34°C and 71°C.
Finishes
Exposed aluminum surfaces:
.1
Colour anodized to AAMA 611, designation AA-M12C22A44.
.1 Black.
2.6
Fabrication
.1
Fit intersecting members to flush hairline weathertight joints and mechanically fasten
together, except where indicated otherwise.
.2
Conceal fastenings from view, except where indicated otherwise.
.3
Form cut-outs, recesses, mortising or milling for finishing hardware to templates
supplied. Reinforce with aluminum or galvanized steel plates.
.4
Field apply isolation coating to aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals or
cementitious materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Verify that door openings are properly installed and ready to receive the work of this
section.
.2
Verify that electrical service is available, properly located, and of proper type.
.3
Check dimensions at the Place of the Work before fabrication commences, and report to
Consultant in writing all discrepancies.
.4
Where dimensions are not available before fabrication commences, the dimension
required shall be agreed upon between the various sections concerned.
3.2
Preparation
.1
Before furnishing any hardware, carefully check Contract Documents, verify door
swings, door and frame materials and operating conditions, and assure that hardware
will fit work to be attached.
.2
Check shop drawings and frame and door lists affecting hardware type and installation,
and verify to correctness thereof, or advise of required revisions. Check that doors,
frames and panels requiring additional support are reinforced.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Automatic Door Operators
.3
3.3
Section 08 71 13
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Point out special requirements to installer. Make final adjustment of hardware, in
particular closer arms, valves and locksets, to work properly.
Installation
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with CAN/CSA
C22.2 No. 247-92(R2014).
.2
Provide operator system complete in all its parts and connected to electrical service
Provided as part of the work of Divisions 26, 27, and 28. Secure all wiring such that it is
concealed from view.
3.4
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Verify that installed hardware and operators function properly, and instruct installers
accordingly of requirements and procedures for adjustments for operation without
binding or scraping, and without excessive noise.
.2
Clean hardware after installation in accordance with Supplier’s instructions.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Glass and glazing.
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Show details of each type of glazing system in conjunction with the framing
system indicating type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material and quantity.
Show details indicating glazing material, glazing thickness, bite on the glass and
glass edge clearance.
.2
Indicate analysis of glass including maximum deflection and allowable stresses
from imposed dead/live loads and thermal loads.
Samples:
.1
Selection samples:
.1 Submit 305 mm (12") square samples of laminated glass with frosted white
interlayer. Provide 5 selection samples showing different levels of visible light
transmittance. Samples are to vary in 5% increments, with 65% being the
median sample.
.2
Verification samples:
.1 Submit 305 mm (12") square samples of each type of glass indicated except
for clear monolithic glass products, and 305 mm (12") long samples of each
color required, except black, for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to
view.
.1 Submit 3 control samples for each glass type showing maximum range of
visible difference between units for the Project.
.5
Test and evaluation reports:
.1
.6
Obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer
indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with
glazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.
Manufacturer reports:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
.1
.7
1.4
Submit glass fabricator’s product information and structural calculations
indicating compliance with glazing standards established by the Glass
Association of North America (GANA). Submittal to include thermal stress and
structural load analysis of the proposed glass types, configuration and sizes.
Submit sample glazing warranty.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
.1
Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for glass and glazing for
incorporation into the operating and maintenance manuals.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors: Provide the work of this section executed by
specialist Subcontractor who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in skills
required, be completely familiar with referenced standards and requirements of
the work of this section, and personally direct installation performed under this
section.
.1 Foreperson experience: Minimum 10 years experience as glazing mechanic.
.2 Glazing mechanic experience: Minimum 3 years experience as glazers.
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Protect glass from edge damage, dust, and contaminants during handling and storage.
For insulating units exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass
manufacturers written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal
ruptures.
.2
Storage and protection: Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer’s written
instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from
condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun or other causes.
1.7
Field Conditions
.1
Ambient Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by the glazing material
manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost,
condensation or other causes.
.2
Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 4.4°C.
1.8
Extended Warranty
.1
Warrant work of this section in accordance with Section 01 78 36. In addition provide:
.2
The glazing systems shall perform properly to the extent that the design and Contract
Documents permit such performance for the duration of the warranty period.
.3
Special product warranty for laminated glass products:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
.1
.4
Provide written 5 year warranty from date of manufacture for laminated glass.
Warranty shall cover deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to
handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer’s
published instructions. Warranty shall be manufacturer's standard form in which
laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units.
Special product warranty for tempered glass products:
.1
Provide a written 5 year warranty from date of manufacture for fully tempered
glass. Warrant that tempered glass will not break spontaneously as a result of
Nickel Sulfide (NiS) inclusions at a rate exceeding 0.8% (8/1000) for a period of
five years from the date of manufacture. Warranty shall be manufacturer's
standard form in which tempered-glass manufacturer agrees to replace
tempered-glass units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Performance/Design Requirements
General:
.1
Publications: Comply with recommendations in the publications below, except
where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section.
.1 GANA Glazing Manual.
.2 GANA Engineering Standards Manual.
.3 GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual.
.4 GANA Sealant Manual.
.2
Glass strength:
.1
Provide glass products in the thickness and strengths required to meet or exceed
the following criteria based on project loads and in-service conditions.
.1 Analysis shall comply with CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89.
.2 Minimum thickness of annealed or heat-treated glass products to be selected
so the worst case probability of failure does not exceed the following:
.1 8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically less than 15 degrees from
the vertical plane and under wind action.
.2 1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the vertical
plane and under action of wind and/or snow.
.2
Provide annealed, heat strengthened, and tempered lights where required by the
building code, and where required for the various solar exposures on the
building.
.3
Glass thicknesses and glass types specified, indicated, or scheduled in the
Contract Documents are minimums required. Glass designer/engineer to modify
as required to satisfy design and building code requirements, and requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction, and any such modifications shall be clearly
indicated on shop drawings.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
.3
Thermal and optical performance: Provide glass products with performance properties
specified or published by glass manufacturer where not specified. Performance
properties to be manufacturer’s published data as determined according to the following
procedures:
.1
Centre of glass U-Value: National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) 100
methodology using LBNL WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
.2
Centre of glass solar heat gain coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBNL35298 WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
.3
Visible light transmittance: NFRC 200 methodology.
.4
Solar optical properties: NFRC 300 or LBNL Optics.
.4
Glazing systems shall be capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, without
failure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabrication and installation;
deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.
.5
Provide glass Products of uniform appearance, reflectivity, hue, shade, visible light
transmittance, and colour when viewed from distance of 3 m (10 ft) to 30 m (100 ft)
perpendicular to the glass or from 45 degree angle to the glass.
.6
Protect laminated glass interlayer from damage or discolouration resulting from contact
with deleterious and incompatible sealants, substances, and materials. Comply with
manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.
2.2
Glass Materials
.1
General: Single source responsibility: Provide materials from a single manufacturer or
fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass
obtained from a single source and manufacturing plant for each type and class required.
.2
Annealed (float) glass:
.1
.3
Clear, annealed glass, 6 mm (1/4") thick minimum, CAN/CGSB 12.3-M91,
Glazing Quality.
Tempered float glass:
.1
CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90.
.2
Provide thickness as indicated or greater thickness as needed to comply with
requirements. Minimum thickness: 6 mm (1/4").
.3
Fabrication process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
.4
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A in accordance with
ASTM C1048-12e1.
.5
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated
glass) in accordance with ASTM C1048-12e1.
.6
Heat strengthened glass shall have surface compression of 24-52 MPa (3,5007,500 psi).
.7
Tempered glass material to come from one tempering furnace and be tempered
to minimize distortion variance.
.1 Roller-wave distortion not to exceed 0.127 mm (0.005") from peak to valley.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
.2 Maximum peak to valley roller-wave 0.8 mm (0.003”) in the central area and
0.20 mm (0.008”) within 267 mm (10.5”) of the leading and trailing edge.
.3 Maximum bow and warp 0.79 mm per lineal 305 mm (1/32” per lineal foot).
.4
Laminated glass:
.1
CAN/CGSB 12.1-M90.
.2
Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with
interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations. Use materials that have a
proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolour, or lose physical and
mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.
.3
Glass layers minimum 4 mm (3/16") thick unless otherwise indicated.
.4
Interlayer thickness: Provide thickness as needed to comply with requirements
and not less than the following:
.1 Vertical glazing: not less than 0.76 mm (0.030") unless otherwise indicated.
.2 Sloped (greater than 15 degrees from vertical): not less than 1.52 mm
(0.060") unless otherwise indicated.
.5
.5
Interlayer colour: Frosted white 65% visible light transmittance.
.6
Glass type: annealed or heat strengthened or tempered, as required to suit
design requirements.
.7
Laminated glass products to be fabricated free of foreign substances and air or
glass pockets in autoclave with heat plus pressure.
Ultraclear (Low iron) float glass:
.1
ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements
specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91%.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 AGC ‘Krystal Klear’.
.2 Guardian ‘Ultrawhite’.
.3 Pilkington ‘Opti-White’.
.4 PPG ‘Starphire’.
.5 Saint-Gobain ‘Diamente’.
2.3
Glazing Materials
.1
Glazing materials; general: Select glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and additional
glazing materials of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including
glass products, seals of insulating glass units and glazing channel substrates, under
conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
.2
Glazing gaskets: Moulded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from the following:
.1
.3
Preformed silicone to ASTM C1115-06(2011).
Setting blocks: Moulded or extruded material with Shore, Type A Durometer hardness of
85, plus or minus 5, made from the following:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
.1
.4
Spacers: Moulded or extruded blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated made from
the following:
.1
.5
Preformed silicone to ASTM C1115-06(2011).
Preformed silicone to ASTM C1115-06(2011).
Edge blocks: Moulded or extruded material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral
movement (side walking) made from the following:
.1
Preformed silicone to ASTM C1115-06(2011).
.6
Cleaners, primers and sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
.7
Polyurethane foam glazing tape:
2.4
.1
.1
High density, closed-cell, flexible, non-extruding tape, adhesive backed one side
only; recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications with nominal
pressure in glazing channel.
.2
Acceptable manufacturer: Norton Company.
.3
Acceptable Products: As recommended by manufacturer suitable for conditions
of application and use.
Fabrication
Grind, chamfer, and polish exposed glass edges, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
.2
3.2
Examination
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with glazing installer present, for
compliance with the following:
.1
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
and offsets at corners.
.2
Inspect butt and mitre joints in framing. Seal joints found to be open with a
compatible sealant prior to glazing.
.3
Glazing pockets and surfaces are free of dust, construction debris, and
contaminants.
.4
Presence and functioning of weep systems.
.5
Minimum required face and edge clearances as per IGMA and GANA standards.
.6
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Preparation
.1
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
.2
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as
needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use
materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
.3
3.3
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and apply primers to surfaces to receive tapes and
sealants in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Ensure surfaces are free of
moisture and frost.
Glazing - General
.1
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
.2
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate
sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
.3
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
.4
Clean glazing rebate surfaces of traces of dirt, dust, or other contaminants.
.5
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.
.6
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
.7
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
.8
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is greater than 1270 mm (50").
.9
.1
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,
unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to
maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance
requirements.
.2
Provide 3.2 mm (1/8") minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal
to sealant width.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel.
.10 Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
.11 Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as
specified.
3.4
Gasket Glazing (Dry)
.1
Allow gaskets to relax and cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket
manufacturer to fit openings to suit frame dimensions.
.2
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 80 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
Glass and Glazing
.3
Installation with drive-in wedge gaskets: Centre glass lites in openings on setting blocks
and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression
gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start
gasket applications at corners and work toward centres of openings. Compress gaskets
to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal
gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
.4
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Centre glass lites in openings on setting
blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression
gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression
gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending
stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
.5
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.5
Sealant Glazing (Wet)
.1
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,
between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants
cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth
of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
.2
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
.3
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.6
.1
3.7
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
Finishing
.1
Immediately remove sealant and compound droppings from finished surfaces. Remove
labels after work is completed.
.2
Final cleaning of glass in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 87 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Applied Films
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
Translucent film; applied to interior glazing, in locations where indicated on
drawings.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
1.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit 3 - 200 mm x 200 mm (8” x 8”) samples of each specified film type,
pattern and colour.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
1.4
.1
.1
Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for incorporation into operating
and maintenance manuals.
.2
Instruct Owner’s representative on proper care and maintenance for work of this
section.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
1.5
.1
1.6
.1
Installers / applicators: Execute the work of this section only by a Subcontractor
with minimum 5 years experience in application of Products specified.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Package materials and identify on attached labels the manufacturer, contents and
material specification number.
Field Conditions
Conform to manufacturer's written documented temperatures, relative humidity, and
substrate moisture content and temperature for application of materials of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Materials
Applied films:
.1
3M ‘Fasara Milano’.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 87 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Applied Films
.2
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
3.2
Examination
Examine glass surfaces to receive film and verify that they are free from defects and
imperfections which will affect the final appearance of installed film. Correct such
deficiencies before starting film application.
Preparation
.1
Window and window framing will be cleaned thoroughly with a neutral cleaning solution.
Surface of glass shall be bladed with industrial razor to ensure the removal of any
foreign contaminants in accordance with film manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Towelling or other absorbent material shall be placed on the window sill or sash to
absorb moisture accumulation generated by the film application.
3.3
.1
3.4
.1
3.5
.1
Installation
Applied film; interior application:
.1
Apply film to indicated face of glazing units in accordance with film
manufacturer’s written instructions, applied plumb, true and level over clean
glazing, without air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
.2
After installation, applied film shall be flat with no obvious concentrations of
moisture, free of creases, free of tears, with no moisture dimples when viewed
under normal conditions.
.3
Film edges shall be cut neatly and square at a uniform distance of 1.5 mm (1/16")
to 0.79 mm (1/32") from frame.
Adjusting and Cleaning
Clean film and glass surfaces so they are free of foreign matter using cleaners
recommended by film manufacturer.
Protection
Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations respecting protection.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 91 19
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Louvres
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
Louvres.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section, including the following information:
.1 Air flow and water entrainment performance test results.
.2 Material types and thickness.
.3
.4
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit engineered shop drawings.
.2
Include elevations, sections and specific details for each louvre.
.3
Show anchorage details and connections for component parts.
Samples:
.1
.5
Test and evaluation reports:
.1
1.3
.1
Submit colour chips for approval. Submit duplicate samples of each type of
louvre showing colour and finish.
Air and water performance data: Submit AMCA test data as required to confirm
that the louvres have the specified air and water performance characteristics
when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-L-99.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors: Provide work of this section, executed by
competent installers with minimum 5 years experience in application of Products,
systems and assemblies specified, and with approval of Product manufacturer.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Manufacturer
Specifications are based on Products of EH Price. The following listed manufacturers
are acceptable only when in compliance with requirements of this section.
.1
Airolite Company.
.2
Construction Specialties.
.3
EH Price.
.4
Price Industries Ltd.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 91 19
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Louvres
2.2
.5
McGill Architectural Products.
.6
Ten Plus Architectural Products Ltd.
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
Structural requirements: Design louvres to withstand, wind and snow loads as required
by the building code, to maximum allowable deflection without permanent deformation.
Maximum allowable deflection for the louvre structural members to be L/180 or 19 mm
(3/4"), whichever is less. Maximum allowable deflection for the louvre blades to be L/120
or 13 mm (1/2”) across the weak axis, whichever is less.
.2
Aluminum framing members shall be designed in accordance with CAN/CSA-S15705/S157.1-05.
.3
Design structural steel structural components and fasteners in accordance with CSAS16-09.
.4
Delegated design: Design louvres, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
.5
Structural performance: Louvres shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without
permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver
blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures
shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.
.6
Thermal movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.
.7
Louvre performance ratings: Provide louvres which have been tested (manufacturer's
stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width) according to
AMCA 500-L.
2.3
.1
Wall Louvres
General:
.1
.2
Single source responsibility: Provide complete system from one manufacturer.
Louvre:
.1
Acceptable Product: Model DE439, 101 mm (4”) depth as manufactured by EH
Price.
.2
Description:
.1 Heads, sills, jambs and mullions to be one piece structural aluminum
members with integral caulking slot and retaining beads.
.2 Mullions shall be sliding interlock.
.3 Blades to be one piece aluminum extrusions with reinforcing bosses.
.4 Louvres to be supplied with 50 mm (2") high by full depth sill flashings formed
from minimum 1.27 mm (0.050") thick aluminum, complete with sealed end
dams to direct water to exterior.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 91 19
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Louvres
.5 Louvres and sill flashings to be installed provide complete water integrity
performance of the louvre system, and drain water infiltration from interior
face of louvre/blank-off assembly to exterior.
.3
Performance:
.1 To AMCA Standard 500-L-99.
.2 AMCA certified and licensed to bear the AMCA seal for the following
performance categories:
.1 Water penetration.
.2 Air performance.
.3 Free Area: minimum 53.6%.
.4
Accessories:
.1 Bird screen.
2.4
.1
Accessories
Bird screen and frames:
.1
Bird screen mesh: 15.9 mm (5/8") mesh, 1.27 mm (0.050") thick expanded and
flattened aluminum screen secured within 1.40 mm (0.055") thick extruded
aluminum frames with mitred corners and corner locks.
.2
Finish: Mill finish.
.3
Facing: Face both sides with 0.81 mm (0.032") thick aluminum sheet.
.4
Insulation core: Insulation board made from inorganic glass fibres preformed into
boards bonded by thermosetting resin. Board density: 68 kg/m3 (4.25 lb/ft3).
.5
Panel perimeter frame: 1.27 mm (0.050") thick-formed aluminum channels,
mitred at the corners.
.6
Panel finish: exterior face to match louvres.
.2
Aluminum extrusions: ASTM B211-12, Alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T6 or 6061-T6.
.3
Aluminum sheet: ASTM B209-14, Alloy 1100, 3003 or 5005. For anodized finish if
required use Alloy 5005.
.4
Fasteners and anchors: Stainless steel Type 304.
.5
Arrange blades and frame extrusions as indicated.
.6
Attach bird screen to non-exposed face of louvres.
.7
Isolate from other dissimilar metals and materials to prevent electrolysis.
.8
Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
2.5
.1
Finishes
Exposed aluminum surfaces: 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer resin systems,
ceramic pigments and other select inorganic pigments to AAMA Specification 2605.
.1
Acceptable Products:
.1 PPG 'Duranar'.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 91 19
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Louvres
.2 Valspar ‘Fluropon’.
.2
Colour:
.1 Colour to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range. Colour
shall be:
.1 Solid; to match existing overhead door colour.
.2
Finish exposed metal fasteners, if applicable, to related aluminum surfaces.
.3
Finish steel clips and reinforcing steel with 380 g/m2 (13 oz/ft2) zinc coating to CAN/CSA
G164-M92.
2.6
Fabrication
.1
Fabricate finish work free from distortion and effects detrimental to appearance and
performance.
.2
Fasten aluminum louvre framing, blade with stainless steel screws or heliarc welding.
.3
Louvres indicated to wrap continuously around corners shall be mitred at corner
intersection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so
that the work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. Fasten
louvres with angle, lag bolts and anchors where required for support with rust proof
screws and anchor bolts.
.2
Apply sealant to joints and penetrations to maintain weather tight installation, while
allowing drainage to exterior at sill flashing.
.3
Anchor louvres to the building substructure.
.4
Allow for thermal expansion and contraction.
.5
Repair or replace damaged finishes or materials.
.6
Erection tolerances:
.1
Maximum variation from plane or location shown on the reviewed shop drawings:
3 mm per 3660 mm (1/8" per 12 feet) of length, but not exceeding 13 mm (1/2")
in any total building length or portion thereof (non-cumulative).
.2
Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end to end,
edge-to-edge in line or separated by less than 75 mm (3"): 1.5 mm (1/16") (shop
or field joints). This limiting condition shall prevail under both load and no load
conditions.
.7
Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer,
and in accordance with its recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove and
replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance
of the assembly.
.8
Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members.
Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 08 91 19
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Louvres
.9
Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
Section 09 22 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
Metal support systems for interior gypsum board partitions, interior ceilings, and
interior assemblies as indicated.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section, including additional data as may be required to demonstrate
compliance with the Contract Documents.
Shop drawings; for engineered interior metal support systems:
.1
Shop drawings shall be engineered.
.2
Submit design for metal support systems at interior locations where noted as
engineered, including but not limited to:
.1 Ceiling type C1.
.4
Test and evaluation reports:
.1
1.3
.1
Submit certified test results for each required fire resistance rated assembly for
work of this section.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.1 Provide work of this section, executed by a Subcontractor with minimum 5
years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies
specified and with approval and training of Product manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Performance/Design Requirements - Engineered Interior Metal Support Systems
.1
Design system members to withstand own dead load, super-imposed dead loads, to
maximum allowable deflection of L/240, without permanent deformation.
.2
Loads on walls acting as guards: Where the floor elevation on one side of a wall,
including a shaftwall, is more than 600 mm (24") higher than the elevation of the floor or
ground on the other side, the wall shall be designed to resist the lateral design loads
prescribed in the building code or 0.5 kPa (0.07 PSI), whichever produces the greatest
effect.
.3
Metal support systems shall be engineered where indicated in Contract Documents as
“engineered” or “structural”. Horizontal framing of ceilings shall be engineered.
Indicated framing depths are maximum permitted unless approved otherwise by
Consultant.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
2.2
Section 09 22 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Performance/Design Requirements - Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies
.1
Fire resistance rating: Where gypsum board systems with fire resistance ratings are
indicated or required, provide materials and installations that are identical with those of
applicable assemblies tested by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
.2
Materials for fire resistance rated construction shall conform to requirements of indicated
fire resistance rated assembly.
2.3
Materials - General
.1
For sheet metal Products: Sheet metal thickness indicated herein pertains to the
“minimum base steel thickness exclusive of coating”.
.2
Protective coatings for metal supports and framing:
2.4
.1
.1
Minimum corrosion protection: Z120 (G40) ASTM A653/A653M-11 .
.2
Heavy duty corrosion protection: Z275 (G90) ASTM A653/A653M-11 .
Partition Support Materials
Interior non-loadbearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645-14; roll formed from
0.455 mm (0.0179”) minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated or as recommended
by gypsum board manufacturer, galvanized steel sheet. Provide service holes starting at
450 mm (18") from bottom, then 914 mm (36") on centre to top of studs.
.1
Steel studs; at plywood sheathing locations: 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimum
thickness.
.2
Steel studs; at backer plate locations: 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimum thickness.
.3
Steel studs at tile backer board locations: 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimum
locations.
.2
Interior engineered metal stud framing: to ASTM C645-14; as indicated; galvanized steel
sheet. Provide service holes starting at 450 mm (18") from bottom, then 914 mm (36")
on centre to top of studs. Stud thickness in accordance with reviewed engineered shop
drawings.
.3
Interior floor and ceiling tracks (runners): to ASTM C645-14; in widths to suit stud sizes.
.4
.1
Metal thickness: to match studs.
.2
For openings wider than 914 mm (36"), provide 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimum
thickness for header.
Interior floor and ceiling track (runner) fasteners:
.1
To concrete and masonry: Use stub nails or power-driven fasteners.
.1 Power actuated fastening systems are not permitted.
.2
.5
To suspended acoustic ceiling tile grid: Manufactured to fit applicable ceiling grid
profile; CGC ‘Partition Clip’.
Bracing channels: Minimum 19 mm x 10 mm x 1.087 mm (3/4" x 3/8" x 0.0428") cold
rolled galvanized steel.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
2.5
Section 09 22 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Ceiling Support Materials and Systems
.1
General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C754-15 unless
otherwise indicated.
.2
Main runners: Steel channels, hot or cold rolled; Z180 (G60) galvanized.
.3
Hanger wire: ASTM A641/A641M-09A(2014), soft, Class 1 galvanized, minimum
4.064 mm (0.160”, 8 AWG).
.4
Hanger rods and flats: Mild steel with zinc coating, galvanized for exterior applications.
.1
General: Size devices for 5 times load imposed by completed system as
determined in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M-15.
.1 Power actuated fastening systems are not permitted.
.2
Screws, clips, bolts, concrete inserts or other devices for ceiling hangers whose
suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction
practices or by certified test data.
.3
Hangers: Comply with ASTM C754-15 for maximum ceiling area and loads to be
supported.
.4
Interior concrete ceiling anchors; acceptable Products:
.1 Dynabolt Sleeve Anchor 'TW-1614' or ‘Redi-Drive Tie Drive’ or ‘Redi-Drive’ by
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
.2 Redi-Drive by ITW Ramset/Red Head, complete with galvanized angle clip.
.3 Trubolt, or Dynabolt anchors by ITW Ramset/Red Head, complete with
galvanized angle clip.
.4 Kwik-Bolt 3 - HHDCA 1/4 Ceiling Hangers by Hilti.
.5
Fasteners exposed to weather, condensation, and corrosion: Zinc-plated or
stainless steel fasteners in applicable product lines specified in preceding
paragraphs.
.5
Tie wire: 1.19 mm (0.047”, 18 AWG) minimum zinc coated, soft-annealed wire, to ASTM
A641/A641M-09A(2014).
.6
Furring anchorages: 1.62 mm (0.0637”, 16 AWG) galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's
standard wire type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer
and complying with ASTM C754-15.
.7
Runner (carry) channels: 1.367 mm (0.0538”) thick cold rolled steel, primer painted or
zinc coated for interior locations, to ASTM C754-15, with minimum 228 MPa yield
strength:
2.6
.1
.1
38 mm x 12.7 mm (1-1/2" x 1/2") where supported at centres of 914 mm (36")
maximum.
.2
38 mm x 19 mm (1-1/2" x 3/4") where supported at centres of 1220 mm (48")
maximum.
Furring
Furring channels: 0.455 mm (0.0179”) minimum typical thickness, cold rolled steel,
wiped coated, nominal size of 22 mm (7/8") depth x 35 mm (1-3/8") face, hat type with
knurled face.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
Section 09 22 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
.2
Resilient furring channels: ‘Resilient Channel’ as manufactured by Nicholson Rollforming
or Bailey Metal.
.3
Z-furring members: Galvanized steel z-shaped furring members; ASTM A653/A653M-11
, G60, 0.836 mm (0.0329”) minimum thickness of base metal, of depth indicated,
designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards or blankets.
.4
Fasteners for furring members: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer for
substrate and application indicated, corrosion resistant finish for exterior building
envelope applications, load rating and spacing to support materials carried by assembly
with factor of safety of 3x per fastener manufacturer data sheets.
2.7
Support Systems – Removable Gypsum Wall Panels
.1
Concealed panel hanging strips; Z-bar hanger system.
.2
Material: Extruded aluminum.
.3
Strips and fasteners/anchors to be capable of supporting 2.5 times dead load of panels
in both vertical and horizontal panel applications.
2.8
.1
Accessories
Backer plates:
.1
Metal backer plates: Steel, galvanized; minimum 150 mm (6") wide x 0.836 mm
(0.0329”) minimum x length and width to suit size of items to be attached;
fastened to studs for attachment of surface mounted fittings and accessories.
.2
Plywood backer plates: Softwood plywood; 19 mm (3/4") minimum x length and
width to suit size of items to be attached; fastened to studs for attachment of
surface mounted fittings and accessories.
.3
Elimination of backer plates or direct attachment of accessories or equipment to
studs will not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation General
.1
Comply with ASTM C754-15 and manufacturer's instructions, except as modified herein.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system. Frame both sides of joints
with furring and other supports as indicated.
.2
Provide and install studs, framing, shimming, and furring to provide proper support for
gypsum board to achieve the following installation tolerances:
.1
Do not exceed 3 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10’) variation from plumb, level, and plane.
.2
Do not exceed 10 mm (3/8”) from drawings locations.
.3
Do not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16”) variation between planes of abutting edges or
ends.
.4
Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 3.2 mm
(1/8") from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
.5
In double stud walls, do not bridge across studs on opposite sides of wall with
gypsum board or metal cross bracing.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
Section 09 22 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
.3
Give complete cooperation and direction to trades erecting framing and furring over
which this work is applied. Coordinate finished joint location with framing.
.4
Coordinate installation and cooperate with mechanical and electrical work to
accommodate mechanical electrical items and any other work required to be
incorporated into or coordinated with the partitions, ceiling and soffit systems.
.1
Where the presence of suspended ductwork or other mechanical or electrical
services or devices above ceiling framing conflicts with ceiling framing
suspension points from structure above, provide bridging framing below
conflicting work as required to support ceiling framing on specified intervals.
.2
Do not suspend ceiling framing from mechanical or electrical suspension
systems unless agreement is obtained in writing from engineer for Subcontractor
installing such framing that additional imposed loads are acceptable; obtain
Consultant’s acceptance before proceeding.
.5
Provide clearances between work of this section and structural elements to prevent
transference of structural loads.
.6
Do not bridge building expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Independently frame both sides of joints with framing of furring members or as indicated.
.7
Size framing systems according to manufacturer’s engineered load tables, to meet
allowable deflection without permanent deformation.
3.2
.1
.2
3.3
.1
.1
Maximum allowable deflection: L/240.
.2
Maximum allowable deflection for tiled partitions: L/360.
Blocking and Sheathing
Attach to framing adequate backer plates to support the load of, and to withstand the
withdrawal and shear forces imposed by, items installed upon the work of this section.
Such items include, but are not restricted to:
.1
Coat hooks.
.2
Washroom accessories.
.3
Fitments.
.4
Cabinetry.
.5
Shelving.
.6
Finish hardware.
.7
Glazing accessories.
.8
Sliding door hardware.
.9
Items as indicated.
Plywood sheathing; wall and ceiling: Attach plywood sheathing to metal support framing,
in locations as indicated.
Furring - General
Furring indicated in Contract Documents is schematic. Do not regard as exact or
complete. Provide all necessary framing and furring to support gypsum board in
accordance with manufacturers' specifications.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
Section 09 22 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
.2
Shim furring as required to achieve required installation tolerances.
.3
Leave finished work rigid, secure, square, level, plumb, curved to detailed radius and
erected to maintain finish gypsum board line dimensions and contours. Make allowance
for thermal movement.
.4
Thermally separate metal studs from exterior concrete or masonry.
3.4
Suspended and Furred Ceilings
.1
Arrange hangers for suspended gypsum board ceilings to provide support independent
of walls, columns, pipes, ducts; erect plumb, and securely anchored to structural frame,
or embed in concrete slabs.
.2
Keep lateral braces at hangers back 450 mm (18") minimum unless otherwise noted.
.3
Space hangers at 914 mm (36") on centre maximum along runner channels, and not
more than 150 mm (6") from ends.
.4
Space runner channels at 1220 mm (48") on centre, maximum, and not more than
150 mm (6") from boundary walls, interruptions of continuity, and changes in direction.
Run channels transversely to structural framing members.
.5
Where splices are necessary, lap members at least 200 mm (8") and wire each end with
2 loops. Avoid clustering or lining up of splices.
.6
Attach to rod hangers by bending hanger sharply under bottom flange of runner, and
securely wiring in place with saddle tie.
.7
Erect cross furring channels transversely across runner channels at 400 mm (16") on
centre maximum, 305 mm (12") on centre at fire rated assemblies, at not more than
150 mm (6") from boundary wall openings, interruptions in ceiling continuity, and
changes in direction.
.8
Secure furring channels to each support with purpose-made slips or wire tie. Splice
joints by lapping channels and tying together.
.9
Level cross furring channels to maximum tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m (1/8” in 10 ft).
3.5
Wall Furring
.1
Install steel furring for braced walls, free standing walls, walls that are furred out as
indicated.
.2
Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on 4 sides,
with channels. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.
.3
Provide bulkheads and boxed-in duct shafts, for beams, columns, pipes and around
exposed services where indicated. Install 19 mm (3/4") channels at corners and at
305 mm (12") on centre.
3.6
Resilient Furring
.1
Erect gypsum board resilient furring maximum 610 mm (24") on centre and not more
than 150 mm (6") from ceiling/wall juncture. Secure to each support with 25 mm (1")
gypsum wallboard screw.
.2
Install 150 mm (6") continuous strip of 12.7 mm (1/2") gypsum board along base of
partitions where resilient furring installed.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
Section 09 22 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
.3
Provide resilient furring channel transverse to framing members, or as indicated.
.4
On partitions, install resilient furring with outer leg oriented upward.
3.7
.1
.2
Metal Stud Partition Framing
Provide partition tracks (runners) at floor and underside of structural assembly and as
follows:
.1
Align accurately and lay out according to partition layout.
.2
Secure runners to concrete access flooring and to concrete slabs, as applicable,
with screwed or shot fasteners located 50 mm (2") from each end and spaced at
maximum 610 mm (24") on centre.
.3
At partition corners, extend one runner to end of corner and butt other runner to
it, allowing necessary clearance for gypsum board thickness. Runners should not
be mitred.
Unless otherwise indicated, place interior studs vertically at centres as follows:
.1
Provide studs at 400 mm (16") on centre, and as specially spaced in accordance
with details indicated.
.2
Provide studs not more than 50 mm (2") from abutting walls, openings and each
side of corners.
.3
Provide freedom for 19 mm (3/4") deflection under beams, structural slabs and
the like to avoid transmission of structural loads to studs, or install 50 mm (2") leg
ceiling tracks.
.3
Install studs in tracks at floor and ceiling.
.4
Where horizontal runs of service lines are scheduled to be installed, arrange with
applicable trades and install studs simultaneously with services.
.5
At openings in stud walls, erect track at head and sills to accommodate intermediate
studs. At each end of track, cut out flanges, turn up web, and fasten to studs. Install
intermediate studs above and below openings in same manner and spacing as wall
studs. Install double studs at each jamb, and double tracks at head of door openings.
.6
At partitions requiring fire rating, erect in accordance with requirements of listing.
.7
Size studs, connections, and runners to carry loads according to stud manufacturer’s
load tables, at 24 kg/m2 (5 lb/ft2) live load to meet maximum allowable deflection limits.
Where depth of stud is indicated, size metal thickness to meet allowable deflection limits.
.8
Provide three studs at corner and intermediate intersections of partitions.
.9
Coordinate work with others installing horizontal runs of service lines so that work is
done simultaneously. Where standard holes are too small for installed services, notch
studs, and splice notched flanges with splice pieces 305 mm (12") longer than notches,
each fastened with 2 screws.
.10 Provide metal studding to maximum tolerance of 3 mm in 3 m (1/8” in 10 ft).
.11 Coordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When
erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.
.12 Coordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special
supports or anchorage for work specified in other sections.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Metal Supports for Gypsum Board
Section 09 22 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
.13 Unless otherwise indicated, partitions, together with gypsum board facings, shall extend
above ceilings to underside of structure above.
.14 Maintain clearance to avoid transference of structural loads to studs.
.15 Chase walls:
.1
Provide chase walls where indicated, consisting of two parallel steel stud
partitions.
.2
Provide cross bracing consisting of metal furring, located at quarter points on
each pair of studs. Attach cross bracing to studs with metal screws. Coordinate
construction of partitions to suit installation of services.
.16 Lateral support bracing channels:
3.8
.1
3.9
.1
Stiffen partitions over 3 m (10’) in vertical span, at mid-height to maximum
vertical spacing of 2440 mm (8’) on centre, with at least one 19 mm (3/4")
horizontal bracing channel, extending full length of partition, overlapping at least
two stud spaces at ends of bracing channels.
.2
Stiffen partitions at not more than 150 mm (6") from the top and bottom of
openings and across two full stud spaces at each side of openings with
horizontal bracing channel.
Control Joints
Control joints: in accordance with Section 09 29 00.
Concrete Anchors
.1
Provide anchorage points in reinforced concrete floor slab underside in accordance with
gypsum board manufacturer’s suspension requirements. Drill holes with carbide-tipped
drill bits conforming to ANSI B212.15-1994 (R2000).
.2
Provide anchors; minimum installation depth,
recommended by the anchor manufacturer.
3.10
and method of
expansion as
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Inspection and testing company may perform random load tests for ceiling anchor
installation.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Gypsum board; plain.
.2
Gypsum board; fire-rated.
.3
Glass scrim interior gypsum board.
.4
Tile backer board; coated glass scrim gypsum board.
.5
Gypsum board accessories and miscellaneous related materials.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
1.3
Fire-rated assembly listings and STC assembly ratings:
.1
Submit fire-rated assembly listings for each required fire resistance rated
assembly for work of this section.
.2
Submit STC assembly ratings for each required STC rated assembly for work of
this section.
Quality Assurance
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Subcontractor executing the work of this section shall have a minimum of 10
years continuous experience in successful installation of work of type and quality
indicated and specified.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Store materials in protected dry areas. Store gypsum board flat in piles with edges
protected.
.2
Ensure that finish metal members are not bent, dented, or otherwise deformed.
.3
Deliver Products supplied under the work of this section only to those who are
responsible for installation, to the place they direct, and to meet installation schedules.
.4
Package fire rated materials with labels attached.
1.5
Field Conditions
.1
Comply with requirements of referenced gypsum board application standards and
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, for environmental conditions before,
during and after application of gypsum boards.
.2
When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 12°C maintain continuous, uniform
comfortable building working temperatures of not less than 12°C for a minimum period of
48 hours before, during and following application of gypsum board and joint treatment
materials or bonding of adhesives.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.3
Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application. Avoid drafts during
dry, hot weather to prevent too rapid drying.
.4
Protection:
.1
Provide adequate protection of materials and work of this section from damage
by weather and other causes. Protect work of other trades from damage resulting
from work of this section. Make good such damage at no additional cost to the
Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Performance/Design Requirements
Fire resistance rating:
.1
2.2
Where gypsum board systems with fire resistance ratings are indicated or
required, provide materials and installations that are identical with those of
applicable assemblies tested by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
General
.1
Single source responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer,
or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards.
.2
Panel boards: 12.7 mm (1/2") minimum thickness and greater thickness as indicated,
1220 mm (48") wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, tapered edges where
available.
2.3
.1
Gypsum Board Panels
Plain gypsum board:
.1
Paper faced gypsum core panel solid set core enclosed in paper, to ASTM
C1396/C1396M-11.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 CertainTeed ‘Regular Gypsum Board’.
.2 CGC ‘SHEETROCK Gypsum Panel, Regular’.
.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock Gypsum Board’.
.4 Lafarge ‘Gypboard’.
.5 National Gypsum ‘Gold Bond Gypsum Board’.
.2
Fire-rated gypsum board:
.1
Paper faced gypsum core panel with a specially formulated core for use in fireresistive Type X or Type C designs, to ASTM C1396/C1396M-11.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 CertainTeed ‘Type X and Type C’.
.2 CGC ‘SHEETROCK Firecode and Firecode C’.
.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘ToughRock Fireguard and Fireguard Gypsum Board’.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.4 Lafarge ‘Firecheck C and X’.
.5 National Gypsum ‘Gold Bond Fire-Shield and Fire Shield C Gypsum Board’.
.3
Glass scrim mould resistant interior gypsum board:
.1
High performance mould resistant glass mat gypsum panels with coated
fibreglass mat facings laminated to both sides of moisture resistant gypsum core
to ASTM C1658/C1658M-13, highly resistant to mould growth with highest level
of performance (score of 10) when tested for mould resistance to ASTM D327312e1, 16 mm (5/8") thickness unless otherwise indicated
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 Georgia-Pacific ‘DensArmor Plus Fireguard High-Performance Interior Panel’.
.2 CGC ‘Sheetrock Brand Glass-Mat Panels – Mold Tough Regular/Firecode X’.
.4
Glass scrim tile backer board:
.1
Glass scrim fibre faced water resistant gypsum board with moisture resistant
core and fibreglass face mats and heat cured water resistant face coating to
ASTM C1178/C1178M-11. 16 mm (5/8") thick unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Type X to ASTM C1658/C1658M-13 where required at fire rated assemblies.
.3
Acceptable Products:
.1 CertainTeed ‘GlasRoc Diamondback Tile Backer’.
.2 Georgia-Pacific ‘Dens-Shield Tile Backer’.
2.4
.1
Attachment Materials
Screws; for gypsum board: bugle head, fine thread, self-tapping, Type W or S or S-12
point to suit framing type and metal gauge, with corrosion resistant finish to ASTM
C1002-07/ASTM C954-15. Screw sizing:
.1
#6 x 25 mm (1") for single thickness board fastening.
.2
#6 x 32 mm (1-1/4") for single thickness 15.9 mm (5/8") board fastening.
.3
#7 x 41 mm (1 5/8") for double thickness board fastening.
.2
Tie wire: 1.6 mm (0.063") diameter galvanized soft annealed steel wire.
.3
Laminating adhesive; for gypsum panels only: in accordance with gypsum board
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, to suit application.
2.5
Accessories
.1
Accessories: to ASTM C1047-14a unless otherwise indicated, maximum length pieces
per location. Flanges shall be free from dirt, grease, or other material that adversely
affects the bond of joint treatment or decoration.
.2
Casing trim; “L” or “LC” beads: Fillable edge trim, 0.55 mm (0.022") base thickness
commercial grade sheet steel with zinc wiped coating to ASTM A653/A653M-11 ;
perforated flanges.
.1
Acceptable Product:
.1 Bailey ‘D200’ and ‘4411’.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.2 Nicholson Rollforming Metal Trim 200-A and 200-B.
.3 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.3
Corner bead: Fillable edge trim, 0.55 mm (0.022") base thickness commercial grade
sheet steel with zinc wiped coating to ASTM A653/A653M-11 ; perforated flanges.
.1
Acceptable Product:
.1 Bailey ‘D100’.
.2 Nicholson Rollforming ‘No. 114’.
.3 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.4
Reveal trims:
.1
.5
Edge trims:
.1
2.6
Gordon Series 400, or matching style by Fry Reglet.
Gordon Series 200, or matching style by Fry Reglet.
Related Support Assemblies and Backer Plates
.1
Dimensional wood blocking at interior assemblies: in accordance with Section 06 10 53.
.2
Metal support systems and backer plates at interior assemblies: in accordance with
Section 09 22 00.
2.7
Joint Treatment Materials
.1
General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M-15.
.2
Joint tape:
.3
.4
.5
.1
Interior gypsum board: Paper.
.2
Tile backing panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint compound for interior gypsum board: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
.1
Prefilling: Use setting-type compound as recommended by panel manufacturer.
.2
Embedding and first coat: Use setting-type or taping compound as recommended
by panel and trim manufacturers.
.3
Fill and finish coats: Use sanding type setting-type or taping compound as
recommended by panel manufacturer.
Skim coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use:
.1
Setting-type, sandable topping compound.
.2
Drying-type, all-purpose compound.
.3
High-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and
to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
Joint compound for tile backing panels:
.1
Glass-mat, water-resistant backing panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
2.8
.1
Acoustic Wall Assembly Materials
Acoustic sealant; concealed locations: non-skinning butyl sealant, non-hardening,
remains soft and tacky, to CGSB 19.21-M87:
.1
Sealant shall not deteriorate (stain or bleed into) painted surfaces.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 DAP ‘Mono Acoustic Sealant’.
.2 Pecora ‘BA98’.
.3 Quiet Solution ‘QuietSeal’.
.4 Tremco ‘Acoustical Sealant’.
.5 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Acoustic sealant; exposed locations: Interior paintable sealant in accordance with
Section 07 92 00.
.3
Acoustic sealant for plenum locations: Smoke-seal sealant with flame-spread not more
than 25 and smoke developed classification not more than 50 to CAN/ULC-S102-10, in
accordance with Section 07 84 00.
.4
Acoustic compound: premixed perlite plaster.
.5
Acoustic (sound attenuation) insulation:
.1
Mineral-fibre sound attenuation batts: to CAN/ULC S702-97, Type 1, and noncombustible to CAN/ULC-S114-05.
.1 Acceptable Products:
.1 CertainTeed ‘Sustainable Insulation NoiseReducer’.
.2 Johns Manville ‘MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts’.
.3 Johns Manville ‘Sound-SHIELD’
.4 Roxul 'AFB'.
.5 Owens-Corning 'QuietZone'.
.2
2.9
Fasteners: use mechanical fasteners where required to secure insulation into
position in accordance with insulation manufacturer.
Access Doors
.1
Architectural access doors: in accordance with Section 08 31 13.
.2
Access doors: in accordance with Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
Installation
General: Comply with ASTM C840-11, GA-216, GA-600, and manufacturer's
instructions, except as otherwise indicated. Do not bridge building expansion joints with
support system. Frame both sides of joints with furring and other supports as indicated.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.2
Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or
damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more
than 1.6 mm (1/16") open space between boards. Do not force into place.
.3
Cover both faces of stud partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces
(above ceiling, and the like) unless otherwise indicated, except in chase walls which are
properly braced internally.
.4
Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional
support at openings and cut-outs.
.5
Securely attach trim, casings, framing, and accessories.
.6
Apply components of fire-rated assemblies in conformance with indicated designs.
.7
Erect materials to dimensions indicated, plumb, level, straight, and square to adjoining
elements.
.8
Do not apply gypsum board in close proximity to hot pipes or heating ducts.
.9
Install materials with the minimum number of joints. Tightly butt joints, without force, and
neatly align them.
.10 Frame openings on every side. Provide clearances with services.
.11 Work shall include bulkheads over doors, frames, screens, and changes in ceiling levels,
pipe space and as indicated.
.12 Provide clearances between work of this section and structural elements to prevent
transference of structural loads in accordance with Section 09 22 00.
.13 Tolerances:
3.2
.1
Do not exceed 3 mm (1/8") in 3 m (10’) variation from plumb, level, and plane in
exposed surfaces, except at end joint between gypsum board panels.
.2
Do not exceed 10 mm (3/8”) from indicated location.
.3
Do not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16”) variation between planes of abutting edges or
ends.
.4
Surface flatness shall not exceed 1.5 mm (1/16") within 305 mm (12") straight
edge. For non-tapered-edge end joints between boards, measure flatness
tolerance with end of straight end at centreline of joint.
Accessories
.1
At external corners install corner trim secured to framing at 230 mm (9-1/16") on centre
on both flanges with screw fasteners or clinch tool.
.2
Secure casing trim at board edges where exposed to view, where board butts against
other materials with no trim to conceal junction, at perimeter of ceiling surfaces at tops of
partitions where they stop against continuous ceiling surfaces, and where indicated.
.3
Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane.
.4
Use full length pieces.
.5
Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners, free from
rough edges. Secure in accordance with manufacturer's specifications unless otherwise
required.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.6
3.3
Installation tolerances:
.1
Alignment with board panels shall not exceed tolerances specified above.
.2
End joints shall be flush aligned to maximum offset of 0.5 mm (0.020”).
Board Application - General
.1
Before application of gypsum board commences, ensure that internal services have
been installed, tested, and approved; that conduits, pipes, cables, and outlets are
plugged, capped, or covered; and that fastenings and supports installed by others are in
place.
.2
Extend board into door, window, and other openings, reveals, behind fitments, and other
applied items and on metal stud partitions to structure above unless indicated otherwise.
.3
Apply board with long dimension perpendicular to supports, unless otherwise indicated.
.4
Locate joints on opposite sides of partitions on different studs, and at least 305 mm (12")
from opening jambs.
.5
Install board to minimize joints, and align end joints to be the least objectionable (where
they are unavoidable), according to the indicated lighting design. Locate joints in ceilings
where least prominently discerned, and never line them up with opening edges.
.6
Form smooth joints at ends and at field cut edges of board panels.
.7
Fasten board to metal support members by metal gypsum board screws, 9.5 mm
(0.374") minimum to, and 12.7 mm (1/2") maximum from, center of joints. Space screws:
.1
At fire rated board as per fire-rated assembly.
.2
At typical board walls at 400 mm (16") on centre at edges and field unless
otherwise required.
.3
At typical board ceilings at 305 mm (12") on centre at edges and field unless
otherwise required.
.8
At laminated plain gypsum board locations: Apply adhesive with notched spreader to
leave ribbons 10 mm x 13 mm (3/8" x 1/2") at 38 mm (1-1/2") apart over entire back side
of face layer. Erect board immediately after spreading adhesive. Temporarily secure
face boards with screws or bracing to ensure adequate bond until adhesive sets.
Temporary face screws may also be used. Substrate shall be fully cured and sufficiently
dry to allow adhesive to fully cure and not re-emulsify.
.9
Offset gypsum board joints 150 mm (6") minimum from corners of openings.
.10 Gypsum panel product joints shall be located so that no joint will align with the edge of
an opening unless control joints are to be installed at these locations.
.11 Replace damaged or weathered sheathing boards.
3.4
Interior Tile Backer Board Application
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
.2
Section 09 31 00 to install tile setting material over tape installed by this section.
.3
Apply tile backer board full height unless otherwise indicated, and in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
.4
Fastener spacing:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.5
3.5
.1
.2
.1
Walls: fasten at 150 mm (6") on centre at vertical butt joints and 210 mm (8") on
centre in field.
.2
Ceilings: fasten at 150 mm (6") on centre.
Maintain 6 mm (1/4") gap between board and tub or shower base as applicable.
Acoustic Wall Assemblies
Acoustical sealant and plaster:
.1
Apply acoustical sealant to seal gaps in accordance with applicable requirements
of ASTM C919-12.
.2
Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal both sides of partition assembly between
gypsum board and adjacent floor, wall, and ceiling assembly of partitions which
contain sound attenuation insulation, and where noted.
.3
Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal both sides of partition assembly at top and
bottom of control joints.
.4
Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal intersections with sound-isolating
partitions that are extended to reduce sound flanking paths.
.5
Apply bead of acoustic sealant to seal joint between penetrations and gypsum
board.
.6
Completely seal objects at wall and gypsum board penetrations (such as
electrical boxes, piping, and fasteners) with heavy coating of premixed perlite
plaster.
.7
Apply sealant to clean, dry surfaces.
Sound attenuation insulation:
.1
Install sound attenuation insulation to fill cavity unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Trim insulation to provide close-fit contact to framing assemblies and fill the
partition cavity or acoustic insulation assemblies to thicknesses specified or
indicated.
.3
Maintain air space between backs of sound attenuation insulation and back of
opposite partition face layer, as applicable.
.4
Cut insulation to provide close-fit contact around electrical boxes, pipes, and
other obstructions and penetrations through and within acoustic assemblies.
.5
Extend acoustic partition assemblies to underside of structure. Incorporate
approved provision to prevent transmittance of structural deflection to partition
assembly.
.6
Staple sound attenuation insulation where required by manufacturer's installation
instructions.
.7
Where studs are not faced with gypsum board on both sides, mechanically fasten
wire mesh to non-faced side of stud to retain insulation.
.8
Mechanically attach sound attenuation insulation in wall assemblies where cavity
of wall assembly is greater than 150 mm (6").
.9
Secure insulation in such a manner that it will not sag or settle away from
required locations.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 9
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.3
3.6
.1
.2
Sound flanking paths:
.1
Where sound rated partition walls intersect non rated gypsum board partition
walls, extend sound rated construction to completely close sound flanking paths
through non rated construction.
.2
Seal joints between face layers at vertical interior angles of intersecting
partitions.
Finishing
Provide levels of gypsum board finish for locations as follows, in accordance with GA214.
.1
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas, except provide higher level
of finish as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.
.2
Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at applied hard surfaces, except remove tool
marks and ridges.
.3
Level 4: Exposed gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level is
indicated.
.4
Level 5: Exposed gypsum board surfaces where indicated in Room Finish
Schedule.
Interior gypsum board:
.1
Prefill:
.1 Use setting-type joint compound.
manufacturer's directions.
Mix joint compound according to
.2 Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge.
.3 Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire rated partitions.
.4 Wipe off excess compound and allow compound to harden.
.5 Joint gaps not greater than 3.2 mm (1/8") shall be prefilled with either readymix or setting type joint compound; joint gaps greater than 3.2 mm (1/8") shall
be prefilled with setting-type joint compound.
.2
Taping (Level 1):
.1 Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints.
.2 Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound.
.3 Remove excess compound.
.4 Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.
.3
First coat (Level 2):
.1 Use taping or all-purpose drying-type compound.
.2 Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound and allow to
dry completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3 Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over
exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 10
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.4 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 1 coat of joint
compound.
.4
Second coat (Level 3): After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat of
compound over tape and trim, feathering compound 50 mm (2") beyond edge of
first coat.
.1 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with total of 2 separate
coats of joint compound.
.5
Third coat (Level 4):
.1 After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat to
joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 50 mm (2") beyond edge of
second coat.
.2 Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand,
to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for
application of finish.
.3 Finished joints will be accepted with a camber not greater than 1 mm (1/32")
and shall be seamless, plumb, true and flush and with square, neat corners.
.4 Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with total of 3 separate
coats of joint compound.
.6
Skim coat (Level 5):
.1 After the fourth coat has dried, apply skim coat of topping or all-purpose
drying-type compound over exposed surfaces of gypsum board.
.2 After skim coat has dried, touch-up and sand to provide surface free of visual
defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish.
.3
.4
.5
Joint compound:
.1
Apply finish coat of compound feathering 75 to 100 mm (3” to 4”) beyond tape
edges.
.2
Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 0.79 mm
(1/32”).
Trim:
.1
Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten
gypsum board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim manufacturer.
.2
Install metal corner beads at external corners.
.3
Install metal casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum base would otherwise
be exposed or semi exposed, and where gypsum base terminates against
dissimilar material.
.4
Erect beads plumb or level, with minimum joints.
Control joints:
.1
Provide control joints set in board facing. Support control joints with studs or
furring channels on both sides of joint.
.2
Provide control joints in required locations.
.1 Review control joint locations with Consultant prior to installation.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 11
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
.3
Install control joints where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a construction
joint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the building structure.
.4
Install control joints where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight
plane exceeding 9100 mm (30 linear feet).
.5
Install control joints in interior ceilings:
.1 With perimeter relief:
.1 Linear dimensions between control joints shall not exceed 15000 mm
(50 ft) and total area between control joints shall not exceed 230 m²
(2500 ft²).
.2 Without perimeter relief:
.1 Linear dimensions between control joints shall not exceed 9100 mm
(30 ft) and total area between control joints shall not exceed 84 m²
(900 ft²).
3.7
.6
Install control joints where ceiling framing members change direction.
.7
Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire-rated system, blocking shall
be provided behind the control joint by using a backing material such as 16 mm
(5/8") type X gypsum panel products, mineral fibre, or other tested equivalent.
Construct through-wall control joints at fire-rated assemblies in accordance with
assembly listing requirements.
.8
Line up control joints with joints in other construction or with centre lines of
mullions, columns, piers, or similar building elements, where accepted by
Consultant.
.9
Install control joints straight and true.
.10
Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling height
frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. If
control joints are not used, additional reinforcement is required at corners to
distribute concentrated stresses.
.11
Board joints shall be located so that no joint will align with the edge of an opening
unless control joints are to be installed at these locations.
Fire Separations
.1
Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with assembly listing requirements in order to
obtain fire ratings indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
.2
Vertical bulkheads in ceiling spaces over fire rated partitions, doors and the like shall
have same fire rating as the partition over which they occur. Such bulkheads shall be of
gypsum board construction unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Use fire rated gypsum wallboard as specified.
.4
Where lighting fixtures, diffusers, and the like are recessed into fire rated ceilings or
bulkheads, provide enclosure to maintain required fire rating. Form removable panel to
give access to fixture outlet box.
.5
Where fire hose cabinets or other fixtures or equipment are recessed in fire rated walls
or partitions, provide gypsum board enclosure or backing to maintain required fire rating,
unless otherwise detailed.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 29 00
Page 12
March 22, 2016
Gypsum Board
3.8
Access Doors
.1
Install access doors to mechanical and electrical fixtures specified in respective sections
of Divisions 21, 22, and 23 and Divisions 26, 27, and 28.
.2
Access
doors
shall
be
as
supplied
by
Divisions 21, 22, and 23
Divisions 26, 27, and 28. Locations to be reviewed and confirmed by Consultant.
.3
Install access panels in locations to be determined by coordination with trades installing
mechanical, electrical and other building services and consultation with Consultant.
.4
Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.
3.9
and
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Remove debris and rubbish from wall and ceiling cavities before enclosing with board.
.2
Clean up and remove surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work of this
section upon completion.
.3
Clean off beads, casings, joint compound droppings and the like, leave the work of this
section ready for painting trades.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Tiling
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Interior hard surface tiling.
.2
Mortar bed for tiling.
.3
Thin-set adhesives for tiling.
.4
Crack isolation membrane.
.5
Trim accessories.
References
Definitions:
.1
Large format tile:
.1 Natural stone tiles and manufactured tiles other than porcelain and glass with
dimension measured along any edge 305 mm (12") and greater.
.2 Porcelain tiles with dimension measured along any edge 450 mm (18") and
greater.
.2
1.3
Thin ceramic tile panels: Large format thin tiles 5.5 mm (0.216") or less in
thickness.
Administrative Requirements
.1
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
.2
Sequencing and scheduling:
1.4
.1
Coordinate installation of tile work with related work.
.2
Proceed with tile work only after curbs, vents, drains, piping, and other
projections through substrate have been installed and when substrate
construction and framing of openings have been completed.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.3
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
.2
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions for Products proposed for use in
the work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
.4
Indicate location of control joints.
Samples:
.1
Submit 2 -full size samples of each type of tile specified.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.5
.2
Submit 2 - 305 mm (12") long samples trim accessory.
.3
Submit 2 - 305 mm (12") long samples of control joint sealant.
Test and evaluation reports:
.1
1.5
Submit moisture, alkalinity, and adhesive bond test results.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
.3
1.6
.1
Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the operation and maintenance manuals.
Maintenance materials:
.1
Provide minimum 2% of each type and colour of tile required for the Work for
maintenance use.
.2
Maintenance material to be of same production run as installed material.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.1 Execute work of this section only by a Subcontractor who has adequate plant,
equipment, and skilled workers to perform it expeditiously, and is known to
have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that specified
during a period of at least the immediate past 5 years.
.2 Subcontractor shall be a member company in good standing of the Terrazzo,
Tile and Marble Association of Canada and have been a member for at least
the past 5 years.
.2
1.7
.1
Mock-ups:
.1
Grouted mock-up: 1220 mm x 1220 mm (48" x 48") sample panels of each tile
type and colour, texture, size, and pattern of tile and grout.
.2
Install each product and colour mock-up for acceptance by Consultant. Accepted
mock-up shall form basis of standard of workmanship for remainder of work.
Mock-up shall consist of floor/wall/base corner intersection, with 300 mm (12") of
finish product on each face.
Field Conditions
Ambient conditions:
.1
Execute work of this section while ambient temperature and humidity within safe
working temperatures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions
for a period of 72 hours before, during and following installation. Avoid
concentrated or irregular heating during curing period.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Tiling
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Performance/Design Requirements
.1
ANSI - American Standard Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile.
.2
Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (“TTMAC”) Specification Guide
09 30 00 Tile Installation Manual 2012-2014.
2.2
.1
General
Single source responsibility: In any given space, use adhesive and grout from a single
manufacturer.
.1
.2
2.3
.1
In locations requiring crack isolation membrane, adhesive and grout shall be of
same manufacturer as crack isolation membrane.
Tile products shall be from same production run, dye lot, calibre, and batch number. If
shading variation is evident, notify Consultant prior to installation.
Tile Products
Porcelain tile; floor tile:
.1
Product: Centura ‘Icon’.
.1 Size(s): 300 mm x 600 mm.
.2 Colour: Titanium.
.2
Acceptable alternate: Ciot ‘Sistem N’.
.1 Size(s): 300 mm x 600 mm.
.2 Colour: Tango.
.2
Porcelain tile; wall tile:
.1
Product: Centura ‘Icon’.
.1 Size(s): 100 mm x 600 mm.
.2 Colour: Ice.
.2
Acceptable alternate: Ciot ‘Sistem N’.
.1 Size(s): 100 mm x 600 mm.
.2 Colour: Bianco Puro.
2.4
.1
Adhesive and Mortar Materials
Unless otherwise specified, select from the following thin-set adhesives:
.1
Latex modified Portland cement thin bed mortar gauged:
.1 Interior and exterior grade.
.2 ANSI A118.4 (ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013) and ANSI A118.11 (ANSI
A108/A118/A136.1-2013).
.3 White colour for translucent tile applications.
.4 Acceptable Products:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.1 Ardex ‘X77 Microtec Fiber Reinforced Mortar’ with Ardex ‘E90 Mortar
Admix’.
.2 Flextile ‘51’ mixed with Flextile ‘44’.
.3 Laticrete 'Laticrete 4237 Latex Thin Set Liquid' with 'Portland 211 Crete
Filler Powder'.
.4 Mapei 'KERALASTIC' mixed with 'KERABOND'.
.5 Profix ‘6500’ liquid latex mixed with ‘8500’ thin set mortar.
.6 Promo Adhesives Inc. ‘Pro Bond Plus’ with ‘Pro Bond Plus Additive’.
.2
Enriched, modified, Portland cement thin bed mortar, single component, with
integral polymer:
.1 Interior and exterior grade.
.2 ANSI A118.4 (ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013) and ANSI A118.11 (ANSI
A108/A118/A136.1-2013).
.3 White colour for translucent tile applications.
.4 Acceptable Products:
.1 Ardex ‘X 5 Flexible Tile & Stone Mortar’.
.2 Flextile ‘52’.
.3 Laticrete ‘254 Platinum Multipurpose Thin-Set Mortar’.
.4 Mapei 'Ultraflex 3' or ‘Ultraflex RS’.
.5 Profix ‘Megaflex’ thin set mortar.
.6 Promo Adhesives Inc. ‘Pro HPX’.
.2
Mortar beds, levelling coats:
.1
Materials:
.1 Water: clean and free of chemicals detrimental to mortar and grout mixes.
.2 Sand: to ASTM C144-11, passing 16 mesh.
.3 Cement: to CSA A3002-13, Type U.
.4 Latex: Formulated for use with Portland cement mortars.
.5 Cleavage membrane: 0.10 mm (4 mil) thick polyethylene film to CAN/CGSB
51.34-M86 (amended 1988).
.6 Metal lath: Galvanized type, 1.4 kg/m3 to ASTM C847-14a.
.7 Reinforcing mesh: 51 mm x 51 mm (2” x 2”) mesh size, fabricated from
1.6 mm (0.06") thick galvanized steel wire; welded fabric design.
.2
Mixes:
.1 Scratch coat (by volume): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, and water or
latex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may be used per
manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusted depending
on water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.2 Slurry bond coat: Mix Portland cement and water to a creamy paste
consistency. Include latex additive where required by TTMAC detail.
.3 Mortar bed for walls (by volume): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, and
water or latex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may be
used per manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusted
depending on water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability.
.4 Levelling coat (by volume): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand, and water
or latex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may be used per
manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusted depending
on water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability.
.5 Mortar bed for floors (by performance): 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts sand,
and water or latex where required by TTMAC detail. Premixed mortar may be
used per manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust liquid volume may be adjusted
depending on water content of sand to obtain consistency and workability that
will allow compaction during tamping of the mortar bed, and achieve
minimum compressive strength of 15 MPa after 28 days.
.3
Levelling underlayment:
.1
Cement-based, quick-setting, self-levelling, self-drying underlayment for
installations from featheredge to minimum 32 mm (1-1/4") thick in single
application.
.2
Primer: Type as recommended by levelling underlayment manufacturer to suit
substrate.
.3
Acceptable Products:
.1 Ardex ‘Liquid BackerBoard Self-Levelling Underlayment’.
.2 Ardex ‘TL 1000’.
.3 Flextile ‘5900 Flex-Flo Plus Self-Levelling Underlayment’.
.4 Laticrete ‘Supercap SC500’.
.5 Mapei ‘Ultraplan 1 Plus’.
.6 Promo Adhesives Inc. ‘Pro Plan’.
2.5
.1
Grout Materials
Latex-Portland cement grout and Portland cement grout:
.1
Sanded (for joints between 3.2 mm (1/8") and 12.7 mm (1/2") and for floor tiling)
and unsanded (for joints greater than 1.5 mm (1/16") less than 3.2 mm (1/8") and
for wall, ceiling tiling:
.2
Weather, frost and shock resistant.
.3
ANSI A118.4 (ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013).
.4
Acceptable Products:
.1 Ardex ‘FG-C Microtec (unsanded)’, ‘FL Rapid Set, Flexible Sanded’.
.2 Flextile ‘500 Polymer Modified Non-Sanded’, ‘600 Polymer Modified Sanded
Grout’.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.3 Laticrete ‘Tri-Poly Fortified Sanded Grout (1500 Series), Laticrete ‘Tri-Poly
Fortified Unsanded Grout (1600 Series)’ gauged with Laticrete ‘1776 Admix
Plus’.
.4 Mapei 'Keracolor S' Sanded Grout, Mapei 'Keracolor U' Unsanded Grout’.
.5 Profix ‘Poly 500 Sanded Grout’, Profix ‘Poly 600 Unsanded Grout’.
.6 Promo Adhesives Inc. ‘Pro Grout Sanded’, Promo Adhesives Inc. ‘Pro Grout
Un-Sanded’.
.2
Grout colours to later selection by Consultant from manufacturer's full range.
.3
Grout sealer: as recommended by grout manufacturer.
2.6
Crack Isolation Membrane
.1
Review floor assembly design (live load deflection) with Consultant and crack isolation
membrane manufacturer’s representative. Confirm crack isolation manufacturer’s
recommended product to Consultant in writing, on crack isolation membrane
manufacturer’s company letterhead prior to commencing the installation.
.2
Crack isolation membrane shall be thin, flexible, cold applied, load bearing, ANSI
A118.12 (ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013) with Extra Heavy Service rating tested to
ASTM C627-10 on concrete substrates. Materials to be non-toxic, non-flammable, and
non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured.
.1
Accessories:
.1 Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven rot-proof specifically intended for crack
isolation membrane as recommended by crack isolation membrane
manufacturer.
.2 Mortar; for setting tile: Compatible product as recommended by crack
isolation membrane manufacturer.
.2
Acceptable Products:
.1 Ardex ‘8+9 Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Compound’.
.2 Flextile 1000 Flexilastic’.
.3 Flextile ‘WP980 Waterproof & Crack Isolation Membrane’.
.4 Laticrete ‘Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane’.
.5 Mapei ‘Mapeguard 2’.
.6 Profix ‘Imper’.
.7 Promo Adhesives Inc. ‘Pro CBM Membrane’.
2.7
.1
Accessories and Related Materials
Trim accessories:
.1
Exposed edges and corners: Schluter Systems ‘JOLLY’.
.2
Floor transitions: Schluter Systems ‘RENO U’.
.2
Joint sealants: mildew resistant sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
.3
Water vapour reduction system:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.1
100% solids epoxy one coat system, 0 VOC, suitable for application to 100% RH
floors per ASTM F2170-11, designed to protect moisture sensitive adhered
flooring systems from elevated moisture and alkalinity levels, warranted by
manufacturer to cover subsequent flooring materials and labour, compatible with
finish flooring products.
.2
ASTM E96/E96M-10 water vapour transmission (wet methods) performance shall
be documented by independent testing laboratory at a minimum 97% for water
vapour transmission reduction compared to untreated concrete.
.3
ASTM E96/E96M-10 perm rating shall not exceed a 0.10 Perm rating.
.4
ASTM D1308-02(2013) insensitivity to alkaline environment up to, and including,
pH 14 in a 14 day bath test.
.5
Manufacturer certifies acceptance and exposure to continuous topical water
exposure after final cure.
.6
Water vapour reduction system shall be a single coat, stand alone system with
no requirements for additional components such as sand broadcast for adhesion
of flooring systems.
.7
System shall reduce Calcium Chloride readings of up to 25 lbs/1000 ft 2/24 hrs by
97% in one coat. System must be able to perform as required with RH Probe
readings of 100%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Ensure compatibility of Products supplied under this section, and which bear contact
with substrate.
.2
Before work of this section commences, examine the areas to be covered and report any
flaw or adverse conditions in writing to the Contractor and the Consultant. Do not
proceed with work until surfaces and conditions comply with the requirements indicated
in the manufacturer's instructions and in ANSI A108.5 (ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013)
specification.
.3
Miscalibrated tiles, tiles with chipped corners, tiles with holes, will not be accepted for
installation.
.4
Inspect tiles for colour variation. Tiles presenting noticeable variations shall be carefully
selected, set aside and used in areas where they fit in the pattern homogeneously.
Provide for appropriate lighting equipment in addition to existing lighting in the immediate
area where the installation is being performed so that any shade differences which are
normally very slight can be identified easily.
3.2
Preparation
.1
Completely remove contaminants and deleterious substances and debris which may
prevent, reduce, and affect adhesion or performance or may act as bond breaker.
.2
Wall surfaces:
.1
Roughen surfaces with previously painted glossy finishes by sandpaper or other
abrasive medium, and completely remove finishes which are not compatible with
products specified under this section.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.2
.3
.4
.5
Prime gypsum, wood or porous concrete with primer, brush or roller applied at
full strength in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.
Floor surfaces:
.1
Prepare concrete to receive levelling underlayment in accordance with
International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) designation CSP-3.
.2
Prepare concrete to receive crack isolation membrane in accordance with
International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) designation CSP-2.
.3
Concrete shall be minimum of 90 days old.
.4
At door opening locations where finished flooring is adjacent to weather-stripping
or automatic door bottoms provide trowel-applied levelling compound to provide
full contact between finished flooring and weather-stripping or automatic door
bottoms. Taper trowel-applied levelling compound to transition with adjacent
flooring substrate to be provide smooth and seamless transition at maximum
slope of 3:1000 (height to distance) ratio.
Alkalinity, moisture, and adhesion testing:
.1
Perform moisture and alkalinity tests and adhesive bond test.
.2
Where concrete substrate exhibits higher than permitted moisture and alkalinity
levels, Provide water vapour reduction system and repeat moisture and alkalinity
tests and adhesive bond tests.
.3
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Document tests
performed and submit in writing to Consultant.
Water vapour reduction system:
.1
At existing concrete slabs-on-grade to receive floor finishes specified in this
section, and where new concrete slabs-on-grade to receive floor finishes
specified in this section exhibit higher than permitted moisture and alkalinity
levels, Provide water vapour reduction system to protect moisture sensitive
flooring system from elevated moisture and alkalinity levels.
.1 Shot blast floors to a International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) Concrete
Surface Profile (CSP) #3 or #4 and clean surfaces with an industrial vacuum
cleaner and remove residues from the substrate. Grinding is allowed only in
areas not accessible by shot blasting. Remove defective materials, and
foreign matter such as dust, adhesives, levelling compounds, paint, dirt, floor
hardeners, bond breakers, oil, grease, curing agents, form release agents,
efflorescence, laitance, and other deleterious substances. Repair cracks,
expansion joints, control joints, and open surface honeycombs and fill in
accordance with water vapour reduction system manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2 Reinforcing fibres, if applicable, that are visible after shot blasting shall be
removed and vacuumed leaving no fibres left on the concrete surfaces.
.3 Repair concrete prior to moisture vapour reduction system installation by
using water vapour reduction system manufacturer’s recommended bonding
emulsion with approved concrete repair materials. Comply with requirements
as listed in water vapour reduction system manufacturer’s technical data
information. Consult with vapour reduction manufacturer.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 9
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.4 Shot blast a small test area and review surface profile with the finished
flooring applicator. As the water vapour reduction system is not a levelling
material, Provide feather finish or levelling material to “flatten” or level the
water vapour reduction system treated concrete prior to the flooring
installation.
.5 Apply moisture vapour reduction system monolithically to manufacturer’s
recommended spreading rate in number of coats to achieve manufacturer’s
recommended thickness.
.6 Consult with vapour reduction manufacturer and comply with requirements as
listed in water vapour reduction system manufacturer’s technical data
information.
.7 Review surface profile with the finished flooring applicator. As the water
vapour reduction system is not a levelling material, Provide feather finish or
levelling material to “flatten” or level the water vapour reduction system
treated concrete prior to the flooring installation. Flooring installation shall not
show telegraphing of substrate. Flooring installation shall be homogenous
free of substrate lines, pockets, bumps and unevenness.
.8 Verify proper adhesion of flooring adhesives/mortars and levelling
compounds to the final vapour reduction coating system for acceptability.
.9 Do not proceed with finished flooring installation if moisture vapour
transmission exceeds maximum permitted rates.
3.3
Mixing
.1
Mix mortars, additives and grouts in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
.2
Mix no mortar in same mixer as a dissimilar type of mortar unless the mixer is first
thoroughly washed clean.
3.4
Levelling Underlayment Installation
.1
Install levelling underlayment to tile flooring assemblies utilizing large format tile, except
for large format tile installations over mortar bed sloped to drain.
.2
Mix and apply primer to prepared subfloor. Allow to dry prior to installation of levelling
material.
.3
Mix and apply levelling material in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions to
produce a smooth, flat surface.
.1
.4
3.5
Apply levelling underlayment to provide substrate surface flatness tolerances to
achieve FF 60 in accordance with ASTM E1155-14 or 3 mm (1/8") with a
3000 mm (10’-0”) straightedge.
Allow to set prior to installation of tile.
Crack Isolation Membrane Installation
.1
Concrete floors are to be dry with maximum allowable moisture in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions.
.2
Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified
International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) designation.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 10
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.3
Prepare substrate and pre-treat cracks and joints.
.4
Install crack isolation membrane system to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.5
Install crack isolation membrane to tile flooring assemblies utilizing large format tile and
as indicated.
.6
Install crack isolation membrane to substrates for tile flooring installations located on
suspended structural floor assemblies. Treat substrate with full coverage of crack
isolation membrane and reinforcement in accordance with crack isolation membrane
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.6
Installation - General
.1
Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and as indicated
herein.
.2
Install in accordance with TTMAC Specification Guide 09 30 00 Tile Installation Manual
2012-2014, except where specified otherwise.
.3
Install in accordance with ANSI A108.5 (ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013).
.4
Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform width.
.5
Provide mortar beds and levelling coats in accordance with TTMAC details.
.6
Provide uniform positive slope to floor drains, to minimum allowable slope of 20 mm/m
(1/4 inch/ft).
.7
At floor drains in mortar bed: Provide minimum setting bed of 10 mm (3/8"), sloped to
drain at 20 mm/m (1/4 inch/ft).
.8
Provide edge protection at tile edges and corners, unless otherwise indicated, using
maximum length pieces.
.9
Provide edge protection and transition strips at tile transitions, unless otherwise
indicated, using maximum length pieces.
.10 Review locations of tile accessories with Consultant prior to setting tile and comply with
directions of Consultant.
.11 Apply sealant at interface with frames at openings. Apply sealant in accordance with
Section 07 92 00 and manufacturer’s instructions.
.1
Sealant colour to later selection by Consultant.
.12 Install flooring to entire area indicated or scheduled. Unless otherwise indicated, include
coverplates occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall uniform continuity of
colour and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on cover plates. Tightly butt edges to
perimeter of floor around cover plates and to cover plates. Do not install flooring to floor
drains occurring within finished floor areas.
3.7
Tile Setting
.1
Lay out tile work as indicated on drawings, and where lay-out is not indicated, lay-out
tiles so tiles less than 1/2 the least dimension do not occur and with minimum amount of
cutting.
.2
Using a damp towel, wipe off the back side of tile to remove any dust or other residue
that may be left over from the manufacturing process.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 11
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.3
Place as much tile as possible in one operation before setting bed reaches initial set.
Clean back and remove bed when it has set before tile is laid.
.4
Prime materials and by methods specified by manufacturer of bond coat.
.5
Except where tiles have setting tabs, and except for expansion, control and isolation
joints, maintain joint widths as selected by Consultant.
.6
Back up tile coves, curbs and other shaped pieces solid with mortar. Rigidly set,
reinforce or otherwise make firm and secure such pieces.
.7
Beat tiles in thoroughly and sufficiently to cause mortar ribs or notches to come together
into a continuous void free bed and allow the mortar to flow up partially into the joint
space to maximum of 1/3 the thickness of the tile. Sound floor tiles by tapping and reset
all tiles with voids in setting bed.
.8
Tile shall contact setting materials for minimum of 95% coverage unless otherwise
indicated.
.9
Obtain 100% mortar coverage with applicable requirements for back buttering of tile in
referenced TTMAC and ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013 series of tile installation
standards for the following:
.1
Tile installed with chemical resistant mortars and grouts.
.2
Tile having tiles 300 mm (12") or larger in any direction.
.3
Porcelain tiles with more than 20% of the tile backs covered with firing release
dust back buttered so that 100% of the back is covered with adhesive mortar
rated for C627, Extra Heavy Duty rating.
.10 Remove any excess setting material from the joint area so that 2/3 of the depth of the tile
is available for grouting.
.11 Remove smudges or smears of setting material from the tile surface with a damp sponge
or cloth immediately after final adjustment and beat-in while the mortar is fresh.
.12 Do necessary cutting and drilling of fixtures, fittings, and built-in or penetrating units
without marring the tile. Replace all cracked or damaged tile.
.13 Form external angles with round edge tile extending over edge of square edge adjacent
tile. Internal angles shall be formed square, carrying 1 flat tile past edge of other.
.14 Extend tile into recesses at windows, doors, or other openings.
.15 Extend tiles 100 mm (4") behind mirrors, and fully behind cabinets, cupboards and other
fixed objects at walls.
.16 Cut tiles to conform to irregularities in wall lines and vertical planes along outer edges.
Smooth cut edges with carborundum block or by other means to provide clean straight
edge.
.17 Install tiles to provide even distribution of shading, colour, and characteristics.
3.8
Mortar-Bed Tiling
.1
Apply latex-Portland cement thin bed mortar with flat trowel as a slurry bond coat
approximately 1.5 mm (1/16”) thick over clean concrete slab.
.2
Place latex-Portland cement thick bed mortar over slurry bond coat while bond coat is
wet and tacky. Omit reinforcing wire fabric and fully compact bed by tamping.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 12
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.3
Spread latex-Portland cement thin bed mortar with flat trowel over surface of
"green"/fresh mortar bed as a slurry bond coat approximately 1.5 mm (1/16”) thick.
.4
Apply latex-Portland cement thin bed mortar slurry bond coat to back of tile or threshold
and place each piece/sheet while slurry bond coats are wet and tacky. Beat with a
hardwood block or rubber mallet to level/imbed pieces before mortar bed takes initial set.
.5
Clean excess mortar from finished surfaces.
.6
For installation of tile over cured (pre-floated) latex-Portland cement thick bed mortar,
follow Thin-Set Method.
3.9
Thin-Set Method
.1
Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure full bedding of the tile.
.2
Work the thin-set mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched
side of trowel.
.3
Beat each piece/sheet into the thin-set mortar with a beating block or rubber mallet to
insure full bedding and flatness.
.4
Clean excess thin-set mortar from tile face and joints between pieces.
.5
Do not cover, bridge or fill tile joints located over expansion joints with adhesive.
3.10
Control Joints
.1
Carry substrate control and movements joints through to tile work.
.2
Install control joints around the perimeter of tiled areas, around columns and where tile
abuts other hard materials.
.3
Cut tiles on both sides along the edges of control joints.
.4
Provide control joints in floors and walls at perimeters of floor and within 4800 mm to
6100 (16 ft to 20 ft) centre to centre by raking out joints to full depth of tile and cleaning
joints for application of sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00. In areas subject to
sunlight provide control joints within 2400 mm to 3700 mm (8 ft to 12 ft) centre to centre.
.1
3.11
Review locations with Consultant prior to setting tile and comply with instruction
given by Consultant.
Trim Accessories Installation.
.1
Coordinate transitions with work of other sections.
.2
Install trims in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
.3
Install in continuous lengths.
.4
Scribe and fit to obstructions.
.5
Cope mitre corners.
.6
Tile shall be installed flush with top surface of trim accessory with tolerance of 1 mm
(1/32") lower than the top surface of trim accessory. The trim accessory shall not be
higher than the tiled surface. A joint of 3 mm (1/8") shall be left between the tile and the
profile to be filled with grout.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 13
March 22, 2016
Tiling
3.12
Grouting
.1
Install grout to comply with ANSI A118.4 (ANSI A108/A118/A136.1-2013) unless
otherwise specified and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
.2
Allow tile installation to cure a minimum of 24 hours at ambient temperature of 21°C prior
to grouting.
.3
Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris, water or tile spacers and face of tiles are clean.
.4
Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured tile units
that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning.
.5
Spread using a sharp edged, hard rubber float and work grout into joints using 45°
diagonal strokes.
.6
Pack joints full and free of voids/pits. Stroke diagonally to remove excess grout and to
avoid pulling grout out of filled joints.
.7
Once excess grout is removed, begin cleaning grout haze before grout is fully cured.
Using a circular motion, lightly scrub grouted surfaces with the damp sponge to dissolve
grout film/haze. Drag sponge diagonally over scrubbed surfaces to remove froth. Rinse
sponge frequently and change rinse water at least every 2 m² (200 ft²). Repeat cleaning
sequence again if grout haze is still present.
.8
Allow grout joints to become firm. Buff surface of grout with clean coarse cloth. Inspect
joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed grout. Within 24 hours, check
for remaining haze and remove it with warm soapy water and a nylon scrubbing pad,
using a circular motion, to lightly scrub surfaces and dissolve haze/film.
.9
Grout joint width to be 4.7 mm (3/16") unless otherwise indicated; except at mosaic type
tiles on paper or mesh backed sheets.
.10 Use caution when using sanded grouts to prevent scratching of tile or other material
surfaces.
.11 Do not cover, bridge or fill any expansion joints in tile with grout.
3.13
Tile Installation Tolerances
.1
Maximum allowable lippage:
.2
3.14
.1
.1
Tile up to 152 mm x 152 mm (6" x 6") in size: 1 mm (0.040”).
.2
Tile greater than 152 mm x 152 mm (6" x 6") in size: 2 mm (0.080”).
Finish planes shall be straight and plumb to within 6 mm in 3 m (1/4” in 10 feet).
Field Quality Control
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
Field tests and inspections:
.1 For concrete floor substrates subject to moisture sensitive materials, conduct
the following tests in accordance with the following:
.1 Test for moisture vapour transmission in accordance with ASTM F710-11
and ASTM F1869-11 or ASTM F2170-11 in accordance with
manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Results must not exceed
the written recommendations of the product manufacturer.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 31 00
Page 14
March 22, 2016
Tiling
.2 Test for surface pH. Levels of pH shall not exceed the written
recommendations of the product manufacturer. Test in accordance with
ASTM F710-11.
.3 For each test type: Conduct 3 tests for flooring applications up to 93 m 2
(1000 square feet) in area, and 1 additional test for each additional 93 m 2
(1000 square feet) of flooring area.
.2 Adhesion bond test:
.1 Proceed with bond test after substrates have been prepared and alkalinity
and moisture test have been completed.
.2 Adhesion bond test shall be completed in accordance with tile flooring
and mortar and adhesive setting manufacturer’s written instructions.
.3 Using the specified adhesive/mortar, set test tiles using adhesive/mortar
manufacturer’s recommended trowel.
.4 After duration recommended by tile flooring and adhesive/mortar
manufacturer, attempt to remove the test tiles by pulling up from the
corners.
.5 Using the specified mortar, set test tiles using mortar specified and to
comply with specifications.
.6 After tiles have test and after duration of time as specified by independent
inspection and testing company, commence pull of test to determine
bonding strength of mortar between tile and substrate. Testing specimen
sizes and number of tests including locations of tests shall be as directed
by independent inspection and testing company.
.7 Minimum bonding strength requirements shall be as determined by
independent inspection and testing company.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
Painting
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
.2
Painting of interior paintable surfaces.
Paintable and non-paintable surfaces:
.1
Paint and finish paintable surfaces included in the Work, except where excluded
by the Contract Documents.
.2
The following surfaces are considered non-paintable, except as otherwise
indicated or scheduled:
.1 Material and equipment furnished prime and finish painted.
.2 Internal surfaces of steel tanks and stacks.
.3 Sprayed fire-resistive materials.
.4 Stainless steel, weathering steel, copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel,
anodized or lacquered or mill finished aluminum, Monel metal.
.5 Metallic and mastic insulation finishes.
.6 Abrasive material finishes on floors, stair treads, stair nosing and landings.
.7 Insulated electric cables.
.8 Machined parts of machinery and equipment.
.9 Concealed surfaces.
.10 Manufactured finish materials.
1.2
.1
1.3
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets and list of Products proposed for use
in the work of this section as identified in ‘Approved Product List’ section of the
MPI Painting Manual. Correlate Products to Schedule furnished by Consultant.
Samples:
.1
Samples for initial paint colour and finish selection:
.1 Submit manufacturer's colour charts showing full range of colours available,
including light and deep dark tones, for each type of finish material indicated
for colour selection by Consultant.
.2 Consultant shall have complete freedom in choice of colours in compiling
colour schedule and will not necessarily select colours from standard colour
charts of manufacturer of Products specified.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Painting
.3 Submit 3 drawdowns of each selected colour for review by Consultant and
resubmit to Consultant as required to obtain approval. Drawdown to be of
specified colour, sheen, and paint formula for applicable surface.
.2
Samples for verification:
.1 Submit 3 samples on 200 mm x 305 mm (8"x 12") material of same type as
that on which coating is to be applied, for Consultant's approval, at least 30
days before materials are required.
.2 Identify each sample as to Project, finish, formula, colour name, number,
gloss name and number, date and name of Contractor and painting
Subcontractor.
.3 Resubmit as required until colours and gloss value are approved.
1.4
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
.3
Maintenance materials:
.1
1.5
.1
Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the operation and maintenance manuals.
Provide 2 sealed containers, each of 4 litres (1 gallon) capacity of each paint
product in each colour used in the Work for Owner’s maintenance use.
Containers shall be new, clearly labelled with manufacturer's name, type of paint,
colour and colour number. Store at Place of the Work where directed by Owner.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications
.1
Manufacturers:
.1 Paint manufacturers and Products used shall be as listed under the Approved
Product List section of the MPI Painting Manual.
.2
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.1 Applicators shall have minimum of 5 years proven satisfactory painting
experience of projects of similar size and class subject to Consultant’s
approval.
.2 Only qualified journeymen who have a “Tradesman Qualification Certificate of
Proficiency” shall be engaged in painting work. Apprentices shall work under
the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade
regulations.
.2
Mock-ups:
.1
Provide mock-ups of each paint system for indicated surfaces of each colour and
finish selected to verify preliminary paint selections made under Sample
submittals.
.2
Mock-ups shall be located to areas as directed by Consultant under lighting
conditions matching final area lighting, for acceptance by Consultant.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Painting
.3
Mock-ups shall demonstrate aesthetic effects of paint colour and sheen and shall
set quality standards for material and execution of the Work. Final approval of
colour and finish selections shall be based on mock-ups. If colour selections are
not approved, apply additional mock-ups of additional colours selected by
Consultant at no added cost to the Owner.
.4
Do not proceed with work, including ordering of paint Products, until mock-ups of
each paint colour and finish and paint system for indicated surfaces have been
reviewed and accepted by Consultant.
.5
Provide the following in-situ mock-ups:
.1 Provide 4’ x 4’ mock-up of up to 3 finish colour options as selected by
Consultant for white gallery walls for final approval/selection of colour by
Consultant.
.6
1.6
Upon completion and approval, mock-ups shall serve as a standard for the
balance of the work of this section. Subsequent work carried out and not in the
Consultant’s opinion equal to standard shall be repainted without charge.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Deliver painting materials in sealed, original labelled containers bearing manufacturer’s
name, brand name, type of paint or coating and colour designation, standard
compliance, materials content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application
requirements.
.2
Store paint Products and materials in original labelled containers in secure (lockable),
dry, heated and well ventilated single designated area meeting minimum requirements of
both paint manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction, and at a minimum ambient
temperature of 7°C.
.3
Protect floor and wall surfaces of storage area. Protect floors with sheets or clean
plywood or metal pans where mixing is being carried out.
1.7
Field Conditions
.1
Comply with environmental requirements of MPI Manual.
.2
Perform no painting work when ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10°C
for both interior and exterior work, unless suitable weatherproof covering and sufficient
heating and ventilation facilities are in place in accordance with MPI Manual.
.3
Perform no painting work when relative humidity is above 85% or when dew point is less
than 3°C (5°F) variance between air/surface temperature.
.4
Check moisture content of surfaces to be painted using properly calibrated electronic
moisture meter approved by paint manufacturer, and Consultant, or other approved
method. Maximum moisture contents shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and as follows:
.1
Concrete and concrete masonry (clay and concrete brick/block): Maximum 12%.
.2
Gypsum board and plaster: Maximum 12%.
.3
Wood: Maximum 15%.
.5
Conduct moisture tests on concrete floors using cover patch test method.
.6
Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Painting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Performance/Design Requirements
Except where more stringent requirements are specified, the following reference
standard shall govern the work of this section:
.1
.2
2.2
Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Specification Manual (MPI
Manual), including Identifiers, Evaluation, Systems, Preparation and Approved
Product List, latest edition, and referenced herein as the MPI Manual, as issued
by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
Materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to requirements of latest edition
of Architectural Painting Specification Manual by the Master Painters Institute (MPI)
(hereafter referred to as the MPI Painting Manual) as issued by the local MPI Accredited
Quality Assurance Association having jurisdiction.
Materials
.1
Products listed in MPI Manual shall be used in the Work, unless specified otherwise.
.2
Paint and materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers,
thinners, solvents, and the like) shall be in accordance with the MPI Manual “Approved
Product” listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
.3
Other paint materials, such as linseed oil, shellac, and the like, shall be highest quality
Products of an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Manual and shall be compatible
with other coating materials as required.
.4
Paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure
free of blemishes or sags.
.5
Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed
ratings designated by building code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
.6
Paints and coatings materials used within the weatherproofing system shall not exceed
the VOC content limits of the following criteria.
.1
Interior paints and coatings: to following Green Seal GS-11 VOC limits:
.1 Flat coating type: 50 gm/L.
.2 Non-flat coating type: 100 gm/L.
2.3
.1
2.4
.1
.2
Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates:
Green Seal Standard GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints, maximum 250 gm/L.
.3
Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, and shellacs applied to interior
elements: South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113,
Architectural Coatings.
Equipment
Painting and coating equipment in accordance with written requirements of MPI Manual.
Mixing and Tinting
Unless otherwise specified, paints shall be ready-mixed. Re-mix prior to application to
ensure colour and gloss uniformity.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 5
March 22, 2016
Painting
.2
Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions.
.3
Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to Place of the Work.
.4
Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.5
Colours and Gloss Levels
.1
Paint colours and gloss levels shall be as selected by the Consultant. Locations as
indicated or scheduled.
.2
Colour and gloss schedule: in accordance with Paint Finish Schedule on Drawing A001.
.3
Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the
following MPI values:
Gloss
Level
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
Description
Matte or Flat finish
Velvet finish
Eggshell finish
Satin finish
Semi-Gloss finish
Gloss finish
High-Gloss finish
Units
@ 60 degrees
0 to 5
0 to 10
10 to 25
20 to 35
35 to 70
70 to 85
> 85
Units
@ 85 degrees
10 maximum
10 to 35
10 to 35
35 minimum
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Prior to commencement of work of this section, thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled
to be painted.
.2
Check moisture content and pH of surfaces to be painted in accordance with paragraph
above titled Environmental Requirements.
.3
Inspect surfaces to be coated for gouges, marks, nibs, and other defects and properly
prepare patching, filling, smoothing or other surface preparation necessary to ensure
satisfactory finish.
.4
Report in writing any condition adversely affecting work of this section.
.5
Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory. Remove dust,
grease, rust, scale and extraneous matter, tool and machine marks and insects from
surfaces which could be detrimental to a satisfactory and acceptable finish.
3.2
Preparation
.1
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
.2
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable
and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and
painting.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 6
March 22, 2016
Painting
.1
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
.3
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
mildew, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
.4
Concrete substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and
chalk. Paint surfaces when moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted are
within levels permitted in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.5
Masonry substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Paint surfaces when moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints are within levels permitted in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions.
.6
Shop-primed steel substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where
shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
.7
Z275 galvanized-metal substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized
sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
.8
Wood substrates for paint finish:
3.3
.1
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
.2
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
.3
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
.4
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Installation
.1
Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until environmental conditions
(heating, ventilation, lighting and completion of work of other sections) are acceptable for
applications of Products.
.2
Apply primer, paint or stain in accordance with MPI Manual Premium Grade finish
requirements.
.3
Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when
environmental conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or
manufacturer’s paint specifications require earlier applications.
.4
Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at
proper consistency and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.5
Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
.6
Unless otherwise approved by Consultant, apply a minimum of 4 coats of paint where
deep or bright colours are used to achieve satisfactory results.
.7
Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove
defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm (39").
.8
Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer’s
directions state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following
coat is applied.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 7
March 22, 2016
Painting
.9
Prime coat of stain or varnish finishes may be reduced in accordance with
manufacturer’s directions.
.10 Paint finish shall continue through behind wall-mounted items (i.e. chalk and tack
boards).
.11 Exposed means visible in complete work including interiors of cupboards and closets,
tops of doors, trim, and the like, whether in sight line or not, including behind surface
mounted fixtures and heating units.
.12 Consultant shall have right to make changes in colour tone of finishes prior to final coat
to obtain desired results without additional cost to Owner.
.13 Unless otherwise noted or scheduled, walls shall be painted same colour within a given
area.
.14 Access doors, prime coated butts and other prime painted hardware, registers, radiators
and covers, exposed piping and electrical panels shall be painted to match adjacent
surfaces in terms of colour, texture and sheen, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4
.1
Mechanical and Electrical Items
Finish paint primed mechanical and electrical items with 2 coats of paint. Include for the
following list unless otherwise indicated:
.1
Air handling units
.2
Convectors
.3
Conduit
.4
Diffusers
.5
Ductwork
.6
Grilles
.7
Hangers
.8
Heaters
.9
Fire hose cabinets
.10
Fire extinguisher cabinets
.11
Louvres
.12
Radiators
.13
Stacks
.14
Vents
.2
Prime and paint exposed insulated and bare pipes. Prime and paint exposed conduits
and electrical raceways, fittings, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and similar
items. Use heat resistant epoxy paint on pipes and surfaces where operating surface
temperature exceeds 65°C.
.3
Coordinate the painting of pipes, and coverings with mechanical contractor applying
colour banding, flow arrows and pipe identification after the painting of pipes and
coverings.
.4
Paint work to match adjacent walls and ceilings unless directed otherwise.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 8
March 22, 2016
Painting
.5
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and pipe trenches including heating pipes and
elements that are visible through grilles and louvres with one coat of flat metal paint to
limit of sight-line. Paint to be black as directed by Consultant.
.6
Gas pipes, whether concealed or exposed, shall be painted in yellow-orange colour, in
accordance with gas code.
.7
Paint and finish wall surfaces behind convectors. Walls to be finished prior to installation
of convector covers. Touch up walls after covers are installed as necessary to make
good installation damage.
.8
Air diffusers shall be primed and finished with 2 coats of paint of same colour and sheen
as ducts and/or ceiling.
3.5
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Paint and Coating Quality Assurance Inspections:
.1
.3
.4
.5
Field quality control shall be in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
Painted interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of
the following defects are apparent to the Consultant:
.1
Brush / roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or
shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and
foreign materials in paint coatings.
.2
Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices,
pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.
.3
Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory
cause.
.4
Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection
from weather.
.5
Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray
paint, etc.).
Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident
under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including
daylight) for interior surfaces:
.1
Visible defects are evident on vertical and horizontal surfaces when viewed at
normal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 1000 mm (39").
.2
Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when
viewed at normal viewing angles.
.3
When final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of colour, sheen,
texture, and hiding across full surface area.
Painted surfaces rejected by the Consultant shall be made good at the expense of the
Subcontractor. Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas
without sufficient dry film thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged
paint shall be removed by scraper or by sanding prior to application of paint.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Section 09 91 00
Page 9
March 22, 2016
Painting
.6
3.6
.1
3.7
.1
Painting Subcontractor shall obtain from Contractor written confirmation of specific
surface preparation procedures and primers used for fabricated steel items from the
fabricator/Supplier to ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat
materials to be used before painting any such work.
Adjusting and Cleaning
Promptly as work proceeds and on completion of Work, remove paint where spilled,
splashed or spattered during the progress of the Work. Keep the premises free from
unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris; at the
conclusion of the work leave the premises clean.
Interior Paint Systems
System references listed are based on MPI Manual and are Premium Grade, Low VOC
(Green Seal GS-11), High Performance Architectural, unless otherwise indicated:
.1
Concrete vertical surfaces: (including ceilings)
.1 INT 3.1C High performance architectural latex; satin.
.2
Concrete masonry unit assemblies:
.1 INT 4.2P High performance architectural latex finish (over alkali resistant
primer); satin.
.3
Primed ferrous metal; touch-up and finish coats required under this section:
.1 Ferrous metal fabrications: Prepared and primed in accordance with Section
05 50 00.
.2 INT 5.1E Alkyd finish; semi-gloss.
.4
Galvanized metal: (doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking,
ducts, etc.)
.1 INT 5.3M High performance architectural latex; semi-gloss.
.5
Plaster and gypsum board: (gypsum wallboard, drywall and textured finishes)
.1 INT 9.2B High performance architectural latex finish; gloss levels as
indicated.
.1 Gloss level:
.1 Walls, except as otherwise indicated: eggshell or flat, as directed by
Consultant pending review of mock-up specified in paragraph
1.5.2.5.1.
.2 Ceilings, except as otherwise indicated: flat.
.3 Wet and service areas; walls and ceilings: semi-gloss.
.2 Use high-hide primer sealer type at glass mat finished gypsum board.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Visual Display Surfaces
Section 10 11 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
Summary
Section includes:
.1
Glass marker boards (base bid).
.2
Marker board laminate (alternative price 9).
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Shop drawings:
.1
Show proposed system of anchorage and materials being supplied on shop
drawings submitted for review.
.2
Show dimensional layouts, hardware items, anchorage devices, dimensions,
description of materials and finishes, and all other pertinent information.
Samples:
.1
Selection samples:
.1 Submit one (1) 305 mm x 305 mm (12" x 12") sample of Product specified for
each gloss level.
.2
Verification samples:
.1 Submit 305 mm x 305 mm (12" x 12") samples of each Product specified,
diagonally cut to show cross section through assembly, complete with
accessories and trim.
.2 Submit 305 mm (12") square samples of each glass type and colour
indicated.
1.3
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.4
.1
Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the operation and maintenance manuals.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.1 Erection of materials to be carried out by competent workers supervised by a
foreperson with at least 10 years experience in this specialized field and
approved in writing by manufacturer for installation of their Product.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Visual Display Surfaces
1.5
.1
Section 10 11 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Package Products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling. Label and protect
finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Design/Performance Requirements
Trademarks and Labels
.1
.2
2.2
.1
.2
No trademarks or labels will be accepted on exposed finished work.
Aluminum trim: in accordance with Trim Components paragraph below.
Marker Board System – Glass Marker Board (Base Bid)
Acceptable Products:
.1
Goldray Glass ‘Glass Marker Board with Magnetic and Projectable Surface’.
.2
Bendheim ‘Magnetic Glass Marker Board with Magnetic and Projectable
Surface’.
.3
Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01 25 00.
Back-painted glass marker boards with magnetic backer and mounting system:
.1
Glass type:
.1 Tempered low iron glass basis of design is PPG ‘Starphire’.
.2 Glass edges shall be polished with slight arrises.
.3 Manufacturer’s standard back paint coating applied to #2 (back) side
uniformly.
.4 Back paint colour: White.
.5 Glass thickness:6.4 mm (1/4").
.2
Dimensions: Refer to drawings.
.3
Options:
.1 Provide manufacturer’s mounting brackets and anodized aluminum rail (zclip).
.2 Provide 600 mm long magnetic pen rails.
.3 Use screws of galvanized steel.
2.3
Marker Board System – Marker Board Laminate (Alternative Price 9)
.1
Basis of design: Walltalkers M2PR Projectable Mag-Rite by Koroseal.
.2
Substrate board: as recommended by manufacturer.
2.4
Fastenings
.1
Reinforcing anchor plates to be galvanized steel plates conforming to CSA G4-09(2014).
.2
Use screws, bolts of galvanized steel or aluminum.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Visual Display Surfaces
.3
Section 10 11 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Ferrous metal not specified must be plated or baked enamel and treated with primer
conforming to CAN/CGSB 1.140-M91.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
Prior to commencement of erection, check surfaces for irregularities, trueness and
rigidity and projections and defects and immediately report in writing to Contractor.
.2
For locations to receive presentation dry erase wallcovering:
.3
3.2
.1
Examine substrates and installation conditions to ensure surface conditions meet
or exceed a Level 4 finish, GA-214-M-97, Recommended Levels of Gypsum
Board Finish.
.2
Test substrates with a suitable moisture meter and verify that moisture content
does not exceed 4%.
.3
Verify substrate surfaces are clean, dry, smooth, structurally sound and free from
surface defects and imperfections that would show through the finished surface.
.4
Evaluate painted surfaces for possibility of pigment bleed-through.
Commencing installation implies acceptance of surface conditions.
Installation –Marker Boards
.1
Install marker boards in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
.2
Draw reference guidelines on substrate for installation location of mounting bracket
location. Fastenings shall be located at wall studs and wood blocking or with zinc plated
metal expansion type anchors at masonry back-up. Fastener quantities and sizes shall
be sufficient to hold weight of marker boards.
.3
Transfer locations to the hanging bracket and drill fasteners in the mounting rail.
.4
Apply white double sided marker tape to return at bottom metal backer. Double sided
tape shall be concealed from view.
.5
Where marker board panels are installed adjacent to one another, gaps are not
permitted unless detailed. Panels shall be flush with 0 tolerance and shall be aligned
edge-to-edge with 0 tolerance.
3.3
.1
3.4
Installation Tolerances
Install plumb, level, tight and secured. Comply with the following maximum tolerances:
.1
Plumb and level: 3 mm (1/8").
.2
Variation from indicated position: plus/minus 3 mm (1/8").
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Verify under work of this section that installed Products function properly, and adjust
them accordingly to ensure satisfactory operation.
.2
Do not remove protective coatings until final cleaning, or earlier if directed by Consultant.
.3
Refinish damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance is
discernible. Refinish work at Place of the Work only if approved.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Visual Display Surfaces
END OF SECTION
Section 10 11 00
Page 4
March 22, 2016
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Washroom Accessories
Section 10 28 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
.1
1.2
.1
Summary
Section Includes
.1
Washroom accessories.
.2
Coordination and installation of washroom accessories as supplied by Owner.
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
.1
Templates:
.1 Submit templates to Contractor for use by installers and fabricators as
required for proper location and installation of hardware.
1.3
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Shop drawings:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Include plans, elevations, hardware, and installation details.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the operation and maintenance manuals.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Package or crate, and brace products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling.
Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
.2
Deliver products to location at the Place of the Work designated by Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Accessories
Incorporate reinforcing, fastenings and anchorage required for building-in of Products.
.1
Acceptable product manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following:
.1 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Washroom Accessories
Section 10 28 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.2
Lettering: for identification of accessories and operation instructions shall be silk
screened using international symbols unless otherwise specified.
.3
Washroom Accessory Schedule; locations as indicated or scheduled:
.1
Grab bars:
.1 GB-1: Bobrick ‘B-6806.99 L30x30’.
.2 GB-2: Bobrick ‘B-6806.99 x 24’.
.2
Tilt mirror: Bobrick ‘B-293 1830’.
.3
Shelf: Gamco Stainless Steel Shelf (450 mm x 100 mm).
.4
Coat hook: Bobrick ‘B-671’.
.5
Washroom accessories as supplied by Owner.
.1 Toilet tissue dispenser.
.2 Soap dispenser.
.3 Paper towel dispenser.
.4 Waste disposal unit.
.5 Sanitary napkin disposal unit.
2.2
.1
Fabrication
Fabricate Products with materials and component sizes, metal gauges, hardware,
reinforcing, anchors, and fastenings of adequate strength to ensure that washroom
accessories will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, and
distortion within limits of intended use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Supply manufacturer’s handling instructions, anchorage information, roughing-in
dimensions, templates and service requirements for installation of the work of this
section, and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices and
construction of other work incorporated with Products specified in this section in order
that they function as intended.
.2
Install work to meet manufacturers' recommended specifications, true, tightly fitted, and
level or flush to adjacent surfaces, as suitable for installation.
.3
Include reinforcing, anchorage and mounting devices required for the installation of each
Product.
.4
Fit joints and junction between components tightly and in true planes, conceal and weld
joints where possible.
3.2
.1
Barrier Free Installation Heights
Install accessories to permit operable parts and controls to be accessed at 1100 mm
(43") maximum above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Washroom Accessories
3.3
Section 10 28 00
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Installation of Washroom Accessories
.1
Install and secure fixtures rigidly in place using expansion shields in solid masonry or
concrete, toggle bolts in hollow masonry or sheet metal screws at metal studs.
.2
Insulate surfaces to prevent electrolytic action due to contact with dissimilar metals, or
concrete or masonry if required. Use bituminous paint or other approved means.
.3
Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, on built-in concealed
solid backing materials. Grab bar installation shall be able to withstand 250 kg downward
force.
.4
Verify locations and mounting heights with Consultant before roughing-in.
.5
Install plumb, level, straight, tight and secured, centred between joints on masonry and
tile walls.
3.4
.1
3.5
Installation Tolerances
Install plumb, level, tight and secured. Comply with the following maximum tolerances:
.1
Plumb and level: 1 mm.
.2
Variation from indicated position: 1 mm.
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Verify under work of this section that installed Products function properly, and adjust
them accordingly to ensure satisfactory operation. Test mechanisms, hinges, locks, and
latches and adjust and lubricate to ensure washroom accessories are in perfect working
order.
.2
Do not remove protective coatings until final cleaning, or earlier if directed by Consultant.
.3
Refinish damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance is
discernible. Refinish work at Place of the Work only if approved.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Loading Dock Equipment
Section 11 13 00
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
Administrative Requirements
Coordination
.1
.2
1.3
.1
Dock levellers.
Coordinate the work in this section with other appropriate sections of the
specifications to ensure proper scheduling for fabrication and installation of the
work in this section.
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.1 Provide work of this section, executed by competent installers with minimum
5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies
specified, and with approval of Product manufacturer.
1.4
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.3
1.5
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
.2
Submit manufacturers’ installation instructions.
Shop drawings:
.1
Include large scale details of members and materials, of anchorage devices
where required, dimensions, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing
specifications and all other pertinent information.
.2
Shop drawings to include preparation and installation instructions.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.6
.1
Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the operation and maintenance manuals.
Delivery, Storage and Handling
Package or crate, and brace Products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling.
Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Loading Dock Equipment
Section 11 13 00
Page 2
March 22, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
.1
Performance/Design Requirements
Dock leveller system shall be engineered by delegated Professional Engineer.
Dock Leveller
Acceptable manufacturer:
.1
.2
Dhollandia Canada Inc, Contact: Brad Borland, Cell: 647-458-5438, Fax: 514447-2538.
Acceptable Products:
.1
Dhollandia Canada ‘Model DH-VB.15’.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
3.2
Installation - Dock Leveller
Properly position, shim and secure leveller in accordance with manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
Field Quality Control
.1
Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Manufacturer’s field review to be in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
3.3
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Upon completion of installation, inspect finishes and materials for damage and faulty
installation. Make good or replace damaged finishes and materials as directed at no cost
to Owner.
.2
Upon completion, test entire installation and adjust operation as required to obtain
optimum performance.
3.4
.1
Closeout Activities
Demonstration
.1
Instruct Owner on proper care and maintenance for items and related work of this
section.
.2
Before acceptance of system, arrange for demonstration of equipment with
authorized representatives of Owner, to be performed by competent
representative of equipment manufacturer to assure proper function, operation
and explanation. Give Owner’s representative a minimum of 48 hours advance
notice in writing of demonstration date.
.3
Conduct comprehensive demonstration for Owner’s staff on operation and care
of equipment.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Roller Window Shades
Section 12 24 13
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
1.3
Roller window sun shades at interior locations; manually operated.
Administrative Requirements
Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.3
.4
.1
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
.2
Submit flammability performance data.
.3
Submit manufacturers’ installation instructions.
Shop drawings:
.1
Submit shop drawings or fully dimensioned catalogue cuts.
.2
Window treatment schedule: Use same designations indicated on Contract
Documents.
.3
Clearly indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods and
locations, fastening methods, handing of controls, required blocking locations,
banding (tandem shades), and installation details.
Samples:
.1
Selection samples:
.1 Submit selection samples showing colours available from manufacturer’s full
range.
.2
Verification samples:
.1 Submit samples of each material and finish colour selected and each
accessory.
1.4
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
.1
Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the operation and maintenance manuals.
Quality Assurance
Qualifications:
.1
Manufacturers:
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Roller Window Shades
Section 12 24 13
Page 2
March 22, 2016
.1 Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section,
with minimum 10 years experience.
.2
Installers / applicators / erectors:
.1 Work of this section shall be by forces in the direct employ or under control of
the system manufacturer, skilled, trained, and experienced in work of similar
scope and complexity.
.2
Mock-ups:
.1
1.6
Erect 1 full size mock-up each roller shade type at the Place of the Work for
review. Completed and accepted mock-up shall act as the standard to which
balance of the work of this section will be judged.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1
Before delivery to the Place of the Work, check each shade for operation; remove finger
marks and smudges.
.2
Package Products to prevent distortion in shipment and handling. Label packages and
crates, and protect finish surfaces by sturdy wrappings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
2.2
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Products by one of the following
manufacturers:
.1
Solarfective Products Ltd.
.2
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
Hardware – Manual Controlled Shades
Interior display case:
.1
.2
Crank operated. Right hand operation and banding as applicable to suit Place of
the Work condition.
Exterior glazing:
.1
Chain operated, with infinite positioning. Right hand operation and banding as
applicable to suit Place of the Work condition.
.1 Drive assembly:
.1 Must allow finger tip control and include a built in shock absorber system
to prevent chain breakage under normal operating conditions;
.2 Capable of being field adjusted from the exterior of the shade unit without
having to disassemble the hardware.
.3 Drive Chain: No. 10 stainless steel bead chain formed in a continuous
loop. The chain shall have passed a 40 kg (90 lb) load test.
.1 Provide child-safe chain retainers.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Roller Window Shades
2.3
Section 12 24 13
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Assembly
.1
Provide fully factory assembled shade unit consisting of 2 shade brackets, one piece
extruded aluminum shade tube, extruded aluminum fascia, aluminum profile hembars,
extruded vinyl fabric spline, and fabric as specified.
.2
Fabric shall hang straight, without shifting sideways more than 3 mm (1/8") in either
direction due to warp distortion or weave design.
.3
Factory modify housings where necessary to bypass columns.
.4
End brackets: a two piece molded ABS construction with nylon drive sprocket. Bracket
colour shall coordinate with the fascia colour.
.5
Shade tube: Minimum 1.52 mm (0.060") thick extruded aluminum with three equally
spaced continuous stiffening fins, non-sag design, maximum deflection under full load of
fabric L/700.
.6
Fascia: Minimum 1.5 mm (1/6") thick extruded aluminum.
.7
Hembar: Extruded aluminum with matching plastic end finials.
.8
Mounting: Removal of shade system shall not require the disassembly of the shade unit.
2.4
.1
Shade Mounting System
Extruded aluminum bracket designed to accept preassembled shade system.
.1
.2
2.5
Brackets to be used to facilitate the alignment with shade opening.
Modular construction: Shades must be removable as a complete modular unit without
any component disassembly required.
Aluminum Finish
.1
Exposed aluminum: Baked enamel, White, to match adjacent painted ceiling.
.2
Unexposed aluminum: mill finish.
2.6
.1
Shade Fabric Types
Sun control fabric; dimensionally stable shade fabric:
.1
Acceptable Products; 3% open area:
.1 Solarfective ‘Solarblock 300 Series’.
.2 Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
.2
Colour: as selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s full range.
.2
Fabric shall hang flat, without buckling or distortion. Edge, where trimmed, shall hang
true and straight, without shifting sideways more than 3 mm (1/8") in either direction due
to warp distortion or weave design.
.3
Fabric shall be colour fast, retain its shape, and not be affected by moisture or heat.
.4
Flammability performance:
.1
Certified by an independent laboratory, shade fabric shall pass CAN/ULC S10903 Flame Tests of Flame Resistant Fabrics and Films.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Roller Window Shades
2.7
.1
Section 12 24 13
Page 4
March 22, 2016
Fabrication
Finished assemblies shall be, square, true to size and free from distortion, twist, or other
defects that could affect their strength, operation or appearance. Factory applied finish
shall be uniform, smooth and without blemishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install shade systems in plumb, squared, adequately anchored, maintaining uniformed
clearances, accurate alignment levels, and parallel with the window plane. Fabric shall
not travel more than 3 mm (1/8") in either direction within channels after installation.
.2
Fabric shall be pre-measured and manufactured off-site.
.3
Shades shall be snapped into place without screws or visible fasteners.
.4
Incorporate reinforcing, fastening and anchorage required for installation of shades.
.5
Securely attach installation fittings to their mounting surfaces with stainless steel or
hardened aluminum screws of proper length and type, and durable anchors.
.6
Install shade roller true and level, and with cloth to hang flat without buckling or
distortion.
3.2
Adjusting and Cleaning
.1
Verify that installed shade system functions properly, and adjust it accordingly to ensure
satisfactory operation.
.2
Refinish damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance is
discernible.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Entrance Floor Mats
Section 12 48 16
Page 1
March 22, 2016
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
.1
Summary
Section includes:
.1
1.2
.1
Administrative Requirements
Coordination
.1
1.3
Entrance floor mats.
Submit manufacturer's handling instructions, anchorage information, roughing-in
dimensions, templates and service requirements required for installation of work
of this section, and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices,
and construction of other work incorporated with Products specified in this
section in order that they function as intended.
Submittals
.1
Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data sheets:
.1
.3
Shop drawings:
.1
.4
Layout of floor grilles including grid and frame, direction of traffic, dimensions,
fabrication details, splice locations, profiles, hardware, and accessories.
Samples:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the
work of this section.
Submit duplicate samples of each finish and each insert specified.
Closeout Submittals
.1
Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
.2
Operation and maintenance data:
.1
1.5
.1
Submit manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the operation and maintenance manuals.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Package or crate, and brace Products to prevent damage during shipment and handling.
Label packages and crates, and protect finish surfaces from environmental conditions
where required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
.1
Entrance Mat
Acceptable Products:
.1
Go Resilient ‘Gateway’.
.2
Substitutions: in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Entrance Floor Mats
.2
Section 12 48 16
Page 2
March 22, 2016
System description:
.1
Flexible, 100% solid, extruded PVC grid, gray colour.
.2
Application type:
.1 Surface mounted application.
.3
2.2
.1
Accessories:
.1
Fasteners: Provide fasteners, spikes and tapcons as recommended by
manufacturer.
.2
Adhesive tape: as recommended by manufacturer.
.3
Transition: Provide Schluter Systems ‘JOLLY’ at exposed edge of mat below
doors.
Fabrication
Fabricate products with materials and component sizes, metal gauges, hardware,
reinforcing, anchors, and fastenings of adequate strength to ensure that foot grilles will
remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, and distortion within limits
of intended use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.1
Preparation
Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be
performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
.1
.2
3.2
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of irregular
shaped grid assemblies where applicable to ensure a proper installation.
Installation
.1
Install the work of this section in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Mill finish frames in contact with concrete to be primer coated.
.3
Coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across to provide ample
clearance between door and mat.
.4
Install work to meet manufacturer’s written specifications and installation instructions,
true, tightly fitted, and level or flush to adjacent surfaces, as suitable for installation.
.5
Include reinforcing, anchorage and mounting devices required for the installation of each
Product.
.6
Fit joints and junction between components tightly and in true planes, conceal and weld
joints where possible.
.7
Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent
electrolysis.
3.3
.1
Adjusting and Cleaning
Verify that installed Products function properly, and adjust them accordingly to ensure
satisfactory operation.
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
Baird Sampson Neuert Architects
Project No. 1413
Entrance Floor Mats
.2
Section 12 48 16
Page 3
March 22, 2016
Refinish damaged or defective work so that no variation in surface appearance is
discernible.
END OF SECTION
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 00 01
List of Sections
Page 1 of 1
LIST OF SECTIONS
26 00 01
SECTION NO.
SECTION 26
SECTION TITLE
PAGES
ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 01 01 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20
26 05 00 - COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 01 - ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 05 19 - WIRES & CABLES 0-1000 VOLTS
26 05 27 - GROUNDING AND BONDING SECONDARY
26 05 29 - FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS
26 05 32 - SPLITTERS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES, CABINETS
26 05 33 - CONDUITS, FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
26 05 35 - OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
26 05 47 - INCOMING ELECTRICAL SERVICE
26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
6
3
4
3
2
4
2
1
5
26 07 00 - EQUIPMENT WIRING REQUIREMENTS
26 07 16 - WIRING TO MOTORIZED DOORS
26 07 17 - WIRING TO DOCK (TRUCK) LEVELERS
1
1
26 08 00 - TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND HAND-OVER
26 08 19 - PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
3
26 09 00 – LIGHTING CONTROL
26 09 43 – NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
26 20 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
26 22 13 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY
26 27 15 - POWER PANELS
26 27 16 - LIGHTING & RECEPTACLE PANELBOARDS
26 27 18 - PANEL TRIM
26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES
26 27 28 - WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V
26 27 33 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES UP TO 1000 VOLTS
26 28 13 - FUSES - LOW VOLTAGE
26 28 16 - MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 50 00 - LIGHTING
26 51 13 – LIGHTING
26 52 00 - UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SECTION 27
2
6
2
2
2
2
11
3
COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 00 - COMMON WORK FOR COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 13 - SIGNAL SYSTEMS
27 05 14 - TELEPHONE & DATA RACEWAYS
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
4
4
1
3
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 1 of 20
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 01 01
1
REQUIREMENTS
1.1
General Contract Documents
.1 Comply with General Conditions of Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General
Requirements.
1.2
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this section to include furnishing of labour, materials, equipment and services
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete Electrical systems as
shown, as specified, as intended, and as otherwise required. Complete systems to be left ready for
continuous and efficient satisfactory operation.
1.3
Document organization
.1 Applicable Divisions for Electrical Work:
.1 Division 26 - Electrical
.2 Division 27 - Communications
.3 Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security
.2 For clarity, any reference in the Contract Documents to Division 26 includes Division 27 and 28.
.3 The Specifications for these Divisions are arranged in Sections for convenience. It is not intended to
recognize, set or define limits to any subcontract or to restrict Contractor in letting subcontracts.
.4 Contractor is responsible for completion of the Work whether or not portions are sublet.
1.4
Division 26, as it applies to Division 27 and 28
.1 Division 26 contains common work requirements that are applicable to the Work of Divisions 27 and
28 and apply as if written in full within Divisions 27 and 28.
1.5
Definitions
.1 The words "indicated", "shown", "noted", "listed" or similar words or phrases used in these
Specifications, mean that the material or item referred to is "indicated", "shown", "listed" or "noted" on
the Drawings or in the Specifications.
.2 The words "approved", "satisfactory", "as directed", "submit", "permitted", "inspected", or similar
words or phrases used in these Specifications, mean that the material or item referred to, is to be
"approved by", "satisfactory to", "as directed by", "submitted to", "permitted by", "inspected by" the
Consultant.
.3 Instructions using any form of the word "provide", requires the Contractor to furnish labour, materials
and services as necessary to supply and install the referenced item.
.4 The term “building code” means the current edition of the “Ontario Building Code”.
.5 The terms “electrical code” and “electrical safety code” mean the current edition of the “Ontario
Electrical Safety Code”.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 2 of 20
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.6 The terms “electrical authority” and “electrical safety authority” mean the “Electrical Safety Authority,
ESA” The term “AHJ” means the “Authority Having Jurisdiction” and can include the local building
inspector, the local fire department and the electrical safety inspector or their agents.
1.6
Language
.1 Specifications are written as a series of instructions addressed to the Contractor, and by implication
to subcontractors and to suppliers. For clarity and brevity, use is made of numbered lists and bulleted
lists. Where the list follows a semi-colon (;) punctuation is for clarity, where the list follows a colon (:)
punctuation is to be read as short-hand form of verb “to be” or “to have” as context requires.
.2 It is not intended to debate with the Contractor reasons for these instructions, and words associated
with justification for an instruction or restatement of anticipated performance have been omitted to
avoid possible ambiguities.
1.7
Examination
.1 Examine any existing buildings and services, local conditions, building site, Specifications, and
Drawings and report any condition, defect or interference that would prevent execution of the Work.
.2 Examine work of other Divisions before commencing the Work, and report any defect or interference.
.3 No allowance will be made for any expense incurred through failure to make these examinations of
the site and documents prior to Tender or on account of any conditions on site or any growth or item
existing there which was visible or known to exist at time of Tender.
1.8
Design Services
.1 Provide design services for elements of the Work where specified. Instruments of this service to be
sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the applicable jurisdiction.
1.9
Standard of Material and Equipment
.1 Provide materials and equipment in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Material and Equipment.
.2 Materials and equipment:
.1 new and of uniform pattern throughout the Work,
.2 of Canadian manufacture where obtainable,
.3 labelled or listed by Code and/or Inspection Authorities, CSA certified and CMB listed; where
there is no alternative to supplying equipment which is not CSA certified, obtain special approval
from Electrical Safety Authority,
.4 standard products of approved manufacture,
.5 in compliance with Standards and Regulations with respect to;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
chemical and physical properties of materials,
design,
performance characteristics, and
methods of construction and installation,
.6 identical units of equipment to be of same manufacture,
.7 within any unit of equipment, identical component parts to be of same manufacture, but various
component parts comprising the unit need not be from one manufacturer.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 3 of 20
.3 Materials and equipment are described to establish standards of construction and workmanship.
.1 Where manufacturers or manufacturers’ products are identified in lists with phrase "Standard of
Acceptance", these are manufacturers and/or products which meet standards with regard to
performance, quality of material and workmanship.
.2 Manufacturers and/or products used are to be chosen from these lists.
.4 Include items of material and equipment not specifically noted on Drawings or mentioned in
Specifications but which are required to make a complete and operating system.
.5 Confirm capacity or ratings of equipment being provided, when based on ratings of equipment being
provided under other trade Sections, before such items are purchased.
.6 Factory fabricate control panels and component assemblies.
.7 Select materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and install in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.8 Materials and equipment not satisfying these selection criteria will be condemned.
.1 Remove condemned materials from job site and provide properly selected and approved
materials.
1.10
Substitutions
.1 The use of a substitute article or material which the manufacturer represents to be of at least equal
quality and of the required characteristics for the purpose intended may be permitted, subject to the
following provisions;
.1 a substitution will not be considered for reasons of meeting the construction schedule unless the
Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Consultant that all reasonable efforts have
been made to procure the specified product or material in a timely fashion,
.2 the manufacturer to advise the Consultant of the intention to use an alternative article or material
before doing so,
.3 the burden of proof as to the quality and suitability of alternatives to be upon the manufacturer,
the manufacturer to supply all information necessary, as required by the Consultant, at no additional costs to the contract,
.4 the Consultant to be the sole judge as to the quality and suitability of alternative materials and the
Consultant’s decision to be final,
.5 where use of an alternative material involves redesign or changes to other parts of the Work, the
costs and the time required to effect such redesign or changes will be considered in evaluating
the suitability of the alternative materials,
.6 no test or action relating to the approval of substitute materials to be made until the request for
substitution has been made in writing by the manufacturer and has been accompanied by
complete data as to the quality of the materials proposed, such request to be made in ample time
to permit appropriate review without delaying the Work, taking into consideration that such a
substitution request may be rejected requiring that the product or material as originally specified
be provided,
.7 whenever classification, listing, or other certification by a recognized standards body is a part of
the specifications for any material, proposals for use of substitute materials to be accompanied by
reports from the equivalent body indicating compliance with the requirements of the
specifications,
.8 the costs of testing required to prove equality of the material proposed to be borne by the
manufacturer.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 4 of 20
2
SUBMITTALS
2.1
Shop Drawings and Product Data
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Submit shop drawings, manufacturers and product data and samples in accordance with Section 01
33 05;
.1 Submit for each item of equipment.
.2 Submit shop drawings in the same unit of measure as used on the drawings. Both metric and
imperial measures may be included.
.3 Submit shop drawings by email to: shopdrawings@hhangus.com
.2 Include an H.H. Angus shop drawing cover sheet form prepared for this project, for each shop
drawing (sample included at the end of this section), or, include the same information on the
contractors submittal cover sheet:
.1 Provide the following information on each submission;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
Client/Architect name
Project Name
H.H. Angus project number
Date
Contractor name
Contractor reference No.
Manufacturer’s name
Product type
Specification section number
Contractor trade: mechanical, electrical, elevators, or general trades
If a re-submission, the H.H. Angus reference number from the previous submission.
.3 Submit shop drawings in PDF format;
.1 If submitted in hardcopy format, submit in 11 x 17, black and white originals of graphic quality
suitable for photocopying. Allow one additional week for processing of shop drawings submitted
in hardcopy format.
.4 Manufacturers’ printed product data sheets for standard items are acceptable in place of shop
drawings provided that physical characteristics are identified and are related to specification
references.
.5 Submit manufacturers’ data sheets with typed schedules listing manufacturers’ and suppliers’ name
and catalogue model numbers for such items as fire alarm system components, etc.
.6 For luminaires, submit bound sets of luminaire cut sheets with manufacturers’ names and catalogue
numbers for all luminaires to be used on the project. Identify and arrange the luminaire cut sheets and
catalogue numbers in the same sequence as the Specification Luminaire List.
.7 Shop drawings and product data to show;
.1 CSA or equivalent approval,
.2 dimensioned outlines of equipment,
.3 dimensioned details showing service connection points.
.8 Indicate details of construction, dimensions, capacities, weights and electrical performance
characteristics of equipment or material.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 5 of 20
.9 Where applicable, include;
.1
wiring, single line and schematic diagrams,
.2
diagrams showing interconnection with work of other Sections,
.3 equipment elevations,
.4 component assemblies,
.5 trip settings,
.6 description of operation.
.10 Each shop drawing to be checked and stamped as being correct, by trade purchasing item, before
drawing is submitted. If above requirements are not complied with, shop drawings will be rejected
and returned forthwith.
2.2
Field, Fabrication, or Installation Drawings
.1 Contractor’s field, fabrication, installation, and/or sleeving drawings will not be reviewed as shop
drawings. If submitted as a shop drawing, a transmittal will be returned identifying that the submitted
drawings have not been reviewed.
.2 Maintain a copy on site of such drawings for reference by the Consultant.
.3 Upon request, provide a copy of such drawings to the Consultant for general information purposes.
3
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
.1 Install electrical systems in accordance with the Electrical Safety Code (ESC).
.2 Abbreviations for electrical terms: to the latest edition of CSA Z85.
.3 Comply with CSA Certification Standards and Ontario Electrical Safety Code Bulletins in force at time
of Tender submission.
.4 Where requirements of this specification exceed those of the above mentioned standards, this
specification to govern.
.5 In the event of a conflict between codes, regulations, or standards, or where work shown is in conflict
with these documents, obtain interpretation before proceeding. Failure to clarify any ambiguity will
result in an interpretation requiring the application of the most demanding requirements.
4
CONFINED SPACES
.1 Unless otherwise prescribed by the Constructor’s/Owner’s workplace safety program, treat spaces
not designed and constructed for continuous human occupancy as “confined spaces”, including but
not limited to;
.1 horizontal and vertical service spaces, shafts, and tunnels,
.2 inside of equipment which permits entry of the head and/or whole body, and
.3 ceiling spaces which are identified as containing a hazardous substance.
5
PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
.1 Submit to Electrical Safety Authority necessary number of drawings and specifications for
examination and approval prior to commencement of work.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 6 of 20
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 Pay associated fees.
.3 Consultant will provide drawings and specifications required by Electrical Safety Authority at no cost.
.4 Notify Consultant of changes required by Electrical Safety Authority prior to making changes.
.5 Furnish to Consultant, Certificates of Acceptance from Electrical Safety Authority and authorities
having jurisdiction, upon completion of the Work.
6
EQUIPMENT
6.1
Manufacturers Nameplates
.1 Metal nameplate with raised or recessed lettering, mounted on each piece of equipment.
.2 Manufacturer's nameplate to indicate equipment size, capacity, model designation, manufacturer's
name, serial number, voltage, cycle, phase and power rating, and approval listings.
6.2
Finishes
.1 Primary and final painting for Work, other than items specified as factory primed or finished, to be
done under Finish Division 9.
.2 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at
least two coats of finish enamel.
.3 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or
installation, to match original paint.
.4 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.
.5 Protect exposed or free standing equipment with plastic to minimize entry of dust and dirt and marring
of finished surfaces during progress of work.
.6 Schedule luminaires, lamps, diffusers and fire detectors for installation as late as possible during
construction in order to minimize accumulation of dust and/or dirt on them. Clean luminaires and
diffusers, not acceptable because of dust and dirt, in an approved manner in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wrap surface mounted and suspended luminaires and fire detectors,
installed prior to painting or dusty construction being completed in the area, in plastic to prevent dirt or
paint from settling on them.
7
COORDINATION
7.1
General
.1 Consultant’s drawings are diagrammatic and illustrate the general location of equipment, and
intended routing of ductbanks, conduits, cabletrays, feeders, etc. and do not show every structural
detail. In congested areas drawings at greater scale may be provided to improve interpretation of the
Work. Where equipment or systems are shown as “double line”, they are done so either to improve
understanding of the Work, or simply as a result of the use of a CAD drawing tool, and in either case
such drawings are not represented as fabrication or installation drawings.
.2 Lay out and coordinate the Work to avoid conflict with work under other Divisions.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 7 of 20
.3 Make good damage to Owner's property or to other trade's work caused by inaccurate layout or
careless performance of the Work.
.4 Where equipment provided under other Divisions connects with material or equipment supplied under
this Division, confirm capacity and ratings of equipment being provided.
.5 Take information involving accurate measurements from dimensioned Architectural Drawings or at
the building.
.6 Install services and equipment which are to be concealed, close to the building structure so that
furring is kept to minimum dimensions.
.7 Location of conduit, raceways and equipment may be altered without extra cost provided instruction is
given or approval is obtained, in advance of installation of items involved. Changes will be authorized
by site instructions and are to be shown on Record Drawings.
.8 Include incidental material and equipment not specifically noted on Drawings or mentioned in
Specifications but which is needed to complete the Work as an operating installation.
7.2
Field, Fabrication, and Installation Drawings
.1 Refer to section 01 33 00 for general requirements for interference drawings. In conjunction with the
submission of electrical equipment submittals and shop drawings, submit a 3D model (using
Autodesk Revit V2015 or other 3D modelling software) which incorporates all elements of the
mechanical and electrical systems including equipment, ducting, pipes, conduit, mounting provisions
and all clear access areas. All elements to be sized and positioned accurately as to the items to be
installed. Consultant will provide a base architectural model in Revit 2015 for use by the Contractor
at the outset of the work (base Mechanical and Electrical Drawings will be provided in AutoCad
2014). All interferences to be coordinated with the architect.
.2 Prepare field, fabrication, and/or installation drawings to show location of equipment and relative
position of services and to demonstrate coordination with work of other trades.
.1 Drawing scale: minimum 1:50 (1/4"=1'-0")
.3 Use information from manufacturer's shop drawings for each trade and figured dimensions from latest
Architectural and Structural Drawings.
.4 Layout equipment and services to provide access for repair and maintenance.
.5 Submit drawings to other trades involved in each area and include note in drawing title block as
follows;
.1 “This drawing was prepared and circulated for review and mark-up to related subcontractors as
noted and initialed in the table below. Corrections and concerns identified through this
coordination process have been addressed on this drawing. Areas that incorporate significant
changes from layouts shown on Contract Drawings have been circled for Consultants’ review.”
7.3
Cutting and Remedial Work
.1 For details of cutting and patching and division of Work refer to Division 1.
.2 Neatly cut or drill holes required in existing construction to accommodate equipment such as cables,
raceways, etc.
.3 Arrange and pay for cutting and patching as required for the Work. Before cutting, drilling, or sleeving
structural load bearing elements, obtain the Consultant’s approval of location and methods in writing.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 8 of 20
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
For weather exposed or moisture resistant elements or sight exposed surfaces, employ the original
installer or an expert in finishing of the material, to perform cutting or patching.
.4 Layout cutting of structural elements, such as floor slabs, walls, columns or beams and obtain
approval before starting work. Conduct an electromagnetic scan for reinforcing rods, such as Hilti
PS200 Ferroscan, and review with the Structural Engineer.
.5 Relocate core drilling location if steel or conduit is found in the proposed location and repeat
procedure. Repair and reroute any circuits damaged by core drilling.
7.4
Voltage Ratings
.1 Operating voltages: to latest edition of CAN3-C235.
.2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60
Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard. Equipment to operate in extreme
operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment.
7.5
Wiring of Mechanical Trades Motors
.1 To limit responsibility and to specifically define the Work under this Division, use the following
procedure with regard to motors provided under Mechanical Division 20.
.2 The Contractor under Mechanical Division 20 will be responsible for installing equipment which he
supplies including motors, starters, disconnect switch, “mechanical” panelboards and miscellaneous
controls of the type specified.
.3 In every instance whether pertaining to Plumbing, Air Conditioning, Refrigeration, Heating or
Ventilating equipment, wire to line side of the, panelboard, disconnect switch, or starter provided by
these trades, in reasonable proximity to equipment being controlled.
.4 From this point, unless otherwise noted, the cost of electrical material and labour will be borne by the
particular trade whose work is involved. That trade will mount starter and wire from it to motor being
controlled, together with control wiring, remote switches, and pilot lights.
.5 Where individual starters and controls are grouped together, the Contractor under Mechanical
Division 20 will provide a panel for mounting his equipment. Provide a feeder, main fused disconnect
switch, a splitter of adequate size and capacity, individual fused disconnect switches, and wire to line
side of the Division 20 starters.
.6 In the case of unit heaters, reheat coils, electrical control devices, and cabinet unit heaters, terminate
wiring in an outlet immediately adjacent to motor or device being electrically powered. Wiring from
this point to starter, thermostat, or other devices will be done under Mechanical Division 20.
.7 Provide branch circuit wiring and an outlet for each motorized damper or heating control.
.8 Ascertain exact locations of starters, “mechanical” panelboards and motors, from Mechanical
Drawings.
.9 Motors up to and including 0.25 kW (1/3 HP) to be 120 volt, 60 Hz, single phase.
.10 Motors 0.37 kW (½ HP) and above to be 3 phase, 60 Hz, voltage as noted.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
8
PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL, WORK, AND PROPERTY
8.1
Personnel Protection
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 9 of 20
.1 Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel safety.
.2 Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 120 VOLTS", or with appropriate voltage.
.3 Arrange for installation of temporary doors for rooms containing electrical distribution equipment.
Keep these doors locked except when under direct supervision of electrician.
.4 Do not leave conduit, wires, cables, tools, equipment or materials in such a way that they constitute a
hazard.
.5 Provide guards around openings in the roof or floor to prevent stock or scrap from dropping down.
.6 Remove loose equipment and tools from overhead areas before leaving each day.
.7 Do not leave boards with protruding nails on the floor.
.8 Cut off bolts at floor level to eliminate a possible tripping hazard.
8.2
Protection During Construction
.1 Provide protection required to enable existing building and equipment to remain in continuous and
normal operation.
.2 Take the necessary precautions to protect equipment, existing building and service from damage
during the Work. Accept responsibility for any damage and make good without cost to the Owner.
.3 It is of vital importance, during work of this Contract, that all existing surfaces and items are not
damaged in any way whatsoever by the work of all trades. Take precautions as necessary to prevent
damage to walls, floors, ceilings, windows, doors, door frames, mouldings, finishes, piping, ductwork,
light fixtures, etc. Provide protection, hoarding, tarpaulins, dust sleeves etc., as required. Any
damage caused because of lack of adequate protection to be made good at no cost to the Owner.
.4 Take care to eliminate dust in equipment areas.
8.3
Core Drilling
.1 Wherever core drilling is required, provide temporary dust proof screens.
.2 In areas where core drilling through a slab in an operating facility is necessary, the areas to be drilled
to be marked out clearly on the underside of slab. Owner's representative to be notified at least 1
week prior to core drilling operation. Provide tarping of equipment supervised by the Owner.
.3 During core drilling operations, station at least one person directly below the area of drilling with a
large plastic container pressed to underside of slab to capture and hold core and water upon
completion of operations.
.4 A wet/dry commercial quality vacuum to be used continuously at location of drilling operation to
remove all excess water from the area.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 10 of 20
8.4
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Protection of Floors During Equipment Installation
.1 Provide protection of floor finishes during installation or removal of equipment, and at any other time
when moving or installing heavy equipment.
.2 Install 19mm (¾") plywood over 6 mil plastic over finished floor areas when moving heavy equipment
that could damage floor finish.
.3 Repaint or re-tile any floors or walls damaged or scratched during construction.
8.5
Housekeeping
.1 Maintain a high level of cleanliness.
.2 Remove scrap and refuse from the work area daily.
.3 Whenever possible, clean up immediately following completion of work.
.4 Deposit oily and waste solvent rags in approved containers to minimize the fire hazard.
.5 Sweep and damp mop daily.
9
WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING
9.1
General
.1 During the tender period, perform a site inspection of the place of work and surroundings including
the accessible ceiling spaces and other areas where access could be considered reasonable. Make a
thorough investigation of the as built conditions to determine the scope of renovation and demolition
work required prior to submitting a tender.
.2 The Work includes changes to the existing building and changes at junction of old and new
construction. Route cabling, ducts, conduits and other services to avoid interference with existing
installation.
.3 Core drilling to be done evenings after 7:00 pm. Coordinate with Owner.
.4 Relocate existing pipes, ducts, conduits, and any other equipment or services as necessary to
accommodate the Work.
.5 Maintain or relocate existing services which pass through the area of renovation or demolition, but
which feed items located outside of these areas. Rewire devices to the original circuits.
.6 Remove existing lighting fixtures, wiring, devices and equipment to suit new construction. Cut back
and cap conduits and electrical outlets not being used, so that finished work presents a neat and
clean appearance. Disconnect at point of electrical supply, remove obsolete wiring and conduits, and
make existing systems safe. Blank off openings in panels or boxes created by the removal of cables,
conduits, wireways or ducts.
.7 Where an existing ceiling is to be removed and reinstalled or replaced under another trades scope of
work, and the existing electrical items such as luminaires, fire detectors, speakers, exit signs,
emergency lighting heads etc., are to be reused, provide the following regarding the electrical items:
.1 remove,
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 11 of 20
.2 store in a secure, clean, dry location,
.3 install in the new ceiling, extend wiring and raceways as necessary,
.4 provide new items to match existing where existing items have been lost or damaged,
.5 make connections,
.6 clean,
.7 test,
.8 verify fire alarm devices,
.9 replace defective items with new, then retest/reverify,
.10 submit test and verification reports.
.8 Unless noted otherwise removed materials and equipment become the property of the Contractor and
are to be taken from the site and disposed of appropriately.
.9 Review removed luminaires and equipment with the Owner’s representative, and if the Owner
instructs they wish to keep any items, move them to a designated location on the site. Luminaires and
equipment that the Owner does not want become the property of the Contractor and are to be taken
from the site and disposed of appropriately.
.10 For devices, fixtures and equipment to be relocated, provide junctions boxes, outlet boxes, wiring,
plates, supports, etc., as necessary.
.11 Revise panelboard directories accordingly if affected by the Work.
.12 On completion of relocations, confirm that relocated devices and luminaires are in proper working
order.
.13 Co-ordinate work affecting fire alarm system, fire safety, or protection systems with the Owner,
Consultant, fire alarm system manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction prior to commencing
work. Retain the original fire alarm system manufacturer to verify relocated fire alarm devices,
modified equipment and revised wiring. Provide temporary fire protection and/or a fire watch in all
areas affected by the demolition and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
.14 Where the Owner wishes to take over renovated areas ahead of the project completion date and
these areas are intended to be fed from the distribution systems in the new building, make temporary
connections to the existing services in these areas. Reconnect to permanent services at a later date,
when the new distribution systems are available.
9.2
Continuity of Services
.1 Keep existing buildings in operation with minimum length of shutdown periods.
.2 Make connections to existing systems at approved times.
.3 Obtain written approval, recording times when connections can be made.
.4 Repair any damage caused to existing systems when making connections.
.5 Provide premium time labour to tie-in feeders or wiring at night or on weekends.
.6 Provide temporary feeders and connections as required to maintain systems in operation where
shutdown periods will exceed 8 hours, or extend beyond the allowable time frame determined by the
Owner.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 12 of 20
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.7 Arrange the Work so that physical access to the existing buildings is not unduly interrupted.
10
MOVING AND SETTING IN PLACE OWNER’S EQUIPMENT
10.1
S.B.O. (Supplied by Owner)
.1
Items marked SBO on drawings will be;
.1 purchased by Owner,
.2 received, checked, stored, unpacked, uncrated, assembled and located by the Contractor under
Division 1
.2 Connect electrical services to this equipment.
10.2
E.R. or Ex. Rel. (Existing Relocated) or otherwise so identified
.1 Except as indicated below, items so marked on drawings will be moved from their present location
and reinstalled by the Contractor under Division 1. Disconnect and reconnect electrical services to
accommodate the relocation of this equipment.
.2 Disconnect, remove, store as necessary, move into place, reinstall, clean and reconnect electrical
items so marked, such as;
.1 luminaires,
.2 fire detectors,
.3 speakers,
.4 switches,
.5 receptacles,
.6 disconnects,
.7 splitters,
.8 panelboards,
.9 switchgear,
.10 transformers,
.11 etc.
11
CONSTRUCTION POWER AND TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICES
11.1
Temporary Construction Power and Lighting
.1 To section 01 51 13.
12
FINAL CLEANING
12.1
General
.1 Do final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 74 23.
.2 Perform final cleaning after construction activities that create dust, have been completed.
.3 Clean electrical equipment and devices installed as part of this project.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 13 of 20
.4 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces that have been exposed to construction
dust and dirt, including the top surface, whether exposed or in the ceiling space.
.5 Clean switch, receptacle, and communications outlets, coverplates, and exposed surfaces.
13
RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 Provide record drawings in accordance with Section 01 78 39 and as specified herein.
.2 A set of design drawings in AutoCad 2013 on CD or DVD ROM will be provided by the Consultant.
Make sets of white prints for each phase of the Work, and as the Work progresses and changes
occur, mark white prints in coloured inks to show revisions. Within the building, provide dimensions
with respect to building column centres. Outside the building provide dimensions to the building
foundation or to the centerline of paved roadways or provide GPS co-ordinates. Mark level with
respect to an elevation which will be provided.
.3 Retain these drawings and make available to Consultant for periodic review.
.4 At 50%, 75% and 90% of project completion, scan marked-up drawings to Adobe .pdf format and
submit a copy to the Consultant, or to the project document portal if one is in use.
13.2
AS-built Drawings
.1 Prior to testing, balancing and adjusting, transfer site record drawing information to AutoCad 2013
(CAD) files, to record final as-built condition. Obtain a current set of CAD files from the Consultant.
.1 Follow the Consultants AutoCad Standards. Do not alter drawing scales, X-refs, colours, layers or
text styles.
.2 The Consultant's CAD files might not reflect all or any construction changes.
.2 Where items have been deleted, moved, renumbered or otherwise changed from contract drawings,
revise the CAD files to record these changes. “Bubble” these revisions, and place these annotations
on a separate and easily identified drawing layer.
.3 Show on electrical as-built drawings final locations of conduit, outlets, panels, branch wiring, system
wiring, pull boxes, bus ducts, and equipment.
.4 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm (½") high as follows "ASBUILT DRAWINGS. This drawing has been revised to show systems as installed" (Signature of
Contractor) (Date). The site services drawings are to include signature and stamp of OLS attached to
note.
.5 Submit one (1) set of white prints of the draft as-built CAD files for the Consultant’s review.
.6 Once “AS BUILT DRAWINGS” white prints are reviewed, transfer Consultant's comments to the CAD
files. Return AutoCad drawings modified to “As Built” condition to Consultants on CD or DVD ROM.
.7 Submit three (3) sets of white prints and three (3) copies of CAD files with Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
14
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
14.1
Operating and Maintenance Data
.1 Provide operation and maintenance data bound in 210 mm x 300 mm x 50mm thick (8½ in x 11 in x 2
in thick) size, vinyl covered, hard back, three-ring covers.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 14 of 20
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Organize material in volumes generally grouped by Division Section;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Power,
Lighting,
Low Voltage Systems,
Fire Alarm and Security.
.2 Title sheet in each volume to be labeled "Operating and Maintenance Manual" and to bear;
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Project Name,
Project Number,
Date,
Trade Section, and
List of Contents.
.3 Provide three hard-copies to Owner.
.2 In addition, provide Adobe PDF files for each document, produced from original direct-to-digital file
creations.
.1 Organize documents into separate PDF files for each Division Section identified above, and apply
Adobe Bookmarks to create Table of Contents.
.3 Include in operations and maintenance data;
.1 details of design elements, construction features, component function and maintenance
requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance, repair, modification, extension
and expansion of any portion or feature of installation,
.2 technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations, exploded views,
technical descriptions of items, and parts lists; advertising or sales literature not acceptable,
.3 wiring and schematic diagrams and performance curves,
.4 names and addresses of local suppliers for items included in maintenance manuals,
.5 reviewed shop drawings,
.6 operating characteristics of the equipment supplied such as calibration curves and coordination
data to allow proper co-ordination with Owner’s equipment,
.7 description of operation of the controls and protective devices used,
.8 maintenance and adjustment procedures,
.9 lifting and jacking instructions,
.10 fault locating guide,
.11 spare parts list and an itemized price list,
.12 name and telephone numbers of service organization and technical staff that will provide warranty
service on the various items of equipment.
.4 Approval procedure;
.1 submit one set of first draft of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for approval,
.2 make corrections and resubmit as directed,
.3 review contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals with Owner's operating staff or
representative to ensure thorough understanding of each item of equipment and its operation,
.4 hand-over an additional two copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals to Owner's operating
staff and obtain written confirmation of delivery.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
14.2
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 15 of 20
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.1 Provide instructions to Owner’s operations staff to thoroughly explain operation and maintenance of
each system, incorporating specialized instruction by manufacturers as described under other
Sections. Include classroom instruction and hands-on instruction, delivered by competent instructors.
.2 Develop the proposed training plan, submit an outline of the training program for review and
adjustment by the Owner. Obtain approval from the Owner before commencing training.
.3 Structure each session to start with the classroom instruction for the overall system, followed by
hands-on instruction for each item of equipment, utilizing the services of the manufacturers’
representative as required.
.4 Organize and schedule each training session to deliver the required instruction in an efficient and
effective manner on a schedule agreed upon with the Owner.
.5 Organize each pair of training sessions as follows:
.1 Power Distribution - Normal Power- Division 26
.2 Power Distribution - Emergency Power- Division 26
.3 Lighting Control – Division 26
.4 Electronic Safety and Security – Fire Alarm – Division 28
.6 Complete the training as close to Substantial Performance as possible, so that the operations staff
are prepared to operate the systems after Substantial Performance is certified.
.7 Keep a record of date and duration of each instruction period together with names of persons
attending. Submit signed records at completion of instruction.
.8 For each training session, include the following topics;
.1 general purpose of the system (design intent),
.2 use of O & M manuals,
.3 review of single line drawings and control schematics,
.9 Sessions may be videotaped by the Owner as an aid to ongoing training of Owner’s staff.
15
CARE, OPERATION AND START-UP
.1 Arrange and pay for services of applicable manufacturer's factory service engineer or certified
independent testing organization to supervise initial start-up of specialized portions of installation and
to check, adjust, balance and calibrate components including related wiring and controls. Provide
these services for such periods, and for as many visits as may be necessary to put applicable portion
of the installation in complete working order. Provide a certificate indicating that the equipment is free
and clear of deficiencies.
16
TESTING
.1 Conduct and pay for the following tests;
.1 power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing,
.2 circuits originating from branch distribution panels,
.3 lighting and its control,
.4 systems: fire alarm system, communications,
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 16 of 20
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.5 additional testing as specified in other Sections.
.2 Furnish manufacturer's certificate or letter confirming that entire installation as it pertains to each
system has been installed to manufacturer's instructions.
.3 Insulation resistance testing;
.1 megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument,
.2 megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument,
.3 check resistance to ground before energizing.
.4 Carry out tests in presence of Consultant.
.5 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at
conclusion of project.
.6 Submit test results for Consultant's review. Test electrical equipment to standards and function of
specifications, applicable codes and standards in an approved manner. Replace defective equipment
and wiring with new material and leave entire system in complete first class operating condition.
17
LOAD BALANCE
.1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance.
Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and
record changes. Revise circuit labelling as appropriate.
.2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of
equipment.
.3 Submit, at completion of work, report listing phase and neutral current on panelboards, dry-core
transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load. State hour and date on which
each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.
18
TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USAGE
18.1
General
.1 Temporary and trial usage by Owner of any electrical device, machinery, apparatus, equipment or
any other work or materials before final completion and written acceptance, is not to be construed as
evidence of acceptance by the Consultant.
.2 Owner to have the privilege of such temporary and trial usage, as soon as the Contractor claims that
said work is completed and in accordance with specifications, for such reasonable length of time as is
deemed to be sufficient for making a complete and thorough test of same.
.3 No claims will be considered for damage to or failure of any parts of such work so used which may be
discovered during temporary and trial usage, whether caused by weakness or inaccuracy of structural
parts or by defective materials or workmanship of any kind whatsoever.
19
PRICING OF CHANGE NOTICES
.1 The value of a proposed change in the work shall be determined in one or more of the following
methods;
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 17 of 20
.1 by time and material,
.2 by unit prices set out in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon,
.3 by labour and material costs submitted in a detailed quotation.
.2 In the case of changes in the Work to be paid for under the time and material or the unit price
methods, the form of presentation of costs and methods of measurement shall be agreed to by the
Consultant and Contractor before proceeding with the change. Keep accurate records, as agreed
upon, of quantities or costs and present an account of the cost of the change in the Work, together
with vouchers, material receipts and invoices where applicable.
.3 In the case of changes in the Work to be paid for under the time and material or the labour and
material method, the material costs are to be less trade discounts. Provide a 20% discount from list
price for items included in the Allpriser catalogue or Electrical Price Guide.
.4 The detailed quotation referenced under the labour and material method is to include a summary of
charges made up of three components: labour charges, material costs and fees.
.1 Labour Charges
(a) The labour hour estimates are to be based on the current NECA Column 2 manual of labour
units.
(b) Labour costs are to include burden on wages such as taxes, worker compensation charges,
CPP, EI, project insurance, safety meetings, estimating, as-built drawings, supervision, small
tools, site facilities, labour warranty and clean up.
(c) The all inclusive hourly labour rate applicable for quotations submitted for changes to the
work is 1.34 times the TOTAL PACKAGE RATE of the current Collective Agreement. The
hourly labour rate for specialists not governed by union agreements (technicians or
engineers) is 1.6 times the TOTAL PACKAGE RATE for electricians, plumbers or pipe fitters.
(d) The all inclusive hourly labour rate indicated above is to include:
• Collective Agreement relevant to the place of work (vacation pay, RRSP, Health &
Welfare, RST of Health & Welfare, Pension, Union admin fund, ECA fund (or others),
Secretariat.
• Legislation as relevant to the place of work (Emp. Health Tax, E.I., CPP, WSIB, taxes)
• Project insurance, safety meetings, estimating, lay outs, site facilities, warranties,
storage,
• clean up, office supervision and miscellaneous charges.
(e) Foreman Electrician, General Foreman, Superintendent rates shall be as for the calculated
Journeyman rate above plus 10.6% of the TOTAL PACKAGE RATE . A maximum of 10% of
the total calculated journeymen hours on a change may be charged as overhead supervision
hours at the Foreman rate.
(f) A maximum combined amount of 3% of the total calculated journeymen hours on a change
may be charged as overhead supervision hours at the General Foreman/Superintendent rate.
(g) No other overhead supervision hours will be permitted.
.2 Material Charges
(a) Material costs are to be less trade discounts. Provide a 20% discount for items included in
the Allpricer catalogue or Electrical Price Guide.
.3 Fees
(a) The overhead and profit fee is to include for the Contractor's head office and site office
expenses, project manager, assistants, site office and storage facilities, utility charges, site
security, telephone and facsimile transmission costs, as builts, expendable small tools,
financing costs, coffee breaks, site facilities, general clean up and disposal, security,
storekeeper, and all other non-productive labour.
(b) Fees for overhead and profit are to be in accordance with the general conditions of the
contract]
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 18 of 20
20
CONSULTANT REVIEWS
20.1
General
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Consultant’s attendance at site including but not limited to site meetings, demonstrations, site reviews
and any resulting reports are for the sole benefit of the Owner and the local authority having
jurisdiction.
20.2
Site Reviews
.1 General reviews and progress reviews do not record deficiencies during the course of the Work until
such time as a portion or all of the work is declared complete. In some instances before the work is
completed, deficiencies may be recorded where the item is indicative of issues such as poor
workmanship, incorrect materials or installation methods, or may be difficult to correct at a later date.
Do not use any such reported items, or lack thereof, as part of the project quality assurance program
nor as a change to the scope of work nor as acceptance of the quality of the work.
.2 Deficiency reviews conducted by the Consultant are performed on a sampling basis, and any
deficiency item is to be interpreted as being indicative of similar locations elsewhere in the Work,
unless indicated otherwise .
.3 Prior to Work being concealed, notify the Consultant in writing seven (7) calendar days in advance of
the planned concealment to arrange a site review, where required by the Consultant. Correct noted
deficiencies before concealing the Work. Failure to provide notification can result in the Work being
exposed for review at the Contractor’s cost.
20.3
Final Review
.1 At project completion submit written request for final review of mechanical and electrical systems.
.1 Refer to section 26 08 19 Project Close-Out.
.2 Include with the request a written certification that;
.1 deficiencies noted during job inspections have been completed,
.2 systems have been balanced and tested and are ready for operation,
.3 completed maintenance and operating data have been submitted and approved,
.4 tags are in place and equipment identification is completed,
.5 cleaning is finished in every respect,
.6 electrical panels, switchboards, cabinets, and equipment surfaces have been touched up with
matching paint, or re-finished as required,
.7 spare parts and replacement parts specified have been provided and receipt acknowledged,
.8 As-built and Record drawings are completed and approved,
.9 Owner's operating personnel have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of systems,
.10 fire alarm verification is 100% completed and Verification Certificate has been submitted and
accepted.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
21
CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION
21.1
General
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 19 of 20
.1 At completion, submit written guarantee, undertaking to remedy defects in work for a period of one
year from date of substantial completion. This guarantee is not to supplant other guarantees of
longer period called for on certain equipment or materials.
.2 Guarantee to encompass replacement of defective workmanship, parts, materials or equipment, and
to include incidental fluids, gaskets, lubricants, supplies, and labour for removal and reinstallation
work.
.3 Submit similar guarantee for one year from date of acceptance for any part of work accepted by
Owner, before completion of whole work.
22
ATTACHEMENTS
22.1
Shop Drawing Submittal Form
.1 Attached sample of shop drawings submittal form.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements
Page 20 of 20
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
END OF SECTION
Master revised: September 08, 2015
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 01
Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
Page 1 of 6
ELECTRICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 05 01
1
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
.1 Articles that are of a general nature, apply to each Section of Divisions 26, 27 and 28.
1.2
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this section to include furnishing of labour, materials, equipment and services
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete electrical systems as
shown, as specified, as intended, and as otherwise required. Complete systems to be left ready for
continuous and efficient satisfactory operation.
2
ACCESS DOORS
2.1
Construction:
.1 Access doors, unless shown or specified otherwise:
.1 constructed from galvanized steel sheet,
.2 flush mounted,
.3 concealed hinges,
.4 180o opening door,
.5 anchor straps,
.6 plaster lock,
.7 screwdriver operated latches,
.8 without visible screws,
.9 finished prime coat only.
.2 Door metal thickness as follows:
.1 up to and including 400 x400 (16” x 16”): 1.6 mm (16 gauge)
.2 height or width larger than 400 (16”): 2 mm (14 gauge)
.3 Constructed of stainless steel with neoprene gasketted door where used in damp and high humidity
areas.
.4 Dish type door design to receive a tile insert where acoustic tile is applied to plaster or gypsum board
ceilings.
.5 Fire rated where installed in fire rated walls or ceilings. Fire rating to match the rating of the wall or
ceiling.
.6 Inside clear dimensions:
.1 approximately 400 mm x 400 mm (16" x 16") for hand access,
.2 at least 600 mm x 600 mm (24" x 24") where personnel are to enter through doors,
.3 larger where indicated or required.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 01
Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
Page 2 of 6
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.7 Submit access door shop drawings for approval as soon as possible after award of contract, showing
size, type and exact location of access doors.
Standard of Acceptance
° Acudor
° Cendrex (up to 400 x 400 only)
° Elmdor (up to 400 x 400 only)
° Mifab (up to 400 x 400 only)
° Nystrom
° Williams Brothers – GP
2.2
Installation
.1 Provide access doors for locations where equipment requiring access, maintenance or
adjustment is "built-in".
.2 Submit a list of proposed access door locations and obtain approval before commencing
installation.
.3 Access doors to be installed under the Division in whose work they occur. Arrange for and pay
cost of access doors and their installation.
.4 Access doors are not required in removable acoustic panel type ceilings.
.5 Size and locate access doors in applied tile, or in glazed or unglazed structural tile to suit tile
patterns. Refer to Architectural Room Finish Schedule and details on Architectural drawings in
this regard.
2.3
FIRE STOPPING
2.4
General
.1 Maintain the integrity of floor and wall fire separations around electrical raceways, cables and boxes
passing through rated floors or walls.
2.5
Materials
.1 Materials to form a ULC or cUL listed firestop system to CAN/ULC-S115 “Standard Method of Fire
Tests of Firestop Systems”.
.2 Firestop system rating: minimum 2 hrs., higher where indicated.
.3 Submit shop drawings consisting of product technical data and ULC or cUL listing.
Standard of Acceptance
° Hilti Firestop Systems
° 3M
° A/D Fire Protection System Inc.
° Eastern Wire + Conduit
.4 Other manufacturers having products with explicitly similar characteristics, listings or classifications
and approvals are acceptable.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
2.6
Section 26 05 01
Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
Page 3 of 6
Installation:
.1 Submit a complete fire stopping and smoke seal schedule to the Consultant for review. Include
details, cut sheets, system description and location for each proposed fire stopping and smoke
sealing application.
.2 Install firestopping in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with
the ULC or cUL listing.
.3 Firestopping to be installed only by personnel trained by the manufacturer on the installation of such
systems.
.4 Firestop system manufacturer’s training and inspection services:
.1 Provide the services of the firestop system manufacturer to provide training to trades performing
the fire stopping. Create and maintain a log of those personnel who obtain training.
.2 Provide the services of the firestop system manufacturer to inspect the installation of the
firestopping while in progress and a final inspection at completion of work. Provide a
manufacturer’s inspection report to the Owner and Engineer.
.5 Seal space between penetrating service and sleeve or opening in fire rated floors and walls with a fire
stopping and smoke sealing system.
.6 At time of application of materials, surfaces to be clean, dry and free from dust, oil, grease, loose or
flaking paint, loose concrete or masonry and foreign materials.
.7 Wiring may penetrate a fire rated assembly provided it is enclosed in non-combustible conduit, and
the passage of the conduit in turn is suitably sealed to the assembly with fire stop material.
.8 Where wiring with a combustible covering and not enclosed in non-combustible conduit penetrates a
fire resistance rated assembly, group the wiring into separate fire sealed penetrations to ensure the
overall diameter of the combined wire(s) in each penetration does not exceed 25 mm.
.9 Arrange single conductor metal sheathed cables to individually penetrate the fire rated assembly and
be individually fire stopped.
.10 Where wiring is installed in cable trays and penetrates a fire rated assembly;
.1 terminate and independently support the cable tray on each side of the fire rated assembly, and
.2 provide sufficient working room to properly install and inspect the fire stopping materials and
penetration.
.11 Smoke seal and fire stop electrical boxes that penetrate a fire rated wall using fire rated putty pads,
install putty pads on the outside of boxes.
.12 Co-ordinate installation of cast-in-place fire stopping devices with the Division responsible for the
placement of concrete.
3
SPRINKLER PROTECTION
3.1
Materials
.1 Surface panelboards and other electrical equipment in sprinklered areas to be fitted with watertight
hubs with insulated throat, for each conduit entrance.
Standard of Acceptance
° Thomas & Betts Ltd. - Series 401
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 01
Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
Page 4 of 6
°
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Efcor of Canada Ltd. - Series 40-50B
.2 Provide equipment in sprinklered areas, with hoods or shields and gasketted doors for protection
against entry of sprinkler discharge, and to comply with the requirements of the electrical code,
alternatively, and where indicated, provide indoor weatherproof equipment.
.3 Ventilation openings to be overhanging drip proof type.
.4 Indoor weatherproof equipment, where noted in the specifications and/or drawings to have CSA type
3R enclosures in accordance with the requirements of CSA Standard C22.2 No. 94.
4
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, AND BASES
4.1
Supports for electrical work
.1 Equipment supplementary supports to be provided by this Division.
.2 Concrete housekeeping bases for electrical equipment to be provided by this Division.
.3 Work to be done by firms specializing in these fields.
.4 Submit shop drawings for steel and concrete work, prepared by licensed Professional Engineers.
4.2
Supplementary supports and support brackets:
.1 Fabricated from structural grade steel with anchor bolts and fastenings.
.2 Designed in consultation with building structural consultant to transfer live loads and dead loads to
building structural elements.
.3 Constructed as frames bracketed from walls, and/or supported from building structure above, and/or
floor below.
4.3
Concrete bases for housekeeping pads:
.1 Constructed using plywood form work and 20 Mpa (3000 lb) concrete,
.2 Dowelled to concrete floor slab with steel rods not less than 13 mm (1/2 in) in diameter.
.3 Finish to make flat, level, smooth, neat surfaces.
.4 Chamfer corners 25 mm (1 in).
.5 Dimensions:
.1 75 mm (3 in) larger all around than base of apparatus for non-seismic applications,
.2 200 mm (8 in) larger all around than base of apparatus for seismically restrained equipment,
.3 Height: 100 mm (4 in)
4.4
Installation - General
.1 Locate supporting steel to permit service or repair, and to allow clear access to junction boxes and
equipment.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 01
Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
Page 5 of 6
.2 Set equipment on supporting frames and brackets and install hangers, anchor bolts, and vibration
mountings.
.3 Install anchor bolts, and vibration mountings between equipment and housekeeping pad.
.4 Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections.
.5 Provide anchorage, dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles.
.6 Make field connections with bolts to CAN/CSA-S16.1, or weld.
.7 Supply items for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with
setting templates.
.8 After completion of erection, touch-up field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces with primer.
.9 Where gratings or trench covers are cut in field or damaged, touch up with zinc rich paint.
5
GENERAL WIRING REQUIREMENTS
5.1
Wiring Terminations
.1 Lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring to be suitable for either copper or aluminum
conductors.
.2 Manufacturers’ and CSA labels to be visible and legible after equipment is installed.
5.2
Location of Outlets
.1 Locate outlets in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements.
.2 Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall.
.3 Where back boxes on opposite sides of a wall occupy the same stud bay, apply acoustical putty pads
to the outside of the boxes.
.4 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm
(10'), and information is given before installation.
.5 Locate light switches on latch side of doors. Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator
machine rooms on latch side of door.
5.3
Mounting Heights
.1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centerline of equipment unless specified or
indicated otherwise.
.2 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.
.3 For Barrier Free areas verify the mounting heights with the authority having jurisdiction prior to roughin.
.4 Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 01
Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
Page 6 of 6
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Description
General Area
Barrier Free
Local switches
1200 mm (47")
1050 mm (41")
Wall receptacles: General
300 mm (12")
450 mm (18")
200 mm (8")
200 mm (8")
175 mm (7")
175 mm (7")
Wall receptacles: In Mechanical rooms
1200 mm (47")
1050 mm (41")
Telephone outlets
300 mm (12")
450 mm (18")
Outlets for wall mounted telephones
1500 mm (59")
1000 mm (39")
Fire alarm pull stations
1500 mm (59")
1200 mm (47")
Wall mounted speakers
2100 mm (83")
2100 mm (83")
Wall mounted door operator push
pads
1000mm (39”)
1000mm (39”)
Wall or floor mounted, vertical panel
type door operator controls
from ≤200mm to
≥900mm (from ≤7.9”
to ≥36”)
from ≤200mm to
≥900mm (from ≤7.9”
to ≥36”)
Television outlets
300 mm (12")
450 mm (18")
Clocks
2100 mm (83")
2100 mm (83")
Other controls
1200 mm (47")
1050 mm (41")
Panelboards
As required by code
or as indicated
As required by code
or as indicated
Wall receptacles: above top of
continuous baseboard heater
Wall receptacles: above top of
counters or counter splash backs
5.4
Plywood Backboards
.1 Provide plywood backboards in electrical and telecommunications rooms and closets where indicated
or specified for mounting of equipment.
.2 Plywood to be securely attached to the building structure.
.3 Plywood to be 19mm, void free, good one side, mounted with good side exposed.
.4 Plywood to be Class A fire retardant, FSC certified and contain no added urea formaldehyde.
Plywood to be treated as follows on all surfaces:
.1 initially seal the plywood with one coat of Sherwin Williams part No. B49 W 2 wood primer,
.2 follow with one coat of Flame Control 10-10 Intumescent Fire Retardant Paint,
.3 finish with one coat of Flame Control 40-40 Fire Resistant Paint.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 19
Wires & Cables 0-1000 Volts
Page 1 of 3
WIRES & CABLES 0-1000 VOLTS
26 05 19
1
GENERAL
1.1
Product Data
.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 26 05 01 Electrical General Requirements.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Building Wires
.1 Conductors: copper conductors: size as indicated.
.2 Minimum wire size: No. 12 AWG.
.3 Stranded conductors for 10 AWG and larger.
.4 Insulation:
.1 chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material,
.2 RW90 or RWU90 to CSA C22.2 No. 38,
.3 600V and 300V ratings.
.5 Conductors to be colour coded. Conductors to have colour impregnated into insulation at time of
manufacture. Phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger, with black insulation, may be colour coded
with adhesive colour coding tape.
Standard of Acceptance
° Aetna Insulated Wire
° General Cable
° Nexans Canada Inc.
° Prysmian Cables & Systems Ltd.
° Southwire
2.2
Armoured Cables with Insulated Bonding Conductor
.1 Type: AC90 ISO-BX, 600V 90C to CSA C22.2 No 51, FT4 rated.
.2 Conductors: copper, minimum size #12, with green insulated #12 copper bonding wire.
.3 Insulation: RW90 XLPE.
.4 Armour: interlocking type fabricated from galvanized steel or aluminum strip.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1 Conductor colour coding to be as follows:
• Phase A - Red
• Phase B - Black
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 19
Wires & Cables 0-1000 Volts
Page 2 of 3
•
•
•
•
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Phase C - Blue
Neutral - White
Ground - Green
Control - Orange
.2 Where colour coding tape is utilized, apply at least 50 mm (2") at terminations, junction boxes and pull
boxes. Do not paint conductors.
.3 Use:
.1 600 V insulation for 600 Volt systems,
.2 300 V insulation for 120/208 V systems.
.4 Wiring in channel back of luminaires:
.1 600 volt type GTF or TEW,
.2 temperature rating as required by CSA and/or manufacturer requirements.
.5 Store wire and cable in a clean, dry, well ventilated area.
.6 Protect white insulated wire from exposure to NOx gas (eg: exhaust from propane fuelled equipment)
by wrapping with shrink wrap, by locating away from sources of NOx and by maintaining adequate
ventilation to minimize NOx levels.
.7 Where white insulated wire has discoloured:
.1 do not install,
.2 dispose of the wire,
.3 remove and replace wire that has been installed.
.8 Neatly train circuit wiring in cabinets, panels, pullboxes and junction boxes and hold with nylon cable
ties.
.9 Splice wires:
.1 Up to and including No. 6 AWG: with nylon insulated expandable spring type connectors with
moulded thermoplastic body and expandable square edge design spring.
.2 Larger than #6 AWG: with compression sleeve connectors and heat shrink insulating sleeves,
voltage rating of sleeves equal to or greater than the cable.
.3 Aluminum Conductors: with long barrel compression sleeve connectors approved for use with
aluminum conductors and heat shrink insulating sleeves, voltage rating of sleeves equal to or
greater than the cable.
.10 Do not splice conductors used in parallel runs.
.11 Where the Consultant agrees that splicing of conductors in a parallel run is unavoidable, connect the
paralleled runs of the feeder together in a junction box at the splice location, using:
.1 Copper bus bars of quantity and size to match the circuit,
.2 A two hole long barrel compression lug on each cable,
.3 Two nuts and bolts on each lug,
.4 Two oversized flat washers and a spring lock washer, or two Belleville washers, on each bolt,
.5 An oversized CSA Type [1][3R][4][12] enclosure to house the above.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
3.2
Section 26 05 19
Wires & Cables 0-1000 Volts
Page 3 of 3
Installation of Building Wires
.1 Install wiring as follows:
.1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section 26 05 33.
.2 In wireways and auxiliary gutters in accordance with Section 26 05 37.
.2 Home runs, of 15 and 20 Ampere circuits to lighting and receptacle panels, which exceed:
.1 25 m (75') in length: No. 10 AWG or larger,
.2 40 m (120') in length: No. 8 AWG or larger,
.3 60 m (180') in length: No. 6 AWG or larger.
.3 Increase the size of branch circuit conductors and home runs as required so that the total voltage
drop, from panelboards to loads, does not exceed 3% under load.
.4 For branch circuit wiring [provide a dedicated neutral conductor for each phase conductor. Where the
load does not produce harmonic currents a common neutral conductor may be used with two or three
phase conductors, subject to prior approval by the Consultant.
.5 For branch wiring, common neutral conductors may be used in the following applications:
.1 lighting circuits, excluding dimming circuits,
.2 housekeeping receptacles,
.3 specific purpose receptacles for equipment that does not produce harmonic currents, such as
resistance heating.
.6 Where wires are damaged or contaminated during installation, remove and dispose of wires, swab
out conduits and pull in new, clean conductors.
3.3
Installation of Armoured Cables AC90(BX)
.1 May be used for drops to surface and recessed mounted fluorescent luminaires. AC90(BX) to be
neatly installed and Tie Wrapped to supports.
.2 May be used for wiring concealed within walls provided that horizontal runs within the ceiling space
do not exceed 3m.
.3 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 27 28 - Wire and Box Connectors - 0 - 1000 V.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 27
Grounding and Bonding Secondary
Page 1 of 4
GROUNDING AND BONDING SECONDARY
26 05 27
1
GENERAL
1.1
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
1.2
Related Sections
.1 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
.2 26 05 01, Basic Materials and Methods.
.3 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.3
References
.1 IEEE 837, Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.
1.4
Submittals
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
.2 Submit list of nameplates.
1.5
Applicable Codes and Standards
.1 Latest edition of CSA C22.2 No 41 Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
1.6
Work Included
.1 Provide labour, materials, and equipment as required for installation, testing and putting into proper
operation complete systems as shown, as specified and as otherwise required.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Clamps:
.1 conductor to water main clamps suitable for grounding connections,
.2 type and size as required to make electrically conductive connections to underground water pipe,
.3 non-corroding copper, bronze and/or stainless steel construction.
2.2
Conductors
.1 Insulated grounding and bonding conductors:
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 27
Grounding and Bonding Secondary
Page 2 of 4
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 bare, stranded, soft annealed copper,
.2 type RW90 green insulation.
2.3
Accessories
.1 Accessories including but not limited to:
.1 grounding and bonding bushings,
.2 protective type clamps,
.3 bolted type conductor connectors,
.4 exothermic welded type conductor connectors,
.5 bonding jumpers, straps,
.6 pressure wire connectors,
to be of non-corroding copper, bronze and/or stainless steel construction.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Ground electrical systems in accordance with the Electrical Safety Code and the latest edition of
ANSI/IEEE Standard 142.
.2 Bond electrical equipment in accordance with the Electrical Safety Code and the latest edition of
ANSI/IEEE Standard 142.
.3 Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.4 Protect exposed grounding and bonding conductors from mechanical injury.
.5 Use mechanical connectors for grounding and bonding connections to equipment provided with lugs.
.6 Soldered joints not permitted.
.7 Provide a bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at both ends to bonding bushing, solderless
lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit.
.8 Provide a separate bonding conductor in each conduit:
.1 sized as per Table 16A of the ESC,
.2 not less than #12 AWG copper,
.3 with one bond conductor for every three line conductors.
.9 Bond building structural steel and metal siding to ground by welding copper to steel.
.10 Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at a single
grounding point. Avoid loop connections.
.11 Install grounding conductors outside electrical rooms and electrical closets in EMT and bond the EMT
to the conductor at both ends.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
3.2
Section 26 05 27
Grounding and Bonding Secondary
Page 3 of 4
System Grounding
.1 Provide system grounding connections to neutral point of secondary systems using not less than #6
copper conductor unless indicated otherwise.
.2 Install insulated copper grounding conductor for service raceways and service equipment as required
by the electric utility company.
3.3
Equipment Bonding
.1 Install insulated copper bonding connections:
.1 sized not less than #12 AWG and not less than indicated in Tables 16A and 16B of the electrical
code,
.2 to typical equipment including, but not necessarily limited to the following list:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
transformers,
panelboards,
splitters,
disconnect switches,
junction and outlet boxes,
receptacles,
luminaires,
frames of motors,
starters,
communications systems,
control panels,
other equipment that is supplied with electrical power.
.2 Where applicable, run bonding conductors as part of the feeder.
.3 Where bonding conductors are run separately, install in EMT conduit.
3.4
Communications Systems
.1 Install bonding connections for telephone, sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as follows:
.1 telephones: make telephone bonding system in accordance with telephone company's
requirements,
.2 communications system bonding: in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA 607, 568A, 569 standards,
3.5
Bonding of Other Items
.1 Install insulated copper bonding connections:
.1 sized not less than #6 AWG,
.2 run in EMT conduit,
.3 to typical items including, but not necessarily limited to following list:
(a) metallic water piping systems,
(b) metallic gas piping systems,
.2 Review the design and installation of each piping system with the system installer and provide
bonding jumpers where necessary to ensure that each piping system is electrically continuous.
3.6
Field Quality Control
.1 Perform tests in accordance with:
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 27
Grounding and Bonding Secondary
Page 4 of 4
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Section 26 01 01 - Electrical General Requirements.
.2 Section 26 08 05 - System Co-ordination, Verification and Testing.
.2 Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to
approval of Consultant and local authority having jurisdiction.
.3 Perform tests before energizing electrical system.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 29
Fastenings and Supports
Page 1 of 3
FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS
26 05 29
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1 Fastenings and supports: Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.
.2 Concrete bases and housekeeping pads for electrical equipment shall be arranged and paid for by
Division 26, and installed by trade specialists under respective Carpentry, Concrete, and Painting
Divisions.
1.2
Shop Drawings
.1 Submit design drawings for custom fabricated trapeze hangers, sealed by a professional engineer
licensed in the project location jurisdiction.
.1 Shop drawing details:
(a) construction detail drawings for each loading condition,
(b) span deflection calculations,
(c) building attachment load calculations and type.
.2 Provide services of engineer who sealed the custom trapeze hanger shop drawings to conduct a
general review of the completed installation on site.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Support Channels
.1 Hot dipped galvanized steel, U shape, size 41 mm x 41 mm x 2.5 mm (1e" x 1e" x 1/10") thick,
surface mounted, suspended or set in poured concrete walls and ceilings.
2.2
Inserts
.1 Inserts for conduits and raceway hangers, for single, double and multiple runs shall be galvanized.
Standard of Acceptance
° Unistrut Canada
° Burndy (Canada) Ltd. - Flexibar
° Pilgrim Technical Products Ltd. - Tufstrut
2.3
Hangers
.1 Hangers for electrical conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
Standard of Acceptance
° Burndy Canada Ltd.
° Canstrut
° Electrovert Ltd.
° E. Myatt & Co. Ltd
° Steel City Electric Ltd.
° Pilgrim Technical Products Ltd.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 29
Fastenings and Supports
Page 2 of 3
2.4
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Trapeze hangers
.1 Performance:
.1 Manufactured:
(a) to product load listings.
.2 Custom fabricated:
(a) maximum deflection between supports: 1/250 (0.4%) of span
(b) minimum factor of safety : 5 times load to ultimate tensile or compressive strength.
.2 Construction:
.1 Carbon steel shapes, to suit load application:
(a) hollow steel section,
(b) equal leg El section, or
(c) double C channel “strong-back”, with welded clips.
.2 Hanger rods:
(a) as specified above, and
(b) minimum two support rods,
(c) rods selected for minimum factor of safety of 5 times load to ultimate tensile or compressive
strength of rod.
.3 Finish:
.1 hot dipped galvanized finish in mechanical rooms and outdoors.
.2 black steel finish in other areas.
Standard of Acceptance
° Anvil Fig 45, 46, 50
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Supply and deliver inserts to site in ample time to be built into work of other trades. Provide
necessary templates and adequate instructions to locate and install inserts.
.2 Secure equipment to masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors.
.3 Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.
.4 Secure surface mounted equipment with T-bar support hanger fastened to inverted T bar ceilings.
Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before
installation.
Standard of Acceptance
° Caddy model No. 512 c/w BHC clip
.5 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as
accessories to basic channel members.
.6 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.
.1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm (2") and smaller.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 29
Fastenings and Supports
Page 3 of 3
.2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm (2").
.3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.
.7 Suspended support systems.
.1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm (¼") dia threaded rods and spring clips.
.2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm (¼") dia threaded rod
hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.
.8 For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels.
.9 Provide galvanized after fabrication metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of
support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.
.10 Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no
wall support.
.11 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.
.12 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with
permission of other trade and approval of [Engineer][Consultant].
.13 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in
accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.
.14 Supply and erect special structural work required for the installation of electrical equipment. Provide
anchor bolts and fastenings unless noted otherwise. Mount equipment required to be suspended
above floor level, where details are not shown, on a frame or platform bracketed from the wall or
suspended from the ceiling. Carry supports to either the ceiling or the floor, or both as required, at
locations where, because wall thickness is inadequate, it is not permitted to use such brackets.
.15 Electrical panels, switches or other electrical equipment shall be complete with suitable bases or
mounting brackets. Install angle or channel iron supports to bear the equipment where it is shown in
or on structural tile walls, or walls that are inadequate to bear the equipment.
.16 Provide channel iron or other metal supports where necessary to adequately support lighting fixtures.
Do not use wood. Lighting fixtures shall be supported totally independent of ceiling and supported
from structure above.
.17 Support hangers, in general, from inserts in concrete construction or from building structural steel
beams, using beam clamps. Provide additional angle or channel steel members required between
beams for supporting conduits.
.18 Do not use explosive drive pins in any section of work without obtaining prior written approval.
.19 Provide re-enforced concrete pads under switchboards, generators, and all other floor mounted
electrical equipment. Pads are to formed with chamfered edges to prevent chipping. Pads are to be
sealed and painted to prevent dust from entering and interfering with electrical equipment.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 32
Splitters, Junction and Pull Boxes, Cabinets
Page 1 of 2
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES, CABINETS
26 05 32
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with Section 26 05 01 Electrical
General Requirements.
1.2
Reference
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 76 Splitters.
.2 CSA C22.2 No. 40 Junction and Pull Boxes.
.3 Cabinets to Section 26 27 18 Panel Trim.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Splitters
.1 Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in closed
position.
.2 Main and branch lugs and connection bars to match required size and number of incoming and
outgoing conductors as indicated.
.3 At least three spare terminals on each set of lugs in splitters.
.4 Distribution riser splitters shall be of special construction with hinged access door, copper bus bars
predrilled to accept two hole compression connectors for all incoming and outgoing cables.
2.2
Junction and Pull Boxes
.1 Welded steel hot dipped galvanized construction with screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.
.2 Covers with 25 mm (1") minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull and junction boxes.
.3 Provide lamacoid nameplates for all panel mounted control and indicating devices, and all internal
components such as terminal strips, control transformers, control devices, relays, etc. as per 26 05
01.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Splitter Installation
.1 Install splitters and mount plumb, true and square to the building lines.
.2 Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.
3.2
Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets Installation
.1 Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 32
Splitters, Junction and Pull Boxes, Cabinets
Page 2 of 2
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m (6'-6") above finished floor.
.3 Install terminal block as indicated in Type T cabinets
.4 Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install pull boxes so as not to exceed 30 m}[100'} of
conduit run between pull boxes.
3.3
Identification
.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical
Systems.
.2 Install size 2 identification labels indicating system name, voltage, phase and source of power.
.3 Provide a typed directory in cabinets showing following information: Nature, actual quantities and
room number of device or devices connected to each terminal, as well as signal circuit number where
applicable.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 33
Conduits, Fastenings and Fittings
Page 1 of 4
CONDUITS, FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
26 05 33
1
GENERAL
1.1
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 05 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.2
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 05 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
1.3
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete systems as shown as
specified and as otherwise required.
1.4
Location of Conduit
.1 Drawings do not indicate all conduit runs. Those indicated are in diagrammatic form only.
1.5
References
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 45 Rigid Metal and Epoxy Coated Conduit
.2 CSA C22.2 No. 83 Electrical Metallic Tubing
.3 CSA C22.2 No. 136 Rigid PVC Conduit
.4 CSA C22.2 No. 56 Flexible Metal and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit
.5 CSA C22.2 No 211.2 Rigid PVC Conduit
.6 Conduit accessories, conduits and fittings to CSA C22.2 No. 18.
1.6
Wiring Methods
.1 Install wiring in surface mounted EMT conduit unless otherwise specified. In finished areas, conceal
conduit in walls and ceiling spaces.
.2 Runs of conduit and cables, where shown, are indicated only by general location and routing. Install
conduits and cables so as to provide maximum head room and to interfere as little as possible with
free use of spaces through which they pass.
.3 Use EMT conduit for branch circuit and signal wiring in ceilings, furred spaces, and in hollow walls
and partitions.
.4 Aluminum conduits shall not be used.
.5 Flexible conduit and armoured cable will be accepted in parts of existing building, where furred
spaces above ceilings are too congested to permit conduit to be installed, but only with Consultants
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 33
Conduits, Fastenings and Fittings
Page 2 of 4
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
written permission. Terminate armoured cable, where shown, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
.6 Flexible steel conduit with integral insulated green ground wire is permitted for the final connection to
luminaires mounted in suspended ceilings from the branch wiring junction box above, with flexible
conduit length not to exceed 3 m (10'), and be neatly installed and attached to luminaire support
chain]
.7 Flexible armoured conduit (or BX) with an integral insulated green ground wire may be used where
concealed in walls for wiring to receptacles, and for the final connection to luminaires.
.1 The junction box interfacing the horizontal EMT conduit to the flexible conduit shall be located
within 3 m (10') horizontally from the end device in open areas, and in enclosed rooms, located in
the same room as the devices being served, in reasonable proximity to the walls, in order to keep
the horizontal portion of the run of flexible conduit to less than 3 m (10').
.2 The flexible conduit shall be neatly installed parallel or perpendicular to building lines, and
independently supported from the slab structure above.]
.8 Conduit shall be of sufficient size to permit easy removal of conductors at any time. Conduit sizes,
where shown, are minimum and shall not be reduced.
.9 Arrange conduits, installed in suspended ceilings, to provide minimum interference with removal of
tiles.
.10 Where existing locations of flush mounted electrical devices (switches, receptacles, etc.) correspond
to new devices shown, the existing downdrop conduit and outlet box may be re-used. Provide new
devices, new coverplates, new home-run conduit and complete new wire.
.11 Vertical raceways to be provided with insulated cable support bushings or other approved method of
supporting the weight of the cable, where vertical runs exceed those of Table 21 of the Electrical
Code.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Conduits
.1 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT), [hot dipped] galvanized: with couplings.
.2 Flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.
.3 Conduit shall be of sufficient size to allow easy removal of conductors at any time. Conduit sizes,
where shown, are minimum and shall not be reduced.
2.2
Conduit Fastenings
.1 One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm (2") and smaller. Two hole steel straps for
conduits larger than 50 mm (2").
.2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.
.3 Channel type supports for two or more conduits.
.4 Six mm dia threaded rods to support suspended channels.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
2.3
Section 26 05 33
Conduits, Fastenings and Fittings
Page 3 of 4
Conduit Fittings
.1 Fittings: manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.
.2 Factory "ells" where 90Ε bends are required for 25 mm (1")and larger conduits
.3 Insulated throat steel set screw connectors and couplings for EMT.
.4 Raintight insulated throat steel connectors at all surface panelboards, switchboards and other
electrical equipment in sprinklered areas for all conduit terminations.
2.4
Expansion Fittings
.1 Electrogalvanized steel with internal grounding for EMT suitable for 100mm linear conduit movement.
Standard of Acceptance
° Cooper Crouse Hinds XJG-EMT
.2 Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for [100mm (4")] [200 (8")]
linear expansion.
.3 Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm
(3/4") deflection in all directions.
.4 Concrete type, water tight, corrosion resistant for conduit installations embedded in concrete
.5 Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.
2.5
Fish Cord
.1 Polypropylene
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in
spaces through which they pass.
.2 Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in unfinished areas.
.3 Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) except: in cast concrete, underground or where installed exposed
within 2.0m (6'-6") of floor.
.4 Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment
.5 Use raintight connectors or hubs for terminating conduits at all surface or floor mounted panelboards,
switchboards, and other equipment located in sprinklered areas or where at risk of exposure to
dripping liquids.
.6 Install wiring in conduit unless otherwise specified.
.7 Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.
.8 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19mm (3/4") dia.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 33
Conduits, Fastenings and Fittings
Page 4 of 4
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.9 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.10 Install fish cord in empty conduits.
.11 [Run two 25 mm (1") spare conduits up to ceiling space from each flush panel. Terminate these
conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm) 6" x 6" x 4") junction boxes in ceiling space.
.12 Install junction boxes or cable anchor boxes wherever necessary for proper pulling or anchoring of
cables. Install so as to be accessible after building is completed and set to come within finished lines
of building.
.13 Where EMT is used, run green insulated ground wire in conduit, with minimum one ground conductor
per three ungrounded conductors.
.14 Provide expansion couplings, with bonding jumper and ground clamps where raceways cross building
control joints.
.15 Runs of conduit and cables, where shown, are indicated only by general location and routing. Install
conduits and cables so as to provide maximum head room and to interfere as little as possible with
free use of spaces through which they pass. They shall be installed as close to building structure as
possible such that, where concealed, necessary furring can be kept to a minimum. Arrange conduits,
installed in suspended ceilings, to provide minimum interference with removal of tiles.
3.2
Surface Conduits
.1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2 Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels.
.3 Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.
.4 Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm (3") parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25
mm (1") at crossovers.
3.3
Concealed Conduit
.1 Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.
.2 Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 35
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings
Page 1 of 2
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
26 05 35
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1 Box connectors to Section 26 27 28.
1.2
References
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 18.
.2 CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Outlet and Conduit Boxes - General
.1 Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1
.2 102 mm (4") square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices
.3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
.4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.
.5 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.
2.2
Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes
.1 Hot dipped galvanized steel single and multi-gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum
size 76 mm x 50 mm x 38 mm (3" x 2" x 1½") or as indicated. 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes when
more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.
.2 102 mm (4") square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.
.3 102 mm (4") square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in
finished plaster or tile walls.
2.3
Floor Boxes
.1 Concrete tight hot dipped galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing rings to suit floor
finish with brass or brushed aluminum faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate short or
long ear duplex single or receptacles. Minimum depth: 28 mm (1¼") for receptacles; 73 mm (3") for
communication equipment.
2.4
Conduit Boxes
.1 Cast FS boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of switches and
receptacle, outside building and where weatherproof boxes are required.
2.5
Fittings - General
.1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 35
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings
Page 2 of 2
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.
.3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 32 mm (1½") and pull boxes for larger conduits.
.4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.
.2 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to
come within 6 mm (¼") of opening.
.3 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit and armoured cable connections. Reducing
washers are not allowed.
.4 Provide a suitable outlet box for each light, switch, receptacle or other outlet, approved for the
particular area in which it is to be installed.
.5 Locate outlet boxes, mounted in hung ceiling space, so they do not obstruct or interfere with the
removal of lay-in ceiling tiles.
.6 Offset outlet boxes, shown back to back in partitions, horizontally to minimize noise transmission
between adjacent rooms.
.7 Use gang boxes at locations where more than one device is to be mounted. Use combination boxes
with suitable barriers where outlets for more than one system are shown.
.8 Where 100 mm (4") square boxes are installed in exposed concrete or cinder block in finished areas,
blocks will be cut under masonry division as instructed under this section. Openings shall be cut to
provide a close fit to boxes and covers so that edges of openings are not visible after installation of
plates. Mortar shall not be used to patch up openings that are cut too large or to patch ragged edges.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 47
Incoming Electrical Service
Page 1 of 1
INCOMING ELECTRICAL SERVICE
26 05 47
1
GENERAL
1.1
References
.1 Conform to requirements of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
1.2
General
.1 Obtain approval from the Condominium Corporation and Inspection Authority on complete service
installation before proceeding with work.
1.3
Incoming Electrical Service From the Owners Existing System
.1 The main electrical service to the OCAD Space is supplied at 600 Volts, 3 phase, 4 Wire, 60 Hz from
the existing Main Electrical Switchboard located on Parking Level P1.
.2 Cable has been installed and terminated in a 400 Amp Unfused Disconnect Switch as part of the
Base Building Contractor’s Scope of Work.
1.4
Work Within OCAD’s Space
.1 This Electrical Contractor to arrange for the existing feeder to be de-energized at the Main
Switchboard to allow for the removal of the main disconnect switch and relocation of the existing
feeder to a new location as indicated on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 53
Identification for Electrical Systems
Page 1 of 5
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53
1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1
Scope
.1 Provide identification and warning signs for complete electrical systems as shown, as specified, as intended,
and as otherwise required.
1.2
Shop Drawings
.1 Submit list of nameplates with proposed wording, prior to engraving.
.2 Submit list of labels with proposed wording, prior to printing.
.3 Submit representative samples of nameplates, labels and warning signs.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Equipment Identification
.1 Nameplates for panels and equipment:
.1 3 mm (⅛") thick laminated plastic plates,
.2 engraved lettering,
(a) first line:
11 mm (7/16”) high lettering,
(b) second line: 7mm (1/4”) high lettering,
(c) third line:
5mm (3/16”) high lettering,
.3 black lettering on white background,
.4 with bevelled edges,
.5 mechanically attached with self-tapping stainless steel screws.
.2 Labels for warnings, instructions etc on panels and equipment:
.1 printed on white polyester background,
.2 7 mm (¼") high letters unless specified otherwise,
.3 UV resistant inks,
.4 clear polyester over lamination,
.5 pressure sensitive adhesive.
Standard of Acceptance
° Brady
° Ideal Industries
° Safety Sign
.3 Do not commence manufacture of nameplates and labels until wording has been reviewed by the Consultant.
2.2
Wiring Identification
.1 Colour coded phasing tapes:
.1 7 mil poly vinyl chloride,
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 53
Identification for Electrical Systems
Page 2 of 5
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 pressure sensitive adhesive,
.3 compatible with wire insulation,
.4 permanent colour,
.5 electrically insulating,
.6 UV and moisture resistant,
.7 to CSA C22.2 No. 197
Standard of Acceptance
° 3M Scotch 35
° Electro Tape Specialties 103/103C Series
.2 Wire markers:
.1
[adhesive
.2 self laminating,
.3 white vinyl print area,
.4 permanent thermal transfer printing.]
Commented [NC1]: Select the type of wire marker that
you want (i.e. #1, 2 and 3 for heat shrink or #4, 5, 6 and 7 for
self laminating).
There are also adhesive preprinted cloth markers available
from these two manufacturers and from Ideal Industries
however, they tend to fall off over time.
Standard of Acceptance
° Brady
° Panduit
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Equipment Identification
.1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates, directories and labels.
.2 Nameplates:
.1 secure to top exterior of equipment except where indicated otherwise,
.2 panelboards: indicate name, voltage and source of power,
.3 terminal cabinets: indicate name, system and voltage,
.4 disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage,
.5 transformers: indicate name, capacity, primary and secondary voltages,
.6 pull boxes and junction boxes: indicate system, circuit numbers and voltage,
.7 cabinets for low voltage systems, such as signals and communications: indicate name and system,
.8 equipment not listed above, such as, instruments, fire alarm, clock and program equipment and control
panels: identify in a similar manner showing name and number of the equipment, voltage and load
information.
.9 typical identification standards:
(a) Lighting, Receptacle and Power Panels: each identified with an engraved lamicoid nameplate
secured to top interior trim as follows:
LP-4NW-1EA
Issued for Tender
11 mm (7/16") high lettering
120/208 volts
7 mm (1/4") high lettering
Fed from PP-SBSW-EAA
5 mm (3/16") high lettering
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 05 53
Identification for Electrical Systems
Page 3 of 5
.3 Directories:
.1 Supply each panelboard with a directory card holder welded to inside of door, complete with a neatly
typewritten list showing information as follows:
Panelboard Name LP-4NW-1EA
Panel Voltage
120/208 Volts
Circuit Number
Description
1
Lighting Room #34
2
Receptacles Room #34
3
Ice Machine Room #17
.2 Cabinets for low voltage systems, such as signals and communications: as for panelboards with a directory
showing circuit numbers and room locations plus a blank column for "Remarks".
.3 Cover directory list with a 0.8mm (1/32") minimum thick clear plastic sheet to protect it.
.4 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes
.1 Identify feeder pull boxes and junction boxes:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
3.2
lettering stamped on brass or aluminum tags,
showing the name of the feeder or system,
voltage involved,
data for both termination points whether equipment or panel,
secure tag under box lid screws using steel wire.
Service Rough-in Identification
.1 Apply a small dab of paint to inside of each outlet box, pull box and panel as it is installed, using colour code
as follows:
Red
Fire Alarm System and Emergency Voice
Communication System
Dark Green
Telephone and Data Systems
Pink
Computer Systems
Light Green
TV Systems
.2 Junction boxes in furred ceilings to have colour identification on both inside and outside.
.3 As an alternative to applying paint dabs, prepainted conduit/EMT may be used where applicable.
.4 Colour coding is not required for lighting and power circuits.
3.3
Wiring Identification
.1 Identify feeders and branch circuit wiring with wire markers;
.1 at each end of run,
Issued for Tender
Section 26 05 53
Identification for Electrical Systems
Page 4 of 5
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 in each junction box,
.3 wherever they are introduced into ducts or equipment.
.2 Identify incoming utility service lines by Red - Phase "A", Black - Phase "B", Blue - Phase "C", with colour
coded phasing tape.
.3 Band buswork in each;
.1 power panel,
.2 lighting and receptacle panel,
with colour coded phasing tape as follows:
Red
Phase A
Black
Phase B
Blue
Phase C
White
Neutral
Green
Ground
.4 Band feeder and sub-feeder bus and conductors as above.
.5 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.6 Connections in equipment to be Phase A, B, C from left to right when viewing from front or accessible
direction.
.7 For control conductors for motors and equipment, schedule and chart marker numbers with corresponding
machine numbers and locations and include with Record Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Data.
.8 Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system. Schedule and chart, marker
numbers and wire colours with corresponding equipment and include with Record Drawings and Operation
and Maintenance Data.
3.4
Conduit and Cable Identification
.1 Label;
.1 feeder conduits/EMT,
.2 feeder cables,
.3 communications cables.
.2 Locate labels as follows;
.1 at every end of every conduit, duct or cable run, adjacent to item of equipment serviced,
.2 on each exposed conduit, duct or cable passing through a wall, partition or floor (one on each side of such
wall, partition or floor),
.3 at intervals of not more than 15 m (50') along every exposed conduit, EMT, duct or cable run exceeding 23
m (75') in length,
.4 at every access point on concealed conduit, EMT, duct or cable runs,
.5 visible from 1.5 m (5') above adjacent floor or platform.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
3.1
Section 26 05 53
Identification for Electrical Systems
Page 5 of 5
Fire Stopping Identification
.1 Provide a warning card adjacent to each opening exceeding 25mm (1”) in diameter, indicating the following;
.1 a warning that the opening is protected by a fire stopping material,
.2 the fire stop system used, ULC or cUL,
.3 F rating or FT rating,
.4 specific fire stop product(s) used,
.5 name and telephone number of the contact person should any changes to the fire stopping be required.
.2 Provide warning labels for each fire stopped penetration as follows;
.1 permanently attached to walls, floors, underside of slabs, adjacent to the penetration,
.2 on each side of the penetration,
.3 vinyl panel, white and red background with black lettering,
.4 self adhesive with permanent pressure sensitive adhesive,
.5 stating:
WARNING
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM - DO NOT DISTURB
NOTIFY BUILDING MANAGEMENT OF ANY DAMAGE
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 07 16
Wiring to Motorized Doors
Page 1 of 1
WIRING TO MOTORIZED DOORS
26 07 16
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1 Door control panel will be provided with door. Interconnecting power and control wiring and on-off
switch will be provided by Division 26.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Disconnect
.1 On-off switch shall be rated 15A, 120 volt.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Provide conduit, wiring and on-off switch for each motorized door. Mount door control panel. Install
interconnecting power and control wiring to motor, controller, sensors and limit switches.
.2 On-off switch shall be mounted in ceiling space above door.
.3 Wire to fire alarm system to de-energize doors when fire alarm system is activated.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 07 17
Wiring to Dock (Truck) Levelers
Page 1 of 1
WIRING TO DOCK (TRUCK) LEVELERS
26 07 17
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1 Push button will be provided by supplier of truck leveler.
2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Provide a fused disconnect switch for each dock leveler. Provide wiring from disconnect switch to a
starter. Install and wire push-button and wire from starter to an outlet box in pit, and from outlet box to
motor terminals.
.2 Provide a weatherproof combination starter-disconnect switch, complete with suitable control
transformer and fuse. Provide wiring from combination unit to push-button. Install and wire
combination unit and wire from combination unit to an outlet box in pit and from outlet box to motor
terminals.
.3 Interconnect limit switches with push-button where limit switches are provided in overhead doors.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 08 19
Project Close-Out Electrical
Page 1 of 3
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT ELECTRICAL
26 08 19
1
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
.1 Provide documentation deliverables at completion of the Work.
1.2
Occupancy Permit
.1 Submit the reviewed final Life Safety and Fire Protection Commissioning report two weeks prior to
application for occupancy permit.
1.3
Substantial Performance
.1 Complete the Substantial Performance Checklist and submit with required documentation when
applying for Substantial Performance of the Work.
.2 Where the work is sub-divided into separate scopes of Work, each requiring a separate Substantial
Performance application, provide a separate checklist for each application.
.3 Prepare and submit to the Consultant a comprehensive deficiency list of items to be completed or
corrected, as part of the application for a review by the Consultant to establish Substantial
Performance of the Work, or for each designated portion of the Work in the case of phased
Substantial Performance.
.1 Failure to include an item on the list does not alter the Contractor’s responsibility to complete the
Work.
.4 Within five working days of the Consultant’s review report which indicates that Substantial
Performance of the Work has been achieved, provide a detailed schedule for completion and/or
correction of the Work of all items described in the Contractors’ and the Consultants’ deficiency list.
1.4
Total Performance
.1 Submit the following documentation with the application for Total Performance. Application for Total
Performance cannot be submitted any earlier than the date of Alternate Season testing.
.1 Where documentation has already been submitted to the Owner, provide a copy of the
transmittal.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 08 19
Project Close-Out Electrical
Page 2 of 3
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE APPLICATION CHECKLIST
Project Name:
Contract:
Contract Scope:
Application Date:
Signed:
The following requirements are completed and included in this application. Where documentation has been
issued directly to the Owner, a copy of the transmittal is enclosed.
G
Contractor has compiled and submitted a detailed deficiency list, identifying work still to be completed,
incomplete, or requires correction.
G
Equipment start-up reports (Interim).
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Building department inspection reports.
ESA field inspection reports.
Fire alarm verification certificate.
Independent testing company, coordination study and testing reports submitted.
Equipment and wiring identification completed
Clean-up completed.
Spare parts and replacement parts turned over to Owner; transmittal attached.
Warranty certificates
Operating and Maintenance Manuals, draft, submitted.
As-built drawings submitted
Training completed and attendance logs submitted.
Commissioning reports submitted and reviewed by Consultant
Consultant Review
Status:
G Reviewed
Signed:
Date:
Issued for Tender
G Incomplete or deficient - resubmit
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 08 19
Project Close-Out Electrical
Page 3 of 3
TOTAL PERFORMANCE APPLICATION CHECKLIST
Project Name:
Contract:
Contract Scope:
Application Date:
Signed:
The following requirements are completed and included in this application. Where documentation has been
issued directly to the Owner, a copy of the transmittal is enclosed.
G
All known deficiencies have been corrected, including latent deficiencies reported by the Owner.
G
G
Final commissioning reports submitted and accepted by Owner.
Operating and Maintenance manuals - finalized and submitted (if final version was issued at time of
Substantial Performance indicated here:
G.
As-built drawings final version submitted (if final version was issued at time of Substantial Performance
G
indicate here:
G
Date of delivery:
Consultant Review
Status:
G Reviewed
G Incomplete or deficient - resubmit
Signed:
Date:
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 1 of 14
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
26 09 43
1
GENERAL
1.1
Section Includes
.1 Digital-network lighting control system and associated components:
.1 Power panels.
.2 LED drivers.
.3 Lighting control modules (Lutron Energi Savr Node).
.4 Lighting management hubs.
.5 Lighting management system software.
.6 Control stations.
1.2
Related Requirements
.1 Section 26 51 13 - Luminaires, Ballasts, and Drivers.
1.3
Administrative Requirements
.1 Coordination:
.1 Coordinate the work to provide luminaires and lamps compatible with the lighting controls to be
installed.
.2 Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior
to proceeding with work.
.2 Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting with lighting control system manufacturer prior to
commencing work as part of manufacturer's standard startup services. Manufacturer to review with
installer:
.1 Low voltage wiring requirements.
.2 Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring.
.3 Wire labeling.
.4 Lighting management hub locations and installation.
.5 Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in Part 2
under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS",
sensor locations to be reviewed in accordance with layout provided by Lighting Control
Manufacturer. Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct Contractor regarding sensor relocation
should conditions require a deviation from locations indicated.
.6 Control locations.
.7 Computer jack locations.
.8 Load circuit wiring.
.9 Network wiring requirements.
.10 Connections to other equipment.
.11 Installer responsibilities.
.12 Power panel locations.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 2 of 14
1.4
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Submittals
.1 Shop Drawings:
.1 Provide schematic system riser diagram indicating component interconnections. Include
requirements for interface with other systems.
.2 Provide detailed sequence of operations describing system functions.
.2 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
.3 Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control system
components.
.4 Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on lighting control system operation,
equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance procedures
and intervals.
.5 Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's Warranty or Enhanced Warranty as specified in Part 1
under "WARRANTY". Submit documentation of final execution completed in Owner's name and
registered with manufacturer.
.6 Software: One copy of software provided under this section.
1.5
Quality Assurance
.1 Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
.2 Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
.3 Manufacturer Qualifications:
.1 Company with not less than ten years of experience manufacturing lighting control systems of
similar complexity to specified system.
.2 Registered to ISO 9001, including in-house engineering for product design activities.
.3 Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in
accordance with warranty.
.4 Title 24 Acceptance Testing Technician Qualifications: Certified by a California approved Acceptance
Test Technician Certification Provider as an Acceptance Test Technician (ATT) in accordance with
CAL TITLE 24 P6.
.5 Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized service representative.
1.6
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
.1 Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
1.7
Field Conditions
.1 Maintain field conditions within manufacturers required service conditions during and after installation.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 3 of 14
.1 System Requirements - Lutron, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
(a) Ambient Temperature:
• Lighting Control System Components, Except Those Listed Below: Between 32 and 104
degrees F (0 and 40 degrees C).
• Lighting Management System Computer: Between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 35
degrees C).
• Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts: Between 50 and 140 degrees F (10 and 60
degrees C).
(b) Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent, non-condensing.
1.8
Warranty
.1 See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
.2 Manufacturer's Standard Warranty, With Manufacturer Start-Up; Lutron Standard 2-Year Warranty;
Lutron LSC-B2:
.1 Manufacturer Lighting Control System Components, Except Lighting Management System
Computer, Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules:
(a) First Two Years:
• 100 percent replacement parts coverage, 100 percent manufacturer labor coverage to
troubleshoot and diagnose a lighting issue.
• First-available on-site or remote response time.
• Remote diagnostics for applicable systems.
(b) Telephone Technical Support: Available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, excluding
manufacturer holidays.
.3 Lighting Management System Computer: One year 100 percent parts coverage, one year 100
percent manufacturer labor coverage.
.4 Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules: Five years 100 percent parts coverage, no manufacturer labor
coverage.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Manufacturers
.1 Basis of Design Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com.
.2 Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single
supplier.
2.2
Digital-Network Lighting Control System – General Requirements
.1 Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as suitable for
the purpose indicated.
.2 Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.
.3 Shade Control Requirements:
Issued for Tender
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 4 of 14
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Capable of operating shades and recalling shade presets via keypad, contact closure input,
infrared receiver, lighting management system software, or other lighting control system interface.
.2 Capable of operating any individual, group, or subgroup of shade electronic drive units within
system without requiring separate group controllers.
.3 Capable of assigning and reassigning individual, groups, and subgroups of shades to any control
within system without requiring additional wiring or hardware changes.
.4 Capable of controlling shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.125 inch (3.17 mm)
throughout entire travel.
.5 Provide 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade grouping
and sub grouping and system configuration.
.6 Capable of synchronizing multiple shade electronic drive units of the same size to start, stop and
move in unison.
.7 Capable of stopping shades within accuracy of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) at any point between open
and close limits.
.8 Capable of storing up to 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and any other
position.
.9 Capable of controlling lights and shades from single wall control button.
.4 Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at any
temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F (40
degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
.5 Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic discharges
without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
.6 Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment:
.1 Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 36 degrees F (20 degrees C) below the
capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully loaded conditions at
maximum rated temperature.
.2 Inrush Tolerance:
(a) Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs) and isolated
gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at least two times the rated
operating current of the dimmer/relay.
(b) Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating current without
impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay.
.3 Surge Tolerance:
(a) Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps according to IEEE
C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to performance.
(b) Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 200
amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance.
.4 Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within 3 seconds
lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full off) as prior to power
interruption.
.5 Dimming Requirements:
(a) Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for incoming line
voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or minus 2 percent change in RMS
voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or minus 2 Hz change in frequency per second),
dynamic harmonics, and line noise.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
•
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 5 of 14
Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include external power
conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.
(b) Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps lights up to the
appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
(c) Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
(d) Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with visible steps are
not acceptable.
(e) Load Types:
• Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming curve for the
specific light source to be controlled.
• Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned per circuit.
(f) Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit basis.
.6 Line Voltage Dimmers:
(a) Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformers:
• Provide circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC waveform to input of
magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472.
• Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or SCRs) to include DC
current protection in the event of a single device failure.
(b) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate transformers via reverse
phase control. Alternately, forward phase control dimming may be used if dimming equipment
manufacturer has recommended specific ELV transformers being provided.
(c) Dimmers for Neon and Cold Cathode Transformers:
• Magnetic Transformers: Listed for use with normal (low) power factor magnetic
transformers.
• Electronic Transformers: Must be supported by the ballast equipment manufacturer for
control of specific ballasts being provided.
.7 Low Voltage Dimming Modules:
(a) Coordination Between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay: Capable of
being electronically linked to a single zone.
(b) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following light sources:
• 0-10V analog voltage signal.
° Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
° Sink current according to IEC 60929.
° Source current.
• 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.
• DSI digital communication.
• DALI broadcast communication per IEC 60929:
° Logarithmic intensity values complying with IEC 60929.
° Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity control.
• PWM per IEC 60929.
.8 Switching Requirements:
(a) Rated Life of Relays: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting loads.
(b) Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied
to and removed from load circuits.
(c) Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
.7 Device Finishes:
.1 Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable.
.2 Color Variation in Same Product Family: Maximum delta E of 1, CIE L*a*b color units.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 6 of 14
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.3 Visible Parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light sources as
defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
2.3
Lighting Control Modules (Lutron Energi Savr Node)
.1 Provide lighting control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
.2 General Requirements:
.1 Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment.
.2 Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel.
.3 Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
.4 Mounting: Surface.
.5 Connection without interface to wired:
(a) Occupancy sensors.
(b) Daylight sensors.
(c) IR receivers for personal control.
.6 Connects to lighting management hub via RS485.
.7 LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and IR
receivers.
.8 Contact Closure Input:
(a) Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or sold-state output without
interface to:
• Activate scenes.
° Scene activation from momentary or maintained closure.
• Enable or disable after hours.
° Automatic sweep to user-specified level after user-specified time has elapsed.
° System will provide occupants a visual warning prior to sweeping lights to userspecified level.
° Occupant can reset timeout by interacting with the lighting system.
• Activate or deactivate demand response (load shed).
° Load shed event will reduce lighting load by user-specified amount.
.9 Supplies power for control link for keypads and control interfaces.
.10 Distributes sensor data among multiple lighting control modules.
.11 Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls.
.12 Switching:
(a) Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting loads.
(b) Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied
to and removed from load circuits.
(c) Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
(d) Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
(e) Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect the load from
line supply.
.3 0-10V Lighting Control Modules:
.1 Product(s):
(a) Lutron 0-10V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T16-S: 16 A continuous-use per channel.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 7 of 14
(b) Lutron 0-10V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T20-S: 20 A (16 A ballast) continuous-use
per channel.
.2 Coordination Between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay: Capable of being
electronically linked to single zone.
.3 Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
(a) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
• Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
• Sink current per IEC 60929.
(b) 10V-0V analog voltage signal.
• Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
• Sink current per IEC 60929.
.4 Switching:
(a) Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all lighting loads.
(b) Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is applied
to and removed from load circuits.
(c) Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
(d) Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
(e) Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect the load from
line supply.
2.4
Lighting Management Hubs
.1 Product: Lutron Quantum Light Management Hub.
.2 Provided in a pre-assembled NEMA listed enclosure with terminal blocks listed for field wiring.
.3 Connects to controls and power panels via RS485.
.4 Enables light management software to control and monitor compatible dimming ballasts and ballast
modules, power panels, power modules, and window treatments.
.1 Utilizes Ethernet connectivity to light management computer utilizing one of the following
methods:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Dedicated network.
Dedicated VLAN.
Shared network with Building Management System (BMS).
Corporate network where managed switches are configured to allow multicasting and use of
IGMP.
.5 Integrates control station devices, power panels, shades, preset lighting controls, and external inputs
into a single customizable lighting control system with:
.1 Multiple Failsafe Mechanisms:
(a) Power failure detection via emergency lighting interface.
(b) Protection: Lights go to full on if ballast wires are shorted.
(c) Distributed architecture provides fault containment. Single hub failure or loss of power does
not compromise lights and shades connected to other lighting management hubs.
.2 Manual overrides.
.3 Automatic control.
.4 Central computer control and monitoring.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 8 of 14
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.6 Furnished with astronomical time clock.
.7 Maintains a backup of the programming in a non-volatile memory capable of lasting more than ten
years without power.
2.5
Lighting Management System Computers
.1 LAPTOP PRVIDED BY OWNER.
.1 Computer:
(a) Minimum Hardware Requirements:
• Processor: Single Intel® Xeon® processor with minimum speed of 2.0 GHz; Dual Core
Intel® processor with minimum speed of 1.86 GHz
• 2 GB Ram.
• 80 GB hard drive (30 GB for application).
• Two 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interfaces - one for communication with lighting
management hubs and one for communication with corporate intranet to allow access
from system PCs and/or energy saving display terminals. Only one Ethernet network
interface is required if all lighting management hubs and client PCs are on the same
network.
• 17 inch (43 cm) monitor with 1024 x 768 resolution.
• 48X CD/DVD-ROM drive.
• 4 USB 2.0 ports.
(b) Minimum Software Requirements:
• Licensed installation of US English 32-bit or 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® Server 2008
with Service Pack 1.
(c) Minimum Hardware Requirements:
• Processor: Single Intel® Xeon® processor with minimum speed of 2.0 GHz.
• 1 GB RAM.
• 80 GB hard drive (30 GB for application).
• One 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface for communication with lighting
management hubs.
• 17 inch (43 cm) monitor with 1024 x 768 resolution.
• 48X CD/DVD-ROM drive.
• 4 USB 2.0 ports.
(d) Minimum Software Requirements:
• Licensed installation of US English 32-bit or 64-bit Microsoft® Windows® Server 2008
with Service Pack 1.
2.6
Lighting Management System Software
.1 Provide system software license and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted
by a single manufacturer.
.2 Configuration Setup Software:
.1 Product: Lutron Q-Design.
.2 Suitable to make system programming and configuration changes.
.3 Windows-based, capable of running on either central server or a remote client over TCP/IP
connection.
.4 Allows manufacturer to:
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 9 of 14
(a) Capture system design:
• Geographical layout.
• Load schedule zoning.
• Shade grouping.
• Equipment schedule.
• Equipment assignment to lighting management hubs.
• Daylighting design.
(b) Define the configuration for the following in each area:
• Lighting scenes.
• Shade group presets.
• Control station devices.
• Interface and integration equipment.
• Occupancy/after hours.
• Partitioning.
• Daylighting.
• Emergency lighting.
• Night lights.
(c) Startup:
• Addressing.
• Daylighting.
• Provide customized conditional programming.
.3 Control and Monitor Software:
.1 Products:
(a) Lutron Quantum Vue (web-based application).
(b) Lutron Q-Admin (desktop application).
.2 Accessibility and Platform Support:
(a) Lutron Quantum Vue Web-Based Application:
• Web-based; runs on most HTML5 compatible browsers (including Internet Explorer,
Chrome, and Safari).
• Supports multiple platforms and devices; runs from a tablet, desktop, laptop, or
smartphone; optimized for displays of 1024 by 768 pixels or higher.
• User interface supports multi-touch gestures such as pinch to zoom, drag to pan, etc.
• Utilizes HTTPS (industry-standard certificate-based encryption and authentication for
security).
(b) Lutron Q-Admin Desktop Application:
• Client installation for Windows-based operating systems only.
.3 System Navigation and Status Reporting:
(a) Lutron Quantum Vue Web-Based Application: Performed using graphical floor plan view or
a generic system layout.
• Graphical Floor Plan View: Utilizes customized CAD based drawing of the building. Pan
and zoom feature allows for easy navigation; dynamically adjusts the details presented
based on zoom level.
• Area, scene, and zone names can be changed in real time.
(b) Lutron Q-Admin Desktop Application: Performed using basic system tree view.
.4 Control of Lights:
(a) Area lights can be monitored for on/off status.
(b) All lights in an area can be turned on/off or sent to a specific level.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 10 of 14
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
(c) For areas that have been zoned, these areas may be sent to a predefined lighting scene, and
individual zones may be controlled.
(d) Area lighting scenes can be renamed and modified in real-time, changing the levels that
zones go to when a scene is activated.
(e) High and low end of area lighting can be tuned/trimmed.
(f) Control and monitor area partition status.
.5 Occupancy:
(a) Area occupancy can be monitored.
(b) Area occupancy can be disabled to override occupancy control or in case of occupancy
sensor problems.
(c) Area occupancy settings including level that lights turn on to when area is occupied, and level
that lights turn off to when area is unoccupied can be changed in real-time.
(d) Monitor energy savings due to occupancy down to an individual area.
.6 Scheduling: Schedule time of day and astronomic time clock events to automate functions.
(a) Adjust or disable a single occurrence of a repeating scheduled event.
(b) Easily monitor and adjust scheduled events using a weekly calendar view.
.7 Diagnostics: Allows the building manager to check on the status of all equipment in the lighting
control system. Devices to be listed with a reporting status of OK, missing, or unknown.
.8 Alerts and Alarms: Monitors the system for designated events/triggers and automatically
generates alerts according to configured response criteria.
(a) Capable of monitoring for the following events/triggers:
• A failed piece of equipment (e.g. ballast, control, sensor, etc.); alert cleared when
equipment is replaced.
• A lamp outage (for compatible EcoSystem digital electronic dimming ballasts only); alert
cleared when lamp is replaced.
• Low battery conditions in battery-operated sensors and controls; alert cleared when
battery is replaced.
• Luminaires with lamp operating hours in excess of designated time.
• A load shed event; alert generated for beginning and end of trigger.
• Energy usage higher than designated threshold target.
• Potential light level condition discrepancies (daylight sensors not agreeing with expected
lighting status).
(b) View alerts on a customized graphical floor plan.
(c) Capable of generating alerts through visible changes in software or through email messages.
(d) Capable of customizing the frequency of alerts and providing notifications immediately or
through daily, weekly, or monthly summaries.
(e) Capable of sending different alerts to different system users.
(f) Capable of generating historical reports of all alert activity within the system.
.9 Administration:
(a) Users: Allows new user accounts to be created and existing user accounts to be edited.
• Supports Active Directory (LDAP) tying user accounts to network accounts.
(b) Area and feature access can be restricted based on login credentials with three levels of
access rights (Admin, Programmer, Controller) and customized access levels available.
(c) Publish Graphical Floor Plan: Allows admin user to publish new graphical floor plan files,
allowing users to monitor the status of lights, occupancy of areas, and daylighting status.
(d) Back-Up Project Database: Allows admin user to back up the project database that holds all
the configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, areas scenes,
daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and time clock.
(e) Publish Project Database: Allows admin user to send a new project database to the server
and download the new configuration to the system. The project database holds all the
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 11 of 14
configuration information for the system, including keypad programming, area scenes,
daylighting, occupancy programming, emergency levels, night lights, and time clock.
.10 Favorite Buttons: Provide global scene control or modes of operation across the entire system.
.11 Provides control/monitoring of partition status to automatically reconfigure how the space
operates based on the partition's open/closed status.
.4 Web Services Integration License:
.1 Provide ability to communicate by means of XML web services
.2 Web services integrator can monitor:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Area instantaneous power usage.
Area instantaneous power savings.
Area energy savings.
Area energy usage.
Area maximum power usage.
.3 Initiate load shed event using OpenADR protocol in an auto-Demand-Response event without
additional interfaces or gateways.
.4 Supports both push and pull for integration with third party systems and energy dashboards.
.5 Quantum Mobile Control and Programming Software License:
.1 Allows mobile control and programming of Quantum system via an Apple iPad (by contractor,
quantity of 2).
.2 Provides users the ability to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Control and monitor area lighting scenes, zones, and shade presets.
Easily identify zones and shade groups.
Edit area lighting scenes, shade presets, scene fade rates, and scene delay rates.
Restrict user access by area.
Restrict users from ability to make changes.
Historical logging of who made changes available in Q-Admin control and monitor software.
.3 Connects to Quantum system via Wi-Fi.
.4 Can connect directly to processor or through computer (server) in the system.
2.7
.1
Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
.2 Wired Control Stations:
.1 General Requirements:
(a) Class 2 (low voltage).
(b) UL listed.
(c) Control stations can be replaced without reprogramming.
.2 Product(s):
(a) Multi-Scene Wired Control:
• Product(s):
° Lutron seeTouch QS.
• Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system.
• Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication.
• Functionality:
° Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 12 of 14
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated if the button press
was properly processed or LEDs to turn off if the button press was not processed.
° Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
° Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.
Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
Engrave wall stations with button, zone, and scene descriptions
Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process that chemically
bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by scratching and cleaning.
Software Configuration:
° Customizable control station device button functionality:
° Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined action.
° Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on press and defined action
on release.
° Buttons can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable such as
time of day or partition status.
Control station device LEDs to support logic that defines when it is illuminated:
° Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels).
° Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
° Pathway (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
° Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).
Contact Closure Interface: Accepts both momentary and maintained contact closures.
°
•
•
•
•
•
•
(b) Four-Button Preset Wallstation:
• Product: Lutron EcoSystem CC-4BRL Four-Button Control.
• Recall four scenes plus all on or all off for one group of fixtures.
• Master raise/lower control for entire group of fixtures.
• Integral IR receiver for personal control.
• Immediate local LED response upon button activation to indicate that a system command
has been requested.
2.8
Source Quality Control
.1 See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
.2 Factory Testing; Lutron Standard Factory Testing:
.1 Perform full-function factory testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling is not
acceptable.
.2 Perform full-function factory testing on 100 percent of all ballasts and LED drivers.
.3 Perform factory audit burn-in of all dimming assemblies and panels at 104 degrees F (40 degrees
C) at full load for two hours.
.4 Perform factory burn-in of 100 percent of all ballasts at 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1 Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
.2 Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
.3 Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 13 of 14
.4 Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2
Installation
.1 Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable,
NECA 130.
.2 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3 Provide dedicated network between lighting management system computer and lighting management
hubs.
.4 Define each dimmer/relay load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.
.5 LED Light Engine/Array Lead Length: Do not exceed 100 feet (31 m).
.6 Coordinate scheduling of visit with Lighting Control Manufacturer. Manufacturer recommends that this
visit be scheduled early in construction phase, after system purchase but prior to system installation.
3.3
Field Quality Control
.1 See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
.2 Manufacturer's Startup Services; Lutron Standard Startup Services:
.1 Manufacturer's authorized Service Representative to conduct minimum of two site visits to ensure
proper system installation and operation.
.2 Conduct Pre-Installation visit to review requirements with installer as specified in Part 1 under
"Administrative Requirements".
.3 Conduct second site visit upon completion of lighting control system to perform system startup
and verify proper operation:
(a) Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in Part 2
under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS", authorized Service Representative to verify sensor locations, in
accordance with layout provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer; Lighting Control
Manufacturer may direct Contractor regarding sensor relocation should conditions require a
deviation from locations indicated.
(b) Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits.
(c) Verify connection and location of controls.
(d) Energize lighting management hubs and download system data program.
(e) Address devices.
(f) Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.
(g) Download system panel data to dimming/switching panels.
(h) Check dimming panel load types and currents and supervise removal of by-pass jumpers.
(i) Verify system operation control by control.
(j) Verify proper operation of manufacturer's interfacing equipment.
(k) Verify proper operation of manufacturer's supplied PC and installed programs.
(l) Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and occupancy
sensors.
(m) Provide initial rough calibration of sensors; fine-tuning of sensors is responsibility of
Contractor unless provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer as part of Sensor Layout and
Tuning service where specified in Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS".
(n) Train Owner's representative on system capabilities, operation, and maintenance, as
specified in Part 3 under "Closeout Activities".
Issued for Tender
Section 26 09 43
Network Lighting Controls
Page 14 of 14
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
(o) Obtain sign-off on system functions.
(p) After Hours Startup; Lutron LSC-AH-SU: Include <<as part of the base bid; as an alternate to
the base bid; or __________>> additional costs to perform manufacturer's startup procedures
outside normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7am to 5pm).
.3 Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with
contract documents.
3.4
Adjusting
.1 On-Site Scene and Level Tuning; Lutron LSC-AF-VISIT: Include as part of the base bid additional
costs for Lighting Control Manufacturer to visit site to conduct meeting with Engineer; Owner's
representative to make required lighting adjustments to the system for conformance with original
design intent.
3.5
Cleaning
.1 Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original
factory finish.
3.6
Commissioning
.1 See Section 01 91 13 for commissioning requirements.
3.7
Closeout Activities
.1 See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
.2 See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
3.8
Protection
.1 Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus and Associates
HHA #2141328
Section 26 22 13
Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary
Page 1 of 4
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY
26 22 13
1
GENERAL
1.1
General Requirements
.1 General Conditions as applicable.
.2 Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.2
Applicable Codes and Standards
.1 Latest edition of:
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 47 Air-Cooled Transformers (dry type),
.2 CSA C9 Dry-Type Transformers,
.3 CAN/CSA C802.2 Minimum Efficiency Values for Dry-Type Transformers.
1.3
Scope
.1 Provide labour, materials, and equipment for the installation, testing and putting into proper operation
complete systems as shown as specified and as otherwise required.
1.4
Submittals
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for each type and rating of transformer.
.2 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into the Operating and Maintenance
Manual.
1.5
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.1 Provide operating and maintenance instructions.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1 Constructed in accordance with the referenced standards except where indicated otherwise.
.2 Self-contained, free standing units suitable for floor mounting.
.3 Up to and including 75 kVA to also be suitable for wall mounting.
.4 Supply wall mounting brackets for transformers shown to be wall mounted.
.5 Vacuum impregnated epoxy or polyester resin construction.
.6 Type ANN.
.7 Efficiency to meet or exceed values of Table B.1 of CSA C802.2.
.8 Windings: copper.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 22 13
Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary
Page 2 of 4
OCAD Professional Gllery
H.H. Angus and Associates
HHA #2141328
.9 Buswork and all current carrying parts, other than the windings: copper.
.10 Primary and secondary voltages and kVA ratings as indicated.
.11 Delta connected primary and 120/208 volt Wye.
.12 Secondary neutral terminals, suitable for the connection of:
.1 #6 AWG copper grounding conductor and
.2 bonding conductor.
.13 Primary-to-secondary phase shift of -30 degrees, except where indicated otherwise.
.14 Taps: four (4) @ 2.5% full capacity primary taps, two above and two below nominal voltage.
.15 Provisions for incoming and outgoing conductor entry of sizes shown.
.16 Front accessible primary and secondary conductor entry and connections, unless indicated
otherwise.
.17 System bonding lugs, connected to the enclosure for:
.1 primary feeder bonding conductor,
.2 secondary feeder bonding conductor and
.3
bonding conductor to the secondary neutral terminal.
.18 System bonding lugs sized to accommodate cables sizes in accordance with Table 16 of the
Electrical Code.
.19 Core bonded to the enclosure, either inherently by design or by a bonding strap.
.20 Labelled to warn of an arc flash potential in accordance with the Electrical Code.
Standard of Acceptance
° Atlas Transformer Inc.
° Delta Transformers Inc.
° Hammond Manufacturing Co. Ltd.
2.2
Ratings
.1 KVA capacity based on Class 220 degree C insulation, with 150 degree C rise.
.2
Impedance:
.1 per Table 7 of CSA C9, except where indicated otherwise,
.3 Full load voltage regulation at 80% power factor:
.1 ≤ 300 kVA: ≤3%,
.4 Noise levels:
.1 Per Table 8 of CSA C9 for ratings ≤300 kVA, unless noted otherwise.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus and Associates
HHA #2141328
2.3
Section 26 22 13
Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary
Page 3 of 4
Support and Isolation
.1 Support core and coil assemblies on in-shear vibration isolation mounting pads. Pads to:
.1 provide a uniform deflection under weight and weight distribution of supported equipment,
.2 consist of 2 layers of 9mm (3/8") ribbed or waffle pattern neoprene pads of not more than 50
durometer,
.3 include a galvanized steel plate separating and bonded to the layers of elastomer,
.4 [equal to Kinetics Noise Control Model "NGD”,with a static deflection ≥ 4.5mm,
.5 include a thru bolt with extra thick extra large washers, tightened for shipping purposes.
Enclosure and Finish
.2 Enclosure: Type 2 suitable for use in sprinklered areas; include drip shield and angled sprinkler
resistant louvers at ventilation openings, except where indicated otherwise.
.3 Finish:
.1 rust-inhibiting metal treatment process,
.2 powder coat finish to UL50 3R,
(a) colour: ANSI #61 grey.
2.4
Equipment Identification
.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical
Systems.
.2 Label size: 7.
.3 Submit nameplate wording.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Mount transformers:
.1 ≤ 75 kVA suspended, on wall brackets or on floor as indicated,
.2 > 75 kVA on floor.
.2 Provide, under this division, a 100mm (4") reinforced concrete pad with beveled edges for each floor
mounted transformer. Seal with paint or concrete sealer to prevent concrete dust from entering
equipment.Install transformers in level upright position.
.3 Provide suitable mounting hardware.
.4 Where specified, install the external vibration isolation mounts for both floor mounted (between
enclosure and pad) and bracket (wall) mounted transformers (between enclosure and brackets)
.5 Where specified, install the external spring isolation hangers in the support rods of suspended
transformers.
.6 Position transformers to provide:
.1 adequate clearance for ventilation,
Issued for Tender
Section 26 22 13
Dry Type Transformers up to 600 V Primary
Page 4 of 4
OCAD Professional Gllery
H.H. Angus and Associates
HHA #2141328
.2 adequate access to connections,
.3 adequate access to taps.
.7 Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installed and just before putting into service.
.8 Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible.
.9 Make final primary and secondary connections using flexible steel conduits.
.10 Make primary and secondary connections in accordance with wiring diagram.
.11 Provide a #6 AWG green insulated copper ground conductor in rigid PVC conduit from transformer
secondary neutral to the building grounding system.
.12 Connect the bonding conductors from the primary and secondary feeders to the transformer bonding
lugs.
.13 Provide a bonding conductor, sized not less than the secondary feeder bonding conductor, from the
transformer bonding lugs to the transformer secondary neutral terminal.
.14 Provide nameplates in accordance with Article "Equipment Identification”.
.15 Energize transformers after installation is complete.
.16 Adjust transformer taps as required to achieve suitable secondary voltage at loads, with the
transformer operating under its typical load.
.17 Touch up small areas marred in transit or during installation with touch up paint.
.18 Repaint entire enclosure using electrostatic process where significant damage to factory finish has
occurred.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 15
Power Panels
Page 1 of 4
POWER PANELS
26 27 15
1
GENERAL
1.1
References
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 29-M1989.
1.2
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.3
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete systems as shown as
specified and as otherwise required.
1.4
Related Work
.1 Plywood Backboard: Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
1.5
Shop Drawings
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 01 01 Electrical General Requirements.
.2 Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure
dimension.
1.6
Plant Assembly
.1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.
.2 In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault current that panel
including breakers has been built to withstand.
1.7
Identification
.1 Panels shall be identified with lamacoid plate with shall include panel designation 12 mm (½")
lettering), voltage and phase 5 mm (¼") lettering and where panel is fed from 5 mm (¼") lettering).
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements.
1.9
Maintenance Materials
.1 Provide maintenance materials as required and as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 27 15
Power Panels
Page 2 of 4
1.10
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.1 Provide operating and maintenance instructions as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Power Panels
.1 Panelboards to be factory assembled type CDP, unless otherwise specified.
.2 All power panels 400A or larger to be in oversized tub with bus bar extensions drilled to accept a long
barrel two hole compression connector on main incoming feeder.
.3 Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains.
.4 Panels to be freestanding surface mounted type, as shown.
.5 Panels to be dead front type in code gauge steel enclosure.
.6 Each panel shall be complete with a typewritten directory which shall be mounted inside door with
clear plastic cover.
2.2
Construction Features
.1 Free-standing, rigid, dead front enclosure
.2 Hinged and formed front doors
.3 Completely front accessible with all bolted connections, lugs for cable connections, terminations for
control wiring and any other items requiring torquing, infra-red scanning and maintenance and
replacement all visible and accessible from the front, when front trim is removed.
.4 Indoor sprinkler proof construction of non walk-in type conforming with CSA Enclosure 2. Door(s)
shall be gasketted, with overhanging drip shield, with T-handle 2 point locking system complete with
lock and latch, protecting breakers and all other components.
.5 Two channels across bottom of each section to permit rolling, jacking and levelling.
.6 Finish basic rust inhibiting metal process
.7 Panels shall be finished with two coats of grey ASA No. 61.
.8 Panel locks shall be common to one key throughout project.
.9 Ground bus extending through all sections complete with copper lugs for number of incoming and
outgoing feeders.
.10 All buses shall be copper and braced to match main breakers.
.11 All branch circuit breakers shall be molded case type suitable for 50,000 amps interrupting capacity at
600 volts. Main breakers shall be 400 frame with 42,000 amp interrupting capacity with solid state trip
unit with individually adjustable long, short and instantaneous time and current elements.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 15
Power Panels
Page 3 of 4
.12 Breakers shall at a suitable height for operation without the use of step ladders or stools
.13 Equipment and total assembly shall be CSA approved.
Standard of Acceptance
° Cutler Hammer
° Federal Pioneer
° Siemens
° Square D
2.3
Breakers General
.1 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick-make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic
operation.
.2 Breakers shall have bolted type connections.
.3 Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.
.4 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current
reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 5 - 10 times current
rating.
.5 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips over 150 A.
.6 Include:
.1 on-off locking device.
.2 handle mechanism.
.7 10,000 Amps symmetrical interrupting rating at 120/208 volts
.8 42,000 Amps symmetrical interrupting rating at 347/600 volts.
.9 Series rated breakers are not permitted.
2.4
Thermal Magnetic Breakers
.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping
devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.
.2 [Main breakers on all normal, emergency and IPC riser power panels shall be 1600 amp frame solid
state high instantaneous magnetic trip only type equal to Westinghouse C Series R frame. ]
2.5
Equipment Identification
.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical
Systems.
.2 Nameplate for each power panel size 4 engraved, Submit nameplate wording.
.3 Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each circuit. Cover
directory with a 0.8 mm (1/32") thick clear plastic sheet.
.4 Nameplates for electrical panels shall indicate panel designation and mains voltage, i.e. 600V, 3 φ, 4
W and panel and circuit number from which this panel is fed.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 27 15
Power Panels
Page 4 of 4
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Locate panel boards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces.
.2 Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards. Where practical, group panelboards on
common backboard.
.3 Provide a 100 mm (4") reinforced concrete pad with bevelled edges for all floor mounted panelboards.
Seal with paint or concrete sealer to prevent concrete dust from entering equipment. Pads to be
provided under this division.
.4 Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 26 05 01 - Electrical Basic Material, or with top of
trim at uniform height of 2000 mm (6' -6") or to match door heads or to suit tile layout, or as indicated.
.5 Deliver ten (10) duplicate keys for panel locks to Owner.
.6 Connect loads to circuits.
.7 Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral identified.
.8 Provide minimum #6AWG green insulated copper bonding conductor in conduit to interconnect
normal and emergency power panels serving common patient care areas.
.9 Connect ground conductors to common ground bus.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 16
Lighting & Receptacle Panels
Page 1 of 4
LIGHTING & RECEPTACLE PANELS
26 27 16
1
GENERAL
1.1
References
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 29-M1989.
1.2
Related Work
.1 Plywood Backboard: Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
1.3
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.4
Shop Drawings
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 01 01 Electrical General Requirements.
.2 Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure
dimension.
.3 Nameplates shall be in accordance with Article "Equipment Identification”.
1.5
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete systems as shown as
specified and as otherwise required.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements.
1.7
Maintenance Materials
.1 Provide maintenance materials as required and as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
1.8
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.1 Provide operating and maintenance instructions as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
1.9
Plant Assembly
.1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.
.2 In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault current that panel
including breakers has been built to withstand.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 27 16
Lighting & Receptacle Panels
Page 2 of 4
1.10
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Identification
.1 Panels shall be identified with lamacoid plate with shall include panel designation 12 mm (½”)
lettering, voltage and phase 5 mm (¼") lettering and where panel is fed from 5 mm (¼") lettering.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Panelboards
.1 Product of one manufacturer.
.2 Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each breaker
identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase. When numbering
breakers, number from top to bottom and from left to right.
.3 Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit breakers as indicated.
.4 Two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike.
.5 Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains.
.6 Panels shall be constructed and finished in accordance with details specified in Section 26 27 18
"Panel Trim".
.7 Panels shall be surface or flush mounted type, as shown.
.8 Panels shall be dead front type in code gauge steel enclosure.
.9 Each panel shall be complete with a typewritten directory which shall be mounted inside door with
clear plastic cover.
.10 Panels shall have mains of voltage and capacity, and main and branch breakers and contactors, as
shown on the "Lighting and Receptacle Panel Schedule". Spaces shall include the necessary bus
work such that Owners, at a later date, need buy only the breakers.
.11 Breakers shall have bolted type connections.
.12 Panels for 120/208 volts, three phase, four wire systems shall be complete with full size breakers,
having a symmetrical interrupting rating of at least 10,000 A.
.13 Where indicated breakers shall have a ground fault interrupter.
.14 Panels for 600 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire or 4 wire systems shall be complete with breakers having a
symmetrical interrupting rating of 42000 Amps minimum.
Standard of Acceptance
° Cutler Hammer
° Federal Pioneer
° Siemens
° Square D
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
2.2
Section 26 27 16
Lighting & Receptacle Panels
Page 3 of 4
Breakers General
.1 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick-make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic
operation.
.2 Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.
.3 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current
reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 5 - 10 times current
rating.
.4 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips over 150 A.
.5 Lock-on devices for clock outlet, fire alarm, security systems, battery chargers, door supervisory,
intercom, stairway, exit and night light circuits.
2.3
Thermal Magnetic Breakers
.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping
devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.
2.4
Trim
.1 Front panel trim shall be overall hinged type, door within door construction. Trim assembly shall
provide hinged access to the internal tub and wiring channels for access to wiring and breaker
terminals without removal of the trim assembly. With overall trim assembly closed and secured, a
second integral hinged door forming part of the trim assembly shall provide access to the circuit
breakers only for opening and closing purposes
.2 Panels shall be given a rust-resistant treatment to both tub and trim. Locks shall be chrome plated.
.3 Flush panels shall have concealed hinges and flush type combination lock latch. Doors shall open
minimum 135 degrees. Trims shall have fasteners concealed and shall be prime coated to receive
room finish paint.
.4 Surface mounted panels shall be constructed in accordance with CSA Type 2 enclosures with overall
door assembly protecting all circuit breakers. Door(s) shall be gasketted, with overhanging drip
shield, with T-handle 2 point locking system complete with lock and latch.
.5 Panels in kitchen, servery and dishwashing areas shall have stainless steel trim.
.6 Panels shall be finished with two coats of grey ASA No. 61.
.7 Panels shall be finished with two coats of paint in accordance with the following Sherwin Williams
colour code:
.1 Normal Power: [#F65L7, Pale Blue] [ASA # 61, Grey]
.2 Emergency Power: #F65E37 International Orange
.8 UPS panels to be painted in royal blue Tempo Code #2281. Submit colour chip for approval by
Consultant.
.9 Panel locks shall be common to one key throughout project.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 27 16
Lighting & Receptacle Panels
Page 4 of 4
2.5
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Equipment Identification
.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 01 - Electrical General
Requirements.
.2 Nameplate for each panelboard size 4 engraved, Submit nameplate wording.
.3 Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each circuit. Cover
directory with a 0.8 mm (1/32") thick clear plastic sheet.
.4 Nameplates for electrical panels shall indicate panel designation and mains voltage, i.e. 120/208 V, 3
φ, 4 W and panel and circuit number from which this panel is fed
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Locate panel boards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces.
.2 Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards. Where practical, group panelboards on
common backboard.
.3 Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 26 05 01 - Electrical General Requirements, or with
top of trim at uniform height of 2000 mm (6' -6") or to match door heads or to suit tile layout, or as
indicated.
.4 Co-ordinate panel finish with Room Finish Schedule.
.5 Deliver ten (10) duplicate keys for panel locks to Owner.
.6 Connect loads to circuits.
.7 Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral identified.
.8 Provide minimum #6 AWG green insulated copper bonding conductor in conduit to interconnect
normal and emergency power panels serving common patient care areas.
END OF SECTION
Master revised: April 17, 2007
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 18
Panel Trim
Page 1 of 2
PANEL TRIM
26 27 18
1
GENERAL
1.1
Application
.1 Provide panel trim for:
.1 Lighting & Receptacle Panelboards Section 26 27 16
.2 Power Panels, Section 26 27 15
.3 Terminal Cabinets: Section 26 05 32
1.2
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.3
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
.2 Nameplates shall be in accordance with Article "Equipment Identification”.
1.4
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete systems as shown as
specified and as otherwise required.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements.
1.6
Maintenance Materials
.1 Provide maintenance materials as required and as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
1.7
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.1 Provide operating and maintenance instructions as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Trim
.1 Panels shall be given a rust-resistant treatment to both tub and trim. Locks shall be chrome plated.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 27 18
Panel Trim
Page 2 of 2
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 Flush panels shall have concealed hinges and flush type combination lock latch. Doors shall open
minimum 135 degrees. Trims shall have fasteners concealed and shall be prime coated to receive
room finish paint.
.3 Surface mounted panels shall be constructed in accordance with CSA Type 2 enclosures with overall
door assembly protecting all circuit breakers. Door(s) shall be gasketted, with overhanging drip
shield, with T-handle 2 point locking system complete with lock and latch.
.4 Panels in kitchen, servery and dishwashing areas shall have stainless steel trim.
.5 Panels shall be finished with two coats of grey ASA No. 61.
.6 Panel locks shall be common to one key throughout project.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Deliver ten (10) duplicate keys for panel locks to Owner.
.2 Mount electrical panels, where possible, with top of trim at uniform height of 2000 mm (6' -6") or to
match door heads or to suit tile layout.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 26
Wiring Devices
Page 1 of 6
WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Sections
.1 Section 26 05 01 - Electrical Basic Materials & Methods.
.2 Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
.3 Section 26 08 13 Testing of Hospital Wiring.
.4 Section 26 28 19 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
1.2
Submittals
.1 Submit shop drawings for each type and size of device.
1.3
Applicable Codes and Standards
.1 Latest version of CSA C22.2 No. 111-M1986 Switches.
.2 Latest version of CSA C22.2 No. 42-M1984 Receptacles.
1.4
Scope
.1 Provide labour, materials, and equipment required for installation, testing and putting into proper
operation complete systems as shown as specified and as otherwise required.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Nameplates
.1 Wall mounted:
.1 engraved laminated plastic to Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems,
.2 7 mm (¼”) high letters unless indicated otherwise.
.2 Receptacle mounted:
.1 permanently printed on white polyester background,
.2 7 mm (¼") high letters unless indicated otherwise,
.3 UV resistant inks,
.4 clear polyester over lamination,
.5 pressure sensitive adhesive.
.3 Colours:
.1 normal power: black lettering on white background,
2.2
Switches
.1 Features:
.1 20 A, 120 V, general purpose AC type,
Tender
Section 26 27 26
Wiring Devices
Page 2 of 6
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 higher ratings where indicated,
.3 CSA listed,
.4 fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps, and for inductive loads,
.5 commercial grade for Decora style switches,
.6 Decora style throughout.
.7 silent operation,
.8 terminals rated for No. 10 AWG wire,
.9 suitable for back and side wiring,
.10 silver alloy contacts,
.11 single pole, double pole, three-way, four-way switches as indicated.
.2 Toggle colours:
.1 Normal power: white.
.3 Decora rocker colour: white
.4 Switches of one manufacturer throughout project, unless accepted otherwise.
°
°
°
°
°
Standard of Acceptance
Pass & Seymour (Legrand)
Hubbell
Bryant Electric
Cooper-Eaton Wiring Devices (Arrow Hart)
Leviton
.5 Catalogue numbers listed below have been used for convenience only to indicate quality standards:
Approved Catalogue Numbers
Hubbell 120 Volt Decora
2.3
Single Pole
DS120
Double Pole
DS220
Three-Way
DS320
Four-Way
DS420
Timer Switches
.1 Timing function to 60-minutes with four preset buttons and off.
.2 Fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps.
°
2.4
Standard of Acceptance
Leviton No. 6560M-W
Dimmer Switches
.1 Dimmers for use on LED lamps:
Issued For Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 26
Wiring Devices
Page 3 of 6
.1 1000 watt capacity,
.2 RFI toroidal choke filter,
.3 white cover plates.
°
Standard of Acceptance
Lutron "Diva Series"
.2 Dimmers for 0-10V LED drivers:
°
Standard of Acceptance
Lutron Diva DVSTV.
.3 Colour:
.1 Normal power: white
2.5
Receptacles
.1 Decora style throughout
.2 With the following features:
.1 eight back wired entrances, four side wiring screws,
.2 suitable for no. 10 AWG for back and side wiring,
.3 break-off links for use as split receptacles,
.4 triple wipe contacts,
.5 riveted or integral ground contacts.
.3 Colour coded as follows:
.1 Normal power: white
.4 One manufacturer throughout the project.
°
°
°
°
°
Standard of Acceptance
Pass & Seymour (Legrand)
Hubbell
Bryant Electric
Cooper-Eaton Wiring Devices (Arrow Hart)
Leviton
.5 The receptacles listed below represent the most common configurations and are not necessarily used
on this project. Refer to drawings for types used.
.1
Duplex receptacle: 15 / 20 ampere, 120 volt, grounded CSA Configuration 5-20R:
Standard of Acceptance
Type
Decora
Tender
Approved Catalogue Numbers
P&S
Hubbell
Bryant
26352
2162
9352
Leviton
-
Cooper
6362
Section 26 27 26
Wiring Devices
Page 4 of 6
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 Single twistlock receptacle: 20 ampere, 208 volt, three phase, 4 wire grounded CSA
Configuration L15-20R:
°
°
°
°
°
Standard of Acceptance
Pass & Seymour L1520R
Hubbell 2420
Bryant 71520
Cooper-Eaton CWL1520R
Leviton 2420
.3 Single twistlock receptacle: 20 ampere, 120/ 208 volt, three phase, 5 wire grounded CSA
Configuration L21-20R:
°
°
°
°
°
Standard of Acceptance
Pass & Seymour L2120R
Hubbell 2510
Bryant 72120
Cooper-Eaton CWL2120R
Leviton 2510
.4 Single receptacle: 30 ampere, 120 volt, single phase, 3 wire grounded CSA Configuration 5-30R:
°
°
°
°
°
2.6
Standard of Acceptance
Pass & Seymour 3802
Hubbell 9308
Bryant 9530-FR
Cooper-Eaton5716N
Leviton 5371
Floor Outlets
.1 Flush mounted duplex floor receptacles, 15 ampere, 120 volts CSA configuration 5-15R with
adjustable, watertight floor boxes.
°
°
°
Standard of Acceptance
Hubbell B2431 single gang box (brass)
Hubbell B2432 double gang box (brass)
Hubbell B2433 three gang box (brass)
.2 Service fitting for floor receptacle to be complete with receptacle specified above, unless noted
otherwise.
°
°
2.7
Standard of Acceptance
Hubbell S3625, duplex screw cover (brass)
Hubbell S3825, duplex flap (brass)
Cover Plates
.1 Compatible with wiring device.
.2 One manufacturer throughout the project.
°
°
Issued For Tender
Standard of Acceptance
Pass & Seymour #93000 Series
Harvey Hubbell of Canada Ltd. #93000 Series
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
°
°
°
2.8
Section 26 27 26
Wiring Devices
Page 5 of 6
Bryant Electric #S600 Series
Leviton #84000 Series
Cooper #93000 Series
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI’s)
.1 CSA approved Type A.
.2 Complete with suitable outlet box.
.3 15A grounded duplex Decora receptacle type 5-15R.
.4 15A/20A grounded duplex Decora receptacle type 5-20R where indicated.
.5 Auto-monitoring (self-test), manual test feature and reset switch.
.6 Units to include current transformer and sensing mechanism.
.7 GFCI’s in patient care areas: hospital grade.
.8 Unless noted otherwise, unit to trip at 6 mA.
.9 No power at device face if reversed wired.
.10 Colour coded as follows:
.1 Normal power: white
.11 Where shown in outdoor locations, units to be enclosed in “While-In-Use” weatherproof surfacemounted enclosures. In other locations units to be furnished with stainless steel cover plate.
Standard of Acceptance
Type
Approved Catalogue Numbers
P&S
Hubbell
Bryant
Leviton
Cooper
1597
GFST15
GFRST15
7599
SGF15
2097
GFST20
GFRST20
7899
SGF20
15A:
Decora
15/20A:
Decora
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Identification
.1 Label receptacles with circuit identification using a lamacoid label with label attached to the
receptacle.
3.2
Installation
.1 Switches
.1 Mount switches vertically so that the switch contacts are closed when the toggle is up or, in the
case of Decora switches, when the top part of the rocker is depressed.
Tender
Section 26 27 26
Wiring Devices
Page 6 of 6
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.3
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2
Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location.
.3
Provide separate boxes where switches are supplied from different power systems (normal and emergency).
.4
Mount switches at heights specified in Section 26 05 01 - Electrical Basic Materials & Methods unless
indicated otherwise.
.5
Verify the door swing and ensure easy access before installing switches.
.6
Switches installed adjacent to dimmers: provide switches that match appearance of dimmers.
Dimmers
.1
Where more than one dimmer is shown in the same location, mount dimmers in individual backboxes.
.2
Where remote dimmers are utilized, install associated components in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Receptacles
.1
Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location.
.2
Mount receptacles at heights specified in Section 26 05 01 - Electrical Basic Materials & Methods unless
indicated otherwise.
.3
For each type of receptacle 20 ampere or larger, supply and hand to Owner two heavy duty caps.
.4
Connect receptacle grounding terminal to the outlet box with an insulated green bonding conductor.
.5
Verify exact position of service fittings to suit furniture layout.
.6
Do not mount receptacles directly on a column, unless column has been appropriately furred, to avoid
breaking fire barrier.
Cover Plates
.1
Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped.
.2
Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes.
Ground fault circuit interrupters:
.1
Mount receptacles at height indicated in Section 26 05 01 - Electrical Basic Materials & Methods unless
indicated otherwise.
.2
Do not connect GFCI receptacles to provide protection to downstream receptacles, unless indicated
otherwise.
Testing
.1
Verify the operation of illuminated handles in switches.
.2
Verify the operation of lights on pilot light switches.
.3
Test each receptacle for correct polarity and ground continuity.
.4
Test the manual trip and reset functions of each GFCI.
END OF SECTION
Issued For Tender
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 28
Wire and Box Connectors 0-1000 V
Page 1 of 2
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V
26 27 28
1
GENERAL
1.1
Applicable Codes and Standards
.1 Latest version of CSA C22.2 No.65 Wire Connectors.
.2 Latest version of CSA C22.2 No.188 Splicing Wire Connectors.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1 Mechanical pressure type wire connectors:
.1 for copper conductors: current carrying parts of copper or tin plated aluminum,
.2 for aluminum conductors: current carrying parts of aluminum.
Standard of Acceptance
° Burndy
° Ilsco
° Thomas & Betts
.2 Compression type pressure wire connectors:
.1 in plated copper for copper conductors
Standard of Acceptance
° Burndy
° Ilsco
° Thomas & Betts
.3 Twist on wire connectors:
.1 for copper wire up to and including #6 AWG,
.2 “live” spring construction,
.3 corrosion resistant spring,
.4 square wire spring construction,
.5 polypropylene cap rated for 105oC
Standard of Acceptance
° T&B Marette
° Ideal
° 3M
.4 Fixture type splicing connectors:
.1
current carrying parts of copper,
.2 sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less,
.3 temperature rating of not less than 105oC
.5 Bushing stud connectors: to EEMAC 1Y-2 to consist of:
Issued for Tender
Section 26 27 28
Wire and Box Connectors 0-1000 V
Page 2 of 2
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Connector body and stud clamp for copper conductors or bars.
.2 Clamp for copper conductors or bars.
.3 Stud clamp bolts.
.4 Bolts for copper conductors or bars.
.5 Sized for conductors or bars as indicated or required.
Standard of Acceptance
° Burndy
° Hubbell
° Thomas & Betts
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Provide connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation for the size, quantity and
type of wires.
.2 Install connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
.3 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors:
.1 where the conductor is damaged, remove the damaged portion and strip the insulation back
further as necessary,
.2 where the conductor is too short, replace the conductor.
.4 Tighten screws of mechanical pressure type connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Installation to meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.
.5 Install compression type connectors using the appropriate compression tool and die as recommended
by the manufacturer. Make two crimps on each wire. Installation to meet secureness tests in
accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.
.6 Remove all traces of electrical joint compound after each connection has been made.
.7 Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 27 33
Disconnect Switches up to 1000 Volts
Page 1 of 2
DISCONNECT SWITCHES UP TO 1000 VOLTS
26 27 33
1
GENERAL
1.1
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.2
Scope
.1 Provide labour, materials, and equipment required for installation, testing and putting into proper
operation complete systems as shown as specified and as otherwise required.
1.3
Related Sections
.1 Section 26 28 13 Fuses - Low Voltage.
1.4
Submittals
.1 Submit shop drawings for each type and size of switch.
1.5
Applicable Codes and Standards
.1 Latest version of CSA C22.2 No. 4-04 Enclosed and Dead Front Switches.
.2 Latest version of CSA C22.2 No. 39 Fuseholder Assemblies.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Disconnect Switches
.1 Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switch in CSA Type 1 enclosure, sizes as indicated.
.2 2 pole or 3 pole as required for single phase or three phase circuits.
.3 2 pole with solid neutral for three wire circuits with neutral.
.4 3 pole with solid neutral for four wire circuits with neutral.
.5 6 pole for two speed motor applications.
.6 HP rated where used in motor circuits, with rating not less than the largest motor in the circuit.
.7 Provision for padlocking switch in OFF position.
.8 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.
.9 Fuses: size as indicated, to Section 26 28 13 - Fuses - Low Voltage.
.10 Fuseholders: suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse indicated.
.11 Heavy Duty, quick-make, quick-break action, rated for load breaking operation.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 27 33
Disconnect Switches up to 1000 Volts
Page 2 of 2
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.12 ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.13 Rust inhibiting process to enclosures prior to finishing.
.14 Finish enclosures using manufacturer’s standard process, colour to be grey ASA No.49 or 61.
2.2
Double Throw Switches
.1 Non-fusible manual load transfer switch in CSA Type 1 enclosure, size as indicated.
.2
Two pole, three pole or four pole as shown and as required.
.3 Continuous duty.
.4 HP rated where used to switch motor loads.
.5 Visible blades for positive indication that switch is in the OFF position.
.6 Provision for padlocking in the centre OFF switch position, and in both ON positions.
.7 Heavy duty, quick make, quick break operating mechanism, rated for load breaking operation.
.8 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in an ON position.
.9 ON-OFF-ON switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.10 Rust inhibiting process to enclosures prior to finishing.
.11 Finish enclosures using manufacturer’s standard process, colour to be grey ASA No. 61.
Standard of Acceptance
° Square D/Schneider Electric
° Eaton (Cutler- Hammer)
° Siemens Canada Ltd.
° General Electric
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 For sprinklerproof enclosures use watertight connectors complete with O rings for conduit
connections.
.2 Provide fuses in disconnect switches, sizes as shown.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 28 13
Fuses - Low Voltage
Page 1 of 2
FUSES - LOW VOLTAGE
26 28 13
1
GENERAL
1.1
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.2
Submittals
.1 Submit product data for each type of fuse used.
.2 Submit fuse performance data characteristics for each fuse type and size above 200 A.
Performance data to include: average melting time-current characteristics on log log paper, I2t (for
fuse coordination), and peak let-through current.
1.3
Maintenance Materials
.1 Supply six spare fuses of each type and size installed up to and including 600 A.
1.4
Applicable Codes and Standards
.1 Latest version of CSA Standard C22.2 No.106 HRC – Miscellaneous Fuses
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Fuses General
.1 Fuses: product of one manufacturer.
.2 Fuses rated to 600A: CSA certified HRCI-J.
.3 Fuses rated 601A and above: CSA certified HRCI-L.
2.2
Fuse Types
.1 HRCI-J fuses, current limiting, time delay, with blown fuse indication.
Standard of Acceptance
° Ferraz Shawmut: Amptrap 2000 AJT series
° Bussman: LPJ - SP series
° Littlefuse: JTD-ID series
.2 HRCI-L fuses, current limiting, time delay.
Standard of Acceptance
° Ferraz Shawmut: Amptrap 2000 A4BQ series
° Bussman: KRP-C - SP series
° Littlefuse: KLPC Power-Pro series
Issued for Tender
Section 26 28 13
Fuses - Low Voltage
Page 2 of 2
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 Ship fuses in original containers.
.2 Spare fuses to be stored in original containers.
3.2
Installation
.1 Install fuses in fuseholders immediately before energizing circuit.
.2 Ensure correct fuses fitted to physically matched fuseholders.
.3 Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circuit.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 28 16
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Page 1 of 2
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 16
1
GENERAL
1.1
References
.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 5.1. Moulded case circuit breakers.
1.2
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.3
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
.2 Nameplates shall be in accordance with Article "Equipment Identification”.
.3 Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers with ampacity of 200 A and over or with
interrupting capacity of 22,000 A symmetrical (rms) and over at system voltage.
1.4
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete systems as shown as
specified and as otherwise required.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements.
1.6
Maintenance Materials
.1 Provide maintenance materials as required and as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
1.7
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.1 Provide operating and maintenance instructions as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Breakers General
.1 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic
operation.
.2 Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 28 16
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Page 2 of 2
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.3 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current
reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 5 - 10 times current
rating.
.4 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips over 150 A.
.5 42,000 Amps symmetrical interrupting rating at 600 volts
2.2
Thermal Magnetic Breakers
.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping
devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.
2.3
Features
.1 Include
.1 on-off locking device
.2 handle mechanism
2.4
Enclosure
.1 Mount individually mounted breakers in CEMA 3 enclosure.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Install circuit breakers as indicated.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 1 of 12
LIGHTING
26 51 13
1
GENERAL
1.1
General Requirements
.1 Conform to the requirements of Section 26 01 01 Electrical General Requirements.
1.2
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete Electrical systems as
shown, as specified and as otherwise required. Complete systems shall be left ready for continuous
and efficient satisfactory operation.
1.3
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 01 01 Electrical General Requirements - Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
.2 Submit complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for luminaires where
specified, for review by Consultant.
.3 Photometric data to include:
.1 Total input watts, candlepower summary, candela distribution zonal lumen summary, luminaire
efficiency, CIE type, coefficient of utilization, lamp type and lumen rating in accordance with
IESNA testing procedures.
1.4
Requirements
.1 Luminaires shall not be delivered to building or stored therein until dry and protected space is
available for proper storage of luminaires.
.2 Submit samples of luminaires which are not catalogue items for approval. Additional luminaires shall
not be manufactured until sample has been approved. Each approved sample shall be retained on
job site until final completion of project. Luminaires which do not match quality and workmanship of
standard sample will be rejected.
.3 Finishes of luminaires, as specified in the "Luminaire List" must be maintained. Where the
description of the luminaire directs a "colour/ finish to suit Architect" it is to be understood that during
construction the final colour/finish will be selected. The Architect must be permitted to make their
choice from a standard colour/finish range but the selected colour will apply to all of the particular
type of luminaire unless otherwise specified.
.4 "Allowances" when shown, are in Canadian dollars and cover the cost of the lighting luminaires and
lamps. Allowances do not include applicable taxes, delivery to the site, handling, installation,
overhead or profit.
1.5
Substitutions
.1 Luminaires included under this Section are specified by approved manufacturer and type. Furnish
equipment, as specified, unless substitutions are mutually agreed upon, as follows:
Issued for Tender
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 2 of 12
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.1 During the construction period, no substitutions shall be considered unless compelling reasons
are given such as inability to meet delivery schedule. This reason shall not be acceptable if delay
is caused by Contractor's failure to order luminaires in accordance with the schedule. In such
cases, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide luminaires as specified without delay to the
project and without additional cost to the Owner.
.2 Substitutions shall be named, samples, catalogue cuts and complete photometric reports
submitted, and cost savings documented. Submit a written request for proposed luminaires to be
substituted to Lighting Consultant at least two weeks before the end of the bid period. Make the
request an alternate, separate proposal, accompanied by complete descriptive and technical
data. Indicate addition or deduction from the base bid. Substitutions proposed less than two
weeks before the end of the bid period, or not including proper documentation shall not be
considered. [Engineer][Lighting Consultant] shall accept or reject proposed substitutions.
.3 Where proposed substitutions alter functional or visual design, or change the space requirements
or mounting details indicated here or on the drawings, detail such changes in the proposal and
include costs for revised design and construction for trades involved.
.4 Reimburse [Engineer][Lighting Consultant] and his/her consultants for costs of evaluating
proposed substitutions, after the bid period, whether or not such substitutions are accepted.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1 Similar luminaires shall be products of same manufacturer.
.2 Luminaires shall be suitable for individual or continuous mounting.
.3 Supply recessed luminaires, where installed in plaster or in acoustic ceilings, complete with plaster
trim frame or ring and mounting brackets.
.4 Fluorescent troffers in ceiling shall be equipped with adjustable mounting brackets.
.5 Luminaires shall be completely assembled in factory and shall be delivered to building in cartons or in
palletized form, as directed.
2.2
Ballasts and Drivers
.1 LED Drivers:
.1
Operable from 50/60 Hz input source of 120V through 277V or 347V through 480V with
sustained variations of ± 10% (voltage) with no damage to the driver.
.2 Input power factor greater than 0.90 from 20% to 100% rated load.
.3 Input current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) less than 20% from 20% to 100% rated load.
.4 Comply with NEMA 410 for in-rush current limits.
.5 Output current regulated to ± 5% across published load range.
.6 Output ripple current at maximum output:
(a) less than 15% measured peak-average/average,
(b) less than 5% low frequency content (< 120 Hz.).
.7 Integral means of limiting surges to the LED’s, based on IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2 surge
characteristics:
Issued for Tender
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 3 of 12
(a) for interior applications: common mode and differential mode surge protection of 2.5kV
(100kHz, 30 Ohm ring wave),
(b) for exterior applications: common mode and differential mode surge protection of 3kV
(1.2/50µs, 2 Ohm combination wave).
.8 Able to tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without failure, without
need for external fuses or trip devices. Auto resetting.
.9 No visible flicker when tested with flicker wheel.
.10 For dimming systems: no visible flicker, when tested with flicker wheel, across the full dimming
range.
.11 Minimum operating temperature:
(a) -20˚C (-4˚F) for interior applications,
(b) -40˚C (-40˚F) for exterior applications.
.12 Metallic enclosure for optimal thermal performance.
.13 Integral thermal foldback to reduce driver power if case temperature exceeds rated maximum
temperature.
.14 Compatible with the dimming system.
.15 Class A sound rating.
.16 Rated for UL Damp and Dry locations.
.17 For downlights: compact enclosure with integral studs allowing the driver to be mounted on the
outside of the luminaire or on a junction box, without the need of an additional enclosure.
.18 For linear luminaires: slim profile with height ≤ 25 mm (1 inch) and width ≤ 30 mm (1.2 inch).
.19 Integral colour-coded connectors.
.20 Free of any Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs).
.21 Labelled compliant with the latest edition of the following standards:
(a) [CSA-C22.2 No. 223, Power Supplies with Extra-Low Voltage Class 2 Outputs,
(b) CSA C22.2 No 250-13, Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for use in Lighting
Applications.]
.22 Comply with applicable requirements of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules
and regulations, Title 47 CFR part 15, for Non-Consumer equipment.
.23 RoHS compliant.
.24 Warranty: 5 years
Standard of Acceptance
° Advance
° Litetech
° Universal
° VLM (Italy)
° Lumi-Drives (UK)
° Osram
° AC Electronics
° EldoLED
2.3
Lamps
.1 Light Emitting Diodes
.1 1.2 or 3 watts per LED.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 4 of 12
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.2 Available in 2700K, 3000K, 3500K and 4000K correlated colour temperature (CCT) packages.
CCT tolerances to remain within a 3-step MacAdam ellipse and to maintain a CRI of ≥80, and an
R9 > 50.
.3 Colour temperature and lumen output for each luminaire per luminaire schedule. Comply with
IESNA LM-79 testing procedures.
.4 Maximum temperature at the base of the “LED cap” mounted to the substrate to be controlled to
ensure full lamp life.
.5 Minimum lumen maintenance of L70 @ 50,000 hours. Comply with IESNA LM-80 and LM-21
testing procedures.
.6 LED’s of the same type to be from the same manufacturing batch.
.7 Capable of continuous dimming, flicker and noise free, from 10-100% lumen output.
.8 Provide certified test results for each type of LED used on the project.
.9 Warranty: 5 years
Standard of Acceptance- Lamp Acceptance:
° Cree
° Lumileds
° Nichia
° Osram
° GE
° Samsung
° Bridgelux
2.4
Exit Signs
.1 Exit signs to CSA 22.2 No. 141 Emergency Lighting Equipment.
.2 Internally illuminated by white L.E.D. sources.
.3 Single or double face as shown.
.4 Each face to show a green “running man” pictogram.
.5 With directional arrows as shown.
.6 With directional arrows in two directions per face where shown.
.7 Directional arrows to be white.
.8 Visibility of signs to ISO 3864-1 Graphical Symbols – Safety Colours and Safety Signs – Part 1:
Design Principles for Safety Signs in Workplaces and Public Areas.
.9 Dimensions of signs, pictograms and symbols to ISO 7010 Graphical Symbols – Safety Colours and
Safety Signs – Safety Signs Used in Workplaces and Public Areas.
.10 With [6][12][24]Volt two wire DC emergency power input.
.11 With internal battery backup using sealed nickel cadmium batteries of sufficient capacity to power the
sign for not less than 2 hours.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 5 of 12
.1 Locate and install luminaires as indicated.
.2 Locate hangers on tile centres or intersections. Mount recessed incandescents, troffers and surface
mounted luminaires in or on full tiles.
.3 Verify quantity of luminaires before placing orders.
.4 Verify ceiling types with the latest revised Architectural Drawings and order luminaires to suit the
correct ceiling.
.5 Check lighting luminaires and mountings for their electrical and physical characteristics in relation to
conditions due to building construction and mechanical equipment. Make necessary adjustments to
luminaires or hanging arrangement without expense to Owners. Give notification at time of shop
drawings and before construction if decision on necessary changes is required.
.6 Co-operate with other trades to ensure proper installation of lighting luminaires.
.7 Carefully align luminaires, shown in continuous lines or rows, so that rows appear as straight lines.
.8 Mount luminaires perfectly level or plumb. Luminaires shall fit tightly to ceiling without showing a
space or light leak between frame and ceiling.
.9 Take down any improperly installed luminaires and re-install without expense to Owner.
.10 Standard octagonal boxes may be supplied where conduits feeding luminaires in finished areas are
exposed on ceiling if hanger canopies entirely cover outlet boxes and are neatly notched for conduit.
Otherwise, provide cast conduit outlet boxes with a diameter larger than canopies.
.11 Attach boxes or hickies directly to poured concrete with 6mm (¼") minimum diameter bolts and lead
expansion anchors where luminaires are suspended directly from concrete slabs. Use 8mm (5/16")
minimum bolts through precast slabs, welded to 100mm x 100mm (4" x 4") minimum, 3.5mm (10
gauge) plate above slabs.
.12 Do not mount luminaires above pipes, ducts or equipment. In event of unavoidably tight locations,
provide hangers to clear obstructions. Check layouts of other trades on job and plan co-operatively.
Luminaires in any room shall hang at one height. Obtain approval before any changes are made to
layouts shown
.13 All luminaires mounted in or on ceilings shall be supported independently of ceiling by means of
chains.
.14 Provide continuous 12mm x 38mm (½" x 1½") channel above the ceiling, where luminaires are
suspended or mounted on furred ceilings. Fasten luminaires to channel with two 6mm (¼") minimum
diameter studs with minimum 1220mm (4'- 0") on centre.
.15 Luminaires installed in or on "T" bar ceilings shall be equipped with safety chains anchored in an
approved manner to the floor slab or roof structure above. Fluorescent luminaires shall have two
chains, each supporting two corners of the luminaire. Chain shall be #10 Tensile jack chain, installed
as noted below.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 6 of 12
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.16 Chain shall be No. 10 Tensile jack chain, bright zinc coated, with a strength of 180 kg (400 lbs.)
where luminaires are indicated to be chain hung. Attachments shall be made using a No. 10 "S" hook.
Caddy fasteners may be used where applicable. "S" hooks must be closed after installation.
.17 Industrial luminaires where suspended shall be 12mm (½") conduit hangers and ARB ball aligners.
Length and location shall clear equipment, ducts and pipes. Metal strut (Flexibar or equal) may be
used for mounting of luminaires in mechanical areas and electrical rooms.
3.2
Lighting Luminaires
.1 Provide lighting luminaires exactly as shown and as specified in the following schedule. Luminaires
shall be complete with necessary accessories and lamps at time of acceptance.
.2 All luminaires shall be ULC or CSA certified.
.3 Each fluorescent luminaire installed on branch circuits with voltage exceeding 150 volts-to-ground
shall be provided with a disconnecting means integral to the luminaire that simultaneously opens all
circuit conductors between the branch circuit conductors and the supplying ballast(s) and marked in a
conspicuous, legible and permanent, manner adjacent to the disconnecting means, identifying the
specific purpose in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 Rule 30-308(4).
3.3
Exit Signs
.1 Connect 12 Volt DC circuit to the emergency power input.
Issued for Tender
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
3.4
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 7 of 12
Luminaire List
.1 Luminaire manufacturers are listed in alphabetical order and not in order of preference.
Title
Description
Lamp Schedule
LC1
Pendant LED cube luminaire. Nominal dimensions of 3 7/8” width x 4 7/16”
depth x 4’ length. Constructed of die and brake-formed code gauge steel,
spring loaded endcaps for ease of maintenance. Finish is white polyester
powder coat. Lens shall be a pattern 12 acrylic.
LED Boards
3700 lumens
3500K
CRI ≥ 80
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Visioneering:
Eaton Cooper:
Cree:
LC2
LCAD48-LED835K037UNVP12
4BCLED-LD4-36SL-F-UNV-L835-CD1
LS4 40L 35K 10V
LED cube luminaire. Nominal dimensions of 3 7/8” width x 4 7/16” depth x 2’
length. Constructed of die and brake-formed code gauge steel, spring
loaded endcaps for ease of maintenance. Finish is white polyester powder
coat. Lens shall be a pattern 12 acrylic.
LED Boards
2000 lumens
3500K
CRI ≥ 80
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Visioneering:
Eaton Cooper:
Kenall:
LC3
LCAD24-LED835K020LUNVP12
2BCLED-LD4-20SL-F-UNV-L835-CD1
MLHA5 24 F MW PP 25L35K DCC 1 120
Wall mounted LED cube luminaire. Nominal dimensions of 3 7/8” width x 4
7
/16” depth x 4’ length. Constructed of die and brake-formed code gauge
steel, spring loaded endcaps for ease of maintenance. Finish is white
polyester powder coat. Lens shall be a pattern 12 acrylic.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Visioneering:
Eaton Cooper:
Cree:
Issued for Tender
LCAD48-LED835K037UNVP12
4BCLED-LD4-36SL-F-UNV-L835-CD1
LS4 40L 35K 10V
LED Boards
3700 lumens
3500K
CRI ≥ 80
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 8 of 12
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Title
Description
Lamp Schedule
LF1
LED monopoint track head flood. Nominal dimensions of 146mm diameter x
314mm length. Luminaire has aluminum housing, lockable aiming with allen
key in the horizontal and vertical planes. Finish to be determined by
architect. Luminaire shall come complete with a linear spread lens 5˚x50˚.
LED Module
Xicato
5000 lumens
3500K
CRI ≥ 83
Luminaire shall be mounted in a mono point configuration, aimed towards
ceiling to provide a wash of light across the ceiling membrane.
Track heads shall be suitable for Electronic Low Voltage Reverse Phase
dimming (ELV) for compatibility with Lutron dimming system.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Lighting Services Inc.:
Edison Price:
Litelab:
LP1
LX2084-T19-50-83 35 J4-5A-TE 120 x - 990
Maxima LED O-OBM Series
Museum Collection M97L3200
Pendant architectural 2” slot luminaire. Nominal dimensions of 67mm width
x 117mm height x run length (see drawings). Luminaire is one piece
extruded aluminum, cast aluminum end caps, 22ga. steel reflectors with
high reflectance powder coat, and an extruded acrylic snap in lens.
Luminaire shall be dimmable with 0-10v eldoLED logarithmic driver capable
of dimming to 1%. Finish shall be determined by architect at time of shop
drawing review.
Luminaire shall be mounted at 2750mm AFF.
LED Boards
625 lumens/ft
3500K
CRI ≥ 80
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Focal Point:
Selux:
Eaton Neo-Ray:
LR1
FSM2LS FL 625LF 35K 1C 120 eldoLED L11 C96 xx
L60 1A35 35 LW C xx xx 120 DML
S22DP-2L35-SCST-xx-1DD-SI-S92S
Recessed 2” architectural slot luminaire. Nominal dimensions of 129.2mm
height x 67.1mm width x run length (see drawings). Constructed of one
piece extruded aluminum housing, 20ga. steel end caps, 22ga. steel
reflectors finished in a high reflectance white and an extruded acrylic snapin lens with satin finish. Finish shall be white. Luminaire shall come
complete with a 0-10v eldoLED logarithmic dimming driver capable of
dimming to 1%.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Focal Point:
Selux:
Eaton Neo-Ray:
Issued for Tender
FSM2L FL 625LF 35K 1C 120 eldoLED L11 WH
L6R1 1A35 35 LW xx xx xx 120 DML
S22DR-2L35-SR-xx-1DD-S92S
LED Boards
625 lumens/ft
3500K
CRI ≥ 80
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 9 of 12
Title
Description
Lamp Schedule
LR2
Recessed 4” architectural slot luminaire. Nominal dimensions of 127mm
height x 101.6mm width x 1.2m. Constructed of one piece extruded
aluminum housing, 20ga. steel end caps, 22ga. steel reflectors finished in a
high reflectance white and an extruded acrylic snap-in lens with satin finish.
Finish shall be white. Luminaire shall come complete with a 0-10v eldoLED
logarithmic dimming driver capable of dimming to 1%.
LED Boards
825 lumens/ft
3500K
CRI ≥ 80
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Focal Point:
Selux:
Eaton Neo-Ray:
LS1
FSM4L FL 825LF 35K 1C 120 eldoLED L11 TF WH 4
L1R1 1A35 35 LW xx xx 04 WH 120 DML
S23DR-2L35-SR-4-1DD-SI-S93S-W
Surface mounted architectural 2” slot luminaire. Nominal dimensions of
67mm width x 117mm height x 1829mm. Luminaire is one piece extruded
aluminum, cast aluminum end caps, 22ga. steel reflectors with high
reflectance powder coat, and an extruded acrylic snap in lens.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Focal Point:
Selux:
Eaton Neo-Ray:
Issued for Tender
FSM2LS FL 625LF 35K 1C 120 LD1 SM WH 72
L60 1A35 35 LW F 06 WH 120 DML
S22DS-2L35-SR-6-1DD-SI-S92S
LED Boards
625 lumens/ft
3500K
CRI ≥ 80
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 10 of 12
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Title
Description
Lamp Schedule
LT
Two circuit 120V light track. Track shall be constructed of extruded
aluminum, track shall be field cuttable to any length with a single cut. Track
system shall be available with end feed, end cap, straight mini-joiner,
straight joiner/feeder, flexible joiner and L, T and X joiner/feeders as
standard components. Track shall have dedicated neutrals to avoid
dimming interference. Finish shall be determined
-
Track and track heads (LT1 and LT2) shall be supplied from the same
manufacturer.
Track shall be installed on top of a steel ‘I-beam’ with a nominal width of
103mm. Manufacturer shall provide a 1 inch stand-off to allow power to run
underneath track along I-beam.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Lighting Services Inc.:
Litelab:
Edison Price:
LT1
LED cylindrical track head. Nominal dimensions of 146mm diameter x
314mm length (incl. stem). Constructed of a sturdy aluminum housing with
vertical and horizontal locking with allen key wrench. Integral electronic
driver. Field changeable optics, accessory cartridge accepts two filter or
accessories. Luminaire shall come complete with an on/off safety switch.
Finish shall be determined by architect at time of shop drawing review.
Track head utilizes the Xicato XTM LED module, less than 2 MacAdam
Ellipses with a CRI of 98.
Tack head shall be suppled from the same manufacturer of the two circuit
track.
Track heads shall be suitable for Electronic Low Voltage Reverse Phase
dimming (ELV) for compatibility with Lutron dimming system.
Awarded manufacturer shall supply additional reflectors for track heads. All
track heads are specified with 20˚ optics, and additional 50 reflectors shall
be supplied of which 30 will be 40˚ and the remaining to be 60˚.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Lighting Services Inc.:
Litelab:
Edison Price:
Issued for Tender
LX2084-T19-(20-98)-30-M2-00-TE-120-x
M37L2000 EUT-2 1A 9830 x 20
LX-XTM-OX-2C-20D-xx-DME-30K-SW
LED Module
Xicato XTM
2000 lumens
3000K
CRI ≥ 98
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 11 of 12
Title
Description
Lamp Schedule
LT2
LED cylindrical track head wallwasher. Nominal dimensions of 108mm
diameter x 289mm length (incl. stem). Constructed of a sturdy aluminum
housing with vertical and horizontal locking with allen key wrench. Integral
electronic driver. Luminaire shall come complete with an on/off safety
switch. Finish shall be determined by architect at time of shop drawing
review.
LED Module
Xicato
1170 lumens
3000K
CRI ≥ 97
Track head utilizes the Xicato XLM and/or XTM LED module, less than 2
MacAdam Ellipses with a CRI ≥ 97.
Tack head shall be suppled from the same manufacturer of the two circuit
track.
Track heads shall be suitable for Electronic Low Voltage Reverse Phase
dimming (ELV) for compatibility with Lutron dimming system.
Luminaire is not shown on drawings but a quantity of 5 luminaires shall be
supplied under this contract and handed over to client.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
Lighting Services Inc.:
Litelab:
Edison Price:
LU1
LX2045-L70-(11-97)-30--00-TE-120-x
M38L1300 EUT-2 A 9830 x
MM-XTM-W-DMP-2C-xx-10A-30K
Surface mounted LED undercabinet luminaire. Nominal dimensions of
17.25mm height x 54mm width x run length (see drawings). Constructed of
extruded aluminum with ABS endcaps and acrylic frosted lens. Luminaire
shall be hard wired with local switch. Contractor shall determine feed
locations based on site conditions.
Voltage: 120 volt
Manufacturers:
GVA:
iO Lighting:
ModaLight:
Issued for Tender
STR8 xx xx CM OPL 3W 3000K H3 ND
09 I 3KHO x 1 x x 1
Zilva-3000K
LED Board
3W / ft
3000K
CRI ≥ 85
Section 26 51 13
Lighting
Page 12 of 12
OCAD University – Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Title
Description
Lamp Schedule
X
LED ‘Running Man’ or ‘Pictogram’ Edge-Lit exit sign. Unit shall operate with
universal 2-wire AC input voltage of 120 to 347VAC at less than 3W and
universal 2-wire DC input voltage from 6 to 24VDC at less than 2.5W for
single and double face signs.
The housing assembly shall be constructed of extruded aluminum with a
textured aluminum finish. The canopy shall be of Die-Cast aluminum and
allow for wall, end, or ceiling mount. The legend shall be printed on a pure
acrylic panel. The panel shall come standard with double-face legend, for
single-face and double-face applications. The light source shall be long life
white light emitting diodes (LED) and shall provide even illumination in
normal and emergency operation.
The Edge-Lit Exit Sign in a Self-Powered configuration shall use a sealed
Nickel-Cadmium battery of 2.4V nominal voltage and shall stay illuminated
during emergency operation for at least two hours upon AC failure.
The pictogram Exit Sign shall meet CSA 22.2 No. 141-10.
LED
Max 3W
Voltage: 120V
Manufacturer:
Emergi-Lite: EAE Series
Lumacell:
Uniglo:
Aimlite:
Dual-lite:
Notes:
1. - Include in the Contract an additional combination of five (5) spare
‘Type X’ luminaires including installation (include an average of 30’
of wire in conduit for each additional luminaire and connection to an
emergency circuit). For bidding purposes, allow that these
luminaires can be added at any time during the construction
process including and up to occupancy of client, in any location as
directed on site. Once the project is awarded there will be no
additional cost to the client for installation of these luminaires. Any
luminaires not installed shall be turned over to the client.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 52 00
Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting
Page 1 of 3
UNIT EQUIPMENT FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
26 52 00
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 141 Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.
1.2
General Requirements
.1 Conform to Sections of Division 1 as applicable.
.2 Conform to Section 26 01 01, Electrical General Requirements.
1.3
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
.2 Nameplates shall be in accordance with Article "Equipment Identification”.
1.4
Work Included
.1 Work to be done under this Section shall include furnishing of labour, materials, and equipment
required for installation, testing and putting into proper operation complete systems as shown as
specified and as otherwise required.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 26 01 01
Electrical General Requirements.
1.6
Maintenance Materials
.1 Provide maintenance materials as required and as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
1.7
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
.1 Provide operating and maintenance instructions as specified in Section 26 01 01 Electrical General
Requirements.
1.8
Warranty
.1 For batteries, the 12 months warranty period is extended to 120 months, with a no-charge
replacement during the first 60 months and a pro-rate charge on the second 60 months.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Equipment
.1 Supply voltage: 120 V, AC.
.2 Output voltage: 12 V DC for indoor units.
Issued for Tender
Section 26 52 00
Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting
Page 2 of 3
OCAD University, Professional
Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
.3 Operating time:
.1 12 volt units: 180 watts for 120 minutes.
.4 Battery: sealed, maintenance free, lead acid or lead calcium.
.5 Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short
circuit protected. Unit shall have externally accessible means for testing of unit and shall have two
lamps indicating A.C. on, and high charge. Unit shall include a low voltage cut-off protection circuit
and self-diagnostic auto test.
.6 Solid state transfer.
.7 Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage.
.8 Signal lights: solid state, life expectancy 100,000 h minimum, for 'AC Power ON' and 'High Charge'.
.9 Lamp heads: integral on unit and remote, 360Ε horizontal and 180Ε vertical adjustment.
.10 Lamp type (integral and remote):
.1 Finished Areas:
(a) adjustable type LED:12 W, 12 VDC to suite battery, glare free mounted in a Lexan cube
approximately 113 mm square]
.2 Unfinished areas, electrical, mechanical and equipment rooms: 55 W, 12 VDC quartz
.11 Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and c/w knockouts for conduit. Removable or
hinged front panel for easy access to batteries.
.12 Cabinet finish: Painted steel Type 1] enclosure
.13 Auxiliary equipment for central battery units:
.1 Ammeter.
.2 Voltmeter.
.3 Lamp disconnect switch.
.4 Test switch.
.5 Time delay relay.
.6 Battery disconnect device.
.7 ac input and dc output terminal blocks inside cabinet.
.8 Shelf.
.9 RFI suppressors.
2.2
Wiring of Remote Heads
.1 Conduit: type EMT, to Section 26 05 33 - Conduits Fastenings and Fittings.
.2 RFI suppressors.
.3 Conductors: RW90 type to Section 26 05 19 - Wires & Cables 0-1000 Volts, sized in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Issued For Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 26 52 00
Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting
Page 3 of 3
Standard of Acceptance
° Emergi-Lite
° Lumacell Inc.
° Beghelli
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Provide complete emergency battery lighting system as shown and specified.
.2 Unless otherwise noted, mount units on the wall 2440mm above floor. Unit shall be hardwired to
source. Provide lock-on devices on breakers.
.3 Connect exit lights to unit equipment where indicated.
.4 Where heads are shown remote from unit, provide suitable outlet box at 2440 mm and install head.
Connect with conduit to battery and charger unit. Wire size to suit manufacturer's recommendations,
but not less than #10 gauge, and for a minimum of 3% voltage drop at remote heads. Ensure remote
head wiring lengths are reviewed with manufacturer prior to installation. Voltage drops will be tested
by Engineer and Building Inspector. Replace any wiring not passing the 3% voltage drop test with
new size and retest.
.5 Direct heads as indicated.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 27 05 13
Signal Systems
Page 1 of 1
SIGNAL SYSTEMS
27 05 13
1
GENERAL
1.1
Not Used
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Not Used
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Check out wiring on signal systems before final connections to equipment are made. Install signal
and intercommunication wiring in conduit in accordance with the following:
.1 Low and line level wires may be combined with DC wiring in same conduit provided low level line
is shielded, but install AC lines in separate conduits.
.2 Install low and high level wires in separate conduits.
.3 High level wires may be combined with AC or DC wiring without shielding.
.4 Line and high level wires may be combined in the same conduit provided line level wires are
shielded.
.2 Interpretation or designation of the low, line and high level wires shall be the responsibility of
Equipment Manufacturer. Correct any cross-talk, feed-back or other audible interferences, which
occur on any of sound systems, under this Section without expense to Owner.
.3 Completely test out systems and, before they are turned over to Owner, demonstrate them to
Owner’s representative until such time as he is fully conversant with the operation of the systems.
.4 Six months after installation has been accepted by Owner, arrange a time convenient to Owner to do
necessary re-aligning, and replace defective components to make equipment operate perfectly.
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 27 05 28
Telephone & Data Raceways
Page 1 of 3
TELEPHONE & DATA RACEWAYS
27 05 28
1
GENERAL
1.1
System Description
.1 Empty raceways systems shall consist of outlet boxes, cover plates, conduits, pull boxes, fish wires
and service poles.
.2 Empty conduit systems being installed shall be for installation of wiring installed at a later date by
communications contractor:
.1 Telephone and data communications systems.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Material
.1 Conduits: EMT type, to Section 26 05 33 - Conduits Fastenings and Fittings.
.2 Junction boxes and pull boxes to Section 26 05 32 - Splitters, Junction and Pull Boxes, Cabinets.
.3 Outlet boxes, and fittings: to Section 26 05 35 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.4 Cover plates: to Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.
.5 Fish wire: polypropylene type
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1 Install empty raceway system, including fish wire, outlet boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit,
service poles, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system.
.2 Verify exact location of outlets to suit furniture layout.
.3 Fish conduit, clear blockages and outlet and clean out pull boxes at completion of installation. Leave
conduit free of water or excess moisture. Install 3 mm (c”) polypropylene pull cord continuously from
outlet to outlet, through conduit and fasten at each box.
.4 Conduit bends shall have a bending radius of not less than ten times conduit diameter. Ream out
conduits and identify end with green paint.
.5 Install additional steel pull boxes in such a manner that, throughout entire system, there shall be not
more than two 90 degree or equivalent bends or more than 30 m (100') in each run, so that wire or
cables may be pulled in or withdrawn with reasonable ease.
.6 Minimum space requirements in pull boxes, having one conduit each in opposite ends of box, shall be
as follows:
Issued for Tender
Section 27 05 28
Telephone & Data Raceways
Page 2 of 3
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Maximum Size of
Conduit in
Millimetres (Inches)
Size of Box in
Millimetres (Inches)
Width
Length
Depth
For each Additional
Conduit, Increase
Width
(Millimetres)Inches)
20 mm (¾”)
100 mm (4")
300 mm (12")
75 mm (3")
50 mm (2")
25 mm (1")
100 mm (4")
400 mm (16")
75 mm (3")
50 mm (2")
32 mm (1¼”)
150 mm (6")
500 mm (20")
75 mm (3")
75 mm (3")
38 mm (1½”)
200 mm (8")
675 mm (27")
100 mm (4")
100 mm (4")
50 mm (2")
200 mm (8")
900 mm (3')
100 mm (4")
125 mm (5")
.7 Minimum space requirements in pull boxes for 90 degree pulls, shall be as follows:
Maximum Size of
Conduit in
Millimetres
(Inches)
Size of Box in Millimetres (Inches)
Width
Length
For each Additional
Conduit, Increase
Width
Millimetres (Inches)
Depth
20 mm (¾”)
150 mm (6")
300 mm (12")
100 mm (4")
50 mm (2")
25 mm (1")
200 mm (8")
400 mm (16")
150 mm (6")
50 mm (2")
32 mm (1¼”)
250 mm (10")
450 mm (18")
200 mm (8")
75 mm (3")
38 mm (1½”)
300 mm (12")
600 mm (24")
250 mm (10")
100 mm (4")
50 mm (2")
350 mm (14")
750 mm (30")
300 mm (12")
125 mm (5")
.8 Maintain separation of communications conduits to sources of electromagnetic interference as
follows:
Item
Minimum Clearance
Fluorescent ballasts
150mm (6”)
Conduit and cables used for electrical distribution less 300mm (12”)
than 1kV
Conduit and cables used for electrical distribution greater 1000mm (36")
than 1kV
Motor
1200mm (48”)
Transformer
1200mm (48”}
.9 The above tables provides a guideline and at all times the Consultant may advise greater clearances
if the currents being carried through these devices are particularly likely to cause interference.
.10 Interference shall be minimized by ensuring that, wherever possible, communications conductors
cross sources of interference at right angles.
.11 Install cables, conduit and cable tray, etc. along or at right angles to building lines unless impractical
to do so. Verify specific cases of deviation in advance with consultant.
Issued For Issued for Tender
OCAD University, Professional Gallery
H.H. Angus, Consulting Engineers
HHA #2141328
Section 27 05 28
Telephone & Data Raceways
Page 3 of 3
END OF SECTION
Issued for Tender
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2151151
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#120, 121, 122
#101, 105, 109a
#105, 106
#106, 107, 108
#107, 108, 111
#110, 113a
#109b, 115, 116 (GFI)
#101, 116 (ADO)
LUTRON PANEL #1
TOTAL PER PHASE
SURFACE MTD
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
DATE: JULY,
NOVV.
2013
2015 MAINS:
200A, 120/208V, 3Φ, 4W
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
2
20A
200
1 •
2
200
20A
2
2
20A
200
3
•
4
200
20A
2
2
20A
200
5
•
6
200 20A
2
2
20A
200
7 •
8
200
20A
2
2
20A
200
9
•
10
200
20A
2
2
20A
200 11
• 12
200 20A
2
2
20A
200
13 •
14
200
20A
2
2
20A
200
15
•
16
400
20A
4
2
20A
200 17
• 18
400 20A
4
2
20A
200
19 •
20
400
20A
4
4
20A
400
21
•
22
200
20A
2
3
20A
300 23
• 24
100 20A
1
4
20A
400
25 •
26
400
20A
4
4
20A
400
27
•
28
500
20A
1
4
20A
400 29
• 30
500 20A
1
3
20A
300
31 •
32
100
20A
1
3
20A
300
33
•
34
400
20A
4
2
15A
200 35
• 36
1032
20A
1
1032
37 •
38 1032
20A
3P
1
1032
39
•
40
1032
3P
1032 41
• 42
1200 20A
40
1
SUB-TOTAL WATTS 2532 2732 2532
2532 2932 3632 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
FLUSH MTD
5064
5664
6164
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
LUTRON PANEL #2
#109b (MICROWAVE)
16.89 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
PANEL DESIGNATION:
…………..
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#102
#107, 108, 111, 112
#109b (U/C FRIDGE)
#106 (FRIDGE)
#111,
#113a, 113b, 114
LP-LA (PART 1 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2121220
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
DATE: JULY, 2013
MAINS:
200A, 120/208V, 3Φ, 4W
LOAD
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
DESCRIPTION
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
26 20A
516
43 •
44
460
10
LUTRON PANEL #3
20A
22 20A
1010
45
•
46
#112,113a,b,115-118
15A
1
9 20A
450 47
• 48
#120-122
3P
22 20A 1085
49 •
50
#105-108, 111
51
•
52
200
SPARE
20A
20A
2
20A
53
• 54
20A
SPARE
55 •
56
SPARE
20A
20A
57
•
58
SPARE
20A
20A
59
• 60
SPARE
20A
20A
61 •
62
SPACE
63
•
64
SPACE
65
• 66
SPACE
67 •
68
SPACE
69
•
70
SPACE
71
• 72
SPACE
73 •
74
SPACE
75
•
76
SPACE
77
• 78
SPACE
79 •
80
SPACE
81
•
82
SPACE
83
• 84
SPACE
SUB-TOTAL WATTS
1601 1010 450
460
200
0 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
TOTAL PER PHASEPHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
SURFACE MTD
FLUSH MTD
2061
1210
450
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
LUTRON PANEL #4
TVSS
#102
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
3.721 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
** DENOTES GFI BREAKER
PANEL DESIGNATION:
LP-LA (PART 2 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2141328
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
TRANSFORMER T1
ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER
H-1
ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER
H-2
ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER
H-3
ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER
H-4
AC-3
AC-4
TOTAL PER PHASE
SURFACE MTD
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
1333
15A
1333
3P
1333
1333
150A
1333
3P
1333
1333
15A
1333
3P
1333
1333
15A
1333
3P
1333
1333
15A
1333
3P
1333
167
15A
167
3P
167
167
15A
167
3P
167
SUB-TOTAL WATTS 6999 6999 6999
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
FLUSH MTD
20198
20198
20198
DATE: JULY,
NOVV.
2013
2015 MAINS:
200A,
100A 120/208V,
600V 3PH
3Φ,
3W4W
CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
•
167
15A
1
8
•
167
3P
•
167
•
1900
15A
2
9
•
1900
3P
•
1900
•
1900
15A
3
10
•
1900
3P
•
1900
•
2866
15A
4
11
•
2866
3P
•
2866
•
2866
15A
5
12
•
2866
3P
•
2866
•
167
15A
6
13
•
167
3P
•
167
•
3333
15A
7
14
•
3333
3P
•
3333
13199 13199 13199 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
AC-5
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER
EDH-1
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER
EDH-2
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER
EDH-3
ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER
EDH-4
CONDENSING UNIT CU-3
UNIT HEATER UH-1
60.59 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
PANEL DESIGNATION:
…………..
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
PP-PAA (PART 1 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2151151
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
UNIT HEATER UH-1
ROOM 113b
ELECTRIC DOOR
CURTAIN
SUPPLY FAN SF-2
TVSS
MANUAL DOUBLE
THROW SWITCH
SPARE
SPARE
TOTAL PER PHASE
SURFACE MTD
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
1666
15A
1
1666
3P
1666
4000
15A
1
4000
3P
4000
125
15A
1
125
3P
125
DATE: JULY,
NOVV.
2013
2015 MAINS:
200A,
100A 120/208V,
600V
3Φ,3PH
4W3W
CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
•
15
22
•
•
•
16
23
•
•
•
17
24
•
•
•
15A
1
18
25
•
3P
•
•
100A
1
19
•
3P
•
•
15A
20
•
3P
•
•
15A
21
•
3P
•
SUB-TOTAL WATTS 5791 5791 5791
0
0
0 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
FLUSH MTD
5791
5791
5791
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
17.37 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
PANEL DESIGNATION:
…………..
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
PP-PAA (PART 2 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2141328
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
1333
ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER
15A
1
1333
H-5
3P
1333
1333
ELECTRIC HUMIDIFIER
150A
1
1333
H-6
3P
1333
3750
INDOOR DRY COOLER
15A
1
3750
ME-1
3P
3750
3750
INDOOR DRY COOLER
15A
1
3750
ME-1
3P
3750
750
CONDENSER WATER
15A
1
750
PUMP P-1
3P
750
750
CONDENSER WATER
15A
1
750
PUMP P-2
3P
750
800
ELECTRIC DUCT
15A
1
800
HEATER EDH-6
3P
800
SUB-TOTAL WATTS 8716 8716 8716
TOTAL PER PHASE
SURFACE MTD
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
FLUSH MTD
8716
8716
8716
DATE: JULY,
NOVV.
2013
2015 MAINS:
200A,
100A 120/208V,
600V 3PH
3Φ,
3W4W
CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
•
15A
1
8
1
•
3P
•
•
15A
2
9
•
3P
•
•
15A
3
10
•
3P
•
•
15A
4
11
•
3P
•
•
5
12
•
•
•
6
13
•
•
•
7
14
•
•
0
0
0 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
TRANSFORMER T2
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
26.15 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
PANEL DESIGNATION:
…………..
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
PP-SBA (PART 1 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2151151
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
SPACE
SPACE
SUB-TOTAL WATTS
TOTAL PER PHASE
SURFACE MTD
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
FLUSH MTD
0
0
0
0
0
DATE: JULY,
NOVV.
2013
2015 MAINS:
200A,
100A 120/208V,
600V
3Φ,3PH
4W3W
CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF LOAD
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
DESCRIPTION
•
15
•
•
•
16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
0
0 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
0 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
PANEL DESIGNATION:
…………..
PP-SBA (PART 2 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2141328
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
DATE: JULY,
MAR
2013
RCH 16 MAINS:
200A, 120/208V, 3Φ, 4W
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
15A
15A
980
1 •
2
140
#102 (ERV-4+CP-1)
2
2
2P
2P
770
3
•
4
140
3128
5
•
6
3120
40A
40A
#102 (HP-4)
1
1
3128
7 •
8 3120
3P
3P
3128
9
•
10
3120
30 11
• 12
1000 15A
#120 (ETP-1+GLA-1)
4
15A
1
2P
2100
13 •
14 1000
30A
#102 (HP-1)
1
15A
2100
15
•
16
1000
3P
1
2100 17
• 18
1000 2P
30A
100
19 •
20 2250
#121 (SF-1)
1
15A
1
2P
100
21
•
22
2250
#121 (EF-1)
1
15A
#122 (ERV-1+ERV-2+CP15A
415 23
• 24
500
4
15A
1)
2P
2
415
25 •
26
500
3P
15A
1250
27
•
28
500
#102 (BB-2+BB-3)
2
2P
1250 29
• 30
750 15A
1
15A
2P
500
31 •
32
750
#102 (BB-4)
2
2P
15A
500
33
•
34
750
1
2100 35
• 36
750 2P
30A
#102 (HP-20
1
15A
2100
37 •
38
135
3P
1
2P
2100
39
•
40
135
250 41
• 42
1
#121 (MARINE LIGHTS)
1
15A
15A
SUB-TOTAL WATTS 9323 9948 9273
7895 7895 7120 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
TOTAL PER PHASE
SURFACE MTD
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
FLUSH MTD
17218
17843
16393
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
#103 (ERV-3+CP-1)
#102 (HP-3)
#103 (BB-5)
#103 (BB-5)
#106 (FF-1)
#115, 116 (BB-1)
#109d (HWT-1)
#105 (HWT-2)
#116 (ERV-5)
#117 (RO-1)
51.45 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
PANEL DESIGNATION:
…………..
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
RP-MRA (PART 1 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2121220
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
#118 (AC-4)
OUTSIDE (CU-4)
#113a (SEC. DOOR)
#113b (O/H DOOR)
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
15A
1
2P
20A
3P
1
1
1
20A
30A
20A
20A
20A
20A
20A
SUB-TOTAL WATTS 0
TOTAL PER PHASEPHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
SURFACE MTD
FLUSH MTD
0
0
0
0
DATE: JULY, 2013
MAINS:
200A, 120/208V, 3Φ, 4W
CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
15A
43 •
44
1
2P
45
•
46
47
• 48
20A
1
49 •
50
3P
51
•
52
50A
53
• 54
1
2P
55 •
56
57
•
58
15A
59
• 60
15A
61 •
62
15A
63
•
64
15A
65
• 66
15A
67 •
68
69
•
70
71
• 72
73 •
74
75
•
76
77
• 78
79 •
80
81
•
82
83
• 84
0
0
0
0 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
#113A (AC-5)
OUTSIDE (CU-5)
#113b (DOCK LEVELLER)
#117 (EXISTING F-19)
#117 (EXISTING U/H)
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
0 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
** DENOTES GFI BREAKER
PANEL DESIGNATION:
LP-MRA (PART 2 OF 2)
H.H. ANGUS & ASSOCIATES LTD.
PANEL SCHEDULE
JOB # 2151151
CALCULATED BY: M.E.
DATE: JULY,
NOVV.
2013
2015 MAINS:
200A, 120/208V, 3Φ, 4W
LOAD
NO OF NO OF BRKR LOAD PER PHASE CCT PHASE
CCT LOAD PER PHASE
BRKR NO OF NO OF
DESCRIPTION
REC.
FIXT SIZE A
B
C
NO A B C NO A
B
C
SIZE FIXT REC
15A
15A
990
1 •
2
990
RM #110(HP-5 + CP-1)
2
2
2P
2P
990
3
•
4
990
1
95
5
•
6
RM #110 (EF-1)
15A
20A
3
30
7 •
8
15A
20A
RM #110 (ETP-1)
1
500
9
•
10
#122 (BU-1)
20A
20A
1
500 11
• 12
20A
20A
#118 (BU-2)
13 •
14
SPARE
20A
20A
15
•
16
SPACE
17
• 18
SPCE
19 •
20
SPACE
21
•
22
SPACE
23
• 24
SPACE
SUB-TOTAL WATTS 1020 1490
TOTAL PER PHASE
SURFACE MTD
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
FLUSH MTD
2010
2480
595
595
WATTS
WATTS
WATTS
COLUMN MTD
990
990
EXIT LIGHTS
NIGHT LIGHTS
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
0 SUB-TOTAL WATTS
5.085 KW TOTAL LOAD
* DENOTES HANDLE LOCKING DEVICE
PANEL DESIGNATION:
…………..
LOAD
DESCRIPTION
RM #110 (HP-6 + CP-1)
RP-SBRA